1990-2020 AL CE DSE LQ Table of content

Cell and Movement of substances across cell membrane ...... ..................................................2

Cell and Movement of substances across cell membrane .ANS ............................................ 13
Enzymes and metabolism ........................................................................................................20
Enzymes and metabolism ANS................................................................................................27
Food and humans and Nutrition in humans...........................................................................32
Food and humans and Nutritioninhumans.ANS..................................................................40 DSE MC Table of content
Gas exchange in humans..........................................................................................................45
Gas exchange in humans ANS .................................................................................................51
Cell and Movement of substances across cell membrane .............................2
Transport inhumans.·---····························································································.56
Transportinbumans/�NS............ ___ ----····································---·62 Enzymes and metabolism.............................................................................16
Nutrition and gas exchange in plants.......................................................................................68 Food and humans and Nutrition in humans................................................28
Nutrition and gas exchange in plants ANS ...................... ·---········································73
Transpiration, transport and support in plants····---...................................................76 Gas exchange in humans...............................................................................37
Transp.iiation. transport and supportinplants .ANS................................................ ___88 Transport in humans .....................................................................................43
Cell division and Reproduction........... ---·········································---···········93
Cell division and Reproduction ANS..................................••··················---··············109 Transpiration, transport and support in plants...........................................52
Growth and development. ...................................................................................................... 118 Cell division and Reproduction ....................................................................66
Growthanddevelopment.ANS..............................................................................................121
Detecting the enviromnent (plant) ......................................................................................... 140
Growth and development..............................................................................79
Movementinhumans............................................................................................................. 147 Detecting the environment (plant) ...............................................................86
MovementinhumansANS............................ ---························································151
Coordination in humans...............................................................................91
Bomeostasis............................................................................................................................162
Biodiversity.............................................................................................................................. 168 Movement in humans ................................................................................. 101
Biodiversity ANS ..................................................................................................................... 176
Homeostasis .................................................................................................107
Ecosystems .............................................................................................................................. 180
Ecosystems ANS ..................................................................................................................... 196 Biodiversity..................................................................................................110
Photosynthesis.........................................................................................................................205 Ecosystems...................................................................................................116
PhotosynthesisANS ................................................................................................................216
Respiration ...............................................................................................................................223 Photosynthesis ............................................................................................. 129
Respiration ANS..................................................................................................................... .229 Respiration...................................................................................................138
Health and diseases..................................................................................................................234
Health and diseases ANS.........................................................................................................248 Health and diseases ......................................................................................142
Basic genetics............................................................................................................................257 Basic genetics and Molecular genetics .........................................................149
Basic genetics ANS...................................................................................................................273
Molecular and Applied genetics ..............................................................................................285
Evolution......................................................................................................160
Molecular and Applied genetics ANS......................................................................................293
Evolution..................................................................................................................................299
Evolution ANS .........................................................................................................................306
 Cell and membrane transport f P,2

Past Questions - Cell and membrane transport CE- 2007

CE 2003
fi

L (b) A student carried out a study on the effect of two
different sodium chloride solution on red blood cells.
He added a drop of citrated mammalian blood to 2
cm3 of each solution in separate test tubes, A and B.
After five minutes, the mixtures in both tubes
appeared light red in colour. He then examined a drop of each mixture under the
microscope. After repeated examinations, he found 1lrnt intact red blood cells were
present in tube B only and they were in two dift"er<c"nt form.-; as shown below:
2. One day, when Keith and Jane walked past a fresh fruit juice shop, Keith noticed that some
pears were cut into pieces and stored in a tank of water before use.
(a) Keith thought that the shopkeeper stored the cut pears in water in order to extract more
juice. Explain the biological principle bel1ind Keith's idea. (3 marks)
(b) Jane disagreed with Keith because she found that the shopkeeper also stored whole
pears in water tanks. Explain why this observation provides Jane with evidence to
oppose Keith's idea. (2 marks)
(c) Suggest one possible hygienic problem of storing the cut pears in watertanks. ( 1 mark)

The results are recorded in the table below:

CE fi 2008
Averag-: numbe1· or different forms of intact
Concentration of
Tube red blood cells 4 Read the passage below and answer the questions that follow.
solution(%)
Wrinkled Smooth
A 0.3 0 0
B 1.5 15 5 The Discovery of Cells
..
Note; All observations were done under tht:: samt: mag,111tJcat1on.
Most cells are too small to be observed with the naked eye. Tims the existence of
(i) (I) In tube B, some red blood cells became wrinkled. How would you explain this? (3) cells remained unnoticed until the 1711, century. In 1665, Robert Hooke studied a thin
(2) Both fonns of red blood cells were observed in tube B. Give a reason for this.( I) section of cork under his self-made compound microscope. He found that the cork
(ii) How could the student be sure that the red blood cells in tube B had reached was made up of many units which he named ·cells·. According to his observation, a
equilibrium with the surrounding solution at tl1e time when he made the cell is an empty space bounded by a thick wall. At tl1at time, Antonie van
observation? (2) Leeuwenhoek, using the singlefilens microscope he made, discovered singlefice!led
(iii) Accollnt for the absence of intact red blood cdls in the mixture in tube A and the organisms.
lightfired appearance of the mixture. (4)

CE - 2007
(a} Single-celled organisms can be classified into different kingdoms. Name two kingdoms
1. Three samples of specimen were examined in a laboratory. The results are shown below:
that include singleficelled organisms. (2)
Feature of specimen Sample I Sample2 Sample 3
(b) Later, scientists found that living cells are made up of many cellular structures. State
Size(mm) 0.0002 0.003 100 two cellular stmctures present in all living cells. {2)
Cell wall . + + (c) The following table shows some steps of preparing a temporary slide of onion
Mitochondrion . . + epidermis and the purpose behind each step. Complete the table. (2)
Nucleus . '
DeoxyribonucleicAcid(DNA) + + +
Step Purpose
Key: •+'means present ' .. ·means absent Peeling ofepidennis Separate a thin tissue for observation
The following paragraph summarizes the report about the three samples. Complete the
Staining with iodine solution (i)
paragraph with suitable word(s). (4 marks)
Adding a drop of water Reduce the refraction oflight
With reference to the results, the groups that samples l and 2 belong to are
(ii) Flatten the tissue
(a)______ and (b) _ ___ ___ _ _ respectively. For sample 3, it
remams unclassified. It could belong to one of the following groups: plants.
1c)_ _ ___ or{d),_ _ __ ____
 Cell and membrane transport I P.3 Cell and membrane transport I P4

CE - 2009 AL- 2003 2A

4. A student carried out an investigation to detennine the water potential of potato tissue. He 1. The following diagram is a model illustrating the structure ofa plasma membrane:
immersed five identical potato strips separately into five beakers containing sucrose
solution of different concentrations for one hour. The masses of the potato strips before
and after the immersion were measured and recorded. He then made the following
calculation for each potato strip:

w
mass of strip after immersion
Ratio of Ena! mass to initiiil mass =
rnass of strip �fore immerskin

The graph bdow shows the rcsu]t5 of the inve5tigation:

(a) Name this model. Give two features that justify such a name. (3)
(b) Explain how the nature and arrangement of molecules at W are related to the
permeability of the membrane. (4)

AL- 2005 IA

7. The electron micrographs below show two types of organelles:

Conccntrntion of sucro,� solution{%)

,-__,
J(l j,Lnl y 10 flTil
X f--1

(a) (i) 'When the ratio of final mass to initial mass is 1.0, the potato tissue has ..
Complete the followinn0 table·
the same water potential as the corresponding sucrose solution.· Explain I X y
the biological principle behind this statement. (3 marks) IName of organelle 1(a) (b)
!Product l(c) Testosterone (male sex honnone)
(ii) Based on the statement in (i), the student should be able to conclude that (3)
the water potential of the potato tissue is equal to the water potential
of_________ sucrose solution. (1 mark)
3. (a) It has been proposed that both the mitochondrion and the chloroplast might have been
(b) Describe the state of the potato strip after being immersed in 10 % sucrose prokaryotic organisms such as an aerobic bacterium and a photosynthetic bacterium
solution for one hour. Explain your answer. (3 marks) respectively. They had been engulfed by a larger eukaryotic cell and then evolved to
establish a relationship ofmutualism with the eukaryotic cell.
(c) What would be the change in water potential of a fresh potato after it has been (i) Use labelled diagrams to illustrate the process of a bacterium being
stored for a long time? E;s.'J)lain your answer. (2 marks) engulfed by a eukaryotic cell and subsequently becoming a part of the cell.(4)
 Cell and membrane tr::msporr / P5 Cell and membrane transport / P.6

AL- 2006 IA

9. The diagram below shows a model of the cell membrane: 7. The table below lists some historical events in the research into the molecular structure of
the cell member (based on models proposed by scientists):

Historical �,·cnt J
£1,trackd piwsph(llipid _ mo](lcules from the cell membrane of red bk•u<l I
! y
�us und sprend 1hc.'11 rnco n thin lu er on the �urface ofwa1�r. lt \\"-< .
1925 lllld

I F. GrcnJcl found thcr the arc;i oft/a, trill layer was d(mb\c thur nfrhc surface area [
of red blood cells. - ---·--·-----,
-
Proposed rhc "sandwich model' !O lllustralc the simcture of the cell
mcmbrnnc.

Complete the following paragraph ,vith suitable words: (4)

-···--··�
The membrane is composed of proteins which are labelled as A in the diagram and J> ropc-scd Ills: •fluid mo.<ak moder to il]ustrutc rh� �1mct\lr� ,,r the cell
(a)... molecules labelled o.s B. The layer of moki.:ules B makes the membrane m�mhr�nc

impermeable to (b).. The proteins on the membrane serve important

functions: one example is (c).... (a) How did Dav.son and Danielli make use ofth� findings of Gorter and Grendel to build
Carbohydrates are also found on the membrane. Sugar units :Jttaehed to tile proteins net ns the ·sandwich moder? ( I mark)
id). on the membrane surfoce for recognition by {b) In the space below, draw a labeled 20-diagram to show the molecular arrangement of
other cells. the ·nuid mos<1ic moder. (3 marks)
(c) Based on the ·Jluid mosaic model. describe the importance of three key features of1he
AL- 2008 IA cell membrane in cell functions. (3 marks)

2. The following is a schematic diagram of an animal cell· HKDSE 2013 1B

(a) ln the secretory cells of the salivary glands, some ufthc organelles shown above work
together for the production of salivary amylase. The table below lists three of these l 0. Proteins serve diffi::rent functions in our body and their functional role is closely related to
organelles and their functions in amylase production. Complete the table. their confonnation (shape). Describe how protein molecules can have different
conformations and explain how the different confomiations enable them to carry out
Structure Name ofthe organelle Function in salivary amylase production different functions. { 11 marks)
E rough endoplasmic 0)
reticulum HKDSE 2014 1 B
A nucleus (ii)
7. (a) The following is a schematic diagram of a cell membrane. In the spaces provided, label
(b) Other than salivary amylase, name one secretory substance produced by the cells of the membrane components X and Y. (2 marks)
salivary glands and state its function. (2)
----x, ---- -----
AL- 2008 2B

4. (a) Models have been used to explain the structure and function of biological systems such
as membranes in cells. With reference to the current membrane model, discuss how
phospholipids contribute to membrane properties and thereby lead to various
membrane functions in cells. (6) Yo _________
 Cell and membrane transport / P.7 Ce\! and membrane transport / P.8

(b) The vacuoles of beetroot cells contain a red pigment which 'Will be released from the (d) Models are often used by scientists to explain their findings. Complete the following
cells if the cell membrane and vacuole membrane are damaged. In an investigation, table to elaborate on the aspects of the nature of science involved in the use of
Gary placed identical cylinders of beetroot tissues into four test tubes. Each tube scientific models. (2 marks)
contained the same volume ofalcohol at different concentrations. The following Nature of science Elaboration
photograph shows the appearance ofthe solutions bathing the beetroot cylinders after
30 minutes: Science is evidence based
Models are used to simulate an invisible structure or
illustrate a theory.

HKDSE - 2017 1B

4 The electron micrograph on the opposite page shows some structures of a human cell.

A
(i) From the result of the above investigation, deduce which test tube contained the
highest concentration ofthe alcohol. (4 marks)
(ii) After three hours. Gary found that the colour intensity of the solutions of all the
test tubes became the same. Suggest an explanation for this. (2 marks)

HKDSE 20151 B

6. The table below lists some historical developments about the discovery of the structure of
B
cell membrane·
Year Sciemisrs Historical events
1895 Overton Discovered that lipid-soluble substances could penetrate cells easily
1917 Langmuir Discovered that the major component of cell membrane exhibited both
water-loving and water-hating properties
1925 Gorter & Exu-acted lipids from the cell membrane of red blood cells and spread the
Grenda] lipids in a single layer on a water surface: found that the area ofthe layer was
double the surface area of the cell membrane
1972 Singer & Proposed the Fluid Mosaic Model to explain the structure ofcell membranes
Nicolson
(a) What is the major component noted by Overton and Langmuir? (1 mark)
(b) Gorter and Grenda! proposed that the major component identified in (a) existed as a
bilayer (Bilayer Model). With reference to the observation ofLangmuir, suggest how
this major component is oriented and arranged in the cell membrane. Explain your
answer. (3 marks) Label A and B. (2 marks)
(c) (i) The Bilayer Model proposed by Gorter and Grenda\ did not mention another b. Which stage of the cell cycle is shown in this photomicrograph? Give a reason to
major component ofthe cell membrane. What is this component? (1 mark) support your answer. (2 marks)
(ii) With reference to the Fluid Mosaic Model. briefly describe the orientation of this c. The cell was obtained from the pancreas. How do A and B work together such that
component in the cell membrane. (2 marks) this cell can perfonn its function? (4 marks)
 Ceil and ,ncmbran� tronsport ' P9 Cell and membrane transport I P. l 0

HKDSE � 2019 1B HKDSE * 2019 1B

6. Johnny conducted an experiment to determine the water potential of potato tuber cells. He 6. (d) Johnny prepared a slide of freshly sectioned potato cylinder and stained it with
measured the masses of fresh potato cylinders before and after immersing them in sucrose iodine solution. The photomicrograph below shows the section. Label structure X
solutions at different concentrations (OM, 0.2M, 0.4M, 0.6M, 0.8.tvl. and 1.0M). Below shows and Y. (2 marks)
the major steps in the experiment

Step 1: Cut potato tubers into cylinders

Step 2; Blot dry the surface ofthe potato cylinders x, ------
Step 3: Weigh the potato cylinders (inirial mass)
Step 4: Immerse three potato cylinders in each concentrarion of sucrose solution for two hollrs
Step 5; Remove and blot dry the surface ofthe potato cyliiiders
Step 6; Rewcigh the potato cylinders (final mass)
Y,
Step 7: Calculate Ule average percentage change in mass of the potato cy!ii1ders in each solution

The results are sho'Nll in the graph below;

(e) In the middle of the 19th century, there was a severe attack on potato ccrops by a
2S pathogen in Ireland. As the potato was the major staple food a! that time, many
Irish people died of starvation. Vegatative propagation of potatoes was blamed for
.- :h­ the high vulnerability of the potato crops. Explain the rationale for this claim .
.,-�1-,.j
(2 marks)
Hh'DSE * 2020 1B
JO
4. The fo!lowing diagram ·s sho;vs a cell membrane and the movement of some substance
across it:

-20

- 25
(a) Label structures A and B (2 marks)

(a) With reference to the graph, which sucrose solution concentrJtion has the s.ime water (b) X und Y,epresent two different processes by which substances pass through the
potential as the potato cells? Explai your answer. (3 marks) cell rrn:mbr,.me.
(b) If Johnny skipped step 2 by mistake for all samples, how 11-ould this affect th curve and
the deduced value oflhe concentration ofthe sucrose solulion in (a)? Sketch a curve on {i) Give one digested product which is absorbed through process X in the human
the graph on the facing page to show the effect { 1 mark) body. (I mark)
(c) In terms of experimental design, what is the importarn;e of putting three potato
cylinnders in each concentration of sucrose solution? ( I mark) (ii) Give one digested product which is absorbed through process Yin the human
body. (1 mark)
 Cell and membrane transport / P.11 Cell and membrane transport I P.1

Hh.'DSE- 2020 1B Past Papers Marking Scheme - Cell and membrane transport
4. (b) (iii) The digested products absorbed through process X are transported from the
small intestine to the heart. Complete the following flowchart to show the
vessels involved in the transport. (3 marks)

(il ( 1} The water potential of the red blood cells was higher than that of the

l surrounding solution
As a result, the cells shrank and became wrinkled
(2) Because the water potential of some red blood cells was higher than, while
that at" others was equal to /lower than the water potential of the surrounding
solution 1
(ii} Observe the red blood cells again after some time 1
The proportion of the two fom1s should remain the same ifthey had reached

1 (ii1)
equilibrium in the previous observation.

The water potential ofthe red blood cells was lower than that of the surroundin g
solution
Water entered the cells
Tlie red blood cells expanded and burst
Releasing the haemoglobin to the solution. thus making it red

CE- 2007 Q.1

(a) virus
(b) prokaryotes
(c) fungi/ protoctist
(d) Protoctist / fung i

CE- 2007 Q.2

(a) The water outside has a higher water potential than the cells of pears
water moves into the cells
increasiTig the volume of the cell content/ water contentofthe cell
As a result. more fruit juice can be extracted

(b) The skin of the fruit acts as barrier to water

Little / TIO water movement will occur

(c) The water/ pear may be contaminated with pathogens/ lead to food poisoning

CE- 2008 Q.4

(a) * Prokaryotes / prokaryotae

* Protoctists / protoctista / protista } any two 1, 1
'1 Fungi

(b) Cell membrane, cytoplasm . 1, 1

(c} (i) Make cell structure/ nucleus/ cell wall/ cell more distinct ... 1
(ii) Cover the tissue with a cover slip ... 1
 Cell ancJ 111emlm111L' tran:;pon / P.2 Cell and membrane transport/ P.3

CE - 2009 Q.4 �
{i) When the ratio is 1.0. there is no change in tilt:: nwss oftht:' potato (a) • *Jluid mosnic model ( I J 3
strip before and after the treatment Jluidity: lateral movement of protein ( 1) / phospholipid molecules
This shows that there is no net gain or loss of \\-aler lhroug.hout the (accept al!crnatlve expression)
investigation mosaic: protein molecules interspersed among phospholipid molecules (I)
by osmosis (accept: a mosaic of protein and phospholipid molecules)
(ii) 7%
(b) Structural-functional relationships: max. 4
(bJ The potato strip became flaccid W consists of2 layers ofphospho!ipjd molecules (I) / phospholipid bilayer:
due to a net loss of water by osmosis o.1Jows lipid soluble substances to go through (1) as they dissolve in it
because the water potential of potato tissue is higher thun that of the I 0% hydrophobic tails of the phopholipid molecules point inwards { 1 }: form an inner
sucrose solution hydrophobic zone ( I): make the membrane impermeable to charged molecules (I)
(c) After storing the potato for a long time, the water potential ii'the potato AL-20051.A
will become lower
because ofevaporation ofwater during storage 7. (a) Rough endoplasmic reticulum (l) / RER 3
(b) Smooth endoplasmic reticulum (1) / SER
(c) lnsu!in(!J/Glucagon

AL �2005 2A

3. (a) (i)

' �Ji'" ®-'-·� _'· ®-'"@-,.,

e.g plasma membr,l!\e vacuole/ phagosome /vesicle

""
➔ euka/yotic

AL- 2006 IA

9. (a) phospholipids ( 1 J 4
(b) ions (1 J/ polar or charged molecules such as glucose, amino acids, proteins, water
(c) acting as ion channels ( l) / trans-membrane carriers/ electron carriers/ enzymes/
receptors / maintaining structural integrity ofmem brane
(or state the function ofproteins e.g. for active transport across cell membrane)
(d) antigens ( I J / recognition markers

AL-2008 IA

2. (a) (ii as the site of formation of the polypeptide/ for transporting the polypeptide ( l) /
modification ofthc polypeptide
(ii) as the sit<: ofJ(mn::ttion of the mRNA of amylase (1) / as the site of transcription
/ conrnins genetic information coding for amylase
{iii) (BJ(IJ
(iv) "Golgi appanllus ( I)
(b) • *mucin ( IJ I mucus
for lubricating tl1e swallowing of food ( l) I sticking food particles together
 Cell and mernbrnne transport/ P.4 Cell and membrane transport/ P.5

AL-2008 2B HKDSE-201318

4. (a) l 0. Factors detem1jninl! the different conformation:, ofprotein molecules (S)

the phospholipids molecules in the membrane are capable of slight lateral
movements (1 ), g1v1ng f1u1d1ty ( l) to the membrane
- this allows the membrane to mvagmate ( 1), carry out endocytos1s I bud
off vesicles from ER and Golg1 apparatus
also allows membrane fusion ( 1 ), thus supporting the export of matenals max 4
contained rn vesicles by exocytos1s ( 1 ), and the intracellular vesicular
transport ofmatenals (1) e g transport of proteins tn vesicle:; from RER }
to the Golgi apparatus
due to the hydrophobic nature (I) of the fatty acid chains, phospholipids
molecules spontaneously form a bilayer (1) in aqueous surroundings
the bilayer makes the membrane a good physical barrier for
compartmentalization (1) and can help restrict the entry/ exit of ions max. 4
and polar molecules (1 ), thus establishing gradients of charges/
concentration across membranes
the bilayer also forms a matrix/ structural framework for the } R=max. 5
embedment of proteins (I) so that they can exert their respective
functions
(ma"<. 6)
AL- 2010 lA
;i,nino ncid sequence
✓ proteins are btiilt from 20 different amino acids (1)
✓ held/ joined together to form a polypeptide ( 1)
✓ the amino acids sequence determines the final conformation of protein
molecule (I)
✓ this amino ncid sequence is encoded by the base sequence of a gene/
code/ nucleotide on DNA ( l) S=max. 3
folding of the polypeptide
✓ the polypeptide chains then coil/ fold up (1)
✓ while some polypeptide chains bind together (1) to form a molecule
with specific conformation
The unique shape of each protein allows different proteins to perfon11 different
functional roles in our body, e.g. it gives rise to (R)
enzymes with unique active sites/ substrate binding sites (]) that fit with
specific substrates for controlling cellular metablism (1)
receptors with binding sites for neurotransmitters (1) that allows transmission
of 11erve impulses across synpase (1)
antibodies which allow reco1=,>nition of antigens / pathogens ( 1) for body
defence (1)
haemoglobin with binding site (1) for carrying oxygen (1)
C=max. 3
11 marks

7. (,) cell membrane consists of two layers ofphospholipid (1) (1) Hl(DSE � 20141 B
(b) correct drawing showing integral proteins (1) and asymmetrical (max. 3)
arrangement of peripheral proteins ( 1)
title and labels (2) 7. (a) X:
Ye
* protein ( 1)
'' phospholipid (1)
m
(c) (transmembrane) integral proteins serve as ion channel/ carrier protein
for transport of materials across membrane( 1) (b) (i) tube D should have the highest concentration of alcohol (1)
peripheral proteins serve as antigen for cell recognition/ receptor (3) the amount of pigment released to the bathing solution would be the
site for receiving chemical messenger (1) highest, as indicated by the highest colour intensity (1)
tluid nature of the lipid bilayer allows phagocytosis/ pinocytosis ( 1 )/ this is because the phospholipids ofthe membrane dissolve in alcohol
permeability 14)
(11
the cell membrane and vacuole membrane of the beetroot tissue
bathing in the test tube with highest concentration of alcohol would
be most damaged (1 J

{ii) when the cell membrane and vacuole membrane are damaged, the
pigment leaks out of the vacuole by diffusion ( 1)
as time passes, it allows the diffusion of the red pigment in all 4 tubes
to reach an equilibrium state at which the same concentration of red (2)
pigment are found in the bathing solutions / the bathing solution
becames sctturntcd with the same amount of red pigment in all 4 tubes.
i.e. �nme colour intensities ( l J
8 marks

HKDSE-20151B
 Cell and membrane transport/ P.6 Cell and membrane transport/ P,7

2. (eJ vacuole (1)

6. (a) phospholipids
(bl Any two of the following:
(bJ the water-loving parts ofphospholipids point outward while the water-hating thi; cell membrane:/ cytoplasm of the leaf cells has detacl1ed from
parts point inward (I) the eel! wall/ the leaf cell is plasmolysed (!)
both the medium inside and the medium outside the cell .1r<! aqueous solutions { I)
hence. only the water-loving pan of the ph ospholipids is in contact with the cell chloroplasts condense to the centre of the cell ( l) (2)
sap and extracellular fluid ( 1) 3 the vacuole / X has shrunk(I)

(c) (i) protein (c) sucrose solution has a lower water potential than the cell content ( 1)
(ii) proteins are interspersed in the bilayer I <1 mo�Llic p,:it1ern ( l)
in an asymmetric manner ( 1) 2 there is a net movement ofwater from the cell content to the bathing (2)
solution by osmosis (1)
(dJ 5 marks
Nu1111·e. olsdenee I J:'l,rhoralwn
Scientific models theory arc built HKDSE-2019 18
- based o,; experimental findings I
observalions ( l ) 6. (a) 0.3 M sucrose solution (l) /accepl c 0.01 /
Doing science requires imaginations/ there was no change of mass at this concentration (I)
creativity ( l} this shows that there was no net movement of water [accept no osmosisJ (3)
2 in or out ofthe cells (1)
i.e. the bathing solution had the same water potential as the potato cells

HKDSE-20171B (b) the curve would shift downward (I) I to the left (I)

4. (a ) A: endoplasmic reticulum* (1) [accept rough endoplasmic reticulum/ (c) this can increase tl1e reliability oftl1e results by minimizing the individual ( 1)
smooth endoplasmic reticulum] (2) differences ofthe cylinders (I) I can help to spot the presence of
B: nucleus* (I) experimental error when there is inconsistent data (1). [discard
inconsistent data (x)]
(b) interphase/resting stage(l)/ ()+!)
Accept GL S or G2 (whole set must be giwn. if candidates answered (dJ X: starch granule/ starch grain/ amyloplast (1) [x starchJ (2)
either one. no mark for 1'1 point but continue to mark 2"J point. i.e. 0+l) Y: cell wall (1)
because DNA is in the format of chromatin / the chromosomes are ( ,) offspring produced will have the same genetic makeup as parents/ low (2)
invisible (NOT accept no chromosomes) (l) [no mark will be given with (no) genetic variation (l)
wrong stage of the cell cycle] this provides limited raw materials for the selection of resistant strain ( 1)
(c) :§. carries the genetic materials [accept DNA/ genes/ chromatin/ / if parent genotype [accept parent I one of the offspring] is susceptible to
chromosome] (l)coding for the hormone I digestive enzymes* the pathogen attack, the whole population will be susceptible (1)
transcription takes place in Bto produce mRNA(l Y' 9 marks
which is transported to A for translation/ protein svnthesis ( 1 }"*�"' (4)
to produce protein hormones#/ digestive enzymes#(l)for discharge/
secretions
I\ Some candidates may mix up the terms trans<.ription and translotionye/ with
correct descriptions: candidates will be only penalised once.hr sud1 mixi1w 8 marks
up. l
"No mark wi!i be given ( candidates mix up A and B.
# Accept if suitahle examples are given (e.g. insulin. g/ucagrm, //ypsin,
_ chymol!ypsin, p1v1ease, amylase, lipase).
"!No mark will be given (lthe rnndidateji:1ils to indicafe·impfy rhe/imc!ional
link he/Ween Band A.

HKDSE:-2018 1B
 Eni:yme I P.2

Past Questions - Enzyme CE-2008

CE- 2003
6. Ginger milk curd (1'.i:H.ill.fil) is a Chinese dessert. Below is a recipe ofthis dessert.
3. (b) The following shows the procedure ofan experiment to study the effect of pH on the
activity of catalase extracted from bean seedling: !
!Recipe:
! 1. Grind the ginger to obtain some ginger juice.
b. Boil the milk.

lo b. Wait until the temperature of the milk drops to around 65°C.

�.,�.,�-···
4. Pour 220 mL of milk into 15 mL of ginger juice.
=
Th< pope:< di= or,, Ihm put
5. Ginger milk curd is made as the milk coagulates.

I
in10 mbd eonl:linint
«l"sl •ohm>osofhydroi:-o,t
pcrm:ido ,olutions al oolmion
difforcntpf-1.

hi
Having studied the recipe, a science student, Kelvin. conducted an investigation on the
making of ginger milk curd. He followed the steps in the recipe with the use of raw ginger

I
$1:trt �ming whon tho papa
disc=cllc,,lhcboT\om juice for one setup and boiled ginger juice for another setup. The results are shown below:
ofil!otllhc.

Result
I I Boiled ginger juice No coagulation
Raw ginger juice Coagulation occurred
1'101olllc�m• (TI forl!I< poper I
disc :o ,;,,e to ,ne oumlc-e
oFlheoolution.
. (a) With reference to the treatment used by Kelvin, what do you think is his hypothesis
about the coagulation of milk in making ginger milk curd? ( 1)
The results of the experiment are shown below·
pH of hydrogen peroxide solution T(s) {b) What is the principle behind the design of this investigation? (3)

3 >100
{cl Kelvin then carried out another investigation on the effect of temperature on milk
; ;o
coagulation by cooling the boiled milk to different temperatures before mixing it with
7 20
ginger juice. He round that milk coagulation only occurs at around 65 ° C. After that, he
9 20
would like to test if boiling of milk is necessary. Suggest the procedures he would have
II 27
to earl)' out in tl1is test. (2)

(i) Explain why the paper discs rose to the surface of the solution in some of the tubes. (2)
(ii) (1) Work out the rate of reaction from the value ofT for each tube. Tabulate your answer. (2)
(2) Using the data obtained in (1 ), plot a graph on graph paper to show the effect of
pH on catalase activity. (3)
(iii) (1) Based on your graph. estimate the optimum pH of catalase. (1)
(2) In order to get a more accurate estimate of the optimum pH, what further work
would you cany out in this experiment? (l)
(iv) A sample of bean extract was refrigerated at 4°C and then allowed to warm to room
temperature. If the experiment was repeated using this sample. would the catalase
activity be different from that of the pervious experiment? Explain your answer. (2)
 Enzyme / P3 Enzyme / P.4

CE- 2010 AL-20001A

6. Yeast produces an extrace!IL1lar invertase to breakdown sucrose into glucose and fructose.
A certain brand of washing powder claims to contain protease that can remove egg stains Design an experiment to show the presence of extracellular invertase activities in a yeast
on clothes. To find out if protease was present in the washing powder, a student carried out culture and state rwo appropriate controls. (7)
an investigation using photographic film. The procl;!dures and results ofhis investigation
are shown in the diagram below.

AL- 2007 2A
i. Benzopyrene is a hannful compound commonly found in coal tar, automobile exhaust
fumes, tobacco smoke, burnt toast, and the crust of barbecued meat When taken into the
body, benzopyrene can be metabolized in the liver by two enzyme systems, known as phase
I and phase 2, :15 shown in the pathway below:

product A
pi,,,, I (mutagenk:)
benzopyrene CIIZ)'nle sy51em inte.rmediale X �
(fat �Jubie)
� productB
enzyme system (non-toxic and
!!!urath.IOll!! non�mutagenic;
excn:ted by kidney)

bd Boil 11\o <1!her roninn

,mil tlr,,n ;;.l!c,w it l!,
<;t,c)Jd�1+ll
{bl In order lO prntect the body against the mutagenic conseguence of benzopyrene

l
metabolism. which enzyme system (phase I or phase 2) should be more active?
Explain your :mswer. (4)
l'Ul ll!c p.horou.,phk, i'u! lll\Qlher pb.,u,�""Phi�
ti!tn lrllO !he '¥U!Jlng film r:,f !},� '-m� ,,�� in�
tb• b�iled w"-"h;n; (c) G!utathiorn:: is manufactured in the mitochondria. However, the number of
PD>'Td..rsoh,tii;m � rowJ�r 5ol�tio1>
l
mitochondria in the;: liver decreases when one ages. Explain the effect of this
phenorn-:non on the detoxification of benzopyrene in the liver. (3)

(e) Phase 1 reactions occur on the smooth endoplasmic reticulum. Suggest how the
structural features of the smooth endoplasmic reticulum facilitate the phase 1
(a) (i) To make the investigation a fair test. the boiled washing powder solution should reactions. (3)
be cooled down to ___ before the photographic film is put into it. (1 mark)
HKDSE - 2014 1B
(ii) Explain why cooling the boiled washing powder solution to the temperature you
stated in (i) would make the investigation fair. (l mark) 6. It is generally believed that domestic dogs evolved from ancient wolves. A recent study
comparing the genomes of wolves and dogs suggests that genes with key roles in starch
(b) How can the results of the investigation support the claim that !he washing powder digestion were selected during d1e domestication ofwolves into dogs. One of these genes
contains protease? Explain your answer. (4 marks) was gene A. which codes for amylase.
(c) Describe an experiment which can compare the different amylase activities of wolves
(c) Explain why egg stains on clothes can be removed by using this washing powder. and dogs. (4 marks)
(2 marks)
 En;z:yme / P.5 En;z:yme / P.6

HKDSE- 2015 1 B
HKDSE- 20181B
7. Hydrogen peroxide is by-product of some metabolic reactions inside our body. Ifit were
allowed to accumulate, it would kill our cells. Fortunately, we have an enzyme called 8. A student used the following set-up to compare the fat digestion of full fat fresh milk and half
catalase which speeds up the breakdown ofhydrogen peroxide into water and O"-')'gen. A fat fresh milk:
student planned to investigate the effect of temperature on the activity of catalase. Below
are the steps the student has drafted for his investigation:
(1) Extract catalase from an animal organ. gh1�s rod
for stirring.
(2) Mix 5 mL 0.1 % hydrogen peroxide solution with I mL catalase extract.
(3) Place the mixture in a water bath set at O'C
(4) Measure and record the volume of ox')'gen gas release in the first 5 minutes.
° °
(5) Repeat steps (2) to (4) with the water bath set at 20 C, 40 C and 60"C.
(a) Suggest an animal organ in which catalase is present in great abundance and from
which the enzyme can be obtained. Explain why this organ has so much catalase.
(2 marks) +-----.'\ mL milk ·I 7 ml. afkaltnt sdutfon
(b} The student has missed out an important step in his drafted procedure. What is it? - ) drop� of pH indicator X (colourless in acidic solutions and
pink in alkali;'\,: solution.s)
Explain the importance of this step. (2 marks)
(c) You are provided with the following apparatus and materials: 1,1 Write a .'iimple word equation of fat digestion. (2 marks)
(bl Two test tube. each with a different type of milk.. were prepared. The colour of
measuring cylinder_ boiling tube. one-hole stopper. glass tubing. rubber tubing, pipette. each mixture was recorded immediately after the addition of lipase solution, and then
ink. water trough. clip monitored Lmtil there was no more cliange in colour. The colours of the mixtures at the
beginning and the end are shown in Diagram l and Diagram JI respectively·
Choose the appropriate apparatus and materials to assemble a sel-up for measuring the Dillgram 11 (at lire end}
Diagram l (1111/Je beginfllng}
rnte of oxygen production. Draw the set-up in the space below. (3 marks)
Set-up for measurin° the rate of oxvgen production Tube A Tube A

HKDSE- 2017 lB

2. Denise ate a piece of pineapple preserved in a sugar solution and noticed that it was softi::r pak pi11k
pmk white:
than fresh pineapple. Explain this phenomenon. (3 marks)

(i) What is the independent variable in this investigation? (1 mark)

(ii) Describe the results of this investigation. (2 marks)
(iii) Which test tube( A or B) was the one with full fat fresh milk? Explain your answer.
(4 marks)
 Enzyme I P.7 Enzyme/ P.1

HKDSE - 2019 lB Past Papers Marking Scheme- Enzyme

2. The schematic diagram below shows a reaction mixture of an anabolic reaction catalysed
CE � 2003 Q.J (b)
by an enzyme. Drawings P, Q, R, S, and T re]Jresent different components of the mixture:
(i) The catalase in the paper disc broke down hydrogen peroxide, releasing oxygen
<::, When the amount of oxygen evolved reached a certain level, the oxygen bubbles

t> v
buoyed up the disc to the surface of the hydrogen peroxide solution J

□ O;J (IJ
pH Rate ofreaction (s·1) ½

2)
3 <0.01 ½

\7 ◊ (!j
5 0.02

}
7 0.05
1 Or 0
T 9 0.05
JI 0.04

C=7 0 (2)
Effect of pH Oil catahsc- activiiy

(9
Q
�
[7 R Title(½)
Correct choice of axes(½)

CJ
s Correct labeling of axes

[7 0 with units(½,½)
Correct plotting and joining
of points (1)
�

(OJ Which drawing represents the substrate in this anabolic reaction"? F.xrlain your a.nswer.
(2 marks) (iii) (l ) c1ny value between I and 9 / :my value read from the graph drawn
(bi Which drawing represents the enzy1m:'I Explain the answer (2 marks) (2_1 Repeal the experiment using hydrogen peroxide with smaller pH intervals
between 7 and 9 I
(iv} The cat:cilase activity would be similar to that of the previous investigation l
bccouse catalasc is not denatured at 4"C and it can become active again at room
!t:::mµerature I

CE- 2008 Q.6

(a) Ginger juice contains an enzyme that causes the coagulation of milk.

lb) Enzyme is protein in nature.

which is denatured by high temperature,
Therefore. if enzyme is involved. the action of enzyme will be Jost after
boiling ...

(c) Follow the steps in the recipe for one set�up .

.
and heat the milk to 65 °C instead of steps 2 and 3 in another setup ...
Other w<1.ys of e:i...-pression:
Boil the milk, cool down to 65 °C and mix with ginger juice
Heat the milk to 65 °C and mix with ginger juice
OR
Heat the milk to 65 "C and mix with ginger juice
Comnare with the results of the e�eriment of coolin_g_ down boiled milk to 65 °C
 Enzyme /P.2 Enzyme/ P.3

CE- 2010 Q.1 AL-20001A

1. (a) (i) 25 (1) 6. incubate yeast culture with sucrose solution for some time (1 ). centrifuge/
(ii) To make the results of the set-ups comparable/ to eliminate the effect of temperature dialyse/ filter to separate cell from supernatant ( 1 ), test supernatant (1)
difference on the results (1) with Benedict's solution ( 1 ), red ppt indicates presence of invertase activity (1)
(Accept correct alternatives)
(b) The gelatin layer of the photographic film is removed by the unboiled washing Controls; yeast without sucrose (1 ), 2
powder solution (1) sucrose without yeast (1),
This shows that the washing powder contains protein-digesting substance (1) boiled yeast with sucrose ( 1 ), (any 2)
However. the ability to remove the gelatin layer is lost when the washing powder (Accept correct alternatives) (7)
solution is boiled. (1)
This shows that the protein-digesting substance in the washing powder is heat
sensitive/ is denatured/ inactivated at high temperature (I) ..\.L- 2007 2A
This substance is probably protease
1. (bl• phase 2 1;,'nzyme system should work faster than phase l enzyme system (1) (4)
(c) Egg stains contain proteins (I) so that intermediate X could be quickly tmnsfonned to product B ( l) for fast
Protease digests the insoluble protein into peptides which are solubk so it can be elimitmtion rrom the body (l)
removed by water easily (I) and less product A would be formed ( l) to produce mutagcnic effect

(cl�--�-�-------------------� --�
Concert for 111mk award: (3}
effi:::ct of decline in mitochondria nu1nber on glutathione production ( 1) and phase 2
enzyme activity ( l) / the relative production ofproduct A and product B
imolicntion on benzooyrene meIBbolism ( 1)

e.g. the production of glutathione in the liver ,vou ld drop ( 1) due to a reduction in the
number of mitochondria
activity of the phase 2 enzyme system/ reaction would decrease ( 1) / product A
would accumulate and less product B would be formed
detoxification ofbenzopyrene in the liver would be impaired ( 1) / danger of
mutagenesis would increase (3)

(e) • the SER is a network of folded/ stacked membranes (1)

it provides a large surface area for various enzymes to align for carrying out the
biochemical process in sequence ( 1)
the SER network also helps to transport the metabolites from one area to another for
further processing ( 1) (3)

HKDSE- 201418

6. (c) obtain digestive juice from the digestive tract (mouth / stomach? I
intestine/ pancreas) of a wolf & a dog (1)
mix 1 mL of digestive juice with 5 mL of starch solution ( 1)
at regular time intervals, remove a fixed amount of the mixture for iodine
test (1) (4)
record the time taken for the tested mixture to remain brown in colour /the
blue colourno longer appears (1)
the one that takes a shorter time to remain brown in colour has a higher
amylase activity ( 1)

HKDSE-201518
 Enzyme I P.5

HKOSE-201918
7. (s) liver ( 1)
it is the organ where many metabolic reactions take place/ it is the org:in 2. (o) P/I)
for de1oxitlca1ion (l J 2 because two molecules of P are joined together/ Ps are joined together to (2)
form one molecules ofQ (I) ( not acceptable: product/ enzyme-substrate
(b) the hydrogen peroxide and catalase solution should be incubated at Hie sd corn pl ex)
temperature for IO minutes before mixing (I J lb) R(l)
such that the mixture has reached the set temperature at the beginning of the it has (a specific site/ active site for) binding with P or Q / it remains (2)
reaction (l) 2 unchonged or is regenerated after the reaction (l)
4 marks
(c) the set-up could collectgas(l)
the set-up could measure the volume of the gas (1)
labels (1) 3

HKDSE 20171B

2. sugar solution has a lower water potential / higher osmotic (solute) potential
or pressure (do NOT accept water concentration) than the cell content (of
fresh pineapple)/ cvtoplasm or vacuole offtesh pineapple cells ( 1)
as a result, pineapple cells lose water (do NOT accept: solution) to the sugar
solution bv osmosis (accept: water diffuses out by osmosis but do NOT
accept: diffuse only) (1) (3)
pineapple cells become flaccid/ lose theirturgor pressure/ pressure potential
/ less turaid to press against one another())
hence, the texture of pineapple preserved in sugar solution is softer than that
of fresh pineapple
3 marks
HKDSE-20181B

8. (a ) lipase (2.)
Triglyceride/ fat -----+glycerol+ fatty acids
(bl (i) Type of milk (1) (()

(iiJ colour of the mixture in Tube A turned from pi111, lo whik ( 1) (2.)
colour of the mixture in Tube 8 turned from rink lo pale pink
became pale ( l)
(iii) Tube A ( I J
Tube A turned white. sl1owing that the mixt,1re in Tu[i<c A. wa� (41
acidic (I)
Tube B remained pa!e pink, showing. th-at lil� 111ixllire in Tube B was
alkaline ( l J
full fat fresh milk release more fatty uciJ thun hnlf fat li"esl1 in ilk
after fat digestion ( J ), eventually resulting in to the acidic condition
ofthe mixture in Tube A
9 marks
 Nutrition in humans I P.2

Past papers - Nutrition in humans

� 6. Some vegetarians eat plant foods only.
1. (a) The photomicrograph below shows a cross section of the small intestine of a mammal: (a) From the nutritional point of view, explain two advantages of having a diet rich in
plant foods over that with little plant foods. (4)
(bl Most plant foods have a low protein content. Suggest a plant food that can provide a
lot of protein to the vegetarians. (I)

CE- 2006
2. The tnb\e bdow shows the average amount or water <!ntering the alimentary canal and tlie
:werage amount being absorbed in the intestine ofa person each day:

Water entering the alimentary canal I Water absorbed by th.e intesti11e

Source Volume(mL) I Siu: Volume(mL)
I
I
lngcstio11 2000 Small i11testine 9000
mn-.ck
Secretions along the
by�t 8000 Large intestine 850
alimentary canal

(i) With reference to two features ofX observable from the photomicrograph, explain (a) Based on the abovl! information, how much water is egested with the faeces each day?(!)
how these features facilitate the absorption of digested food substances. (4) (Note:Neglect the amount of water absorbed in the other parts of the alimentary canal.)
(ii) Use a flowchart to show how amino acids are transported to the heart after entering X. (b) Give two examples of secretions that enterthe alimentary canal. (2)
Indicate the major organs and blood vessels along the pathway. (2) (c) (i) Based on one structural difference between the small intestine and the large
(iii) Describe how the muscle layer helps the movement and digestion of food inside the intesti11e, explain why a much larger volume of water is absorbed in the small
small intestine. (3) intestine. (2)
(ii) Explain how the absorption of digested food facilitates the absorption of water in
� the small intestine. (2)
3. Read the passage below and answer the questions that follow:
CE- 2006
For many years. doctors believed that gastric ulcer (damage and bleeding of the 5. Body mass index (BMI) is a figure
stomach wall) was caused by excessive acid secretion in the stomach. so they used certain used to assess the body weight
chemicals to treat ulcer patients. However, after recovery, many patients might develop condition of a person. It is determined
gastric ulcer again. In the 1980s. an Australian doctor, Barry Marshall, observed that all his by two factors: weight and height of
ulcer patients had a type of bacteria called HC!/icobacter pylori (\@jf�t�n./£WRii) in their the person. The BM! chart below
stomach. He therefore put forward a new hypothesis about gastric ulcer. Based on this allows people to check their body
hypothesis. he treated his patients with antibiotics which are chemicals that kill bacteria. weight conditions based on their
Many of his patients recovered rapidly and did not develop gastric ulcer again. weight and height:

(a) If gastric ulcer is caused by excessive secretion of acid, what kind of chemicals should (a) (i) Mr. Wong weights 70 kg and
be used for treatment? (I) his height is 1.7m. Using the
(b) Many doctors were surprised at Marshall's observation because they thought that descriptions given on the
bacteria could not survive in the stomach. Why did they think so? (I) chart state the body weight

,.•
(c) With reference to the treatment used by Marshall, what do you think is his hypothesis condition of Mr. Wong. (1)
1.6 1.7 LS
about gastric ulcer? (I)
Bod)-hclJ!ll!(m)
( di Suggest a method to test Marshall's hypothesis. What result would be obtained if his (ii) Mr. Wong's son is \ .55 m tall.
hypothesis is correct? (2) What sl1ould be the ideal range of his body weight if he wants to be fit and
(e) Explain the imponance of the churning action of the stomach in tl1e digestion offood.(3) healthy? ( 1)
 Nutrition in humans / P.3 NutritiDn in humans I P.4

CE- 2007
(b) According to the deposition of fat in the body, scientists classify body sh:ipe into two 9. (bl G!ycemic lndex{Gl) is a ranking of foods containing carbohydrates. It is based on their
basic categories: apple shape and pear shape. To determine the cmegor.i' of body shape. immediate effect on the blood glucose level after consumption. The higher the GI value
the 1vaist-to-hip ratio {WHR) can be used and it is reprcsenk::d by the following ofa food. the Cjllicker the rise of blood glucose level. Be/ow are the major food
formula: constituents and the GI values of some common food items:
WHR _ waist circu111ferc1ce
- hip c1rcumfertncc
The table below shows the categorization of the body shnpt:s or men ;:ind womt:n using I
'I
Food item i
I Carbohydrate
Major food constituents
Fru Protein
G1 value

the WHR: Whole milk i ✓ ✓ ✓ i 27

Fat-free milk ! ✓ • ✓ 32
WHR
Meo I Women Cornllakes I ✓ ✓ ✓ 92
Annie sh
Pear shape
> 0.90 I > 0.85 Oatmeal I ✓ I ✓ ✓ 49
.s0.90 I s 0.85 Key: ✓ means present
·x· means absent
(i) For most people, having extra fat around their waist incro;ases health risk more
than having extra fat around tl1eir hip. With reference to this information. which
body shape has a higher health risk? ( l) (i) With reference to the major constituents of whole milk and fat-free milk in the
(ii) Mr. and Mrs. Wong have similar BM!, but their body shapes are different Mr. above table, suggest why whole milk has a lower 01 value. (3)
Wong's waist and hip circumferences are 0.87 m and 0.97 m respectively, whereas (ii) For a diabetic person, wl1ich breakfast food item. cornflakes or oatmeal, is more
Mrs. Wong's are 0.87 m and 0.95 m. Who has a higher health risk? Show how suitab)w? Explain your choice. (3)
your arrive al your answer. (3) (iii) Besides GI values, state and explain two other considerations regarding the
(c) Dieticians recommend that overweight people should have a diet with more vegetables. nutritional content of food when you plan a healthy diet to reduce body weight. (4)
Suggest two reasons to explain why this diet may help these people to reduce the
chance of becoming obese. (4) CE- 2008
1. The following diagram shows part of the human digestive system.
CE- 2007
6 Read the paragraph below and answer the questions that follow.

Gastric reflux describeS a backflow of the gastric jllice from the stomach into the oesophagus, This
can irritate and sometimes damage the liniug of the oesopb.agus, giving a foding of heanbum. In
i!�
Hong Kong, the rate of patient suffering from gastric reflu.x rose from 2.3 per IO 000 in 1996 to 6.2
per !O 000 in 2005. It is believed that the alarming rise is related to the lifestyles of people in
Hong Kong. These inc!t1de having midnight snack right before sleeping, excessive fatty foods,
large meuJs, irregular mealtime, and drinking a lot of alcohol or coffee.
(oJ Describe how structure A helps the digestion of food. (4J
,'(;
(bJ The table below lists some information about the components of the secretion from
(a) (i) With reference to the content of gastric juice. suggest a probable reason for its structures B und C. Complete the table. (SJ
d::image to the oesophagus. (I)
(ii) Food entering the small intestine carries some gastric juice from the stomach.
Somt: components of the secretion Function
Explain why the gastric jllice does not normally daim:1ge the s1J1a)I intestine (3)
Mucus (i)
(b) Suggest why the backtlow of gastric juice is more likely to occur if n person has a
1-I_vdrochloric acid (ii)
meal just before sleeping. (3J
B Protease (iii)
(c) A patient suffering from severe �astric rdlux will also likely to lrnve tooth dec:iy. Give
Amylase Break down starch into maltose
an explanation for this. (2)
Lipase (iv)
C (v) Neutralize acid from gastric juice
 Nutrition in humans / P. 5 Nutrition in humans I P.6

CE- 2008 AL - 2004 2A

7. A person joined a fitness programme which involves both weight training and 1. Vitamin A and vitamin D are fat-soluble while vitamin C is water-soluble. They are
cardio-respiratory training for one month. The table below shows some data about his essential for nom1al grovnh and body functions.
fitness status before and after the trainin°0 (a) Explain why an excessive intake of fat-soluble vitamins in general is undesirable
Before training After training whereas an excessive intake of water-soluble vitamins is not. (2)
Muscle mass (kg) 30.3 31.4 (b) Give one major function in the human body ofvitnmin A and vitamin C. (2)
Mass of body fat (kg) 18.8 17.7 (c) By means of a flow chart, show the major vessels involved in the transport of vitamin
Mass of minerals in bone (kg) 3.15 3.29 D from th\:! small intestine to the heart. (3)
Basal metabolic rate,;, (kcal per day) 1543 1580 (d) Vitamin D undergoes the following enzymatic activation to form a highly active
Average heartbeat rate (beat per minute) when 143 135 metabolite Y:
running at 6 km per hour for 5 minutes
• It is the minimum amount of energy needed to maintain basic body activities. Vitamin D enzyme 1
X
enzyme 2
y-
Increase in intestinal
in blood Calcium absorption
(a) With reference to the above data, suggest an explanation for the increased basal
i. Elderly people usually have problems in calcium absorption due to decreased
metabolic rate after the training programme. (2)
concentration ofX. Suggest two possible causes for this decrease ofX. (2)
(b) How does the training result in the decrease in body fat of the person? (3)
iii. Explain how vitamin D deficiency might lead to skeleral problems in adults. (4)
(c) During this training, the diet should be changed accordingly. With reference to two
iv. Why is vitamin D deficiency more damaging to children than to adults? (3)
changes in the fitness_ status shown above, state two nutrients that may require an
increased intake. Explain how the increased intake of these nutrients contributed to the
changes in the fitness status. (4)
AL-,,008 lA
(d) There is a change in the person's stroke volume (volume of blood pumped out of the
heart in each heartbeat) when running at 6 km per hour before and after the training. 7. A man was diagnosed with a kind of pancreatic cancer which is characterized by
overgr0\,.1:h of endocrine pancreatic cells. He sometimes felt dizzy but became less so after
Suggest the change in his stroke volume and explain the significance of such a change.(3)
drinking a solution of glucose.
(a} Based on the above observation, suggest why this pancreatic cancer would cause
CE- 2009
dizziness in the man. (4)
1. The diagram below shows the human digestive
(b) After having an operation to remove a large part of the pancreas, the man was advised
system. X
to take a low protein and \ow fat diet. Explain the biological reasons behind this
advice. (2)
(a) Describe the digestion processes that take
place at part X. (2 marks)

(bl (i) Name structure Y (1 mark)

(ii) With reference to one feature of
structure Y observable in the
above diagram, explain how this
feature facilitates the absorption
of digested food. (2 marks)

(c) Explain a role of the digestive system in body defence. (2 marks)

 "

Nutrition in humans / P. 7 Nutrition in humans / P.S

DSE-2012 1B HKDSE-20141B

10. In mammals, the production of bile salts is very limited at birth and during; early 11. Recently, some people have adopted a diet rich in lean meat in order to lose weight and build
f
developmental stages. In an investigation of the ef ect of bile supplementation on fat muscle. They may be able to achieve these aims but there are some health problems
digestion in piglets, four groups of piglets were fed with the same diet except that bile was associated with this diet. Discuss the pros and cons of the controversial diet with regard to
added to diets in the proportion of 0, 0.15%, 0.30% and 0.45% n:spective]y for 15 days. the nutritional needs of our body and protein metabolism. (12 marks)
Faecal samples were collected eoch day for analysis and the body weights of the piglets
were monitored. The results are shown in the table below:

Bile level in diet(%)

0
' I
i 0.15 0.30 OA.5
Average initial body weight (kg) 4_90 --+ __
.::i, 46
'
4.65 I 4.52
Average final body weight (kg) 7. I �--_2
-I 7. 8 1 !
-�
7.92
2��-
Average dry weight offot in the faece.s (%) 6.52 i 5.81 '-l,65 I 3.78

{a) How do bile salts help with fat digestion? (2 marks)

ibJ What was the effect of bile supplementation on fat digestion in the above
investigation? Explain your answer. (2 marks)
(c) Suggest why it is important 10 monitor the body weight of the piglets in this
investigation. (1 mark)
(d) Suggest an in vitro experimental method that allows a direct measurement of the
digestion offat in a laboratory. (3 marks)

HKDSE � 2013 1B

3. Figure A shows a section of part of the human alimentary canal. Figure B shows another
section of the same part with blood vessels stained.

(a) Which part of the alimentary canal is shown in the figures? Suprort your answer with
evidence. (2 marks)
(b) For each of the above figures. describe one observable feature and c:xrlain how it is related
to tile functioning ofthis part of the alimentory canal. (5 marks)
 Nutrition in humans/ P.1 Nutrition in humans / P.2

Past Papers Marking Scheme - Nutrition in humans the gut content

As a result, water is dravm into the blood by osmosis
CE - 2004 Q.1 (a)
CE-2006 Q.5
(i) X s a finger-like projection of the intestinal wall l+ (a) (i) slightly overweight
This feature provides a large surface area-for food absorption 1 (ii) 49.0-56.5 kg
The epithelium ofX is very thin/ one-cell thick 1+ (b) (i) ap ple shape
This shortens the distance of diffusion/ transport of digested food substances 1 (ii) WHR of Mr Wong= 0.90, thus he is of pear shape
WHR of Mrs Wong= 0.92, thus she is of apple shape
(ii) X ➔ hepatic portal vein➔ liver➔ hepatic vein ➔Vena cava➔ (heart) Mrs Wong has a hi gher health risk
(No arrow sign, deduct l mark ) (c) This diet has high content of dietary fibre
which is indigestible / add bulk to the food to give the sense of fullness
(iii) The peristaltic contraction of the muscle layer It also has low fat content
pushes food along the small intestine and hence the overall energy intake through this diet will be lowered
This also helps to mix food with digestive enzymes reducin g the change of obesity

CE-2005Q3
CE- 2007 Q.6
(a) alkaline substance/ substance that inhibits acid secretion/ substance that protects
the stomach wall l (a) (i) Gastric juice is acidic/ contains hydrochloric acid
(ii) Pancreatic juice/ bile/ intestinal juice in the small intestine
(b) Because usually bacteria are killed by the acid secreted by the stomach are alkaline
which neutralizes the gastric juice
(c) Helicubactorpylori is the cause ofulcer
(b) After meal, the release of gastric juice increases
(d) Introduce Helicobacror pylori into the stomach of healthy mammals and the pressure inside the stomach increases
lfthe hypothesis is correct, these animals would develop gastric ulcer symptoms 1 A!so, the stomach and oesophagus are at the same level while sleeping
These increase the chance of gastric reflux
(e) The churning action of the stomach will break down food into smaller pieces (c) The acid in the gastric content dissolves
This helps to increase the surface area of food for the action of enzymes the enamel i calcium salts of the tooth
It also helps to mix the food with the digestive enzymes

CE- 20Q5Q.6 CE - 2007 Q.9 (l:J)

(a) A vegetarian diet has low fat content
This will reduce the risk ofobesiry I heart diseases
A vegetarian diet has a high content of dietary fibre
This helps maintain nonnal peristalsis/ prevent constipation / reduce the risk of
colon cancer/ avoid overeating
A ve getarian diet has a high vitamin C content
This helps the fonnation of connective tissue/p reventing scurvy
any two sets
(bl beans/ peas/ nuts/ mushroom (accept other reasonable answers)
(i) Whole milk has more fat than fat-rree milk
Presence of !at slow down the digestion of carbohydrates
and hence a slower absorption of glucose
(ii) Diabetics cannot lower their blood glucose level if it is too high
Oatmeal has a low GI value/ causes a slow rise in blood glucose level
Therefore, oatmeal is better than cornflake
(iii) The overall ener gy intake should be less than the overall energy expenditure
so that the food reserve will be mobilized and used
The diet should contain sufficient amount and types of nutrient
for proper functioning of the body
1

CE- 2008 Q.1

CE· 2006 Q.2
00 l�mL l (a) Structure A produces bile/ bile salt ..
(b) saliva/mucus, gastric juice, pancreatic juice, bile, intestinal juice (any two) 1 ,1 which is released into the duodenum ....
(c) (i) The small intestine is longer than the large intestine 1+ to emulsify fat and increase the su rface area.
so the time for water absorption is longer/ surface are for water absorption is this facilitates the action of enzyme on fat ...
larger l
or The inner wall of the small intestine is highly folded/ has a large number of
villi ]+
Thus the surface area for water absorption is larger l
(ii ) The absorption of di gested food into blood increases the water potential of
 Nutrition in humans/ P.3 Nutrition in humans/ P.4

(b) (i) Protect inner surface ofthe stomach from se!f-dig<.!stion /the action of AL-2004 2A
enzyme or acid (gastric juice). 1. (a) • fat-soluble vitamins are l2Q1 readily excreted in urine, but excessive 2
(ii) Provide optimum/ suitable pH for enzyme activity/ to kill water-soluble vitamins can be excreted in urine (1)
bacteria . fat-�oluble vitamins accumulate in the body to reach toxic levels (1)
(release calcium salt from bones; hydrolyze larger molecule into smaller / cause hami to the body
molecules)
(iii) Break down proteins into peptides/ polypeptides/ amino acids . (b) • vitamin A- retinal pigment/ visual pigment/ rhodopsin fomiation (1)
(iv) Break down fat into glycerol and fatty acid. (also accept pigment in rods. responsible for dim light vision) OR control
(accept monoglycerides as alternative to glycerol) nomial epithelial structure and growth
(v) Sodium hydrogen carbonate/ hydrogencarbonate salts/ vitamin C (any one function):
hydrogencarbonates ... > propi:r metabolism/ fomiation of connective tissue (1) /
> healing of wound (l)
CE - 2008 Q.7 (N.B. do not accept deficiency disease as answer)

(a) There is greater muscle mass after the training.

Muscles are active cells that require more energy! respiration rate of muscle (1) (lJ (lJ
cells is higher ... (c) small intestine--+ lymphatic vessels thoracic (left) subclavian
(b) There is an increase in the daily ener.1,,y expenditure due to increased / lacteal duct vein
basal metabolic race/ energy expenditure also increases during training .
Thus the ener1'Y expenditure is greater tl1an the energy intake. (I)
our body has to utilize the stored fat to meet the energy demand .... (anterior)
( c) The intake of protein sllould be increased. vena cava _,. heart ma\'.. 3
as it is the major raw material for building muscles.
The intake of calcium/ phosphorous shoulc.J b� incn::ct�<!c.J. [JC wrong co11cept included from vena cava - heart: max. 2 marks only.J
as it is the major raw material for building bones
id) The stroke volume increases after the training. (d ) (i) Any�:
This increases the amount of oxygen and carbon U ioxide transported indoor life. lack of sunlight for vitamin D synthesis ( I J
per heartbeat! a lower heartbeat rate can supplv sufficient oxygen to muscles Jack of vitamin D in food (I) ma"l:.2
A lower heartbeat rate is sufficient to sust.ain the same intensity of exercise/ poor vitamin D absorption ( l)
Exercise of higher intensity can be performed by the person ... lower enzyme 1 activity (I) I absence or or not enough enzyme 1 production
(any o!her acceptable answer)

CE- 2009 Q.l (iii) deficient vitamin D--. decreased dietary Ca.,.. absorption ( 1)
Ca"""'" kvcl in blood decreased (1) I lower than nonnal 4
(aJ Mastication breaks food down into smaJJer pi<.'ces ca++ drawn from bone to maintain homeostasis (1)
Amylase in saliva helps the breakdown of starch into maltose
reduce bone mass { l) / bone weakens/ bones easily break
(bJ (i) small intestine
(ii) Structure Y is long I+
{iv) children need more calcium than adults{]) as children continue to grow 3
to provide a large surface area/ increase surface area for absorption l
of food whereas adults stop growth I less growth (I)
insufficient vitamin D ...... poor bone fomiation ( 1) / bone deformity/
(cJ Presence of hydrochloric acid in the stomach
kllls most of the ingested bactena rickets/ soft bone/ poor teeth development

pH m d1fferent parts of the d1gest10n system vanes extreme ]+

most bacteria cannot surv1ve in such a great change of pH any one l AL- 200S IA

Presence of digestive enzymes 7. (a) due to Ltncontrolled growth ofmsulm-secretmg cells (1 ), this
} pancreatic cancer probably leads to an excessive secretion of msuhn ( 1)
Enzymes digest most ofthe ingested bactena ma\'. 3
as insulin stimulates the conversion of blood glucose by the liver (1)
/ uptake of blood glucose by cells, excessive msu!1n secret10n would
reduce the blood glucose to a low level (1)
As a result ofmsuffic1ent blood glucose supply to the bram(l), }
the man would feel dizzy
(b) some tissues of the pancreas secrete protease and lipase (1) (2)
they may be removed together with the cancerous tissues(l),
and this would make the digestion of protein and fat difficult
DSE-2012 IB
 Nutrition in humans/ P.5

Past papers- Gas exchange in humans

10. (a) bile salts em ulsifv fat into droplets ( 1) (ll
such that there is an increase in surface area for the action of the lipase/
enzvme (1) (1l CE- 2003
(bl as the bile supplementation increased, the fat content of the faeces (ll 1. (a) To study the effect of concentration of ox ygen and carbon dioxide on the breathing
decreased ( 1) rate, a healthy person was asked to inhale different gas mixtures. The results are shown
this indicates increased digestion of fat (I) (ll
R_emarks: 1f absorption instead of digestion is mentioned, no marl.: will be in the table below
given
(c l • to show that the addition of bile supplementation does not adversely affect Concentration of gas(%) Breathing rate
the growth of the pigs ( 1) / indicate the effectiveness of the bile Gas mixture
(1) Oxygen Carbon {breathe per min )
supplementation on promoting piglets' growth / effectiveness of fat
absorption p 21 0.03 17
(d) Concept for mark award: Q 21 4.00 34
1"' pt: suitable substrate and correct enzvme used in the experiment R 16 0.03 17
2"J pt: the identification of parameter fof meausring the dependent variable
3 rJ Pt provide ex�ected results s 16 4.00 34
e.g. prepare a mixture of lipase, (bile salts) and otl (1) Ill
add pH indicator into the mi:-..1ure / use a data lo gger with p\-1 sensor/ p!-1
meter to show the change in pH of the mxiture ( 1) (I) (i) With reference to the above information. state the factor that affects the breatl1ing
the faster the drop in the p\-1 of the mixture, the faster the digestion or fat I I)
I I) mte of the person. Explain how you arrive at your ans\.ver. (3)
Accept oth�r reasonabl(! C'i:perimc:nts
(ii) Which of the four gas mixtures has similar concentrations of oxygen and carbon
DSE-2013 1B
dioxide as exhaled air? (I)
3. (a} it is taken from the small intestine/ ileum ( 1) (accept duodenum) (I)
as evidenced by the presence of villi ( 1) in the region (I ) (iii ) Mouth-to-moutl1 ventilation is a method for rescuing a person who fails to breathe
(b) Figure fin ger-like pro jections (villi) (\)provide a larger surface area for the but still has heartbeat. It involves blowing exhaled air into the patient's body
(2)
A­ absorption of digested food substances ( 1) through the mouth as shown below:
Figure rich supply of blood / dense capillary network (I) helps transport
8: away the absorbed food substances quickly ( 1), this maintains a
steep concentration gradient of these food substances to (1) {3)
facilitate the absorption

DSE-201418

11. Lose wei ght and build muscle (max. 4 marks) (A)
lean meat does not contain much fat and carbohydrates, this reduces the ener gy
intake (l)
when the energy intake is lower than the energy ex penditure (I), our body will
utilise food reserve , body fat in this case., to support our daily activities (1) Based on the composition of exhaled air, explain why this method can help the
protein will be digested to form amino acids (l)
amino acids will be assimilate d to form mµsde fibres (1) according to the
patient stay alive before he can breathe again. (2)
needs of the body
(iv ) Su ggest why it is necessa ry to do the following when carrying out
Health problems associated with the unbal anced diet (max. 2 marks) (D)
such diet may lack other essential nutrients which are also importan t for our mouth-to-mouth ventilation:
health (1) such as certain mineals and vitamins:
insufficient intake of minerals and vitamins leads to deficienc y diseases (1)
(may cite specific examples) (1) Tilt the patient's head as shown in the diagram. instead of letting it lie flat. (1)
(2) Observe whether the patient's chest rises when blowin g air into the patient. (1)
Health problems associated with protein metabolism (max. 3 marks) (P)
excess amino acids will be deaminated in the liver forming urea (1)
and the urea wi!l be e:,;creted through the kidney (1) ( v) Which part of the brain c ontrol s the breathing rate? (I)
this creates heavy workload to both the liver and the kidne y (I) and may lead to
failure of their functionin g (1)
C=max. 3
 Gas exchunge ,o humans P.J

-n
CE- 2004 {c) Eric wanted ro compare the
L (c) The diagram below shows an air sac of the lung and its blond supply:

(i) Explain the importance of the

oxygen content of atmospheric
air and exhaled air, so he
prepared two jars of gas as
,�o,phe,ic,;,
s=pk
7T" If- exhaled :i.jr
sample
water film in gaseous exchange. shown below:
(2)
(i) Draw a labeled diagram to show a sep-up that can be used to collect the air
(ii) SARS patients may have fluid exhaled from his lungs. (4J
accumulated in the air sacs. (ii) Describe what Eric should do in order to compare the oxygen content of the two
Explain how the accumulation of blood c.apillacy air samples. (21
fluid may affect the oxygen
content of the blood of the CE-2006
patients. (3) 10. (b) The graph below shows the oxygen content of blood in the aorta and that in the vena
cava, and the 0;1.-ygen uptake of a person perfonning exercise of different intensities.
(iii) One method of confirm whether a patient is infected with the SARS virus is to The intensity of exercise is expressed as the energy requirement of the exercise.
test for the presence of antibodies against this virus in the patient's blood. Explain
50
why these antibodies will be produced by a SARS patient. (2)

(iv) Suggest a method that can help the body develop immunity against SARS. 45
Explain how the immunity is developed. (4) ,-.s
CE- 2005 40

4. The photomicrograph below shows a section ofa mammalian lung:

35
..•
30

capillmc�
1000 1500 21JOO 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000 5500 6000 6500 7000 7500
Energy r<:quirernent ofth� ex.,:rcist (kJ h- 1)

(i) How does the oxygen uptake change with exercise of different energ;y requirements?( I)
(ii) From the graph, find out the blood oxygen content in the aorta and the vena cava for
boxi11g, whicl1 has an energy requirement of 4500 kJ 11· 1 (II
(iii) The enerb'Y requirements for running and cycling leisurely are 3600 kJ h" 1 and 18000
(a) With reference to two features observable in the photomicrograph, expla in how the Id 11- Calculate the difference in the blood oxygen content between the aorta and the
1
•

lung tissue is adapted lo gas exchange.
(b) Oxygen moves continuously from the air in A into the capillaries. However, the
oxygen content in A remains relatively high. Explain how this is achieved. (2)
(4) vena cavu for each type of exercise. (2)
(iv) How does the difference in blood oxygen content between the two blood vessels
change with the intensiry of exercise? Explain the significance of this change. (3J
(v) As exercise intensity increases, there is a great change in the blood 0A-ygen content in
the vena cava, but that in the aorta remains constant and high. Explain how the
constant and high blood oxygen content in the aorta can be achieved. (3)
 Gas exchange in humans / P.4 Gas exchange in humans / P.5

CE� 2008 HKDSE � 2014 lB

3. The following diagram shows part of the human
respiratory system. 2. The photomicrograph below shows a section of the inner wall of the human trachea:

(a) Name structure X and describe its function. (3)

{b) Construct a tlowchart to show the path of air
passing from the atmosphere to the air sacs of the
lungs (2)
(c) Asthma is a respiratory disease. Wl1 cn it attacks,
structure Y constricts and tl1e patient will have
breathing difficulty. Explain the eftect of asthma on the ra� of removal of carbon
dioxide from tl1e blood of the lungs. (4)
\X 41JQ)

{a) In the space provided, labc:l the cells shown in the pl1otomicrograph. (2 marks)
{bl With rererence to the features of the in ner wall shown in the photomicrograph,
describe how the inner wall of the trachea can protect our body against bacterial
invasion. (3 marks)
Muimumtspiration
HKDSE 201618
,'
�
, '
I
11. Gas exchange in organisms mainly relies on diffusion. As an efficient organ for gas
/ ' ,, ' ' '
exchange, plants· kaves and human·s lungs have some common principle on structural

!
adaptation. Discuss how their structures adapt to confonn these common principles. In
' / addition to these similarities, explain why human's respiratory system is more efficient in
Maximum iration operation. (11 marks)

Time/arbit=yunit -
HKDSE - 201718
The chart shows the lung volume changes during breathing. The vital capacity is calculated
to be _____ The vital capacity can be used as an index of pulmonary function because 5. ,. Briefly describe the breathing actions that bring air into the lungs. (4 marks)
it provides useful infonnation about the stre11gth of the _____ muscles. A patient b. In the following diagrams, Diagram 1 shows some structures of a human lung while
suffering from asthma has a greatly reduced "timed vital capacity' (i.e. vital capacity in a Diagram 11 shows a collapsed lung if it is ruptured at location Y:
fixed time interval) in which the resistance of the ainvays is _____ owing to Dlngrani 1 Diagratnll
bronchial constriction. (3)

Explain why the lung collapses i!'it is niptured at location Y. (2 marks)

 Gas exchange in humans/ P.1

HKDSE-20191B Pa;;t Papers !\'larking Scheme - Gas exchange in humans

5 Diagram L below shows pan of the ltmg in a patient suffering fro111 a certain lung disease. A
hardened layer of dust deposit was found on !he n.:srirntor\· �LJrl"r!ce of the air sac::..
Photomicrograph M shows 1he lug tissue taken from the patient (i) Concentration of carbon dioxide
Bernu:-e the breathing rate increases/ change with !he concentration of CO2
\Vhile it remains the same regardless of the change in oxygen concentration
.Dfognml L

(ii) s
(iii) Exhaled air still contain 16% oxygen
When blown into the patienf s lungs. the oxygen can be supplied to the body cells
for rcspiration J

(iv) (I) To ensure the entrance of the trachea is clear / free from obstructions
(2) To ensure that air is blown into the lun!!:S

(v) medulla

(a) Compare the oxygen and glucose content of the blood in vessels A and B. Explain your CE - 2004 Q.1 (c)
an swer. (4 marks)
(b) With reference to the above information about the lung disease, suggest two possible OJ Oxygt:n in air dissolves in the water film
so that it can diffuse readily through the wall of the air sac into the blood capillary]
ways in which the disease adversely affects gas exchange in the patient. (4 marks)
(ii) The accumulation of fluid increases the distance for diffusion/ reduces the surface
area for dissolving oxygen 1
thereby decreases the rate of diffusion of dissolved oxygen into the blood
capillaries
Thus the O>.'}'gen content of the blood decreases/ becomes lowerthan normal

(iii) The antigen of the SARS virus

stimulates the white blood cells of the patient to produce the specific antibodies

(iv) injection of the weakened virus/ the antigen into the body
This will stimulate the white blood cells to develop memory for the antigen
When the same virus enters the body.
a large amount of antibodies can be produced rapidly

CE - 2005 Q.4

{SJ The: wall of A is very thin I

so ns to reduce the distance of diffosion of respiratory gases JI

A is richly supplied with blood capillaries

This allows a rapid 1ransport of gas to and away from the air sacs/ can maintain a
:,kep conct:!ntration gradient of gases between A and the blood l
The: Jung tissue is made up of numerous air sacs 1
so th.n 1hert: is :l. large surface area for gas exchange/the diffusion of gases 1
any two sets
(b) During ventilation/ brenthing_ some air in the lungs is replaced by fresh air l
which contains a high oxygen content l
 Gas exchange in humans/ P.1 Gas exchange in humans/ P.3

(c) (i) (bi (atmosphere)_, nostril/ nasal cavity_,_ pharynx ......... trachea_,_ bronchus
�bronchioles� (air sacs). 2

exhaled air Mark by pairs (put a✓ above the arrow)

collected / blowing a.ir Put a ✓ above the last nrrow ir atmosphere tind air sacs are included
A maximum of4 ✓
Missing but correct sequence: continue marking
r.J.bber 01be Wrong sequence: stop at the wrong one
!L;nore additional structure c;iven in correct sequence, e.�. mouth, nose, larvnx
Set-up for collecting exhaled air
(c) Volume orthe inspired air decreases ..
Less fresh atr mf.xe.1· with the residual air ....
Title 1/, Thu� concentration of carbon dioxide in the air sacs remains relatively high/
Workable set-up: invened gas jar, collecting gas under water, tube The concentration gradient of carbon dioxide between the alveolar air and the
Label: water/water trough. blowing air, rubber tube, exhaled air collected {any 3)1½ blood becomes smaller ....
Quality of drawing l The rate of removal if carbon dioxide from blood decreases.
(ii) Put a burning candle into the gas samples OR (Any one set)
Compare the time that the candle can bum Volume ofthe expired air decreases... I
carbon dioxide removed from air sacs to atmosphere decreases. .
CE - 2006 Q.10 (b) Thus concentration of carbon dioxide inside the lungs remains relatively high/
The concentration gradient of carbon dioxide bet-.veen the alveolar air and the
( i) Oxygen uptake increases with exercise of increasing energy requirement blood becomes smaller ....
The rate of removal if carbon dioxide from blood decreases ..
(ii) Oxygen content in aorta: 19 mL per JOO mL blood
Oxygen content in vena cava : 5.6 mL per 100 mL blood (l or 0)
AL- 2002 1A
(iii) Difference in oxygen content for running= 19 - 6 = 13 mL per 1 00 mL blood
Difference in oxygen content for cycling= 19 - 10 = 9 mL per 100 mL blood 6. 45L(1)
*intercostals (½) and *diaphragm (Y�)/*respiratory(½)
(iv) The difference in blood oxygen content bet-.veen the aorta and the vena cava increased (1)
increases with increased exercise intensity
This shows that more O>..')'gen is consumed by tissue
for respiration to release more energy for increased exercise intensity HKDSE- 2014 lB
{v) During vigorous exercise., there is an increase in ventilation rate/
rate and depth of breathing 2. (a) * ciliated epithelial cell (I)
The oxygen content in air sac increases * mucus-secreting cell (I)
The diffusion gradient across alveolar wall increases/
this increases the diffusion of oxygen into the blood (b) mucus secreting cells secrete mucus to trap dust and germs from incoming
thus maintaining the blood oxygen content of the aona at a constant air (1)
cilia sweep the trapped dust and genns away to the throat for swallowing
and high level (3)
II)
epithelial cells are closely packed to prevent entry of bacteria / form a
physical barrier ( 1)
CE- 2008 Q.3 5 marks

(a) X· * pleural membrane/ inner pleural membnme .....

It secretes pleural iluid
to reduce friction during breathing movement/ act as lubricant during breathing
movement ...

S3
 Gas exch::mge in humans i P.4 Gas exchange in humans/ P.5

HKDSE-201618 HKDSE-201918

5. (a) A contains more oxygen than B or vice versa (1)

11. Adapations to be an effective organ for gas exchange (A) m:.ix.=5
large surface area for diffusion of gases ( I J
■ numerous air sacs in the lungs of humans vs �ponm 111<.:sophyll with
numerous air spaces in lenves/ numerous leaves in pbnts (I)
a moist surface for dissolving of gas (I)
■ presence ofa water film on the inner surface oflht: :1ir sac vs that ofthe
surface of spongy mesophyll (I)
short distance for exchange ofgns between internal .ind external environment ( 1)
■ one-cell thick ;vall ofairsuCs :ind capill::iry versus flat and thin leaves ( 1)
Human lungs are considered more effective ln gas exdrnnge (S) max.= 3
■ there is active ventilation in humans. breathing movements draw in and
expC!I air actively (I)
■ oxygen diffused in are transported away by the blood oC the capillary
network surrounding the air sacs (I)
■ both of the above maintain a steep concentration gradient for diffusion of
gases (l)
■ while leaves rely on passive ventilation/ diffusion only (I)
*becnuse gas exchange takes place at air sac /not accept al b/oodvessef A or
JJ/ where oxygen is taken up by blood (diffusion) (I), blood leaving air sac
should have more oxygen
A contains kss glucose than B or vice versa {J) (4)
*because the cells in the lung tissues# have taken up glucose from blood for
respiration ( J )_ blood li:!aving air sac should have less glucose
* .Vo need to mork ifO markfi;r pre1,ioni huller puinr
accept: !1111g cells cells in air sue; 1101 acc,:p1 air sue hmg hody cells
(b) Any n�o sets:
dust deposit forms a barrier (I) and this increases the diffusion distance (4)
(0+1)
a significant ponion of the inner surface [not accept water film] of the air
sacs wa� covered/ blocked by dust ( 1 ), thus the area available for diffusion
\Vas reduced (0+ 1)
a hardened layer of dust deposit reduces the elasticity ofthe lung (l ). hence a
smaller lung volume wl1en the ILmg inflates (0+1)
8 marks

Adap1a1ions (A) -- max. 5

(ff2c1ive hreathing ,1ys1e111 (S) max. 3
l�ffecfive communication (CJ max. 3
11 marks

HKDSE 20171B

5. (a) • imercostal muscle contracts to result in upward and outward movement

of rib cage/ raise the rib cage (!)*[accept external intercostal muscle, not
internal intercostal muscle contracts]
diaphragm(muscle)contracts and diaphragm beconii;:s flattened (I)*
both actions increase the volume of the thoracic cavity (1 )#[NOT accept (4J
lung volumeJ
as a result, the pressure inside the lungs drops below atmospheric
pressure# (1)
hence air is forced
f
into the lungs
accept"'co/1/ruction o intercostul muscle und diuphrugm musde (!) lead to
upwurd und outwurd movement of rih cuge r.md jlu!tening of diuphrugm (I)'"
though not encouraged us ii doesn't show i:ausu/ relulionship.
if the candidates mention pressure change.firs/ and then volume �·hr,nge. then
only bullet point ./ (abo111 pressure) will be murked: no mark wilt he given to
h11/le1 point 3 (ahou/ volume)
Marks
(bJ air will leah: into the pleural cavity ( l )from outside (through the lungs)/
the negative pressure of pleural cavity cannot be maintained (I) (2)
the Jung collapses due to its own elasticity (I) 6 marks
 Transport in humans / P.2

Past papers- Transport in humans

CE- 2002 CE - 2004
4. ( b) The graph below shows the 3. (c) The photomicrograph below shows the sections of two types of blood vessels in the
'°
t
100
changes in blood pressure
and velocity of blood tlow
80 ----+..........
I ',� 30 -"
human body

as the blood travels from 60 g�

'' ------- 1(
the heart to the leg and
40 '' ' ,.,,
[...,·
20
�
returns to the heart: 'i /· 10 i
20 \i ,/
(i) Compare the blood 'ks,
pressure in the anery
with that in the vein.
Suggest two reasons
for the difference. (3) Key : -- blood pn=ssure
--- velocity ofblood flow
(i) State two functions of the thick muscular wall of vessel type I. (2)
(ii) Explain the importance of the low velocity of blood tlow in the capillary. (2) (ii) Vessel type II has a larger lumen than vessel type L Explain the importance of this,
(iii) In the vein of the leg, the blood pressure is very low while the velocity of blood (2)
flow is quite high. Describe how such a high velocity of blood tlow in the vein is The table below shows the gas content of the blood in the two types of vessels
maintained. (2) transporting blood between the heart and an organ A:
(iv) Using the same x-axis given above, sketch a graph to show the change in the
oxygen content ofthe blood as it passes through the blood vessels. (3) r,a,,_ content rarbitr unit\
' +.m<> ll

CE- 2003
le., ' ,,c
loxv"en "O 100
4. (b) The photograph below shows tl1e Ch,mh<." A

transverse section ofa pi[ (S heart. (iii) Identity organ A. II)

which has a structure similar to (iv) Witl1 rel'erence to organ A,
that of the human heart, YohoX (I) account for the difference in carbon dioxide content between the blood in
vessel types l and 11 (3)
(1) explain the low oxygen content of the blood in vessel type L (3)
(i) Which chamber of the heart,
A or B, is responsible for CE - 2005 0
sending out blood to all parts 8. (al The photomicrograph
of the body except the lung? below shows three types
Explain your choice. (1) of blood vessels. P, Q and
R, in a tissue. The cells of
Ch:imbccll
the tissue are not shown.
(ii) {1) Name valve X. (I)
(2) In a type of heart disorder, valve X cannot close properly. A man suffering Key : ¢ direction of fluid
from this disorder may faint easily when he performs vigorous exercise. How movement between the
would you explain this? (4) blood and the tissue cells

(iii) Vessel Y is an artery found in the heart wall. Explain why the risk of heart attack

�->,. ,
would be higher if fatty substances are deposited on the inner wall of vessel Y. (2) \. '
. ---�l�__ :j
X _;7 Y
 Transport in hL1inans / P.J Transpon in humans / P.4

(i) (1) Judging from the direction of fluid movement shown above, which blood
vessel, P or R, would have a more muscular wall? (]) (i) How does the oxygen uptake change ,,,,jth exercise of different energy requirements?(])
(2) Explain the importance of the muscular tissue in the wall of the blood (ii) From the graph, find out the blood O>.)'gen content in the aorta and the vena cava for
vessel. (3] boxing, which has an energy requirement of 4500 kJ h·1• (])
(ii} Q forms a highly branched network. What is the signific:rnce of this? (2) (iii) The energy requirements for running and cycling leisurely are 3600 kJ 11-1 and
[iii) Explain how the fluid movement as indicated by the arrows is brought about at 1800 kJ h"1• Calculate the difference in the blood oxygen content between the aorta
(l) siteX (2) and the vena cava for each type of exercise. (2)
(2) site Y (2) (iv) How does the difference in blood oxygen content betv,een the two blood vessels
chun_g,e with the intensity of exercise? Explain the significance ofthis change. (3)
� (v) As exercise intensiry increases, there is a great change in the blood oxygen content in
l. The following paragraph describes the blood flow and a defective condition in the veins of the vena cava, but that in the aona remains constant and high. Explain how the
the legs. Complete the paragraph with suitable words. (5) constant and high blood oxygen content in the aorta can be achieved. (3)

Blood flow in veins is usually under ... . .(a)... pressure ln the legs. CE� 2008
blood in veins flows upwards against . ...(bl. lO return lo the heart. The
upward flow is assisted by the contraction of. .... lying 9. (b) The graph below shows the blood pressure of blood vessels at different locations of the
111 the veins help 10 ensure tliat blood puJmona.ry circulation.
next to the veins. The ... (d) ..
flows in one direction only. If they cannot .... (eJ... prope1·ly in

l I
performing its function. it may result in the accumulation of blood and hence :1 higher
blood pressure in tile veins of the legs. Consequently, vc:ins lornted ncc1r the surl;Ke of the

I
skin tend to bulg,c and become visible. forming varicose vems.

�
10. {b) The graph below shows the oxygen content or blood in the aorta and that in the vena Different loc:itions of the
pulmornvy circulation
cava, and the oxygen uptake of a person performing exercise of different intensities. A B C D E

The intensity of exercise is expressed as the energy requirement of the exercise .

(i) (l J Using the letters A to E in the _t,rraph, construct a flowchan to show the
20
" ,,., ·i;.:'._ ·-'1 ' '· :.:, .;.,\•., :,
> 50
direction of blood flow from the hean along the pulmonary circulation. (J)
18
,, ,- C '·- - "' ;, ..
.::::�_p: -
'
,, c, : .:
(2) State the criterion you should use in constructing the flowchart in(!). (1)

-
,-
;;--16 45
p D1gen ·u.pta� i J".
--
(ii) The blood vessels of two of the above locations show rhythmic changes in blood
14 - -· --� �·· !-: -·;
�•-.j.,1.
;.
E
g 12
:' i' (', -- : "ill :;_ff/
·§ pressure. Explain how these blood pressure changes are related to the heart
activiry. (2)
,,
40
,- c-
i:'.' !, .,, -- i·, ·r _,., . •.· :·c. J
sS
,.
18 2 - ,'
J 10
i; :_,,-- CE ig- (iii) State two blood components responsible for killing specific pathogens in the
-
sS �:, j,_.: -•·.. ·' ·.� :::-:.
JS human body. (2)
+· ·,-· -, a::: ..:·-, :;_:,; e

' "
'c:1 g (iv) Immunity can be acquired by vaccination. Vaccine may be injected into the tissue
�
0 4 r': '.:. ,, _,
30 under the skin. Describe how the vaccine can be transported to the heart after
: ,_ -- �:iJi9xy� conte
• .,.1: � ' 1n;t_in.\;en�_c,
,,,,_ I,.,_,ara,1,...,,f: injection. (3)
2 ., , t.---:< .; I
:. :
'" ', ' !·l1T7 i ;. e
,; 25
1000 !500 2000 :2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000 5500 6000 6500 7000 7500
Energy requirement of the exercise (kJ h-1)
 Transport in ht1mans / P.5 Transport in ht1mans I P.6

CE- 2009
2. The following graph shows the change in blood volume in the left ventricle ofa man over AL-20052B
time.
5. (b) Explain how fluid is interchanged between blood and tissue fluid. (4)

AL-20062C

7. In mammals, structures responsible for gas e.-.:change between the body and the atmosphere
are closely related to the circulatory system. In terrestrial flowering plants, the
corresponding structures for gas exchange are also closely related to the system for water
transport. Write separate accounts of this relationship in mammals and in terrestrial
flowering plants. Comment on the significance of this relationship in each type of
organisms. (15}
0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0
Time(s) HKDSE 2015 lB

(a) With reforence to the graph, calculate his heartbeat rate. (2 marks) 11 Altliough both arteries and veins are blood vessels, they are very different in their structure.
(b) State the conditions ofthe following heart valves at LO s {2 marks} Discuss how their structt1ral differences are related to the different ways of maintaining
bicuspid valve:�------� semi-lunar valve;--------� blood flow inside the blood vessels. { 11 marks}

(c) Explain the increase in blood volume in the left ventricle from 1. l s to 1.5 s J-IKDSE- 2017 1B
(3 marks)
I l. Some natural therapists claim that applying pressure along one's limbs toward the body
� tnmk can improve the circulation of lymph and result in reduced body weight. However.
3. (b) Aged red blood cells are destroyed in the liver. Wl1at is the fate of haemoglobin the clTccls ot' this treatment are controversial. Bridly describe how lymph is formed from
after the red blood cells are destroyed? (2 marks} the blood and returned to the blood circulatory system. For each of the claims above,
discuss whether it is scientifically valid. ( 11 marks)
CE- 2009
7. The photograph below shows an athlete leaping a hurdle.

(c ) After the race, athletes would apply some ointment which enhances local blood
circulation to relieve muscle fatigue. Explain how the enhanced blood circulation
could help the recovery of the muscle from fatigue. (1 mark)
 Transport in humans/ P.1 Transport in hum ans/ P.2

Past Papers Marking Scheme-Transport in humans CE- 2004 Q3 fc)

(i) To withstand the high blood pressure
CE -2002 Q.4 (bl To regulate the blood flow to the organ/ control the diameter of the vessel lumen 1
( i) The blood pressure in the vein is much lower than that in the artery
Reasons: (ii) 111e blood pr�ssure in vessel type II is lower
- the blood inthe artery is directly under the pumping action of the heart, while that The larger lumen would have a smaller resistance, thus facilitating the blood flowl
the vein is not � Lq I
- the blood in the vein has overcome great friction/ resistance aftertraveling over a (iv) (I) Vessel type II of organ A has a lower carbon dioxide contentthan vessel type
long distance 1 I
- there is a loss of fluid fromthe blood during the fonnation oftissue fluid As blood flows from vessel type I to the lung, then to vessel type II 1
any two J,l carbon dioxide diffuses out of the blood to the air sac in the lungs
(ii) To allow more time 1 (2) Blood in vessel type I of organ A comes .from the veins/ the right side of the
for the exchange of materials between the blood and the tissue cells 1 heart 1
which collect blood from the body tissues 1
(iii) The volume of blood flow through each section of the circulation per unit time is v.:here oxygen is consumed in respiration 1
the same 1
From the capillary to the vein, the total cross-sectional area decreases, so the CE - 2005 Q.8 (a)
velocity of blood flow increases 0) (I) P
OR (2) The muscular tissue can contract and rela--::
Contraction of skeletal muscle adjacent to the vein helps to force the blood to flow to change the diameter of vessel P
/ inspiration helps to draw blood toward the thora-: I so asto regulate the blood flow to the tissue cells
Atthe same time, valves are present in the veins to prevent the backflow of blood]
� �m ½ (ii) To provide a large surface area

���1 ! ! [ I I I
Shape oftl1e curve showing the drop in oxygen content at the capil!ary I½ for the exchange ofmaterials between the blood and the tissue cells
Correct axis labels: oxygen content, heart-heart/artery-vein/ aorta-vena cava
arteriole - venule 2 x Yi (iii) (I) Duetoahig,hbloodpressure inthe capillaryatX
some plasma is forced out throug,h the wall of the capillary
(2) Due to the retention of plasmaproteins/ low blood pressure at the venule end
1 of the capillary
the wmer potential of the tissue fluid around Y is higherthan that ofthe
1

l l i:1 ; !
blood/ water in the tissue fluid is drawn into the capillary by osmosis

CE- 2006 Q.l

:mery �;fuary vein (a) low
Change Ln oxvo-er1 cantentqfU\e blood ITT ii::; circulation ber,veeo the he:m and tile le; ( bJ grnvlty
(c) (skdet:il) muscle
CE - 2003 Q.4 {b) (d) VQlve.s
(i) Chamber B (e) close
The wall ofB is thicker/ more muscular than that of A
showing that it is the left ventricle / it can g,enerate a �realer force for pumping
blood l CE- 2006 Q.10 (b)

(ii) (l) bicuspid valve (i) Oxygen uptake increases with exercise of increasing energy requirement
{2) lfX does not close properly, oxygenated blood in the left ventricle will flow
back to the left atrium when the ventricle contracts 1 (ii) Oxygen content in aorta: 19 mL per l 00 mL blood
This reduces the amount of oxygent1Led blood pumped out of the heart in Oxygen content in vena cava: 5.6 mL per JOO mL blood ( I or 0)
each beat 1
During vigorous exercise, the oxygen consumption of the skeletal muscle is (iii) Dift'erence in o\'.ygen content for running= 19 - 6 = 13 mL per I 00 mL blood
ver)" high 1 Difference in oxygen content for cycling,= 19 - 10 = 9 mL per 100 mL blood
This increases the risk of insufficient oxygen supply to the brain
thus theperson would faint easily (iv) The difference in blood oxygen content between the aona and the vena cava
increa<;es with increased exercise intensity
{iii) The deposition of fany substances on the inner \vall of vessel Y would block the This shows that more oxygen is consumed by tissue
vessel 1 for respiration to release more energy for increased exercise intensity
This would reduce the oxygen supply to the heart muscle I
hence increase the risk ofhean attack (v) During vigorous exercise, there is an increase in ventilation rate/
rate and depth of breathing
 Transport in humans/ P.3 Transport in humans/ P.4

The oxygen content in air sac increases

The diffusion gradient across alveolar wall increases/ AL- 200.5 2B
this increases the diffusion of oxygen into the blood 5. (b) r,c--,�--c---0------------------
thus maintaining the blood oxygen content of the aona at a constant Concept for mark award:
and high level interchange of fluid occurs in the capillaries ( 1) max. 4
movement of fluid from blood to interstitial spaces (2)
CE - 2008 Q.9 (b) return of fluid from interstitial snaces to blood (3)

(i) (1) (Heart)_,. B-- D-- E------. C --A. e.g.• interchange of fluid between blood and tissue fluid occurs in the capillaries (1)
(2) Blood flows from a high pressure region to a low pressure region some components of the plasma ( 1) are forced from blood into interstitial
spaces by blood pressure (1) at the arterial end of the capillary } 2
(ii) When the ventricle of the heart contracts, blood is forced into
some of the tissue tluid is collected back into blood at the venule end of the
the artery 8- resulting in the increase ofblood pressure.
capillary network by osmosis ( 1 ), as the retention of plasma proteins in the
Blood in the artery flows forward along the blood vessels while } 3
blood results in a lower solute potential (1)
the ventricle of the heart rela\:es, as a result the blood pressure drops ..
some tissue lluid is collected by the lymphatic vessels ( l) and subsequently
returned to the blood circulation
(iii) Any 1wo ofthe following:
(max. -4)
Lymphocyte/ 8- or T- lymphocyte } White blood cell
Phagocyte I, I
Antibodies
Al -20062C
(iv) Vaccine injected reaches the tissue fluid .
which drains back to lymph capillary/ blood capillary.
7.
and returns to the heart via a vein
Rdationship

.
Significance

.
.
structure for gas exchange with the close contact shortens the

.
CE- 2009 Q.2
atmosphere: alveoli of lungs (1) distance of diffusion of gases (1)
(a) Calculation (60 s / 0.9 s) alveoli are in close contact (1) the rich blood supply helps to
Accurate result with unit (67 beats min-1) with numerous capillaries (1) transport oxygen away rapidly
(1 ). thus assisting to maintain a
(b) bicuspid valve: closed steep concentration gradient
semi-lunar valve: open between blood and alveoli (1); the

.
same applies to the removal of
(c) From 1.1 s to 1.5 s, the left ventricle is relaxing ;: carbon dioxide ( 1)
causing a drop in blood pressure inside the left ventricle to become haemoglobin with high affinity of
3 oxygen (1) allows efficient

.
lower than that of the left atrium
Blood flows from the left atrium to the left ventricle oxygen uptake (1) max. 9
all the above allows efficient
O>..')'gen uptake (1) and transport
CE - 2009 Q.3 (b) to body tissues (1), and efficient

.
removal of carbon dioxide from
(b) The haemoglobin will be broken down and converted into bile pigment
Iron and
protein/ amino acid will be released
} any 2
1,1
alveoli and circulatory system are
closely coupled in function/ rate
. tissues (1)
so that oxygen supply and carbon
dioxide removal are kept at a rate
of breathing and rate of blood that suits the physiological needs
flow is closely coupled (1) and of the body (1)
CE - 2009 Q.7 (c) controlled by medulla/ ANS (1)
I +max.3 max. 6
(c) Enhanced blood circulation helps to transport lactic acid away from muscle
cells more quickly
 1·rnn�:port in hum:ins / P.5 Transport in humans! P.6

Relationship Signi/1(.:UllCC: HKDSE�20J71B

. structure for gas exchange with . 11. Fon nation of tissue fluid and its return (max. 5)
(high) blood pressure / lwdrostatic pressure at the ;:irteriole end ofthe capii la!)·
F=ma.x.5

.
assist in water absorption ( l) in

.
atmosphere: stom;:ita in leaves (I)
opening of stomata leads to
� inevitable water loss ( l )
roots
conditions {i.e. light intensity) ( l J
affecting stomata! ori:ning ;:ilso
intl uence the r;:ite of water
bed forces some of the plasma /blood components out ( 1) to form tissue fluid
the remaining blood cells/ proteins are left in the blood and drain to the
venous end(])
due to the presence of plasma proteins, the blood inside the capillary at the
venous end has a lower water potential/ higher osmotic potential or pressure

�5 . results in transpiration pull (1) for

water transport in A)'lem ( l)
. transport(])
when the rate of \Vater transport is
lower than the rnte of\vater Joss
max. 8 than the tis.::ue fluid ( 1)
water moves into the capillary bed at the venous end bv osmosis (1)
(excess) tissue nuid will enter the lvmph vessels to form the lvmph (due to
� hydrostatic pressure) (J) In the tissue spaces
(] ), tbe plant becomes deficient in with tl1e assistance of the contraction of /skeletal) muscles to squeeze the
water, this induces the closure of lymph vessels (1)
stomata ( 1 ), and results in and the presence of valves in lymph vessels to prevent the back flow (of
slowing down gas exchange ( l J. lymph)(J)
thus limiting the rate of the lymph will (flow along the lymph vessels and) eventually return to the
heart / veins or vena cav;:i near the heart ( l)
photosynthesis and r<::sµiration(l)
whetherthe claims are scientifically valid(max. 3)
I +max.2 max. 5 Improvement of Circulation S=max.l
Can:
pressing along the lymph vessels/ due to the neighbouring muscles/ or the
HKDSE 2015 lB presence of valves especially in limbs does help the return oflymph (back to
heart)(])
Cannot:
11 Lymph vessels are usually found deep inside the body (1) (I)
.
Structural differences rS: ma-..:. 3)
wall of arteries is thicker than .Wavspumping
of maintaining blood flow (F" max. 5)
of heart (created a high blood pressure) to Reduction in Body weight N=max.2
that ofveins(l) drive the blood flow in arteries ( I J. the thick wall Cannot:

. .
wal! of arteries contains more
elastic tissue than that of veins
. (II
valves are present in veins but
not in arteries ( 1)
can withstand the high blood rm:ssure ( I l
elastic nature of the arterial wall allows recoil of the
wall (I) which maintains the blood flow along the
. arteries
blood flov., in veins is maintained by the contraction
OR
of adjacent skeletal muscle (I), which squeeze the
blood along, presencl.! of valves can prevent the
this may reduce the accumulation of tissue fluid I lympl1 at the limbs. (giving a max. 2
slimmt:r appearance temporarily) (1)
the lymph only returns to the circulatory system but is not eliminated(]), i.e.
no change in body weight
this does not affect the energy input/ energy output/ food consumption of the
body (!)
therefore. there should be no effect on body weight

. lumen of wins is larger than . back flow of blood (I)

blood pressure inside veins is relatively low ( 1 ).
Efl",x:tlve communic3tion (0-3) ma-..:.3
11 marks
that of arteries (I) h11ving a larger lumen r-::d11re., the r<::sistance to
blood flow/ to increase the mte amount of blood
flow (I)
(The exccptronal examples: pulmonl'I[)-' ;:incry and vein are not ,1ccep1d us correct alternative answ1;:rs)
C= niax. 3
11
 Nutrition and gas exchange in plants / P.2

Past papers - Nutrition and gas exchange in plants CE- 2004

CE- 2002 (c) The photomicrogrnph belov..- show the sections ofa leaf and a root.

2. (b) The photomicrographs below show part of the transverse section of the leaf blade ofa
terrestrial dicotyledonous plant and that of a moss:

:.-r.irdt
,�I! Il i;.r:inule:;

Leaf Root

(i) What is the significance of the following features?

(1) the presence of cuticle on the leaf epidermis (1)
(2) the absence of cuticle on the root epidermis (1)
T
.S. ,;Jrh< "'1/bla,J,, �JtM d/rr,ry/ed,;nou< plam
(magnlfi<allbn x/80)
(ii) With reference to one feature shown in the photomicrograph, explain how
gaseous exchange can occur at the leaf epidermis. (2)

(iii) Describe how the activity of cell type X leads to the storage of starch granules in
�l�Y �

(iv) The table below shows the concentration of certain minerals in the soil water and
(i) (1) Name structure A. (1) the cell sap of the root epidermal cells:

(2) Explain one way in which A contributes to the function of cell B under bright Concentration (mmol dm·')
sunlight. (2)
Potassium Sodium Chloride

(ii) The moss above is restricted to damp and shady environments and it is often Soil wate:r 0.1 1.1 1.3
covered with a thin film of water.
Cell sap of root 93.0 51.0 58,0

{l) With reference to the leaf structures shown in the two photomicrographs,
suggest two reasons why the moss cannot grow well in dry e11vironments. (�) According to these: data, what mechanism is probably used by the root to absorb
minerals from the: soil water ? Explain your answer based on tlie information
(2) Describe how the moss leaf obtains oxygen from the atmosphere at night (3) provided. (3)
 Nurrn,011 nnd gas �.xch,ingc in µl;rnts I P.3 Nutrition and gas exchang� in plnnis i P.4

CE - 2008

9. (b) Mary examined the epidcnnis or the leaf of a land plant untkr the microsco�e. Ths: I 0. (bJ In a study abotil the growth ofa crop plant in a greenl1ouse, the rate of carbon dioxide
photomicrographs below show the appeurnnce ol" the uppe1· and lower epidL.:rmis under upt:ike by photosynthesis and the rate of carbon dioxide released by respiration at
f
difthent magnification: dif erent temperatures 1vere determined. The results :ire shown in the graph bdow.

T
o,:5rnrn
!

l. Upper epidermis (low power) l. Lower- cpliknni, /low pOWl.'l")

p (i) With reference to the above graph, describe the effect of temperature on the rate
of carbon dioxide uptake. (2)
(ii) Account for the change in the biomass of the crop plant ifit is cultivated at 45 ° C
for several days. (3)
(iii) Find out the optimum temperature for the production of this crop. (1)
(iv) Explain how the plant may avoid overhearing on a hot sunny day when the soil is
well-watered. (3)

(i) Using the infonnation provided in photornicrogrn.ph 2, calculate the stomata!

density (i.e. number of stomata per unit area) of the lower <;:pidermis. (2)
(Take1t "' 3.14)

(ii) Compare tht: stomatal density of the uppt;r and lower ep1derm1s or the lt!af.
Explain the significance of this pattern of"stomatal distribution !o the pl::rnt \\'hen
it is under direct sunlight

(iii) Name structures P and Q. (2)

(iv) Under certain conditions, the stomata of the leaves may bci.:ome doseri during
daytime. Explain how this would affect the rnte of photos_vnthesis of th-: plant. (2J
 Nutrition and gas exchange in pbnts / P.5

AL-19971B Past Papcr:s iVforking Scheme - Nutrition and gas exchange in plants

CE - 2002 Q.2 (h)

10. (a) Figure I presents the results of an (i) (1) stoma
experiment about the effect of light
intensity on the net CO2 fixation rate (2) It allows carbon dioxide to enter tl1e leaf
for photosynthesis in cell B
oftwo tlowering plants A and B. This
experiment was conducted in a (ii) (!) The moss leaf has no cuticle/ no waterproof covering
greenhouse under controlled And it is one-cell thick
so.the__sl!rfac:e ,ar�a_ to. v�l _ume ratio is large
conditions.
This w·ould lead lo a hi°gh rate ofwater loss from the plant/ so the moss
would become dehydrated easily in dry environment
(i ) State two variables that must be
(2) Atmospheric oxygen dissolves into the water film on the moss leaf
kept constant to achieve the aim
and then diffuse in
of this experiment. (1)
(ii) What is meant by net CO2
'" OR
through the entire surface ofthe leaf

fixation ? (1) At night, moss cells carry respiration only thus lower the oxygen
concentration in the cells
(iii) Account for the net CO2 fixation rate of plants A and B at light intensities below Atmospheric oxygen dissolves into the water film on the moss leaf
4 0 arbitrary units. (3) and diffused into the leaf
{iv) Compare the net CO2 fixation rate of plants A and B at light intensities above 40
CE- 2004 Q.4 (c)
arbitrary units. (4) (1) Presence of cuticle helps to reduce water loss/transpiration of the leaf
(i)
(2) Absence of cuticle allows water movement/ gaseous exchange to occur
(b) Figure2 shows the cross sections of two different leaves. X and Y, taken from the same freely at the root epidermis
tree. They are of equal magnification and are at the same stage of maturity.
(ii) The leaf epidermis has stomata 1 +
which allow diffusion/ free movement of gases I

(iii) Cell type X carries out photosynthesis

to produce sugar
whicl1 will be transported through the phloem to the root
The sugar will then be convened to starch in cell type Y

(iv) Active transport

Because them ineral concentration in the cell sap is higher than that in the soil water
1
thus the minerals are absorbed against a concentration gradient
l<--<rx
(i) State the structural differences between the photosynthetic tissue(s) of these two CE- 2005 Q.9 (h)
leaves. (l½} (il Stomata\ density of lower epidermis = ----� mm·2
l4x(0.25) 1
= 25.48 mm·2
{ii) Th<! upper epidermis has a lower stomata! density than the lower epidermis
/ the upper epidennis has no stomata while the lower epidermis has stomata
AL- 2009 2B This helps to reduce water loss/the rate of transpiration of the leaf
4. (b) Unlike mammals, tlowering plants do not have a specialized system for oxygen because tl1e temperature at the upper epidermis is higher when the plant is under
direct sunlight
transport. Explain why flowering plants can still survive. {5) (iii) P: chloroplast Q : cell wall l, 1
(iv) The closure of the stomata limits the diffusion/ intake of CO:: into the leaf 1
Thus the rate of photosynthesis of the plant is reduced
 Nutrition and gas exchange in plants/ P.2 Nutrition and gas exchange in plants/ P.3

AL - 20092B
CE - 2008 Q.10 (b)
4. (bl transport ofoxygen by diffusion can suffice the needs of plant (])
(i) Below 35"C (-10 - 35"C), the rate of carbon dioxide uptake cells (1) because
increases with the increase in temperature. > the metabolic rate of plant cells is relatively low (1)
Above 35"C (35-47"C), the rate of carbon dioxide uptake decreases .. > in the presence oflight, photosynthetic tissues can provide
oxygen (1) which can be provided to tl1e nearby respiring
(ii) The biomass will decrease tissues by diffusion
because the rate of respiration is faster than the ra!e of photosynthesis > In flowering plants. oxygen can be readily obtained from
There is a net consumption of food/ organic matter .. the environment at different parrs of the plant body ( l ), (max. 4)
including the stomata oftl1e leaves (I)/ lenticels of the
(iii) 30-32 °C.. woody stem and surface of root hairs ( I J (max. 2)
> distance of diffusion of gases between the plant surface
{iv) When there is light, stomata of the plJnl open.
and the underlying layers of living cells is relatively short ( 1
When air temperature is high, transpiration is fast
> interconnecting intercellular air spaces provide passages for
A lot of water evaporates from mesophyll cell surface anci carries heat nway
/ offer little resistance to gas diffusion ( l)

AL-19971B

IO. (a) (i) temperature (1/i)

carbon dioxide concentration/ supply ( ½)
(ii) amount of carbon dioxide fixed in photosynthesis less carbon dioxide rd eased from
respiration/ photosynthesis carbon dioxide fixation Jess carbon dioxide released from
respiration l
(iii) For both plants A and B, light intensity increases, rate of nd carbon dioxide fixation
increase (½J as light is the limiting factor ( ½)

Plant A:
no/negative net carbon dioxide fixation occurs (½J because its rate of respiration
exceeds its rate of photosynthesis(½) which is very slow.

PlalltB:
at light intensity below 10 units, no net CO2 fixation occurs ( 1/�). because its rate
of respiration exceeds its rate ofphotosvnthesis (½)
between IO and 40 units, net CO2 fixation occurs(½), because photosynthetic
CO2 fixation exceeds respiratory CO2 production(½)

(iv) between 40-!00 arbitrary intensity units: A has a slower rate of net CO2 fixation
than B / B has a higher rate of net CO2 fixation than A I
at I 00 arbitrary inten sity units, the rate of net CO2 fixation for A and B is the
same(½)
between 100-500 arbitrary units, the rate of net CO2 fixation for A increases with
increasing light intensity(½) and is higher than that ofB (½). The rate of net CO2
fixation forBreaches a maximum(½)/ 5-6 mmole CO2 m·2 h'1, and stays
unchanged despite of further increases in light intensity ( ½)
between 500-600 arbitrary intensity units, the! rate of net CO2 fixation for A
reaches a ma-.;imttm ('/2)/ 23-24 CO2 m·2 h·1• and stays unchanged despite of
further increases in light intensity (½J

(b) (i) X =longer/ largi::r palisade cells ('/2) and 2 layers ofpalisad� cells, only 1 layer in Y
(½),denser/ more chloroplasts in both mcsophyll I photosynthetic tissues(½)
 Transpiration. transport and support in plants / P.2

Past papers - Transpiration, transport and support in plants The initial and final readings in the measuring cylinder and the balance are tabulated
below:
CE� 2001 Initial reading Fina! reading Change in reading
3. (c) The photomicrographs below show the transverse sections of stems taken from two Water level in the
plants: 45.0 43.5 X
measuring cylinder (cm 3 )
Reading of the
117.5 116.3 y
balance (g)

(i) (l)Findvaluesxand y. (I)

T.S. Sum ofplant A
(2) With reference to the water balance of the plant, what do x and y represent
respectively? (2 )
(3) Compare values x and y. Explain the significance of their difference to the
healthy growth of the plant. (3)
(Given: 1 cm3 of water weighs 1 g)
(ii) Predict, with reasons, the change in value x if the study is repeated with the leaves
T.S. Stem ofplnnl B of the plant s meared with Vaseline on both surfaces. (4)

(i) (1) NametissueX. (1) CE - 2003

(2) Explain one way in which the cells in tissue X are structurally adapted to the 3. (c) The photomicrograph below shows part of the transverse section ofa herbaceous stem:
function of transport. (2)

{ii) Which region{s) (P. Q, R, or S) in the stem of plant G contains tissue X? (l)
(iii ) (1) On a hot sunny afternoon. plant G becomes wilted and its stem bends. Explain
why this occurs. (4)
(2) In contrast to plant B. the stem of plant A remains upright under the same
conditions. Account for this. (2)

CE- 2002
3. (a) The diagram below shows a set-up used to study the water balance of a small plant
The whole set-up was put in a well-ventilated and well-illuminated room for 8 hours:

(i) Based on the photomicrograph, state two features that can be observed in cell type
C but not in cell type B. (2)
(ii) Some insects use their tube-like mouthparts to obtain a continuous supply of
carbohydrate from one of the cell types shown above. Using the letters in the
"'�,------ oil layer
photomicrograph, state which cell type it is. What is the main carbohydrate that
can be obtained? (2 )
. _____ measuring cylinder (iii) When this stem is heavily infected by a fungus, cell type C is often blocked by the

--(j��:1'.Jo
1 concaining water fungal hyphae.
electronic ___ CiiTIJ O 0
balance (1) On a hot day, the infected stem droops and bends whereas an uninfected stem
remains upright. Account for the appearance of the infected stem. (4)
(2) State the ecological relationship between the fungus and the infected plant. (1)
 Tra11spira1ion, tnmsport and suppon in planls / P. 3 Transpiration, ln.mspon and support in plants I P.4

CE- 2006 CE -2008

9. (b) In 1890, a German scientist named Edward Strasburger conducted an experiment to 5. The photomicrograph below shows a vertical section of a plant stem. Both cell types A and
study the transport of water in plants. He cut the stem of a woody plant and immersed Bare located in the tissues for transport.
the cut end in a poisonous solution. Upon contact, the poisonous solution killed all
living cells in its way.

(i) Strasburger found that the plant continued to take up 30 litres of solution and
transport the solution up to a height of 20 metres in two weeks. Based on his
findings, what conclusion can you draw regarding the cells involved in water
transport? (I)
(ii) Based on present day knowledge of the mechanism of woter transport in plants,
explain why the treated plant can continue to transport the solution up the stem.(3) (a) With reference to the photomicrograph. state two structural differences between cell
(iii) Describe how you would carry out an investigation with o small dicotyledonoous types 1\ anU B. (2)
plant that allows you to identify the cell type for water transport. (3) (b} Describe how the structure of cell type A facilitates its role in transpon. (2)
(iv) Explain why the cut stem of the woody plant can renrnin upright even atli:!r the (c) Transpo11 of substances downward tl1rough the phloem is very important to roots.
cells had been killed by the poisonous solution (2) Explain why (3)

CE - 2007 CE - 2009
3. The photomicrograph below shows a cross sl:!ction ofn dicotyledonous kal: 9. (bl Fig; ur1: J and !I show two plants, X and Y. from different plant groups. Figure Ill
shows the cross-section of the stem of plant Y.

f"igur,' nr -
�ro»s>e�ll<m ofttie ,;t�n, of plaal Y

,���1;:!"3�\;\ ;,,:.,ii'•

(i) Structure Sin Figure III is found in plant Y but not in plant X
(a) With reference to the photomicrograph, give two structural differences between cell (1) Whatis structureS? (1 mark)
types X and Y. (2 marks) (2) With reference to Figure I, Figure II and your answer in (1), identif)'
(b) (i) In the presence of!ight, carbohydrates are fanned and then stored in cell type Y. the groups to which plants X and Y belong. (2 marks)
(1) State the carbohydrate stored. (I marks) (3) Based on your knowledge of structure S, suggest why plant Y can
(2 ) If you have prepared a thin section of a leaf. how would you show the grow ta!lerthan plant X (2 marks)
presence of the stored carbohydrate in it? (3 marks)
(ii) Explain why the stored carbohydrate in cell type Y disappears when the plant (ii) State one characteristic of the habitat of plant X. Explain your answer.
presence ofthe stored carbohydrate in it? (3 marks) (2 marks)
(c) During transpiration, water evaporates from the surface of cell type Y. How does this
help cell type Y to obtain minerals? (3 marks)
 Transpiration, transport and support in plants / P.5 TranspiraJ.ion, transport and support in plants I P.6

AL-1998 lA DSE-2012 18

2. The following photomicrograph shows the transverse section of a leaf of plant X. Suggest a 3. The electron micrograph below shows part of the stem of a plant containing two cell types, P
natural habitat for plant X With reference to three features, describe how these features and Q:
show adaptations to the habitat of plant X. (5)

(a} Based on the photograph shown, state the difl�rence between cell types P and Q in the
structure indicated by the nrrow heads. ( 1 mark)

AL- 2009 2B (b) Describe how these cells contribute to the support of the plant. (4 marks)

6. (c) A woody flowering plant has not been watered for a few days .during which time the
whether was dry and sunny. Account for the appearance of different parts of the leafy HKDSE-201318
shoot ofthis plant. (5)
6. The following set-up can be used to determine the transpiration rate ofa leafy shoot:

leafy shoot

srand and clamp Nbbcr tube

capillary tube

air bubble
beaker
Wat(:!"

(a) In setting up this experiment, the lower end of the shoot should be cut under water.
Why? (1 mark)
(b) Give one assumption for using this set-up to measure the transpiration rate. ( 1 mark)
(c) Explain how the transpiration rate will change if the fan placed near the shoot is
switched on. (4 marks)
 Transpir.ition, tr;;nspon and support ,n plnnts / P.8

(d) The photomicrograph below shows thtc: appearance uf th<: surface of a leaf during HKDSE-2015 IB
daytim e:
9. The photographs below show the appearance ofthe leaves ofa well-watered potted plant at
9 am and 1 pm on a sunny day in summer.
Ph1Jto1,,ra:ph X (31 am) PfmloJl!aph Y (1pm)

(i) 1n tenns of sub-cellular structure, state two differences between cell A and eel! B. (a) Briefly describe how the appearance of the leaves shown in photograph Xis
(2 marks) maintained. (2 marks)
(ii) What will happen to the size ofC at night? Discuss the functional significance of (b) Suggest an explanation for the appearance of the leaves at 1 pm (Photograph Y).
this change. (3 marks) (3 marks)
(c) With reference to the appearance ofthe leaves in the two photographs, which one is
HKOSE-2014 lB more effective for photosynthesis? Explain your answer. (4 marks)

4. Cross sections of the stems from two different dicotyledonous plants, A and B, are shown in
Photomicrograph A and Photomicrograph B

P/Jotomkmgrapf, 8-Sr�m ofplar,t 11

(a) With reference to Photomicrograph A, draw a labelled low-power diagram of sector

POR in the space below. (5 marks)
(b) With reference to the photomicrographs, deduce the major means of support in plants
A and B. (4 marks)
 Transpiration, transport and support in plants/ P.9 Transpiration. lran5port and support in plants/ P.10

(a) (i) Comparing the cell shapes of both leaves. which labelled tissue(P, Q or R) in
HKOSE-2018 lB photomicrograpl1 Xis absent from Photomicrograph Y? (1 mark)
(ii) Witl1 reference to Photomicrograph X what is the observable adaptive feature of
3. the tissue identiried in (i}? What is the significance ofthis adaptive feature? (2 marks)
(b) Tl1e lc:af in photomicrograph Y was taken from a plant species with leaves oriented
Plsor1>microgrilpfi X
vertically, as shown in the following photograph:

Explain how the distribution of the pl1otosynthetic tissue in these leaves is related to the
vertical orientation of the leaves. (3 marks)

-�---------vascular
bundle:

Photomicrc;mph Y

�---'-----'-----'-----'-------''-"------va.>cular
bur.dlts
 Tr::inspir;i(;on. tmnspurr :,11:J suppon. rn plan1s .' P.11 Transpiratwn, transpon and support in plants I P. 12

HKDSE-2019 18
10. The graph below shows the change in the rate oftranspirntion and the change in stem l-IKDSE 2020 !B
diameter ofa plant over 24 hours:
5, The diagram belo11- shows an experimental set-up used to compare the transpiration rntes of
lr.llllpiration
the upper and lowoe:r epidermis of the leaf of a potted plant. The set-up consists of two identical
bell jars placed one above the other with !he leaf ofa potted plant in between. Chemical X was
placed intu the jars to absorb water vapour. The whole set-up was made air-tight. The masses
of the chemical X in the jars were measured at the beginning and after five hours.

oil

00:00 !2;00 24:00

•"'-k---*---- ditmi�
HUllr.; ina day
X
(a) Describe the relationship between the rate of transpiration and stem diameter. (1 mark) initial mm: 2.-:IO i;.
(b) It is known that the change in stem diameter is related to the diameter of the final rms;;: 2.49 g
xylem vessels. With reference to the way in which water is transported along
Ix-II jar N
the stem. explain the relationship between the rate of transpiration and stem .chernic;:il X
inirllll 1n.:1.iS'. ::!-43 �
diameter described in { a). (2 marks) foul m�s�: 2-56 i;
(c) Describe ad explain two adaptive features of xylem vessels as a strncture for
water transport. (4 marks)

(a) {i) Which ofthe following parameters is used to measure the transpiration rate of the plant
in this investigation? Put a·✓' in the appropriate box to indicate your choice. (l mark)
D amount of water lost by the leaf
D amount of water absorbed by the leaf

(ii) How can the above set-up measure the parameter chosen in (a) (i)? (2 marks)

(b) List two \·ariables which have been controlled by this set-up during the investigation.
(2 marks)

(c) (iJ Compare the changes in !he mass of chemical X in bell jars Mand N. What conclusion
can you draw? (2 marks)

(ii) Suggest one possible explanation for the conclusion. (1 mark)

(iii) Propose one workable method to test your hypothesis in (c) (ii). (2 marks)
 Transpira1ion. transport and support in plants/ P.2

Past Papers Marking Scheme - Transpiration, transport and supp ort in plants CE 2006 Q.9 (b)
ff

CE· 2001 Q.3 (c) (i) Living cells are not reciuired in the transport in the transport of water up the stem l
(i) (1) xylem (ii) Water is transpor1ed up the stem mainly by transpiration pull 1
(2) which is resulted from a ph ysical process and thus can occur outside living cells 1
Structural feature Adantation The: trnnsport ot'water occurs in cJead xylem tissues
The xylem vessels in X This allows a free flow of water which remains functional even in the treated plants
have no cell content/ inside (iii) lmmerse the cut end oflhe small plant in a dye solution
no end walls/ large lumen any one set A!1er a Jew hours. cut a thin section of the upper part of the stem
The xylem vessels in X This can prevent the collapse of l+l Identify the cell type stained by the dye under the microscope
have thick cell wall the xvlem vessels {iv) Tl1e woody stem is mainly supported by mechanical strength/ rigidity / hardness l
ofthe thick walls cells i xylem vessel 1
(ii) Re gion R
(iii) (1) The support ofthe stem of plant Bis mainly due to the turgidity of CE - 2007 Q.3
cells in re gion S / thin•wall cells
Under a hot and sunny condition, (a) Cell type X has no cellular content while cell type Y has
the rate of transp iration of the plant becomes greater than the rater of Cell type X has a thicker cell wall than cell type Y
water absorption
The cells in region S lose water (b) (i) ( 1) Starch
and hence lose their turgidity I become flaccid (2) Add a drop of iodine solution to the leaf section
and thus causing the bending of the stem Observe the leaf section under the microscope
(2) The support ofthe stem A is due to the presence of xylem/ independent The section turns blue black
ofthe water content ofthe plant 1 ( ii) In darkness . photosynthesis stops
because the xylem contains thick-wall cel) s I The stored carbohydrate is converted to su gars
which are transported away to other parts of the plant/ are used in
CE - 2002 Q.3 (a) respiration
(i) (l) x = L5 y = 1.2 Yi, Vi
x represents the amount of water absorbed by the plant 1 (c) When water evaporates from cell type Y. a transpiration pull is set up
(2)
y represents the amount of water transpired I lost by the plant 1 Water is drawn from xylem to cell type Y
(3) Value x is larger than value y together with dissolved minerals
This indicates that there is a net gain of water by the plant
The water gained is essential for various life processes
e.g. fonnation of new cells, photosynthesis CE. 2008 Q.5

(ii) Value x would decrease (al Cell type A lias a thicker cell wall
because Vaseline blocks the stomata and the leaf surfaces There is no end wall for cell type A while there are
so the rate of transpiration would drop end walls for cell type B an y two.
As transpiration enhances the absorption of water Cell type A is hollow/ has no cell content while
less water would be absorbed by the plant cell type A has cell content
l
(bl It forms a hollow tube/ has no cytoplasm/ no end wall .... l+
CE· 2003 Q.3 (c) which offers less resistance to the transport of water. l

(i) Presence of thick/ lignified cell wall OR Any one set

no cell content! empty lumen lt has rings of tliickening/ thicker cell wall ... l+
(ii) 8 to keep the tube open for transport/ prevent collapsing.
sucrose
(iii) (1) As the fungal hyphae block the xylem vessels ofilie infected stem, wMer (cl Roots cannot carry out pho tosynthesis/ cannot make food by themselves.
cannot be transported to tlie stem l Therefore, 1hey rel y on the transport of su gars/ food/ organic substances
On a hot day, the rate of transpiration is high I from 1he leaves ..
The water loss ofthe stem/ plant becomes greater than the water gain 1 for respiration / growlh / metabolism..
Thus cell type D becomes flaccid/ loses tur gidity 1
and can no longer give support to the stern 1
(2) Parasitism
 Transpiration, transport �.nd support in plants/ P.3 Transpiration, transport and support in plants/ P.4

CE· 2009 Q.9 {b) DSE-2012 1B

(b J (i) ( 1) Vascular bundle J. (a} the cdl wall of cell type Q is much thicker than that of cell type P (I) (] )
(2) X: mosses (✓ accept otl1er answers such as spiral thickening or thickened with ring
Y: flowering, plant structures)
(X cell type Q bt!ing hollow not accepted)
(3) The vascular bundle contains xylem tissuc. thick walled cdls
which provide st1ppor1 to the plant (b) when there is ample supply of water (l)
any one set (]J
so that plant Y can grow taller cell type P provides turgidity 10 the plant(]) (])
I. ( cell type Q has thickened cell wall ( 1) (])
The vascular bundle contain:- xylem tissue which provides rigidity to the plant ( 1) (])
which helps transport water up ton highr:r pusilion
so that plant Y can grow tuller
(ii) Damp/moist/wet areas IIKDSE � 2013 Ill
Plant X lacks cuticle to prevent water loss,· lacks vascular tissu0 for
transport of water c.1void blockage ofxykm by rl1e air bubble (1) formed during cutting (])
the n-ite of lr�mspiration is the same as the rate or water absorption / the (IJ
water absorbed is used for transpiration only (1)
AL-19981A
2. Habitat: desert (1/;;J (CJ the transpiration rate will increase ( I J (4)
(Any three features, 1 ½ marks each, 4½ marks ma-.:. for the features) becat1.'ie the nir current sweeps away the water vapour around the leafy
shoot ( 1)
thick cuticle(½); impermeable to water thus reduces water loss (I) 1 reduces water tht: concentration gradient of water vapour between the atmosphere and
loss by evaporation the air space in the leaf becomes steeper ( 1)
11/:: water vapour diffuses out to the atmosphere at a faster rate (l)
sunken stomata (1/;;): space outside sunken stomata/ hairs trap water vapour/ (d) (i) cell B contains chloroplasts but cell A does not ( 1)
and/ or moisture(½), lower diffusion gradient between mesophy!l cells 3 the cell wall of cdl B has uneven thickness while that of cell A is (2)
hairs in epidennal and the exterior (1 ), reduce transpirational water loss(½) even(!)
invagination {½)
(ii) the size ofC will be reduced ( l)
to reduce transpiration/ water loss (1)
multiple epidennis (½): increases diffusion distance/ barrier to reduce water loss when the need for gas exchange decreases in the absence of (3)
through the epidermis (1) photosynthesis (l)

AL- 2009 2B
6. (c)
Leaves
Appearance drooped (l) I wilt
Reason excessive
transpiration results in
water loss from cells
(I) I amount of water
loss exceeds amount
ofwater absorbed
the mesophyll cells
and other thin-wallet.I
cells ofthe petiole
wi!l lose turgor(l)/
turgidity which is tl1e
major means of
support for the leaf
blade and the petiolt!
(1) respectively
(max. 21
HKDSE - 2014 1B
4. (a) Title I mark
Stem Drawing l mark (resemblance)
remained upright(1) / (2) Labels l mark @.. any three (5)
erect *epidermis,"' vascular bundle, *xylem,"' phloem, * cortex,* pith
stem is mainly
supported by (bJ the stem of plant A has a large proportion of thin-walled cells (1),
mechanical tissues/ therefore it is likely that plant A is mainly supported by turgidity of the
xylem which is thin-walled cells (1)
wJ1ile the stem of plant B has a large proportion of xylem / thick-walled (4)
composed of cells cells / woody tissues ( l )
with thick rigid cell therefore it is mainly supponed by mechanical or physical strength /
wall (l) rigidity of the thick-walled cells/ xylem/ woody tissues { 1)
(max. J) 9 marks

Hh'.DSE-20I318
 Transpiration. transport and support in plants/ P.5

9. {a ) it is maintained by the ridgidity of the veins/ vascular bundles/ xylem running Past papers - Cell division and reproduction
through the leaves(]) CE- 2002
and the turgidity of the mesophyll cells/ thin-walled cells (1) 2

(b) a large amount ofwater is lost from the leaves by transpiration (1) / 1. (a) Some plants can be propagated vegetatively using tissue culture. In this method, the
transpiration rate is very high culture medium is sterilized before use and it provides essential materials for plant
water absorption rate cannot keep up with the rate of water loss {1)
mesophyll cells become flaccid (1) growth. The diagram below shows an outline of an investigation involving tissue
and thus can no longer support the leaves to maintain their upright position I culture. The whole process is conducted in the presence of light.
so the leaves become drooped 3

(c) appearance shown in photograph X (1)

(if this part is v.rong, no mark for the whole part (c))
the leaves are flat/ fully extended ( l)
(accept 'open', not accept ·broad')
And thus the exposed surface can be oriented towards the light source (1)
Therefore maximizing light absorption for photosynthesis (1) 4 a small amount oftissue was
taken from the parent plant
HKDSE 2018 IB
couon wool
3. (a) (i) P(l) (I)
(ii) closely packed/ located at the upper side facing the sun directly (1) (1+1) sti:rilized fl"5K
!iv:i11g plant tissue -·.. • • .
this maximizes light absorption for photosynthesis (l)
"'""'�'� culture medium • ·" . .i •.
•
(b) when the leaves are oriented vertically, both sides ofthe leaves have
chance of receiving sunlight (1)
therefore, the photosynthesis tissues are evenly distributed on both
sides ofthe leaf(])
da,gh<� ,,�--=
developed from the b.Ssue
such that photosynthesis can be carried out effectively regardless ofthe (3) •
change in the orientation of sun/ the direction of illumination from sun
during daytime (1) a daughter plant another daughter plant
6 marks w:i.s transplanted to was tramplruued to
some unstcrillv:d soil some stcriliz� soil
HKDSE-20191B
after sever.ii weelcs
10. (a) the diameter of the stem decreases as the rate of transpiration increases, (\)
or vice versa (1)
(bl water is transponed up tl1e stem by transpiration pull (1} .1 w.iter
transport results in negative pressure/ tension/ suction force/ pull-up
force ( 1) in xylem vessels.
this pulls the xylem vessel's walls inwards (1), thus reducing the (2)
diameter of the xylem, hence the stem
(C) hollow tube*(1) to allow the passage of water with low resistance {0+1)
thickened/ lignified wail"' /au:epl lign[fied ,·elf; not lK'cept thickened (4) (i) Sugar is one of the: essential components of the culture me:dium. Explain wl1y
,·ell_/ (1) to withstand tl1e negative pressure of the transpiration pull/
prevent the collapse of xylem vessels /no/ accept maintain /he shape 4 sugar musl be adde:d. (3)
xylem vessel/(0+1) (ii) Compare the genetic make-up of the daughter plants with that of the parent plant.
Give a reason for your answer. (2)
*· no end wall i no protopla.sl-,. incomplete answ,:;r, 0 mark
rigid I strong wall->- insufficient answer, 0 mark (iii) After several weeks, plant B showed signs of yellowing while plant A remained
Remark: wrongfwtures, no mark�. With incomplete or im·u.(ficienlfea111re, green. Based on the information provided, suggest an explanation for the
proceed ro mark the corresponding e.xplanalion. yellowing of plant B. (3)
7 marks
(iv) Give two advantages of this method of plant propagation over the propagation
using seeds. (2)
 Cell division :ind n:production I P.1 Cell division and reproduction / P.3

CE - 2002 CE- 2003

2. (a) The following photograph shows a female condom while the diagram on the right 2. (b) The cartoon below shows a foetus crying for help inside the mother's body:
shows the human female reproductive system:

(i) Smoking during pregnancy is hazardous to the foetus. The foetus may be affected
in a number of ways, such as a reduced supply of oxygen and the entry of toxic
Fe.r1111U reproducrive system
Fefff.llle: CQJldom chemicals.

{ l} Suggest an explanation for the reduced oxygen supply to the foetus. (2)
(i) The female condom is placed in A during sexual intercour.c;c f-Jow does tht female (2) Using a Jlowchart, show the route by which nicotine in cigarette smoke is
condom contribute to contraception? (2) transpon�d from the mother's lung to the foetus. Indicate only the maJor
orgnns and blood vessels involved (3)
(ii) Give an example of an infectious disease that c,tn he [1rl!vemed b_v wearing the
condom. (I) (iiJ (IJ An early sign of the birth process is the breaking of the amnion. What is the
significance oftliis event in the birth process? (2)
(iii) Another co ntraceptive method is to tie and cut b01h the oviducts. State whether or (2) Describe what happens afterwards that leads to the binh of the baby. (3)
not menstruation will still occur in a young woman who has received tl1is
operation. Explain your answer with reference to the physiological processes CE- 2004
involved. (4) 2. (a) The table below shows the average number of pregnancies for women adopting
different contraceptive methods:
(iv) The following is a simplified diagram ofa eel! which is undergoing cell division
to form an ovum. Contraceptive method Pregnancies per 1 00 women in 12 months
Condom 15
Diaphragm 13
lntr:;i-uterine device (IUD) 2
Rhythm method 25

(Only two pairs of homologous chromosomes arc sho\vn in the diagram.)

(i) The use of condoms and diaphragms are based on the same principle in bringing
about conrraception. What Is this principle? (I)
Based on the above diagram, make a drawing of the ovum formed showing the
(ii) How can an IUD prevent pregnancy to occur? ())
chromosomes contained inside. (3) (iii) (I J Explain the biological basis of the rhythm method. (3)
(2) Why does this contraceptive method have a high rate of failure? (])
(iv) Even though some couples do not use any contraceptive methods and have regular
intercourse. the wives fail to become pregnant. Suggest two reasons for this. (2)
(v) A man received an operation for contraception and had his sperm ducts tied and
cut. Explain why his secondary sexual characteristics will not be affected after
this operation. (3)
 Cell division und reproduction / P.4 Cell division and reproduction I P.5

CE- 2005 (b) Refem·ng to the graphs, state the period in which there will be a high chance of
pregnancy if sexual intercourse occurs.Explain your answer. (4)
10. (a) The diagram below shows how the fluid
surrounding the foetus {fluid X) can be (c) The 'safe period' method ls not very reliable for contraception because it can only
collected using a syringe. The fluid predict part of the fertile period. Explain why it cannot predict the whole fertile period.(2)
collected contains some foetal cells. uterus
These cells are cultured for several weeks CE - 2006
and then examined under the microscope 8. (b) Diagram 1 below shows the result of meiotic cell division in gamete fom1ation in
to detem1lne whether the foetus has humans: (Note: Only one pair of homologous chromosomes is shown.)

.�
cenain genetic disorders. / A pair ofhomologolll
� '-., ,hmmosomos
Diagram 1

(i) (1) Name the membrane that surround fluid X. (I)

/,
(2) Give two reasons why tluid X is important to the foetus during its
development. (2)

Ooo,e<os

CD CD Q) Q)
(ii) Suggest why it is necessary to culture the foetal cells for several weeks before
they are examined under the microscope. (I)
(iii) If microscopic examination shows that the foetus has Down Syndrome. the
parents will have to decide whether to continue with the pregnancy or to end the (i) Based on Diagram 1. give two features that are characteristic of meiotic cell
pregnancy by abortion. Which choice do you support? Justify your answer. (2) division. (2)
{iv) Explain how we can find out the sex or the foetus through microscopic (ii) Sometimes, an abnormality occurs during meiotic cell division in gamete
examination ofthe cultured cells. (2) fonnation in humans. Diagram 2 below shows tl1e abnormality concerning a pair
of homologous chromosomes.

(!.SJ'-.,
. �
,/ A paicofhomoloso.s
CE- 2006
( 1) Distinguish between type A ,h;omo,om"

7. Lily is a healthy young woman. ,md type B gametes. ( 1)

"
Graph 1

Parent cell

'" I:... ;·:_:: :·:' - ;·.

\ :- ::: ·.: : '._: �-:
,;
She adopts the 'safe period' (2) Name a genetic disorder that
.. /,
-- ;;_
'.. '
·• ": '.
method for contraception. E will develop ifa type A

®®00
).1
order to do so, she measures her
body temperature every l 37 l;"!:i .
:·� ..::: ..
"l:· ,.
'

. : ::: L L'
·,,1

F•·,
egg is fertilized successfully
by a normal sperm. ( 1)
morning when she wakes ,p.
i

o7
,-
,

j�
,:c( ,"'i .."'
,, (3) This type ofabnom1ality in
'
Graph I below shows the body
•' ·• '' Sperm with
Dl"tramJ

Type B q;g
temperature recorded in March !' ' ..� -• cell division may occur in the
" "
·,

0
and Graph 2 shows the change " 13 19 " " " sex chromosomes.The type
°"}"jnM,r,:;h
in the thickness of her uterine Beggs may fertilize with

y y
lining in the same month: nom1al spem1s to fom1
Graph)
zygotes with different
(a) Identify the period that genotypes as shown in
;f
•
corresponds to Diagram 3 below:
menstruation. Gi-ve one
-�

,,
(Note: Only the sex
chromosome is shown.)
Q) G)
Zygoiewhh
piece of evidence from the
Zyg,,tcw;c±,
information provided to ., ;I ,, XO gc-no,ype YO gc-notypc
support your answer. (2) Suggest why zygotes with

13 • 16 25 • 2.8 " XO genotype may develop into an individual but not those with YO genotype. (3)
Day in Morch
 Cell division :ind rcpmduction / P.G Cdl division and repr□duct1on / P.7

CE - 2007 (iii) The following; photographs show the reproductive structures of wheat.

8. (a) The pl1otographs below show the structure

ofa lily flower:

(i) Label the following structures: (2 )

R,_______
s,.�-------
{ii) State the method of pollination for this
flower. Support your answer with two
observation features from Photograph
l. (3)
( 1) What is the pollinating agent for wheat? Support your answer with two
(iii) After pollination, describe how the observable features from photograph 2. (3)
male gamete meets the female gamete. (2) A scientist performed a genetic experiment by crossing two different wheat
(4) plants. Describe the procedures done in order to ensLJre cross-pollination,
bLJ! not self pollination to occur. (3)
(iv) The lily plant can also reproduce
asexually. What is th is type of asexual
reproduction·/ (I) A coupk can produce gametes bLJtare still not able to produce children. A doctor
advised them to undertake an 111 v!lm fertilization treatment The chart below
outlines the stages involved in their in vilm fertilization treatment

� Mon
1-/orrw;n,a ir,jecti0n �

9. {a) A study of the wheat genome reveled 111:1.t modern wheat is originnted from the crosses Mature .?.ggs were removed from the ovaries Ss:mcn was collect1:d
among wild wheat and wild grasses. Below is one ofthe cross�s
Sperms and eggs were mixed in a suirubk cuhurc medium

Wild wheat A
X
Wildgra,1B Ftnilized eggs were cultured for several days
2nm 14 2n" 14

1
Hybrid C (i)
Si;,. embryos were put into the 1.11:rus

Suggest one possible cause of infertility for this couple. {2 marks)

7 cbromo,omes from A "11d
7 �hromo,omes from B The man and the woman.
i (ii) Explain why the woman had to undertake hormone injection at the
! chromo,omn doubled occidentally beginning bLJt not the man. (3 marks)
i (iii) Ofthe six embryos put into the uterus, eventually only two embryos have
Modern who:i.! successfully developed.
{i) Hybrid C cannot produce gametes but it can produce offspring asexually. State the (1) Why were some embryos not able to develop in the uterus? ( I mark)
f
type of asexual reproduction employed by hybrid C. ( I) (2) Is it possible that the two embryos are of diferent sexes? Explain your
(ii) With reference to the process of meiotic cell division, suggest why hybrid C answer. (2 marks)
cannot produce gametes. (2)
 Cell division and reproduction / P.8 Cell division and reproduction / P.9

AL- 2002 2B DSE-2014 lB

4. (b) Describe how the mammalian foetus obtai ns amino acids from proteins in the maternal
diet. (5) 3. Before the early 20 1h century, scientists generally held the belief:
"Cdl division rcsulled in the loss ofgenelic material so Iha! each cell in a
multicellular organism would cunlain only the genelic material spec{frc lo its
AL- 2004 lA parlii.:ular cell type."
8. (a) The diagram below show s a mammalian sperm with its mitochondria localized in the
region shown: In 1902, Hans Spemann performed one of the earliest experiments on animal cloning. He

----·�
used a fine l1air to separate the cells of a two-celled amphibian embryo. and found that each
cell was able to develop into a complete organism.
mitochOndriJ
(a) Wl1y did Spemann·s experiment disprove the early belief about cell division? ( 1 mark)
(i) Relate the location ofthe mitochondria to their function. (2) (bl Elaborate on hO\v the: above example can be used to demonstrate the two aspects of the
nature ot' scie:nce listed in the table below. (2 marks)
(b) It is known that the nuclei from two sperms of the same individual can be made to
combine inside an anucleate ovum (ovum without nucleus) to form a diploid cell Nature of Science Elaboration
which can f urther develop Into an embryo. Explain the sex(es) of the emb ryo that can 5cientitic knowledge is
be produced by this method.(2) tentative and subject to
change.

AL- 20062B
4. (a) During sexual reproduction in hu mans, sperms are transferred from the penis to the Interpretation of
vagina, whereas in terrestrial tlowering plants, pollen grains are transferred from the observations is guided
anther of the flower to the stigma Contrast the processes involved in the transfer of by our prior
sperms and pollen grains mentioned above, and the subsequent fusion of the male and understanding of other
female gametes. (10) theories and concepts.

(c) Using the current understanding about cell division, explain how genetic maten"al is
preserved in mitosis. (3 marks)

DSE-2012 1B
8. A pn·mrose plant is a flowering plant that has two different types of flowers. Photograph l
11. Mitosis and meiosis are important processes that en sure the continuity of life. Contrast the and Photograph II show the appearances of the two types of flowers (P and Q) and
two processes and state the significance of their differences. (11 marks) Photograph Ill and Photograph JV show the sections of the flowers respectively. Each
primrose plant produces either type P flowers or type Q flowers.
 Cell division and reproductmn ; P.11

HKDSE 2015 lB

2 The photomicrograph below shows the appearance of genetic materials at two different
stages ofthe cell cycle;

(a) Label structure X shown in the photomicrograph. (1 mark)

(b) With reference to the appearance of the genetic materials shown in the
photomicrograph, at which stage, A or B, is transcription more likely to take place?
Explain your answer. (2 marks)
(c) In the space provided below, state the cause for the different outcomes of mitosis and
meiosis -
(' marks)
Outcome
Mitosis Meiosis Cause

Number of
daughter cells 2 4

I
DNA co!ltem in
duug!,rer cells lN IN

(a) Apart from the presence of nectarines, give rwo observable fe::i.ltlre.,; cift�'pe P !lower.,;
which support the claim that the primrose is an insect-pollinated plant. (2 marks)
(b) Butterflle_,; collect nectar from flowers using a mouth structun.:: in the form or::i Jong
sucking tube.
( 1 J When a butterfly visits a type P flower, which p:ut of the sucking tube will the
pollen grains stick to? ( l mark)
(2) When the same butterfly visits another flower. which type of flower will be more
readily pollinated1 Why'/ (2 marks)
(3) What is the advantage of having the ditrt:!rent positioning or a.nthers and stigmas in
the primrose? (2 marks)

102
 Cell division and reproduction / P. 12 Cell division and reproduction I P.13

HKDSE 2016 18 {a) Describe the results of the above experiment. (2 marks)
(bl Based on the results. Hammer ling hypothesized that:
The following diagram shows a foetus and the associated structures inside the uterus: The heredi!wy 117fimnation 1s stored in 1he.fr10/ of'1he algal celt.
Hammerling further studied the expression of hereditary information by grafting the
stalk or Species I to the foot of Species 2. After grafting, the cap fanned from the
rirst regeneration showed a mixed morphology (Ill). He then removed the
c:avityX------'-',�----­
regenerated cap. The cap formed from the second regeneration looked exactly the
i l
same :is Species 2 (IV). The diagram below shows the treatments and the results:

foetuS -------- 111

(a)
(bl

(c)
What is the fluid found in cavity X?

foetal blood and maternal blood takes place.

(1 mark)
On the diagram. label the structure where the exchange of materials between the
(1 mark)
Give two reasons why foetal blood has to be separated from maternal blood.(2 marks)
r
Cap showed mixed morphology
in die first regeneration

-1· -r r
8, In 1930s, a Danish biologist J. Harnmerling tried to find out where the genetic information

�·1�
Graftin the stalk ofS cies I to the foot ofS ies 2
was stored inside the eukaryotic cell. He used some unicellular algae called Acetabularia to

.....
l
carry out a series of experiments. The diagram below shows the morphology oftwo species
of algae used in his study:

,.. l Removalg \he c;ip from the firs-t regeneration Cap looked CX3.ctly the s.mic as
S eeies 2 in the seeond eneration
fo• A<----nuclc..

(i) Hammerling concluded that when the cut stalk was transplanted, it contained
He divided Species 1 into two groups, removing the cap from one b'Toup (I) and the foot some short-lived instruction derived from the foot of Species I, resulting in a
from another group (II). He then observed if any regeneration occurred in the remaining mixed morphology of the cap in the first regeneration.

- tI
parts. The diagram below shows the treatments and the results: (1) Suggest the type of biomolecule that carried the short-lived instruction.
•="

f1
Tnal"""1t ' (1 mark)

=f
(2) How could the biomolecule sug gested in ( 1) affect the morphology of the
cap? (2 marks)
\
1 J. (ii) How do the results from this experiment support Hammerling's hypothesis?

-
(2 marks)
11:.�moving th< cap ll\ltll Spcci°' 1
(cl Give one aspect about the nature of science that can be demonstrated in the above
n,
discovery and give a reason to support your answer. (2 marks)
�
\
�
' I �
\ 1 >
I
CUlT

R.ffllo�i,,g <he foot from Sp,:tic, I

 Ceil d,visam and r�production / P 14 Cell division and reproduction/ P.15

HKDSE-201718 HKDSE-201918
3. The photomicrographs below show some stages of meiosis taking place in a fiower·.
3. The diagram below shows certain processes occurring in:. srcci.'.� of flowering plan!:

Individual I Individual 2

What is process Y? ( 1 mark)

b. Describe the sequence of events leading to fertilization after process Y has
completed. (4 marks)
c. Explain brief1y why process Y ls better than process X in terms of evolution.
(2 marks)

(al State one Jloral struclurt! in which this type of division takes place. (I mark)
(bl (i) Name event W shown in Photomicrograph X. (l mark)
(ii) Brie!ly describe what happens in event W. What is the importance
of everil W? (1 marks)
(cl (i) Which photomicrograph, Y or Z. shows the first meiotic division?
Give u piece or evidence to support your answer. (1 marks)
(ii) What is the purpose of the first and second meiotic divisions
respectively (2 marks)
 Cell division and rcprod11ctmn .' P.16 Cell division and reproduction f P.1

HKDSE - 2020IB Past P:1pcrs Marking Scheme� Cell clivision and reproduction

10. Diagram I shows a photomicrograph of human spenn and a human ovum during CE - 2002 Q.1 fa)
fertilisation while Diagram JI shows an electron micrograph of an enlarged view of (i) The plant tissue cannot carry out photosynthesis/ produce its own sugar
human spenn. So it needs an external supply of sugar for respiration to release energy
and as raw material for growth
Diagram lI
(ii) The genetic make-up of the daughter plants was the same as that of the parent plant J
because the daughter plants were fanned by mitosis of the parent tissue cells 1

(iii) For plant B, the sterilized soil had no microorganism

for recycling the fallen leaves into minerals
After several weeks. the minerals in the soil became exhausted. so insufficient
chlorophyll was made

(iv) This method is a faster/ surer way of producing daughter plants

The desirable characteristics of the parent can be retained in the daughter plants

CE - 2002 Q.2 fa)

{i) It fonns a physical barrier

to prevent spenns from meeting the ovum

(ii) AIDS I hepatitis B, C or EI gonorrhea/ syphilis (accept other correct answers)

(iii) Menstruation will still occur

because the operation does not affect the production of the female sex honnone by
the ovary 1
and the transport of the honnone by blood 1
(a) Under nonnal circumstances. in which structure ofthe female reproductive system Under the inf1uence of the female sex hormone, the uteQne \inin<T will get thicker]

0
does the process shown in Diagram I take place? ( 1 mark) and shed otflater

(iv) Title(Tl ½
(b) With reference to Diagram ll_ what is the significance oforganel\es Q to the sperm's Drawing including cell outline (D) ½
function? (1 mark) Two chromosomes shown i.e. haploid.
chromosome as single thread l+l
(c) (i) Explain the significance of the chromosome number of the sperm and ovum to �
sexual reproduction. (:2 marks)

(i) (I) Tar in cigarette smoke deposits on the surface of the air sacs in the mother"s
(ii) Brietly describe how identical twins may arise after fertilization. lungs 1
As a result. less oxygen can be absorbed into the mother"s blood 1
1-lence ri;:ducing the oxygen supply to the foetus
(2) (mother·s lung)➔ pulmonary vein➔ bean-> aona ➔ artery to uterus
->placenta➔ umbilical vein➔ (foetus) 6 x 1/1
(no arrows, deduct l mark)

(ii) (1) This results in the discharge of the amniotic fluid

Which lubricates the passage ofthe foetus through the vagina
(2) The cervix continues to dilate
The uterus and the abdominal muscles contract strongly
to expel the foetus through the vagina
 Cc!! division and reproduction/ P.2 Cell division and reproduction/ P.3

CE-2004Q.2(a) CE- 2006 Q.7

(i) Both of them are based on the use ofa barrier/ prevent the spenns from meeting the egg (a) 4th to 8111 March
I There is a great drop in the thickness of the uterine lining in the blood
12111 to 21 "' March
(ii) IUD prevents the implantation of the embryo (bl
The rise in body temperature indicates that/ Uterine lining is thickened and ready
(Iii) (I) Egg and sperms are viable for only a few days once: they are released for Implantation 1
The rhythm method is lo avoid having intercourse around the time of ovulation vccurs at around day 17 I
ovulation I Also, sperms and the egg can survive for a couple of days in the female
so that sperms and egg will have no chance of meeting each other I reproductive tract
ir�exual intercourse occurs in this period, there is a high chance of pregnancy
(2) Because it is hard to predict ihe time oJ'ovulalion accurately
(c) This m�thod only allows her to detect ovulation when there is a rise in the body
(iv) Time of intercourse does not necessarilv fall in the period ,:round ovulation 1e111pcratllre
Gametes produced mt1y not be viable �my be defrctive But it foib to predict the fertile period before ovulation
Oviducts of some women may be blocked
The sperm count of the husbands is too low any two IJ

(v) Because the development of secondary sexual characteristics is control led by the CE - 2006Q.8 (b)
male sex hormone
which is still produced by the testes ( iJ Four daughter cells nre formed from a single parem cell,
and transported in !he blood afier the operntion The two members ofa pair or homologous chromosomes are separated;
eacl1 g()es 10 a different daughter cell
CE - 2005 Q.10 (a) Each daug.htcr cell contains the haploid number of chromosomes Any !wo I, 1

(i) (]) amnion (ii) ( l) Type A gamete has both members of the homologous pair, while type B
(2) Fluid X helps to protect the foetus from mechanical shock gamete has none ofthat homologous pair
It can prevent desiccation of the foetus (2) *Down I Down·s syndrome
It allows movement ofthe foetus in the uterus (3) The X chromosome carries more genes than the Y chromosome
It can maintain a constant internal environment for 1he gro\.\1h of the foetus Ahsence of the X chromosome wil1 result in the loss of more genes/alleles l
anytwo l,l that may be essential to the survival of the zygotes and its subsequent
development
(ii) To allow time for obtaining enough foetal cells for analysis

(iii) Continue with pret,,rnancy: (accept other reasonable answers) CE-- 2006 Q.10 (a)
• the foetus has life; we have no right to terminate the life of an individual
• people with Down Syndrome can lead a quality and meaningful life (i) The average dry mass of both samples decreases from day Oto day 12
• abortion may have potential risk to the mother and may have psychological because the stored food in cotyledon I seed
impact on the mother I, 1 is used in respiration/ is broken down to carbon dioxide and water

End pregnancy: (accept other reasonable answers) (ii) TI1e average dry mass of the seedlings grown in daylight increases from day 12 to
• the child may become a burden to his/ her parents/ society as it needs more care day 18, while that of seedlings grown in darkness continues to decrease 1
• the child may be discriminated due to his physical/ mental disabilities 1, 1 because under daylight, the seedlings have developed green leaves 1
any one set for photosynthesis l
1l1e rate of food production is faster than the rate of food consumption 1
(iv) Under the microscope, if two X chromosomes are found/ the sex chromosomes are r�sulting a net gain in dry mass
identical, the foetus is a female I
!fan X and a Y chromosome are found/ the sex chromosomes are different, the {iii) lhe clr�l' mass shows the actual biomass I organic matter of the seedlings/
foetus is a male The wnter content of the seedlings varies and hence the fresh mass cannot indicate
the actual gro\1,,111 1
 Cell division and reproduction/ P.4 Cell division and reproduction/ P.5

CE - 2007 Q.8 (a) AL- 2002 2B

(i) R : filament S : ovary I ovule 1,1 4. (b) • maternal digestion: protease breaks down proteins to amino acids(!)/ 2
(ii) Insect pollination 1 peptides, in stomach and small intestine (1)
large I brightly coloured petal absorbed into the maternal blood stream at the ileum (1)
- anther/ stigma located inside flower aa. carried via veins to hearts, then along artery to uterine wall (1)
- presence of insect gu ide any two 1.1 a.a. diffuse across the "'placenta into foetal blood circulation (1)
(iii) Pollen grain develops to fonn a pollen tube 1
Pollen tube carries the male gametes 1 AL- 2004 lA
down the style to the ovary / and digests the tissues of the style
and releases the male gametes into the ovule 8. (a) (i) mitochondria close to the tail (1) 2
(iv) Vegetative propagation provide enenrv for motility ofthe tail ofsperm (1)
(ii) (I) from the ovum (1) / female
(2) Any�(1 mark):
trace genetic line from female
CE - 2008 Q.9 (a)
parentage identification
(;J Vegetative propagation ..
(ii) The chromosomes from A fail to pafr up with the chromosomes (b) • male spenn contains X and Y chromosomes, when 2 nuclei are combined (1), 2
from B during meiotic cell division . the result is either female. when the nuclei oftwo sperms containing X
because they are not homologous chromosomes. chromosome are used, or male. when the nucleus of one sperm containing X
Therefore, hybrid C fails to produce gametes chromosome and one spenn containing Y chromosome are used ( 1)
(iii) (1) Wind .
Feathery stigma AL-2006 2B
Stigma exposed 1. 1
] Absence of petals } ally two 4. (a)

. .
Anthers exposed
e.g. Humans Flowering; plants
(2) During the experiment. use a plastic bag to wrap the no external agents required for in many plants, external agents 1.1

"�- .
treated flowers except during the following treatments -; the transfer ofspenns (1) such as insects or wind (1) are
a
Remove the anthers from the fiowers.
Use a brush to transfer the pollen grains from other . copulation (I) to bring male and
required
male and female parts are 1+l
female parents together for the separated during the transfer ( 1)

.
f1owers to the stigma ofthe treated J-lowers .

CE - 2009 Q.8 (b)

. transfer
throughout the transfer process,
sperms re: within the human
pollen grains are often released to
the environment ( 1) when 1+ 1

(b) The man: low sperm count/ poor spenn mobility/ sperms with structural
defects / fail to copulate#
. bodv (1)
a liquid medium (1) / semen is
needed for the motility of the
. transferred from anther to stigma
male gametes are transferred by
pollen tube (l) which grow into
max. 4

2+2
The woman: blocked oviduct/ unsuccessful implantation/ no or few
ovulation/ fail to copulate#
(# award rnark once)
. sperms
sperms are propelled up the
female reproductive tract by the
the ovule (1) containing the
female gamete

contraction ofthe uterus and

{ii) It is necessary to stimulate development of ova through honnone injection
so that more ova can be collected
One ejaculation ofthe male already contains millions ofspenns
1
1
;;,
?. . oviduct ( l)
no digestion of tissues during . tissue of style is digested during 1
[ the movement of sperms up the the grO\.vth of the pollen tube (1)
(iii) (1) Some embryos fail to implant in the uterus 5·
, . female tract
active movement of sperms . passive transfer of male gametes 1
(2) Yes
Since the embryos may develop from the fertilization of two different
. involved
single fertilization (1) of one
sperm with one ovum
. (1)
double fertilization (1) with one
male gamete fusing with the 1+2
sperms with two ova I
female gamete and the other male
The two spenns may carry different sex chromosomes 1
gamete fusing with the
endosoennic nucleus(]) ma\'.. 8
max. 10
 Cell division and reproduction/ P.6 Cell division and reproduction/ P.7

DSE-2012 IB

.
(o) in mitosis, DNA I chromosomes I genetic material is duplicated right
(l)
.
11. Differences
Pairing of homologous
Si<>niflcance
Such that the daughter cells fanned
before cell division (1)
the duplicated chromosomes will line up at the middle pan of the cell for
division (1) (])
chromosomes along the equatorial contain the whole set of
plane in first division of meiosis chromosome I one member of each each member I half of the duplicated chromosomes will then separate and
(])
. but no such process in mitosis (1)
The pairs of homologous .
homologous pairs (I) after meiosis
Random segregation of
eventually divide equally into each daughter cell (1)
6 marks
chromosomes segregate into the homologous chromosomes results
daughter nuclei during the first io variations between gametes (5)
meiotic cell division (1)
.
formed in meiosis (1)
Crossing over may occurs, the
DSE-2014 lB
exchange of genetic materials
between non-sister chromatids 8. {a)

.
gives rises to oew genetic co!o ured /I arge petals ( 1) and anther within the flower tube { 1) (2)
. Mitosis involves one division only
combinations (1)
The daughter cells resulted from (b) (iJ middle part(]) (])
but meiosis involves two divisions mitosis are genetically identical to
(]) the parent cell (]) which is (ii) typc> Q flower (I)
impo�nt for growth of the because its stigma is located at the middle level of the flower tube (1)
organisms (]) i asexual which is at the same position where the middle part of the sucking (2)
.
reproduction
The da�ghter cells ' gametes (5)
tube will toucl1 upon
fanned "'
resulted from meiosis
(iii) this ensures that pollination is done between different individuals ( 1)
contain half/ haploid tl1e genetic (2)
content of the parent cell ( 1) such so that !hi; genetic variation of the offspring can be increased ( 1)
that the amount of genc>1ic content 7 marks
can be restored after fertilisation
(]) - DSE-2015 JB
S = max.:-. Max. 8
Communication 2. *chromosomi; / cl1romatid

11 marks (bi stngc:A{IJ

Genetic makrials are dispersed/ not condensed/ loosely packed at stage A {I)
which indicates that the DNA molecules are ready for transcription 2
DSE-2014 18
(0)
Outcome
3. • Cause
(a) since each of the separated cells V. dS abk: to develop inw u complete
P Mi/usis i\1eiosis
organism. this implies a whole set of genetic material is pre..�ent in each cell
/ there was no reduction in the quantity of genetic material during the first
N11111her ,;f"
dwiahter cells
2 " Mitosis involves °"' division while
meiosis involves two divisions (I)
division ( 1) ()) Homologous chromosomes (pair up) and
[For deliberation in markers' meeting: if there was a rt!duction in genetic JJNA cuntenl in
2N IN separate into each daughter cell in meiosis
material, the separated cell would not be able to develop into a complete daughter cells
but not in mitosis ( 1 )
organism ( l)J 2
(b) Science knowledge is Spemann·s results disproved the general belief. DSE 2016 lB
tentative and subject to showing that scientific knowledge will clmnge (])
change. when there is new evidence evolvt::d ( 1) 2.
Interpretation of observation Scientist observed that cells divides into two and
is guided by our prior believed that all the materials inside will be
understanding of other divided too without h."11owing !hat genetic materials
theories and concepts. will be duplicru:ed (1) / Spemann found that each
of the two separated cells developed into a (])
complete organism and interpret that each eel!
contain complete set of genetic materials because
all ge ?etic materials are required to fom1 a whole!
or!!amsm I
 Cell division and reproduction/ P.8 Cell division and reproduction I P.9

8. (a) those with the cap removed could regenerate the cap /the stalk and foot alone could because pairing or separation ofhomologous chromosomes is shown (2)
regenerate the cap (1) ( 1 ), wl1ich is the characteristic feature in first meiotic cell division
those with the foot removed could not regeoerate the foot I the cap and stalk alone
could not regenerate the foot (1) 2 (ii) first meiotic cell division separates the two sets of homologous
chromosomes I produces haploid nuclei /2N to 1N (1) (not acceptive:
( b) (i) (1) RNA reductive division)
RNA directs the protein synthesis through translation ( 1) wl1ile second meiotic cell division separates the (duplicated) (2)
(2)
the protein produced determine the morphology of the cap by acting chromosomes/ the (sister) chromatids ( 1) (not acceptable: halve the
as enzymes or structural proteins ( 1) 2 number of chromosomes, to form haploid gametes, to restore the diploid
(ii) the final morphological feature of the cap resembles that of Species 2 (1) state of a cell after fertilization)
showing that the trait is determined by the foot of Species 2 but not the stalk 8 marks
from Species 1 (1) and thus the permanent heredity infom1ation is stably
stored in the foot 2

HKDSE 201718

3. (a) cross-pollination ( 1} (I)

ibl after landing on the stigma, pollens germinate to form pollen tubes ( 1)
which carry the male gametes /male nuclei/pollens containing mali:::
gametes /male nuclei ( 1)
pollen tubes grow along the style to reach the ovuks/ the micropylc in the (41
ovary/ towards the ovules in the ovary ( l)
the male gametes/male nuclei will be released to fuse with the female
gametes/female nuclei ( 1) in the ovules
Instructions to markers: (l) candidates should elabonitc on the
fertilization process with the correct sequence of events, :ind (2)
candidates must correctly mention ovules in the answer in order to
score the fourth mark.

(c) process Y involves combination of genes from two different individuals

(I)
hence, the fertilised eggs/ offspring from process Y have greater genetic
variations than those from process X (1) for contributing to evolution
Instructions to markers: (1) candidates must mention fertilized
eggs/offspring in order to score the second mark.
OR
process Y could give rise to greater genetic variations than process X ( 1)
individuals with variants would be candidates for natural selection which (2 )
is one of the mechanisms of evolution (1 ).

HKDSE-201918

3. (a) anther/ ovary / ovule / pollen sac ( 1) (I)

(b) (i) crossing over* I crossing-over*/ formation of chiasma* (]) (1)

(ii) exchange of genetic materials between (non-sister chromatids of) the (2)
homologous pair of chromosomes (1)
is an important source of genetic variation/ new combination of alleles
in chromosomes in sexual reproduction/ this produces recombinant
chromosomes (1)

(c) (i) • Photomicrograph Y belongs to the first meiotic cell division (1)
 Onm1h and development / P.1

Past papers- Growth and development CE- 2010

8. (b) A study was conducted to find out the change of amylase activity and the amount of
CE - 2004 reducing sugars in sei;;ds during germination. The seeds were washed with water and
soaked in dilute sterilizing solution for 10 minutes. They were then rinsed with
A
l (b) The diagram below shows a section ofa seed: distilled water and germinated under suitable conditions. The results ofthe study are
shmvn in the following table.
(i) (1) NamestructureA. (])
(2) What organs will A develop into during seed Time of gennination (day) Amylase activity in seeds Amount of reducing sugars in
(arbitrary unit) seeds (mg/I 00g)
germination? {2)
I 0.8 6.8
3 2.4 10.S
(ii) During germination, amylase activity is detected in region B. Explain the 5 4.0 l 1.6
importance of amylase activity to the growth of the seedling. (4) 7 3.0 7.2
9 2.4 6.4
(iii) The dry mass of the seedling decreases in the initial siage of germination but
(i) The data on amylase activity in seeds is plotted on the graph. Present the data on the
starts to increase after one week. Explain the increase in dry mass of the seedling
amount of reducing sugars in seeds on the same graph and give a title to the
in the later stage. (3)
completed graph. (4 marks)

CE - 2006

10. (a) In a study of the grov.th of mung bean seedlings. t\VO samples of mung bt!an seeds
were grown under tl1e same conditions except that one srrmple 1,1:is kept In daylight
while the other in darkness. The same number of seedlings w<1s collected from each
group every 6 days. The average dry m1JSs or the seedlings of each group was
determined and tile results are shown below:

Averagi:: dry mass of seedlings (g)

Time of growth (day)
In daylight : In i.Jarkness
0 0.81 I 0.80 . . .
,

6 0.65 I 0,65
12 0.57 I 0.52
18 0.79 I 0.41
• 7
rrm,:._,f�(Wly)
(i) Explain the change in the average dry mass of the seedlings in both daylight and
(ii) With reference to tl1e data from day I to day 5, describe and explain the relationship
dark conditions from day Oto day 12. {3) between the amylase activity and theamount of reducing sugars in seeds during
(ii) From day 12 to day 18, how do the seedlings grown in daylight differ from those germination. (2 marks)
grown in the dark in terms of the change in the average dry mass? Account for
(iii) The amount of reducing sugars in seeds in day 9 is lower than that in day 3 even
this difference. (4)
though the amylase activity in seeds in these two days are the same. Suggest a reason
(iii) Suggest why the dry mass of seedlings was measured instead of the fresh mass in (1 mark)
for tht lower amount of reducing sugars in day 9.
this study. (]) (2 marks)
(iv) State rwo uses of reducing sugars in the seeds during germination.
 Grov.th and development / P.J Growth and development! P.1

HKDSE-201618 Past Papers Marking Scheme- Growth and development

CE- 2004 Q.1 (b}

9. To study the effect of mineral deficiency on shoot and root dry masses. bean plants were
gro\.Yfl in a complete nutrient solution (a solution containing all essential nutrients for {i) ( 1) *plumule 1
growth) or a nutrient solution without either phosphorus (P) or magnesium (Mg) for 12 (2) stem and leaf 1.1
days respectively. The dry masses of shoot and root were then measured. The results are (ii) Amylase hydrolyses the starch stored in the seed
shown in the graphs below: into maltose I sugar
which is used for forming new cells
Key: complete nutrient S1Jlm.ion
P deficiency and for rc:spiration release of energy for the growth cif the seedling
Mg deficiency
(iii) The ss:edling has developed green leaves
The rate or photosynthesis or the leaves is greater than the rate or respiration of the
seedling l
so there is 8 net gain in the amount or organic substances/ new cells are produced l

CE-- 2006 Q.10 fa)

(i) The average dry mass of both samples decreases from day Oto day 12
because the stored food in cotyledon/ seed
is used in respiration/ is broken down to carbon dioxide and water

(ii) The average dry mass of the seedlings grown in da)'lightincreases from day 12 to
day 18. wl1ile that of seedlings grown in darkness continues to decrease l
because under daylight, the seedlings have developed green leaves l
for photosynthesis 1
The rate of food production is faster than the rate of food consumption 1
resulting a net gain in d ry mass

(iii) The dry mass shows the actual biomass/ organic matter of the seedlings/
The water content of the seedlings varies and hence the fresh mass cannot indicate
the actual grov.1:h 1

Doy
CE-2010Q.8(b)
(a) Briefly describe how the dry mass ofa plant can be determined. (2 marks)
(b) The leaves of the bean plants gro\.Yfl under Mg deficient conditions appeared yellow.
(i) Why did the leaves appear yellow? (1 mark) 8. (b) (i) Title {T): Change in amylase activity and amount of reducing sugars in seeds
durin" 0ennination (1)
(ii) Use this phenomenon to explain the results ofthe shoot dry mass and root dry Corre�t'°plotting and joining of all points (P) (I)
mass ofthe bean plants under Mg deficient conditions. {3 marks) Correct key or labeling of curve (K) 1
C hJ
(c) (i) Explain the difference in the overall dry mass ofthe plant grown under P Correct labeling of a,"Xis with unit and appropriate scale(L) (1 l/1)
deficient conditions and that in the complete nutrient solution (2 marks)
(ii) When the amylase activity increases, the amount of reducing sugars in seeds
{ii) It was hypothesized that P inhibits the export of photosynthetic products from increases (1)
leaves to roots. Use this hypothesis to explain the results of the shoot dry mass because more starch is being broken down by amylase to fonn reducing sugar (1)
and root dry mass of the bean plants under Pdefieient conditions. (3 marks}
(iii) More reducing sugars are consumed in day 9/ less starch (food storage) is
available for amylase activity in day 9/ more reducing sugars are transported
av,;ay from the seed in day 9 (11

(iv) For e11ergy release for tl1e growth of the embryo (l)
For forming structural component of new cells (e.g. cellulose) for growth (1}
1-11-..'.DSE 201618
 Cro11th a11d deve!opment; P.2

Past papas - Gro,vtll responses of plants

9. (SJ dry the harvested plant in an oven at around JOocc { 1 J
until a constant mass is obtained upon repeat-:d weighing ( I J (2)
CE - :2009
(b) (i) without magnesium, chlorophyll cannot be formed (I), le.:iving the l<::a\'es
( I)
yellow
(0. (bJ Scientists have proposed t;vo hypotheses to explain why a greater amount of
{ii) without chlorophy!L the rate of photosynthesis of the plant is lowered ( I J
as a result there is not enough food produced for the gro11·th of plants ( l J (3) ::r.uxins is found in the shnded side than the lighted side when a coleoptile is
therefore, both the shoot and root dry mass are smalll:r than that of the illuminmed with unilmeral light.
control / that grown in complete nutrient solution ( I )

(c) (i) the overall dry mass of the plant wider P deficient conditions is much
smaller(l)
because P is necessary for the formation of protein/ nucleic acids/ ATP
(I) which are important for growth
(ii) without P, more photosynthetic product is transported from leaves to root
(])
as a result, the shoot dry mass is a lot lower than that of control (I)
while the root dry mass maintains more or Jess the same (1)
Hypothesis A· Light destroys auxins in the lighted side of the plant.
(2) Hypothesis B: Auxins move from the lighted side to the shaded of the plant
(i) A scientist performed an experiment to test Hypothesis A. He u.sed agar
(3) blocks to collect atL"Xins from co!eoptile tips under different conditions.
Then he placed each agar block on one side of a decapitated co!eoptile.
11 marks The set-up was kept in darkness for two days. He then measured the
degree of bending of the coleoptile. The diagrams below show his
experiment set-ups and the results:

[t
Result

ag�block

d,:capirnted
cokop1ile

coleoptile bent by 24"

r-Y
lJ coleoptik bent by 2-f"
'
L_._I� ______________ --'------- _J

{ I J SIa1e 1hc: dependent variable in the above experiment. (l mark)

(!J Do the results of the above experiment support Hypothesis A? Explain

your answer. (3 marks)
 Gro"1h responses of plant.s I P.'.! Grov,1h responses of plant.s I PJ

(ii) The scientist perfom1ed another experiment to test Hypothesis B. The HKDSE- 2013 1B
diagram below shows his experiment set-ups and the results:
7. ln 1880, Darwin conducted an experiment to investigate the phototropism of plants. He
placed some coleoptilcs in dark boxes. eacl1 witl1 a hole at one side to allow light to pass
through. The results after various treatments of coleoptiles are shown in tl1e diagrams
below:
Set-uo l ll lll IV
Tr�atme111

u [U
ofLlic !t11�ct coleopcile Tip romovcd Op,!quc cap placed Buried in soil with
ooleonlilc 110 the tip tip�oscd
R��ult opaque cap

[J
IV

�
Growth with No growth and no Growth without Growth with
bcndin1r bcndlnrr bcndinrr bcndinv
coleoptile colcoptils:
ben1 b�' 1::� ben1by31 ° (a) From the results of the experiment, which part of the coleoptiles is responsible for
detecting unilateral light? Support your answer with reasons. (3 marks)
(1) What is the purpose of inserting a _glass plate into the co\eoptile and
agar block in the way shown in Experiment set-up III? (1 mark) (b) E.-xp\ain why it is necessary to have set-up III in the experiment. (1 mark)

(2) If Hypothesis B is eorrect. explain the results obtained from (c) ln 1913, Boysen-Jensen perfonned some other experiments to study the nature of the
Experimental set-up IV. (4marks) signal transmission involved in photorropism. The diagram below shows his
experimental set-ups:

Sct-un A B C D
Treatment
C,rr tip placed on� Cuttipplaced on
oftlic lnlaclcolcopLile Tip rcmo\·�d
mica block ana� block
coko,,ti)c

u [J -�
Result mica block

�
Growth with No [:rowth m\d no No growth a\ld no Growth with
bendin� bendin' bendinv bendin�

What conclusion can be drawn from Boysen-Jensen's experiment? (3 marks)

 Gro\vth responses of plunts / P,4 Growth responses of plants/ P.1

(d) Which of1he following statements about the naturn of science are demonstrated in Past papers Marking Scheme - Growth responses of plants
the above historical events? Put a · ✓' in the space next to the statement and provide
CE- 2009 Q.10 {b)
an explanation. The first one is an example for your ri:fercncc. (4 marks)
(bJ OJ amount of auxins measured by degree of bending of the coleoptiles
f-"S'"'s"e'"c�c<,_________,___+-"E"""·"="11cefrom/he 1r;.,·tr,rlc,1l,00
Doing science requires crca(ivity
, ,0
o","�------ � (2) Hypothesis Ai no! supported/ Light does not destroy auxins
✓ BO!h D�rwin - :ind Boyscn•Jenscr. 11scd innovutlon an<l
and ima<!ination. im�11.ination to design their cxoerimenls, Thi: colcoptiles in experimental set-ups I and II have the same
Science is socially and c1.1lturally degree of bending
cmbcddctl This shows that the agar blocks have collected the same amount of
auxins regardless oflight or dark condition

(ii) (I) To stop the lateral transport of auxins

Science is based cm s::victence. (2) Unilateral light cnuses a migration of auxins from the lightt:d
10 the shaded side
Hence. there is less auxins diffusing to block L / more auxins
diffusing to the block R
When the blocks are placed on the right side of the coleoptiles.
block R stimulates a greater extent of grow1h on the right side
Science knowledge is tentative and than that ofblock L
d}narnic.
resulting in a greater degree of bending towards the left side

HKDSE - 2013 IH

7. (a) the tip is responsible for detecting the unilateral light ( I)

because ifit is removed/ blocked from the stimulus, no bending grov,•111
HKDSE- 2020 1B movement occurs (1) (3)
3. 111e diagram below shows a neural pathway involved in the coordi11ation of pupil size on the other hand. the same response is produced even if the lower part of
when a human eye is exposed to strong light: the coleoptile is covered in soil(!)
appuanmC<' of pupil bcfon:
0$ll!<: ro slrong (b) • to show that the failure to produce response in set-up II is not due to the
----. light (IJ
l effect of injury/ damage (1) when the tip is removed

!igh1 $tlm1.1Jus receptor$ in neun>m:!' (c} some substances are produced from the tip of the coleoptiles ( J)
thi!rt:lil.l.l which can diffus�s through the agar block (l) to reach the lower part of the
colcoptile (3)
and exert effect i lead to bending growth at the lower part of the coleoptile
br�in (I )

(dJ Science is based on ✓ Both Danvm and Jensen used the results from
circular evidence. (I) their experiment to develop their understanding
rn1Jsdes ofiri.� about phototropism in plants (1)
responw (4)
Science knowledge ✓ Darwin's work only provided some understanding
radial. ruu.<,,;::)�s r.eurone R is tentative and (I) about phototropism and Jensen's results helped
of Iris dynamic. develop further the science knowledge (I)

(a) With reference to the above neL1ral pathway,

{i)state the two types of receptors located in the retina. (l mark)
(ii)state the type of neurone represented by Q and R ( l mark)
(b) Describe how the two sets of iris muscles work together 10 bring al1out !he change in
the pupil size Shown above. State the significunce of this ri::spons<:. (4 marks)
(c) Ir someone falls L1nconscious. the response or the ..ibove 11et1ml pathw.:iy will bt:
assessed to confirm if this pathway is still functioning. \.I/hat dot:s this assessment tdl
you about the nature of this neural coordination ( I mar!...)
 Coordim1tion in humans / P.'.!

Past papers - Coordination in humans CE· 2006

CE- 2003 3. The figure below shows a magnetic resonance image of the lateral side of the upper body
3. (a) The diagram below shows a section the human eye: of a person.

(i) Structure A has no blood capillaries.

(1) Why is this feature important to the fonnation of a clear image? (1) (a) Name structure X and state its function. (2)
(2) From where does structure A obtain nutrients? (]) {b) What is the importance of structure Z to structure Y? (])
(ii) When a person steps out from a dark room into broad daylight, 8 becomes (c) The diagram below shows the transverse section of structure Yand an outline of the
constricted. ann:
(l) Explain the importance of this response. (2 )
(2) State the type of response illustrated by the constriction ofB. (])
(3) The person also puts on his sunglasses. With regard to the nature of the
response. state two ways in which this action is different from the constriction
ofB. (2)
(iii) In recent years. dark-coloured sunglasses are in fashion, but some of these
sunglasses cannot cut off ultra-violet light. Suggest why wearing such sunglasses On the above diagram. draw the reflex arc for the withdrawal reflex of the ann and
under bright sunlight would be more damaging to the eye than not wearing any label the different components of the reflex arc (4)
sunglasses. (3)

CE· 2004 CE - 2007

2. (c) lrritability is the ability ofan organism to respond to an external stimulus. Most cases 7 (al The diagram below sh0ws a section of a human eye:

e e
of irritability work in the following pattern:

�➔ ➔ coordinating centre ➔ ➔�

Below are three examples of irritability in humans: (;

I

(]) Secretion of saliva when food is ingested

(II) Constriction of pupil under bright light
(lll) Running out of the classroom upon hearing of fire alarm
{i) (1) Name structure A. (])
(i) For case I, state the receptor and the effector involved. (2) (2) Structure A becomes weak in an old man. Explain how this will affect his
(ii) Based on the above pattern, use a flowchan to show the nervous pathway for case eye sight when he looks at a nearby object. (4)
II, including the types of neurons involved. (3) (ii) Suggest one possible change ofthe lens which will also weaken the eyesight. (1)
(iii) (l) Name the region of the brain where the coordinating centre for case III is (iii) With reference to the function of layer C, explain why the falling off of layerB
located. (1) from layer C may cause blindness. (4)
(2) State two features of the responses controlled by this region. (2)
 Coordinat,on in humans .' P.3 Coordination in humans / P.4

2. The photograph below shows the lateral view ofa human brain.
(a) The surface of structure X is highly folded. What is
the significance ofthis feature? (1)
(b) Name structure Y and state one of its functions. (2)
(c) A patient who suffered from a stoke was diagnosed to
have part of area A damaged. After the stroke, it was
found that he had difficulty in moving his arm. What
is areaA?(l)
(d) Area B is located behind area A. What is area B?
(i) State the type of light-sensitive cell that is lost in this disease. (I)
(ii) Explain why the vision ofthe patient with macular degeneration is seriously
blurred in the centre. (2)
(b) The vision of patients with macular degeneration may be helped by bionic eyes. A
bionic eye consists of a camera mounted on a pair of glasses worn by the patient.
Signal from the camera are sentto a device implanted behind the retina of the eye of
the patient. The diagram below show how the bionic eye works.
Eye<>fpalk.i

CE - 2009
7. Tht: photograph bt:lmv shows an athlete leaping a hurdle

A-+-'
I lm,�c, a,e ,,.,�wrc'<l h}" u,�
�amc...-a (>n !he gl"-"'C<

ibl Describe the roles of different parts of the brain in bringing about the action of 3. l"he �cc, l'l"im�f�te,. :� -opJi,,
m-·edi=-rly
leaping the hurdle. (4)

CE- 2010 (i) Why can the bionic eyes also help the patients to see even when the lenses in their
eyes become cloudy? ( 1)
5. (a) Macular degeneration(5t_g;�fi'in:E)H�:tf.) is a disease resulting in the loss of
light-sensitive cells in the yellow spot of patients, The following photographs show (ii) Can the bionic eyes used to help other patients without any light-sensitive cells in
normal vision and the vision ofa patient with macular degeneration. their retina? Give one reason for your answer. (2)

(iii) In another type of bionic eye, a device is implanted in the brain. After receiving
signals, the device will directly stimulate the brain to generate vision.

(1) Name the part of the brain where the device should be implanted. (I)
(2) Give one advantage of this type of bionic eye over the type illustrated in the
diagrams in part (b). (IJ

l)CI
 Coordination in humans / P.5 Coordination in humans / P.6

AL-20022B AL- 2008 2B

5. {a) What are the roles played by the different parts of the nervous system in the reception 5. (a) Reflex and tropism are important responses of humans and flowering plants
ofvarious stimuli, signal integration and response initiation in the following incident? respectively. Contrast these two types of responses. Using suitable examples, discuss
the significance of these responses to the organisms concerned. () 1)

���-
'While riding a bicycle on the street, a boy saw a red traffic light in front and stopped
�
AL-20091A
(b) Based on the differences between honnonal and nervous co-ordination, explain how
their modes of action enable mammals to cope with different situations in life. 1, The following electron micrograph shows the junction between two neurones A and B
(N.B. Reference to specific honnones is NOT necessary.) (7)

AL- 2004 2B

4. (a) When a boy entered a cinema from broad daylight, he could not see in the dark
surroundings immediately. However, his vision resumed after a short while. After
being seated. he could clearly see the actresses on the screen wearing colourful dresses
but he could not see the people around him clearly. Explain the visual experiences of
the boy in the cinema based on your knowledge and understanding of the rods and
cones in the eye. Present your answer in paragraphs. (8)

AL- 2007 IA (al Give a label for X in the box provided above I 1J
(bJ With refi::rence to one observable feature shown in the electron micrograph,

;� -����:�,.-.
6. The following electron micrograph shows a neuromuscular junction: deduce the direction of signal transmission between the two neurones. (3)

AL-2010 JA
-
_, -··
·.�'
;.
2. A visually nonnal person stared at a blue cross printed on a piece ofwhite paper for 60
seconds_ After that, he looked at a plain wl1ite screen and an image ofa yellow cross was
perceived. This can be explained by the mechanism of colour vision. Complete the
following paragraphs with suitable word(s). (5)

Visual perception of the colour blue is due to the stimulation of the cone cells responsible for
_(a) ____. After staring at the blue cross for some time, these cone cells became
temporarily _(b}___. On the retina where the image of the blue cross was previously
fanned, only the _{c)___ cone cells were stimulated when the person looked at the plain
white screen. These cone cells sent signals via tl1e _(d)___ to the visual centre at the
(a) Name the chemical substance inside A. (1) _(e)___ of the brain. Thus. an image ofa yellow cross was perceived.
(b) A certain type of food pisoning - botulism - is caused by the ingestion of a bacterial
toxin. This toxin acts by blocking the presynaptic membrane, resulting in muscle
paralysis. Based on this infonnation and features in the micrograph above, explain how
this toxin brings about the paralytic effect (3)

LJ2
 Coordination in humans / P.7 Coordination in humans I P.8

HKDSE � 2013 IB HKDSE-2015 IB

l. For each of the ear parts li:;ted in column 1, select from column 2 one phrase that matches it.
I. For each of the brain pans listed in column 1, select from column 2 one phrase that Put the appropriate letter in the space provided. (3 marks)
matches it. Put the appropriate letter in the space provided.
Column 2
Column 1 Cglurnn 2
Cerebellum A. Damage causes inability to make Ear bones A. Transmitting vibrations
decisions
Medulla oblongata B. Damage causes loss ofbody balance Eustachian tube B. Transmitting sound waves
Cerebrum C. Damage causes loss of control of
breathing rate Cochlea C. Converting sound waves to vibrations
D. Damage causes loss ofVl'Uhdrawal reflex
D. Converting vibrations to nerve impulses
HKDSE � 2014 1B
E. Equalizing the air pressure on either side of the ear drum
l 0. The visual centre of the brain is responsible for processing nerve impulses from the retina
The number of neurons in the visual centre allocated to receiving impulses from a unit area
of the retina is shown below (only half of the retina is shown):

l<-+I
Yellow spot Side ofrclin.i (p�riphery)
DistJnce acroas �a

(a) With refere!lce to the rypes of photoreceptor cells and their distribution on the retina,
explain why more neurons in tl1e visual centre are a!Jocated to unit arl':a of the yellow
spot.
(4 marks)
(b) After the perception of what we ·see·, what it means 10 us depends on other parts ofthe
brain. Explain how this works. (2 marks)

l)S
 Coordination in humans / P.9 Coordination in humans/ P.10

5. On the opposite page, Photograph P shmvs several muscle fibres associated witl1 the HKDSE 2016 I B
tenninal parts of neurone R and Photograph Q shows the detailed structure of a
neuromuscular junction. 1. The table belo\V shows the condition which may result from damage to a certain part of the
brain. Complete the table by filling in either the condition or the structural part of the brain
Photograph P
affected (3 marks)
Condition Structuralpart of the brain

Difficulty in breathing
,::::R
Cerebellum

muscle fibre{
Difficulty in speech and vision

J-IKDSE- 2018 1B

1.The diagram below shows the human ear and its associated structures:
·................�11scular
.;.... ,-:1:•.,n

(x400)

Photograph Q

(a) The table below lists two types ofhearing loss. Using the labe!(s) in the above diagram,
indicate which structure(s) is/are most likely to be defective in each case. (2 marks)
--------
T
! X
�-----------1�=�------j
__ ,_ T;,c_o(hC5nn:! _lo.ss
I D.imagi: to ,;e::rsozy hair ceil.s
i" Struct1.1rc
[

Y Faflurc of sound conduction

Ludwig van Beethoven, a famous 1 s1n century composer, suffered from type Y hearing loss in
his 20s and became deaf in his 40s. some records say that he could hear music through his
jawbone and skull by biting on a metal rod attached to his piano. Based on the structures and
functions of human ears, complete the following flow chart to show the major steps involved in
(x 4500) part of muscle fibre his method of hearing music.

(a) Which type ofneurones does R belong to? Give a reason for your answer. (2 marks)
(b) What is the functional relationship between Sand T shown in Photograph Q?(2 marks)
(c) Describe how nerve impulses can be transmined across the neuromuscular junction
leading to muscle contraction. (3 marks)
 Cc,ordinatiun in hwnuns P.11 Coordination in humans , P.12

HKDSE-201918

l
(i)__________ L)ftht mctal r.:id
4. Diagrams l ,md II bdow show a person with both eyes moving right and then left. Tl1is
eyeball movement is brought about by the coordination of different eye muscle pairs.
Diagram III show::, foLlf of the muscles (P, Q. R. and S), all connected to motor neurons
uansmissiou through hones to reach (ii} ________ controlling eyeball movement.

Dingrum Ill (top vi�w)

Key: � dir,,,,ction� of eyc:ba!l rn.ovC1r1c:nt
motor neurones
Diagram 1 --------- r/
••V'- '\.,, --------,

l
de1ect:ion of (iii),____ ____ __ movement by s�C'!')' b11.ir ;:.c[[.;: ,,,>

rig.lit <= =
•"O<P"
•o;>

'
� !dl \

1 \

,tt
generation and :cransrnis.s.ion ofnervi:: implllscs. through (iv)__

l
Dh1grt1m II
right ----> J,::ft

Jnterpret&ion at the sell.50ry area of the ct:�brum

1'
plljlil pupil

(a) To bring about the eyeball movement shown in Di:!b>ram I, which muscle(s) (P, Q, R, or S)
contract(s)? (1 mark)
(b) A person suffers from impaired eyeball movement when turning his eyes from right
to letl. as shown in Diagram IV

Diagram IV
right -I> let'!

It is found tlial on.: of his eye muscles cannot fully contract. Ba.sed on your knov,·ledge of
neurotrn.nsmission at the neuromuscular junction, suggest two possible defects that would
lead to the impaired eyeball movement shown in Diagram IV (2 marks)

139
 Coordination in humans/ P.1 Coordination in humans IP.1

Past papers Marking Scheme- Coordination in humans CE- 2007 Q.7 (a)
(i} ()1 ciliary muscles
(2) When the man is looking at near object, tl1e weakened ciliary muscle
CE - 2003 Q.3 (a) contract with less force
and thc: tension of the suspensory ligament remains high
(i) ( 1) To allow the transmission orlight to the retina \vithout obstruction Hence, !he lens is not thick enough
{2) aqueous humour/ choroids and fails lo converge light to fom1 a clear image on the retina l
(ii) The lc:ns b<ecomes less elastic/ cloudy I
(ii) ( 1) It helps to reduce tl1e amount oflight entering the eyes (iii) Layer B contains ligl1t sensitive cells l
so as to prevent over-stimulation/ damage of the light-sensitive cells cannot obtain nutrients/ oxygen from layer C 1 +
(2) reflex action Asa result. light sensitive cells die l
( 3) Light falling on layer 8 cannot be detected/ no nerve im pulse can be produced 1
Constriction ofB Putting on sunglasses Therefore the vision is impaired
Does not involve the cerebrum Involves the cerebrum CE- 2008 Q.2
Inborn Learned action any 2
Faster in action Slower in action 1,1 (a} To harbour more neurones/ nerve cells
Stereotyped response i.e. same Variable responses to the same (✓ cell bodies/ intemeurone; x. cells/ brain cells).
stimulus always evokes the stimulus
same resnonse (bl Y: * medulla oblongata /medulla_
It acts as the reflex centre for some reflex actions
It controls involuntary actions any one .
(iii) Dark-coloured sunglasses reduce the light intensity entering the eye
so the pupil will not constrict/ constrict to a smaller extent in bright sunlight Correct function with wrong example -> 0
As a result, more UV light can enter the eye and cause damage Correct function with example ofret7ex and involuntary action mixed up_, 1
Give correct exam Jle instead of function-> 1

CE- 2004 Q.2 (c} (cl Motor area.

(dl Sensory area .
(i) Receptor: taste buds/ smell receptor Effector: salivary glands 1,1

(ii) (light) ➔ light sensitive cells relay neurone in brain CE- 2009 Q.7 (b)
sensory 11eurone
muscle of iris➔ (contraction of iris muscle/ pupil constriction) (b) Cerebellum coordinates muscular contraction ofthe whole body
motor neurone 6x ½ to maintain body balance
Cerebrum sends nerves impulses to various muscles
for contraction to leap the hurdle/ to initiate the voluntary action of leaping
(iii) (1) *cerebrum the hurdle
(2) The responses can be .controlled voluntarily
They are not stereotyped CE- 2010 Q.5
ll1ey need to be learned any two 1,1
5. (a) (i) Cone (l)
(ii) Vision in tl1e centre mainly relies on the detection oflight falling on the
CE- 2006 Q.3 yellow spot ( 1)
As the yellow spot contains cone cells only, light falling on this spot can hardly
{ a) *cerebellum be detected bv the patient with this disease (1)
It is for coordinating the activities of muscles in maintaining body balance The vision b;comes blurred in the centre
(b) Z protects Y from mechanical damage
(c) Drawing ofdifferent neurones: correct position or cell bodies. presence or2 {b) (i) The use of the bionic eyes replaces the nomial light path through the lenses ( 1)
synapses only, '/2. '/2 for image formation
Label: receptor/nerve ending. sensory neurone, interneurone, motor neuron, (ii) Yes (2 or OJ
effector1biceps/muscle {any four) 4:,,; Ye Signals from the camera are sent to the device which stimulate the optic
Correct pathway: indicate the direction or nerve impulse transrnissio11 nerve: directly.' light-sensitive cells are not required for the stimulation
Or direction can be identified from the label(s) oftl1e component of optic nerve
(iii) ( I l *Cerebrum/ *cerebral cortex/ *sensory area/* visual area (1)
(2) This type of bionic eye can give visual sensation to a person with damage
in optic nerve/ rupture of eyeball/ no eyeball {1)
 CoorJimition in lrnnians / P.3 Coordination in humans/ P.4

AL - 2002 2B 6 (a] acet;, lcholine ( 1 J / neurotransmitter

1
(]]

5. (a) Stimuli reception (bJ the toxin blocks the release of the neurotransmitter (max. 3)
cones on retina of eye stimulated by red lighl ( ]) 'produce sensory impulses (I) 2 into the clell (1)
utriculus / sacculus perceive position of head 1 I), \;enerate sensory imrulse ( 1 J there 11·ill be no neurotransmitter 10 stimulate the post-synaptic
semi-circular canals perceive rotational movement of1he head ( I J :ti membrane ( 1 l / no depolarization ofsarcolemma
decelern.tion / stopping the post-synaptic membrane/ sarcolemma will not develop
SiLl:nal inteuration action potential ( 1)
association centre in the cerebral cortex t 1) processes impulses from the visual 4 in 111-.: absence ofnervOLtS stimulation, myofilaments will not
cortex ( I J and medulla ( 1) /cerebellum.and rl.)]a\' them to thc: mowr ccn1re slide over one another (1 ), thus muscles will fail to contract
in the cerebral cortex ( 1)
Response initiation
motor centre in cerebral cortex sends impulses ( l) 3 AL- 2008 2B
to the muscles ofthe hands/ legs to stop bicycling ( I J
sends impulses to other skeletal muscles to maintain balance { 1) 5. (a)
(N.B . .,_mark to be given once only. candidates must show that they have (max. 9) Reflexes Tronism
attempted in all 3 areas to earn full mark of9) response is elicited by response is elicited by
external or internal external stimuli
(b) stimuli
Hormonal co-ordination Nervous co-onJination StimL1li involved may or . stimuli involved are
Different situations in life may not be unilateral unilateral
cope with stimuli which involves cope with sudden stimuli(1) 4
messages involved are messages involved are 1. 1
gradual change ( 1 ), deal with / emergency situations, and electrochemical in nature chemical in nature(])
prolonged response (1) the need for short-duration
(Bonus(I): for sustaining long response ( 1) +bonus = ] (])
tenn survival/ adaptations) most are non-directional directional responses, either
Mode of action of the honnonal and nervous svstems responses towards or away from the
honnones are circulated in blood electrical nature of nervous stimulus

.
(1 ) impulse conduction(]) quick responses slower responses
allows guick co-ordination non-growth responses growth responses _1_
(IJ ma-.:.6
diffuse / systematic response (1 ), localized response (1 ), 4 Si1:mificance: Si;mificance:
synchronizes different parts of enables specific parts ofthe protection against danger . to position its body parts so as
the body to contribute to overall body to co� with the (1 J / damage to obtain adeguate supply of
response ( J) situation (1) > pupil reflex protects retina light, nutrients, water for better
(max. 7) growth and survival (2)
/photorcceptors from
damage by strong light {1) oc
AL- 20042B phototropism helps to bring
4. (a) Reasons for unable to see for a while upon entry into the cinema then vision resumed: > withdrawal from heat/
sharp points protect the leaves towards light for more
-rods responsible for dim light vision as the surrounding is dim ( J J food production (1) /
skin from being burnt/ cut
bright light bleaches/ splits the pigment (1) in the rods (I) photosynthesis, for proper
(])
no response can be generated from the rods to produce vision ( I J max. 4 growth and development of
> blinking reflex/ tear
during pigment regeneration time, the boy cannot see in the dimly lit shoot ( 1)
production protects the
surrounding ( 1) / pigment takes time to regenerate geotropism helps !O bring root
eye.':i from mechanical
vision resumes when pigment in the rods is reformed/ n:genernted { 1 J in!O tl1e soil for nutrient and
drnnage ( l J
Reasons for clearly seeing the colourfL!I dresses ofthc actresses on ll1c scri;en: water absorption (1) and for
screen is brightly lit and cones are responsible IOr colour vision in bright max. 3 anchoraue ( I )
light ( l)
concept of one cone one neurone ( I l. :. visual acuiLy ( l)
l1igh density of cones at fovea increases resolvi 11g rower to sc:e dearly ( l )
Reasons for not seeing the people around the body clearly· 3
�rods responsible for dim light vision as the surrounding i� dim t l J
concept of many rods share I neurone (I). :. low acuity ( 1 ! 1-ugueness
(N.B. +"=concept to be awarded mark once only) (nrnx. 8/
AL- 2007 IA
 Coordination in humans/ P.5 Coordinution in humans/ P.6

HKDSE - 20141 B
Significance: Si"nificance:
adjustment to cl1anges in internal hydrotropism helps to 10. (a} yellow spot contain a high density of com:s cells { 1)
environment for optimum body bringroots to areas ofthe and there nre three types of cones for colour perception ( 1 ).
function ( l) soil with higher water as a result, there ure more sensory nerve impulses coming from the yellow
content (1) spot (1) ( 4)
> breathing rate increases in
response to increased carbon from the yellow spot ( l ). hence more neurones are allocated to analysis of
dioxide level in arterial blood so as max.4 the nerves impulses
to speed up the removal of carbon
dioxide (1) (b) impulses received from the visual cortex will be interpreted at the
as reactions to perfonn body association area ( 1)
(2)
functions (1) where relevant information about the image will be retrieved from the
> proprioceptors for keeping muscle previously stored information ( 1)
tone in maintaining posture (1) 6 marks
> salivation in anticipation offood to
HKDSE-2015 lB
prepare for digestion in mouth (1)
> dilation of pupil under dim 1. A. E, D 1,1,1
conditions allows more light to
reach the retina ( 1) 5. (a) motor neurone(])
> when distended by food peristalsis it is connected to an effector (1), i.e. muscle fibre in this case 2
of intestine increases to help
movement of food inside (1) max. 7 (b) S provide enerb'Y ( 1)
max.4 for the synthesis/ secretion/ resynthesis of the neurotransmitter/
chemical messenger stored in T (1) 2

AL- 2009 IA (c) arrival of nerves impulses at the motor nerve ending triggers the release
of neurotransmitters into the neuromuscular junction ( l)
1. ( a) *synaptic cleft/ gap ( l) I Jc.synapse( (I) these neurotransmitters diffuse across the synapse (1) and
to initiate electrical impulse in muscle fibres/ bind to the receptor sites on
(b) sign al transmits from neurone A to neurone B (1) (I) the membrane of the muscle fibre (1) to trigger muscle contraction 3
presence of a large number ofvessicles in the synaptic knob
of neurone A (1) (I) HKDSE-2016 lB

shows that A is the presynaptic neurone (1) I

which releases neurotransmitter to depolarize the membran any one (I)
ofB I next neurone (1) } HKDSE 2018 1B

4 marks (a) B(l)

AL-20101A C and D (1) (2)

2. (a) detecting blue light (1) [not colour vision] (b} (i) vibrations ( l}
(b) bleached/ overstimulated/ fatique/ unavailable for further
stimulation ( 1) (5) (ii) oval window/ cochlea ( 1)
(c) red and green
(d) optic nerve ( 1) (iii} lymph/fluid(IJ (41
(e) cerebral cortex/ cerebrum ( 1 )/ visual cortex
(not accept sensory area) 5 marks (iv) auditory m:rve ( 1)
6 marks
HKDSE - 2013 1 B

I. B (I )
C ())
A (I)
 Coordination in humans/ P.7

HKDSE 2019 lB Past papers- Movement in humans

CE- 1997
4. (a) • QandS(l)(notacceptable:QorS) (])
4. (c) The photographs below show two postures ofa woman doing sit-up exercises:
(b) Any tv.'o ofthe following: (not acceptable: a,-.;:on, neurone, neurotransmitter (2)
cannot diffuse across synaptic cleft)

insufficient amount of/ abnonnal or damaged wsicles at tl1e synaptic knob

or in sufficient amount of mitochondria to provide energy for vesicles to
syntl1esize neurotransmitters ( l l
Phoioi:r:i(lh t (Pom,rc 1)
insufficient amount of neurotransmitters is released at the neuromuscular Pbotogr.:t(lh l (Po,,turc Zl
junction (to stimulate RJ (1 J (no mark: P or Q or S)
neurotransmitter is degraded too rapidly ( 1)
Insufficient amount of/ abnormal or damaged receptors to bind with (i) Describe how the movement of the head can be detected by the semi-circular
neurotransmitters { 1) canuls of the ear when the woman changes her posture from I to 2. (5)
3 marks

(ii} Referring to photograph 2, which muscles in her anns biceps or triceps, are in a
contracted state so that she can touch her knees? (]]

(iii) Give two structural features of the backbone which allow it to bend to a smooth
and curved shape as shown in photograph 2. (2)

( iv} Suggest one advantage of doing regular exercise. (])

CE-1998
2. (c) The diagram below shows part ofthe human skeleton;

(i) Joims A, B. C and D can be

classified into two types according
to their freedom of movement.
Name these tv.'o types of joints.
Classify A, B, C and D into these
two types. (4)

(ii) State how the vertebrae help to

maintain the upright posture of a
person. (2)

(iii) Osteoporosis is a condition in which

the bone material of a person
decreases and the bones become
more porous and lighter than
nonna!. It is more common in old D
people. Suggest, with a reason, one
way in which people could reduce
the chance of getting osteoporosis.{2)
 Movement in humans / P.2 Movement in humans I P 3

CE - 2002 AL- 2006 2B

1. (b) The diagram below shows the human skeleton and two muscles of the right ann, M
andN: 6. (c) Describe how bones and the associated skeletal muscles work together to bring about
locomotion. (4)

AL-2007 lA

5. (a) The diagram below shows some structures ofa I

hinge joint:
On the diagram. draw and label those
components that serve to reduce friction at the (; �
I
I

r
joint during movement. (4)

(b) Ligaments are elastic while tendons have very

low elasticity. Explain how the elasticity of """'"7� V/
each structure is important to its function.
(2)

5. (b) ln the elderly, knee joints degenerate and the secretion of synovial fluid decrease.
(i) Deficiency of vitamin Din childhood will lead to deformity of bones. This results in knee pnin wl1en they walk. Account for the phenomenon in relation to
( 1) Using the letters in the diagram. indicate which part of the skeleton is most the structure nnd runctioning of the knee joint. (4)
easily defom1ed. Explain your choice. (3)
(2) Apart from diet_ suggest another way by which the body gds vitamin D. ( l)
(ii) Why are muscles Mand N described as an antagonistic (opposing} pair'? (1)
(iii) Draw a diagram to show the kver system involved in lifting the right forearm.
Indicate the positions of the load. and 1l1e fulcrum in your diagram. In lifting the
n"ght forean11. what will fon11 the load. the effort and the rulcrum respectively? (.5)

CE - 2009
7. The photograph below shows an athlete leaping a hurdle.

(a) The contraction of muscle A leads to the raising of the lower leg. How do muscle
A and other related structures of the leg bring about this action? (3 marks)
 1V!ow1nent in humans / P.4 Movement in humans/ P. I

HKDSE - 2013 1B Past papers Marking Scheme - Movement in humans

CE-1997Q.4(c)
2 The dia.!:,'TTlm below shows the structures of a joint. (i) The movement ofthe head results in the movement qfthe endolvrnph /
the gdatinous structure of the semi-circular canal
in the direction opposite to the head movement
This stimulates the sensorv hair cells
and nerve impulses are generated and
carried to the cerebrum for inte relation
E ective communication c) I

(ii} triceps
(iii) The backbone is made up of many vertebrae/ small bones
whicl1 are articulated by joints
There are compressible cartilage discs between the vertebrae any TWO lJ
(iv) Improve the functioning of the lungs/ the heart
Help to reduce body v,,eight
lmprove musculature/ improve strength of muscles
(a) Name the type ofjoint shown and suggest an example of such a joint in the body. (2) lmprove i maintain the flexibility ofjoints
Reduce stress /tension any one I
Type ofjoint:
Example in the body: CE- 1998 Q.2 (c)
(bJ Briefly describe how A and B work together 10 [1rin� al1out 111rne111e111 at the joint (i) *ball and socket joint; A and C l+I
,·,1·1inge joint. [3 and D l+I
shown. (4 marks) (ii) Vcm:brae are linked together by ligaments
to form u column Jany
and they allow the uttachment of muscles for maintaining the posture ) two 1,1

[]
HKDSE-2017 IB
(iii) Take in mart vitamin D
to hc:lp the ahsorption of calcium from food

[]
1. For each of the components of the musculoskelctul system liskd in Column L sr;lect from
Column II one phrase that correctly describes it Put the lt:tter in the sp:ice provided.(] marks) Take in more calcium any one set
for bone fornwtion

[]
Co!um11 I Column JI Do regulur weight-bearing exercise
Ligament A. Inelastic tissue found at the two ends ofa skeletal muscle to stimulate the increase in bone mass
Tendon B. Elastic tissue found at the tv,o ends of a Jong bone
Canilage C. In elastic tissue that surrounds a joint CE- 2002 Q.1 (b)
D. Elastic tissue that binds bones together ( i) (1) z
Deficiency ofvitamin D will lead to poor bone growth
As Z is not strong enough, the body weight exerting on it will cause it to
bend
(2) The body produces its own vitamin D under sunlight/ UV light

(ii) because when producing movements, one muscle contracts, the other relaxes
/ the contraction ofM bends the arm and that ofN e;..1ends the arm
(iii) Tltle{TJ 1/,
Position ofload, effort, fulcrum correct (P) l Or 0
Direction of arrows correct (A) ½

The weight of the forearm fonns the load

The force generated by the contraction ofmuscle M forms the effon
Tl1e elbow joint forms the fulcrum
 Movement in humans/ P.2 Movement in humans/ P.3

CE - 2009 Q.7 (a) HKDSE- 2013 1B

(s) The contraction of muscle A provides a pulling force 2. (a) Type ofjoint hinge joint•
the force is transmitted o the bone ofhe lower leg via inelastic tendons Example in our body: elbow joint/ knee joint
This allows movement across the knee joint
(b) A binds bones together (1)
to raise the lower leg and prevents dislocation of the bones (1) during movement
I Effective co11v11unicatio11 (c) B attaches the muscle to the bone (1) (4)
and transmits the pulling force (1 ) produced by muscle contraction

AL 2006 2B HKDSE 2017 1 B

6. (c) • bones provide a surface for muscular attachment (1) ma\'..4 I. D(l)
bones and their associated skeletal muscles fonn a lever system ( 1) with A(I) (3)
8(1)
the joint being the fulcrum (1) 3 marks
contraction of skeletal muscles provides the effort ( 1) I force for pulling
onto the bone to bring about movement (1)
antagonistic pairs of skeletal muscles attached to bones ( 1) bring about
movements in opposite directions (1)

AL-20071A

5 {s) drawing to show the synovial membrane and articular cartilage (4J
labels: articular cartilage/ cartilage (1)
synovial membrane ( 1)
synovial fluid ( 1 )

(b) ligaments have to be elastic so as to allow a certain degree of (2)

flexibility in the movement (1) of bones relative to one anotl1er
at the joint
tendons have to be of lower elasticity as this will ensure most
ofthe force of muscle contraction is used to pull onto the bones (1)
/effective/ efficient transfer of force to the bones to bring about
movement., instead of stretching the tendons

AL-20102B

5. (b) when one walks, the knee joint is bent and straightened alternately (4)
to bring about movement (1) and bears the weight of the upper
body(l)
as there is less synovial fluid, there is more friction between the articular
cartilages ( 1)
continuous rubbing leads to we.aring of the articular cartilage ( 1) of the
bones at the knee joint
as a result, it would result in pain when they walk
 l--lomeostas1s I P.2

Past papers- Homeostasis

(i) What is the increase in the blood glucose level after 1 hour in
CE -1000 (I) the healthy person
3, (b) Diabetes me\litus is a disease found in humans and other mammals. The main (2) the diabetic person? (2)
symptom of this disease is the presence of glucose in the urine. ln the (!ar]y twentieth (ii) Explain why the healthy person had a smaller increase in blood glucose level in
century, the cause of diabetes mellitus was still known. ln order to study this disease, a the first hour when compared with the diabetic person. (4)
scientist perfonned the following experiments on dogs: (iii) During the study, a larger volume of urine was produced by the diabetic person
than the healthy person. Suggest an explanation for this. (4)

Experiment Experimenm.L Treatment Result

subject
CE-2005
I Healthy dogs Symptoms of
Removing the pancreas 9. (a) In a medical test, George drank a glass of glucose solution. The graph below shows the
diabetes appeared
Symptoms of subsequent changes ofhis blood glucose level:
Diabetic dogs Injecting exaacu; of diabete:s
from experiment t p,n=

-
""""'
disappeared 240
(a) Injecting 220
of pan= whic:h Symptoms of
>= •=d diabetes rematll.ed
Diabetic dogs with protease
3 upper limit for
from experin,eru: I
(b) lnjecii,,g comp\� reabsorption
'""
of pancreas whicb

with lipase
Symptoms of
treated diabetes disappeared
of glucose in kidney

140
(i) Comparing the results of experiments 1 and 2, what conclusion can be drawn? (2)
(ii) What is the aim ofperfonning experiment 3? (2) 2
(iii) Based on the results of experiments 2 and 3 (a), expl::iin whetlier tlie diobetic dogs
would show symptoms of the disease ir they \Vere: ln:ated with the extracts or
t
intake of
Time {hour)

pancreas by reeding instead ofby injection. (3) glucose solution

(iv) Based on your biological knowledge, explain 11hy th<;; urinc ofu diabetic person
usually contains glLtcose. (5) (i) B:ised on th<=' graph_ state the period in which the urine of George would contain
glucost:. F.xplain why glucose in the blood would appear in the urine during this
CE - 2002 period. 141
220
I, [ol lo a study, a healthy person (ii) Tlw doctor diagnos-:d that George had diabdes mellitus and advised him to get
and 0 person with diabetes di�beth; 111suli11 injection for treatment. Which organ of George was likely to be defective?
200 pt:<aOTI
mellitus fasted for 12 hours. [I)

I '"
They then stayed at rest in the 180 UJ,perlimil for (iii) The in�ulin used for treating diabetes mellitus can be obtained from pigs and
eontpletc
same room and drank equal
volumes of glucose solutions
]
! -, reabsorplion of
gh1eo,;c \o l.id,,�-y
cattle. or produced by genetically modified bacteria. State two advantages of
tising insulin produced by the bacteria over that obtained from mammals. (2)
of the same concentration.
il. '40
Their blood glucose levels (iv) ( l) Besides insulin. name another honnone that is responsible for the
were measured immediately 120
regulation of blood glucose level. ii)
afterwards and at 30-minute (1) Star� one effect ofthis hormone on the activity of liver cells. (I)
intervals for three hours. The mo
besh:hy
results are shown in the graph person
below: 120 150
 Homeostasis / P.3 Homeostasis / P.4

CE- 2007 CE - 2008

8. (b) The graphs below show the changes in the glucose consumption and the blood 8. (bl The following information is extracted from a pamphlet for diabetic patients. Read the
glucagon level in a person before, during and after exercise: content and answer the questions that follow.

I
Gefore o�ring After
c"crcisc cx�,ccse exercise

!-\ypoglycrn,mia

I/ \ When there is a very low level of glucose in the blood (below 50 mg per l 00 cm·1),
hypoglycaemia occurs. Hypoglycaemia usually happens quickly and the
>
symptoms include sweating, hunger, tiredness, anxiety and dizziness. etc.

/�
Hypoglycaemia may occur because:
• you havl:! s:aten too little. or
• you ;;ire late for a meal. or
• you have injected too much insl1lin. or
i
rimc(m nutc) • you have a lot more exercise than usual.

It is important always to carry some sweets with you and take them immediately
(i) Explain the change in glucose consumption during exercise. (3) when you suffer from hypoglycaemia

(ii) During exercise the blood glucose level remains relatively steady. Explain this
(i ) Explain why a diabetic patient may suffer from hypoglycaemia if he has taken
phenomenon by referring to the change in the blood glucagon level. (3)
more exercise than usual. (4)
(ii) It is recommended for diabetic patients to take in complex carbohydrates (a
(iii) Draw a line on the graph below to show the change in the blood lactic acid level
variety of polysaccharides) in their normal meal instead of sugar. Suggest why
du ring and after vigorous exercise. (2)
these patients are advised to take different types of carbohydrates under normal
and hypoglycaemic conditions.
(1) Take in complex carbohydrates in normal meal (3)
Before
exercise
During
exercise
After
exercise I (2) Take in sugar when hypoglycaemia occurs (2)

Time (mmute)
 l-iorn�ostasis I P.5 Homeostasis f P.6

AL-200618 AL- 1008 IA

I 0. In a medical test three adults. A, 8 and C. ws:re each asked lo drink a solution cont:.iini11g. 7.
100g of glucose after they lrnd lasied for 12 hours. Their plasm:.i glucose levd i-md insulin
level were determined before the glucose Intake, and tlicse levels were rrlso monitored at
regular intervals for the subsequent 4 hours. The results are sho\\'n in Figure and Figuri;: 2
below. A is the only healthy individual. whereas both I3 and Care diabdic.
Figure J (GluCO$C Response Cur�,:)
A man 11·.:is diagnosed with a kind of pancreatic cancer which is characteriz.ed by
overgrol',1h or endocrine pancreatic cells. He sometimes felt dizzy' but became less so aner
drinking a suluti on or glucose.
(a) Based on the above observation. suggest why this pancreatic cancer would cause
dizziness in thi;: man. (4)
(b) After having an operation to remove a large part of the pancreas, the man was advised
to take a low protein and low fat diet. Ex plain the biological reasons behind this
advice. (2)

20
AL- 2009 2A
l5
2. lb) To control the blood glucose level, some diabetic patients take in prescribed dru gs at
10 meal time which stimulate insulin secretion. An overdose of such drugs can result in
C
death of the patient. E:,;p!ain why. (4)
A

0 (c) Diet control is a strategy to manag.e non-insulin-dependent (type II) diabetes by

1'0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 J.O 3.5 4.0 preventing a sudden rise of plasma glucose beyond the nonnal level. The following
intake of Time (hour)
glucose recommendations help this type of diabetic patients manage their blood glucose at a
proper level. For each recommendation, explain the biological principle behind it.
(i) Eat plenty ofvegetables at every meal (4)
Figure 2 (Insulin Response Cllrve) (ii) Take small but frequent meals (2)
300
250
200
C
150
100
so
A
D
'j- 0.5 I.O l.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0
intake of Time{hour)
glucose

(a) Explain the rise in plasma g.lucose level in A one hour after the orn) int3ke ufglucos8
and the subsequent decline in plasma g.Jucose Jew!. (3)

{b) State tJVo differences in the glucose response between A .:ind B. (2)

(c) Contrast the insulin response between B and C and hence cii!forentiate the type of
diabetes in Band C. (4)

J58
 Homeostasis / P. 7 Homeostasis / P.8

DSE-2012 lB HKDSE-201818

7. Tom suffers from diabetes. His doctor asked him to drink. after overnight fasting, a large 7. The glycemic Index (GI) is an indication of the effr:ct of food on the blood glucose level. The
volume of a glucose solution. After that_ blood samples were taken at regular time intervals. l1igher the G! value of o fond. the quicker is the rise in blood glucose level. The graph below
to measure insulin and glucose contents. The following graplis show the clianges in Tom·s shO\VS tl1e changes in the blood glucose level of a l1ealthy individual aticr consuming the same
blood glucose level and blood insulin level after the test and those of a healthy person: quantity ofa low Gl or high Gl meal over a period of three hours:

Key.
--- h1�h Gl meal
Tom -·-· lo,,,.Gt1nte11!

Healthy
person

Time Time
Normal level of
blood g.lurosc
(a) Which type of diabetes does Torn suffer from? Explain your answer. (4 marks)

(b) Explain the difference in blood glucose response to the oral consumption of glucose
solution between Torn and the healthy person. (3 marks) 0.5 l.O 15 2.0 3.0
Tim� thours)
(c) What medical treatment should Tom be given? (1 mark) (a) Describe how the consumption of a meal leads to an increase in the blood glucose level
(2 marks)
HKDSE 2015 lB (b ) (i) Name the key honnone which lowers the blood glucose level. (1 mark)
(ii) Describe how this hormone lowers the blood glucose level. (3 marks)
8. In a health check, Lisa was found to have glucose in her urine. She undertook a further (iii) On the grapl1 on the opposite page (pagel 0), sketch a curve to show the change in
check in which she has fasted for 12 hours before a blood sample was taken for examination. the level of this key honnone in response to the consumption of high GI meal
The results of the blood tests are shown below: by the healthy person. (2 marks)
Test Result Normal rnn"e Units (c) Explain why diabetic patients should consume low GI meals. (1 marks)
Blood glucose 8.4 4-6 mmol L·1
Insulin 0.2 3-32 µUmL·1
Glucagon 130 20- l 00 �lg L·I

(a) State the type of diabetes Lisa is suffering from. ( 1 mark)

(b) With reference to the production and actions of the two honnones, account for the
results of Lisa's blood tests.
(i) Insulin (3 marks)
(ii) Glucagon (3 marks)
(c) Suggest two dietary habits that Lisa should establish. (2 marks)
 Homeostasis/ P.1 Homeostasis/ P.2

Past papers Marking Scheme - Homeostasis (iii) Less side l;)ffects

More effective in action
CE* 2000 Q.3 (b) Insulin produced from genetically modified bacteria is cheaper and In greater supply
(i) Diabetes is caused by the absence of cen:ain sub.'.tance{s) (accept other reasonable answers) any two U
which can be found in pancreas (iv) ( I J glucagon ]
(2) Glucagon will stimulate the conversion of glycogen in liver cells to glucose 1
(ii) To determine whether the substance in the pancreas extract efft-ctive in
treating diabetes is a protein
or a fat ,::;,;ceed the tl1reshold value
thm glucose cannot be completely reabsorbed in the kidne)
(iii) Symptoms of diabetes would remain Thus it a ears in the urine
This is because protease in the alimentary cctnal
will di�est the active substance which is protein in natun:

(iv) In the diabetic person_ the pancreas cannot produce enough insulin CE* 2007 ().8 lb)
Thus the liver cannot convert excess glucose in the blootl intu glyrngen
His blood glucose concentration remains higl1 (i) Glucose consumption increases during exercise
leading to a high level of glucose in the glomerular filtrate because glucose is used in respiration/ respiration rate is faster
The kidney tubules cannot reabsorb all the glucose from the filtrate to provide more enerb'Y for muscle concentration
thus glucose is excreted in the urine
I Effective conunuuication (c) JI {ii} More glucagons is released during exercise
which stimulates 1.he conversion of glycogen to glucose in liver
to restore the blood glucose level/ compensates for the increase in glucose
CE· 2002 Q.I fc) consumption
(i) (I) 40 mg per 100 cm 3 blood I Effective comnumication (c)
(2) 65 mg er 100 cm3 blood
Deduct½ mark for each answer if the unit is left out; VrTong unit, no mark (iii) Trends:
Increase during exercise
(ii) In the healthy person, the initial rise in blood glucose level stimulates the secretion Decrease after exercise
of insulin 1
by the pancreas 1
while there is no/ less insulin secretion in the diabetic person CE * 2008 Q.8 (b)
Insulin stimulates the conversion of glucose into glycogen in the liver
/ uptake of glucose by body cells (b) (i) Diabetic patients lack insulin/ do not have enough insulin in their blood
so the increase in blood lucose level in the health erson is smaller and hence the liver fails to convert glucose into glycogen for storage ...
E ectii;e communication c) 1 During intense exercise, blood glucose is consumed for muscle
activities/ more blood glucose is consumed .
(iii) Since the 36 lli minute, the blood glucose level of the diabetic person is higher than The blood glucose level drops continuously without replenishment from the
the upper limit for complete reabsorption of glucoso: 1 glycogen stored . 1
so glucose is present in the filtrate/ urine in the collecting duct 1
The water potential of the filtrate/ urine is lowered by the glucose present J OiJ (lJ It takes time for starchy food to be digested before absorption
thus the reabsorption of water is reduced 1 As a result, a small amount of glucose is absorbed gradually
and a larger volume of urine would be produced J The fluctuation of blood glucose level is less/ blood glucose
level will not increase too fast after a normal meal ...

CE* 200:i Q.9 fa) (2) Sugar is ea,;;ily digested/ absorbable .

Blood glucose level can be raised immediately/ quickly/
(i) 0.5 to 4 hour F�ter to alleviate the symptoms of hypoglycaemia
Blood glucose is filtered into the kidney tubule
In this period. tl1e glucose level in the jomerular fillrat:: i$ hi1:ifler than the upper
limit for complete reabsorption of glucose l
so some glucose will be letl in the glomerulnr filtrate/ cclnnot be reab$orbed
and excreted in the urine
(ii) Pancreas
 Homeostasis/ P.3 Homeostasis I PA

AL-20061B { cl {i) Any two of the following sets: 2 x (1 + 1)

10. (a) • absorption of glucose from the gastrointestinal tract ( 1) results in an elevation
of plasma glucose level
this rise triggers the release of insulin ( 1) which stimulates glucose uptake into
its target tissues (l) / the conversion of glucose into glycogen in the liver,
resulting in the decline in plasma glucose level
(b) Anv two ofthe following:
B shows a sharper rise in plasma glucose level (1)
plasma glucose level ofB rises to a higher peak than A ( I)
the peak of plasma glucose level in B occurs later than that in A (1)
its level fails to return to its basal level after 3 h, while that of A drops back to the
basal level (1)
vegetables consist of much indigestible dietary fibre ( 1) whicti
3 will not contribute to the blood glucose level (1)
the fibre can bond with other carbohydrates (1) / slow
down their digestion, and reduces the absorption of glucose into (4)
the blood(\)
the fibre also gives a sense of satiety, thus reducing food
intake (1) and subsequently helps restrict the increase in plasma
glucose level (1)
2
(ii) small meals will restrict the amount of glucose to be absorbed
in each meal (1) (2)
frequent meal provides sufficient glucose in bet;veen meals (1)

(c) B has no/ very low insulin secretion (1) despite an increase in plasma glucose 4
level,
indicating that B has insulin-dependent diabetes mellitus (1) /type 1 diabetes
mellitus
C shows a sharp increase in the plasma insulin level (1), yet his/ her plasma
glucose level remains higher than normal
indicating that Chas no-insulin-dependent diabetes mellitus (1) /type2 diabetes
mellitus
(9)

AL� 2008 1A

7. {a) due to uncontrolled growth of insulin-secreting cells (l ), this

pancreatic cancer probably leads to an excessive secretion of
insulin (1)
} ma, 3
as insulin stimulates the conversion of blood glucose by the liver ( l)
/ uptake ofblood glucose by cells, excessive insulin secretion would
reduce the blood glucose to a low level (l)
As a result of insufficient blood glucose supply to the brain(]),
the man would feel dizzy
(4)
{b) some tissues ofthe pancreas secrete protease and lipase ( l)
they may be removed together with the cancerous tissues( 1 ),
and this would make the digestion of protein and fat difficult

AL 2009 2A

2. (b) insulin serves to enhance glucose uptake into body cells { 1) from
the plasma,
if the drug is overdosed, a sudden over-secretion of insulin would (4)
cause the plasma glucose level to become much lower than the normal
(1) and there would be insufficient supply of glucose to the brain
cells (1) which d epend solely on glucose for respiration ( 1)
 Homeostasis/ P.5 Homeostasis I P.6

(cJ low GI food will lead to small fluctuations in blood glucose level (1) (2)
the chance of having too high blood glucose level/ glucose appearing in
7. (a) despite the high blood glucose level detected in his blood. his fasting blood (]) urine is reduced(])
insulin level was lower than that of the healthy person (I)
although there is an increase in blood glucose level, the insulin level only 10 marks
(!)
shows little change (1)
this shows that Tom failed to produce the nonna! amount of insulin (1) (I J
therefore. Tom suffered from insulin-dependent diabetes (]) / type (!)
diabetes
(b) with insufficient insulin, his body cells will not take up extra glucose from
the blood as efficiently as the healthy person (I)
as a result, the blood glucose concentration rised to a higher level (1) after
glucose consumption (3)
and remains high for a longer time / decreases slower than tl1e healthy
person ( 1)
Remurks: conversion of glucose to glycogen b�, insuJi 11 is 1101. ac-.:ep1:ible

(c) • by injection of insulin (I)/ aerosal spray of insulin applied lO nasal cavity (Il
8 marks

HKDSE- 2015 I B

8. (a) type J diabetes/ insulin-dependent diabetes meJlitus

(bJ (i) Lisa·s pancreas failed lo secrete enough insulin ( J J

as a result her body/ liver cells cannot be sufficiently stimulated to
increase the uptake of glucose from blood i liver cells cnnnot be stimulated
to convert glucose to glycogen/ body cells cannot be stimulated to
increase glucose oxidation ( 1)
hence, her blood glucose level dropped very slowly I r�mained at high
level/ exceeded the normal range()) even at1er 12 hours of fa.sting 3

(ii) Without the inhibitory effect of insulin. Lisa·s pttnrn:as secretes a

large amount ofglucagon (I)
her liver cells are stimulated (l)
to promote the conversion of glucose from glycogen/ cimino acid ( J J
leading to a high g]LJcosc level in blood 3

(c) having frequent meals but in small portions ( 1)

Avoid food which elevates blood glucose level in a short time ( I J 2

HKDSE-2018 IB

7. (a) digestion of foods containing carbohydrates to form glucose { l J

absorption of glucose frorn the small intestine into the blood (I) (2)

(b) (i) insulin (l) (I)

(ii) it stimulates the body cells and liver cells to tak.e up more glucose
from blood (1)
increases respiration in body cells to consLJme glucose ( l J (3)
it stimulate the conversion of glucose to glycogen by tl1e liver/
muscle cells (IJ

(iii) • has initial basal value and drops back to basal value at the end (l ). (2)
effect lags behind (I)

1,,., J67
 Biodiversity/ P. 2

Past papers - Biodiversity (i) Using letters provided, state all the animal(s) that should be placed in the
exhibition area for reptiles. (I)
CE-1996
(ii) B and E are kept in the same exhibition area. Name the animal group to which
1. (a) The diagrams below show three kinds of plants :
R
they belong. (1)
Q
(iii) State two structural differences between A and C which explain why they are kept
/"•:·

�.,
in different exhibition areas. {2)
(iv) The amount of daily food intake per unit mass of A is much greater than that ofC.
Suggest an explanation for this. (4)
(v) The population of F in Nature has decreased continuously in recent years. Suggest
two ways of preventing the extinction ofF. (2)

CE- 2002
Pinc
3. (b) In an ecosystem. there are various types of bats. One type of bats, A. is shown in
(i) Pine and bread mould belong to the same major plant group and maize belongs to photograph 1 below. When a sample of its faeces was examined, pieces of legs and
another group. wings ora certain group of animals were found as shown in photograph 2.
(1) State one feature that distinguishes these two major plant groups. ( l}
(2) Bread mould belongs to the sub-group fungi. Name the sub-group to which
pine belongs. ( 1)
(ii) State the role of the following structures in tl1e reproduction of the plants:
(1) p ( l)
(2) R
(iii) State one feature that is common to structures Q and R which enables them 10 be
carried by wing. ( \)
(iv) Referring to the diagram. explain how bread mould is adapkd for obtaining
nutrients. (4l
1
f'Jmw;:rarh l {mai,•rt/J/c<Ufon;,:
. )
5
CE-1998
1. (a) In a marine museum, living marine animals are kept in different exhibition areas
according to their animal group. Some of the animals in the museum are shown in the {i) { 1} To whicl1 group of vertebrates do bats belong? (I)

diagrams below (2) Referring to photograph 1. state one external features of bat A through which
it is classified into the group you stated in (1 ). (])

(ii) With reference to photograph 2, suggest the group of animals that bat A feed on.(1)

(iii) The faeces of another type of bats, B, are found to contain some seeds. Suggest an
explanation for the presence of intact seeds in the faeces of bat B. (2)

(iv) A third type of bat, C, feeds on the blood of large animals. Assuming that bats B
and C have the same amount of daily food intake, compare the daily amount of
faeces they produce. Explain your answer. (2)

(v) Having different types of bats is advantageous to the survival of bats in an

,£ ecosystem. Suggest an explanation for this using the information about bats A, B
and C given above. (2)
 Biudiv�rs,ty / I" Biodiversity/ P. 4

CE� :was AL- '002 IA

1. The following pictures show four different organisms:
4. The following key is constructed for identifying the fishes A-E shov.11 below.

la Both eyes on the same side of the head ---------- 2

lb One eye on each side ofthe head 3

2a Both eyes on the right side of the head Paralichthvs olivaceus

2b Both eyes on the left side of the head C!eisthenes herzensteini

3a Caudal fin asymmetrical Squalus mitsukurii

P{xlZOOO)
(_) (.1: 1500) 3b Caudal fin symmetrical 4

4a Two dorsal fins Apouon fleurieu

4b One dorsal fin Lethrinus haematopterus

Using this key, identify each of the fishes A, C and D, and state the key sequence you went
through in making the identification (5)

S (.\ l)
B

(a) Organisms can be classified into rive kingdoms. Name the kingdom thm P and Q ench
belongs to (2)

(b) State two cell structures that can be found in Q, Rand S. but 1101111 P. (2J
D
(c) Explain the role ofS in the cycling of materials in nature. (2)

(dJ A number of human diseases such as influenza and SARS are i::mtsed by viruses. Some
scientists consider viruses as organisms, but some do not Give one reason for each of
these views. (2)
Soot«· 'i'iil14�(i;i!lllf.lr.�Ai' • {•t'J1J�lf..r,.Illmi1!'!!1111ll' (I)) • J:rJi!: J:11i!lif!:lH:l.,lll-/:ll.,l!i:,± •
)'1\12•

'71
 Biodiversity/ P_ 5 Biodiversity IP. 6

DSE-2012 lB
AL-2005 JA
4. The following key can be used for identifying organisms under the same phylum:
1. The key below is constructed for identifying animals A to F, the shell(s) of which are sho\.vn 1, Absence of eyes 2
below: lb A pair of eyes 3

2a Six legs Class A

2b More than six legs Class B

3a Six legs>'..'\\· Class C

3b More than six legs Class D

(al Using the above key, identify which class organism X shov,·n in the photograph below
belongs to. ( 1 mark)

la The animal has only one piece of shell.. .... 2

lb The animal has two pieces of shell.. 4
(b) Suggest a characteristic of the habitat of organism X. Explain your answer_ {2 marks)

2, The shell is flat.... Haliotis ovina (c) A newly found organism Y has a pair of eyes and fewer than six legs. Although it is
believed that this organism belongs to this phylum. it cannot be identified by using the
2b The shell is not tlat.. 3
above key. Explain why this problem occurs. (1 mark)

3a The shell becomes narrower toward one end .. .......... Con us littertus (d) Suggest one way to collect more infonnation which can be used for deciding whether
3b The shell becomes narrower toward both ends.......... Cvpraea vitellus organism Y belongs to this ph ylum. (2 marks)

4a The two pieces of shell are equal in size.. ............. 5

4b The two pieces of shell are unequal in size.. . . ..... Ostrea nigromarginata

5a The shell is elongated in shape... Solen grandis

5b The shell is oval in shape.. Paphia euglvpta

Using this key, identify animals B. C and D. Write down the full scientific name of each
and the key sequence taken for making the identification. (5)

Animal Scientific name Key sequence for identification

<72
 fl,odi,-ersity P. 7 Biodiversity i P 8

DSE 2016 1B (c) Study th� fol!O\Ving statement:

The didwtomous key shows that the lesser celandine and primrose have a
4. The following diagrams shov11· tl1e appearance of five flowering plants:
dos.:r evufutionwy relationship.
Do you agree? Explain your answer. (2 marks)

HKDSE-2017 IB
•,\'.ii i
\ 6. The chart below shows the time!ine of some major advancements of technology and the
"il\ l
development of different classification systems:
111

-
Adva11ce111e111s oftechnology Dcmelopme,11 of different cl«ssijicrititm sy.ftems
wild daffodil

1660
Hooke observed cork cells using a

-
simple microscope.
173.S
Lianaeus proposed the two kingdom
!886 s�em: Vegetabilia and Animalia
The compound light microscope was
invented.
1937
Chatton proposed the two empire
system: Prokaryota and I:,ukaryoto.

1975 !977
(a) In the following table, put a'✓' in the appropriate boxes to show the features of each Sanger developed the first DNA Woese and his team proposed six
flowering !ant (2 marks) sequencing method to detennlne the kingdom s)"lltem: Eubacreria,
ArchaebacterU!, _x_, Fungi, Plantac
Leaves v.iith Leaves ¼ith Cl1JS!er of - nucleotide sequence of DNA.
and Animalia

L
Single flower Other features
narallel veins network veins flowers !987 ]990
lesser celandine heart-shaoed leaves The first DNA sequencing machine Wocse and his team proposed three
was invented. domain system: 13acteria, Archaea and
hyacinth
wild daffordil
funnel-like flowers
trume>et-like flowers
• Eukaryn

onmrose club-shaoed leaves a.. Name kingdom X in the six kingdom system proposed by Woese and his team in
de�d net!le two-lirrncd flowers 1977. (1 mark)
b. How did the following, technological advancements contribute to the development of

(b) Using the information from the table in (a), complete: the following dichotot11ol1S key: diffi'relll classification systems? (4 marks)
Microscopy:
(3 marks)
The plant has leaves with parallel veins DNA sequencing.:
Ia
The plant has leaves with network veins 3
Ib

2, hyacinth
lb wild dcdTodil

3a The plant has t\vo�lipped flowers

lb The plant does not have two-lipped flowers

4a 7 lesser celandine
4b primrose

174 175
 Biodiversity/ P. l Biodivc�ity I P.2

Past papers Marking Scheme- Biodiversity CE- 2002 Q.3 (b)

(i) (IJ mammal

CE-1996Q. l (a) (2) body covered with hair

(i) ( 1) The major plant group to which maize belongs produces flowers/ fruits, {ii) insects/ invertebrates
while the other group does not l
(2) "gymnosperm 1 (iii) Bnt [3 fe..::ds on rruiL�
Some seeds escape tl1e chewing action of the teeth/ the seed coal protects the seeds
(ii) (1 ) To form a new plant / to protect the emb ry o / for dispersal or the plant from being digested in the alimentary canal l
(2) To carrv the male !!amete ThLis intact seeds arc egested in the faeces
to the female gamete for fertili7..ation
(iv) Bat 8 produces a larger amount of faeces per day than bat C
(iii) dry, small, light (any one) because bat 8 feeds on plants which contains more indigestible material/
bat C reeds on blood wliich contains less indigestible material
(iv) Bread mould has branching rhizoids / root-like structures
to provide a large surface area (vJ Different types of bats have different diets
for secreting di<>estive enzymes/ enzvmes to digest the organic food thus tlie competition for food among the bats would less/ more resoLirces would be
and then absorb the digested products available to the bats/ the risk of extinction of bats due to the disappearance of a
certain food source would be smaller 1
/ Effective communication (c)
CE- 2005 Q.l

(a) P: Prokaryotes 1
CE-1998Q.1 (a) Q: Protoctists 1
(b) nucleus, mitochondria 1, I
{i) F (c) S breaks down organic matter 1
into inorganic matter which can be used by plants for growth 1
(ii) invertebrate (d) Support virus as organisms: because it can reproduce in a cell/ it has genetic
materials to control its life processes
(iii) Against virus as organisms: because it is non-cellular/ has no cytoplasm/ cannot
A C replicate by itself/ has no metabolism unless it is within a host cell 1
has mammary glands no mammary glands
no scales has slimy scales )any two 1,1
no lateral line has lateral line ) AL- 2005 lA
breathes by lungs breathes by gills )
I.
(iv) A has a higher body temperature than C Scientific name Key sequence for identification 5
This enables A to achieve a higher metabolic rate
Thus A needs more food for respiration to release more energy Animal 8: Paphia euglypta (½) Jb---,.4a-5b(l)
to compensate for the faster heat loss to the surrounding Animal C: Ostrea nigromarginata (½) lb-4b(I)
Animal D: Cypraea vitellus (½) l a-->2b-3b(l)

I Effective comnumication (c) ,1 ½ mark for underlining the scientific names of all animal specimens.

(v) Prohibit the overhunting off

Prohibit the trading ofF
Protect the breeding grounds off
Establish a reserve area to protect F
EdLicate people to protect the animals any two 1,1
 Hiodiver,;ity / P.3 Biodiversity/ P.4

DSE�2012 1B because a dichotomous key is used to identify organisms from a group based on the
observable I morphological features which may not be related to their evolutionary
4. (a) ClassA(I) (]J 1 phylogenetic relationship ( 1)
(b) the light intensity ofthe habitat is very low I the habitat is completely dark !"accept: not all observable/ morphological can reflect their evolutionary
{IJ rebtionship]
(]] (IJ
as organism X does not have eyes lo survive in the habitat ( I l [accept: a dichotomous key is purely for identifying organisms, not for
(cl the key is constructed based on the morphological characteristics of phylogenetic classification]
exisiting organism found (I)/ not all the morrhological charnclcristics of (]] f:.H.:cept: obs,;;:rvable / morphological features which may not be related to their
the phylum are listed in the key evolutionary/ phylogenetic relationship]
(d) • carry out a comparative study about the amino acid sequence or similar [accept similarities in observable/ morphological features can be resulted from
proteins/ base sequence or DNA template / mRNA ,lf similar prowins adapting the similar environment/ convergent evolution]
found in organism Y and other organisms in this phylum\ I l (]] [NOT accept: observable I morphological cannot reflect their evolutionary
(✓ acccpl comparison or devc;lopment::tl proc,·ss ' s:di,dc1r struclul's:
chemicnl composition J relationship]
to establish the phylogenetic relationship between them ( l) (]] [NOT accep!: only genetic/sequence similarities can reflect their evolutionary
6 marks rdationship]
Remorks: {("the points are 1.:ontrad11.:1my, no mark will be Kiven 2
DSE-201618
HKDSE-2017 IB
4. (a)
Leaves with Leaves with a single a clLlstcr of
Other featLlrl:5
narallel veins network veins flower ilo\\'ers
6. (a) X:Protista* (]) (])
heart-shriped
le..ser celandine ✓ I leaves
funnel-like
(b) Microscopy:
hyacinth ✓ ✓
flowers
microscopy allows the observation of cellular structures [accept
trumpet-like
membrane.bound organelles; NOT accept cell wall or cell membrane](])
wild d.iffordil I I
flower,;
this distinguishes prokaryotic cells from eukaryotic cells ( 1 ), giving rise
ch1b-shuped
to the basis ofthe two empiresystem proposed
pnmrose I ✓

•.
leaves
two-lipped DNA sequencing: (4)
dead nettle I
flower,; DNA sequencing detennines the nucleotide sequence of the DNA of
different organisms/ allows the comparison of their genetic makeups(l)
(each correct pair of charactenstics 1) [mark on the bottom left and bottom nght corners [accept RNA sequence]
respectively; accept·;· but not 'O' or "X" or other symbols] 2 so that the scientists can work out the phylogenetic relationship (1 ),
giving rise to the basis of the 3 domains system
(6) 2, The plant has a cluster of/ funnel-like nowers
111
26 The plant has a single /trumpet-like flower }
[accept neg ative statement, e.g. The plant does not have a cluster of flowers]
3a ead nettle
� } 11 J
36
4, The plant has heart-shaped leaves
} ( 11
46 The plant has club-shaped leaves
[accept negative statement, e.g. The plant does not have heart •shaped
leaves]
f
Remorkv: These rhree se/s o answers should he marked separu/ely 3

(c) this is incorrect ( !)

179
 Ecosystems I P. I Ecosystems I P 2

Past papers - Ecosystems CE - 2005

5. EVC:T)' year. people in Hong Kong consume a lot of big marine fish such as humphead
CE - 2003 wrasse (.��l- This fisl1 takes five years to rench maturity. Because or the strong market
(c) The photographs below show a Hong Kong newt and a lizard which can be found in demnnd, young fish are often caught together with the mature ones, and as a result the
Tai Mo Shan Country Park. population of this fish has decreased greatly in the past ten years.

(b) Suggest two ecological consequences of the overfishing ofhumphead wrasse. (2)
(cl Some people propose that the ca.tching of young humphead wrasse should be
prohibited. Explain why this may maintain the population ofthis fish. (3)

CE- 2005
8. (b) The picture below sl1ows a school gnrden with some tomato plants:

U:wd

(i) The two animals above belong in different vertebrate groups. Based on the
photograph, state one external feature ofthe newt that is characteristic of its group
(I) (i) Explain why continuous harvesting of tomatoes may lead to the depletion of
(ii) Name the vertebrate group to which the Hong Kong newt belongs. (I) nitrate in the garden soil. (2)
{ii) Which organism in the soil turns some of the nitrate into atmospheric nitrogen?( 1)
(iii) Only a small number of Hong Kong newts exist today and it is listed as a {iii) Suggest two ways to restore the nitrate content of the soil. (2)
protected species. Suggest two reasons to account for its small population. (2) (iv) A student flooded the soil with water. As a result, the air content of the soil
became very low. Explain why this condition may lead to poor plant growth. (3)
(iv) The diagram below shows a simplified food web in Tai Mo Shan Count!)' Park:
CE - 2007
9. {a) The photograph below shows an ecosphere:
snake ---------- !bmd
The ecosphcre is 8 self-sustaining ecosystem
sealed in glass container. It contains bacteria,
bird microscopic nlgac:, shrimps nnd branches of
"'"'�"'m
" � / 1 dend coral in l'iltered seawater.
cnnhwarm � � caterpillar

(i) Why is it essential to put the algae into the

"'wlld ff1.littree /
ecosphcrc to make it self-sustaining?
( 1) With reference to the given food web, draw a food chain that consists of five (4)
trophic levels. (I) (ii) How can the activity ofthe bacteria contribute to tl1e growth of algae? (2)
(2) Construct a pyramid of numbers for this food chain. (2) (iii) This ecosphere can only support two trophic levels. Suggest a possible
(3) Explain the shape ofthis pyramid of numbers. (4) explanation for this. (2)

mo
 Ecosystems I P.3 Ecosystems / P.4

(2) With reference to the process of water treatment in Hong Kong,

8. {a) In order to increase the yield of crops, fanners may add inorganic f"enilizers and explain why instruction I is necessary. (2 marks)
fungicides to the field. Fungicides can kill fungi \Vhich may infect crop plants. The
table below shows the effect of applying these chemicals to a wheat field. (3) Why is it necessary to leave the filter operating for four weeks before
putting fish in the aquarium? (1 mark)
Mass of inorganic Yield of wheat (arbitrary ttnit)
fertilizers added (kg) With the addition of fungicides Without the addition of fungicides (iii) Cindy is advised to grow some water plants in the aquarium. What is the
0 33 33 role oftl1e ·water plants in the cycling of materials in the aquarium?(2 marks)
80 54 52
160 64 60 CE-2010
240 68 61
320 70 58 7 Thlc diagram bdow shows the energy flow in a food chain.

(i} Plot a graph to show the yield of 1vhea1 when dilfrr�nt am(lunts of inorganic &n,:ri.Y ga<=d by <>'1,!JQltlm� �<torcdl<lbi,:,ma,s.,.

fertilizers are added in the presence and in the absence ol rungicidi::s (3) (lllb[c,,ry �nit) (;u-biuury llllil)

(ii) With the reference to the graph plotted. describe the effect of fongicides and
inorganic fertilizers on they ield of wheat. (3) �01..br;-·Co1JC>umer
cl
____ ______,..-�----"-----..J
"°
CE- 2009
10. {a) The following diagram shows the freshwater aqLL.1.rium set up by Cindy.
Prim;i:y Con;um.,,r

208� 8863

All the fish died after one week. She learnt from the internet that a high level of
ammonia in water is harmful to the fish. She suspected that this cau.sed their
death. (a) Explain the difference between the energy stored in biomass and the energy gained at
(i) Account for the presence of ammonia in the aquarium. (2 marks) each trophic level. {2)
(ii) After searching on the internet, she found that the ammonia concentration (b) Suggest two reasons to explain why in each trophic level the energy gained is always
in water can be lowered by installing a biological filter seeded with less than the energy that can be provided by the previous trophic level. (2)
bacteria. To set up the aquarium again, she purchased a biological filter (c) Below is the comparison of the average mass of individual organisms in a food chain:
and noted to following instructions:
Average mass of individual organisms (arb itrary
l. Leave the tap water in the aquarium for at least one night before unit)
installing the filter. Producer 100000
II. Allow the filter to operate for four weeks b<Jfore putting fish in the Primal}' consumer l
aquarium. Secondary consumer 100

( 1) What kind of bacteria is seeded in the: biological filter? Explain how Sketch a pyramid uf numbers relating the three trophic levels. (3)
this kind cf bacteria can lower the ammonia cn11centration in the
aquarium. (2 marks)
 Ecosystems I P.5 Ecosyste= I P.6

CE- 2010 AL- 2006 lA

9. (b) Mikania is a climber plant which originates in South America. It climbs up other 2. Each of the following figures shows the changes in population density of Mo interacting
plants to reach for better sunlight. Its leaves grow extensively and cover the affected species:
plants, eventually leading to the death ofthe plants. The photO,b'Taph below shows
Fig11rt I
Mikania and the affected plant
spedes I
Population
density

--�
Time
Figurt2

. species 3
Population ;
Mik.mii
density \
\ / \
\.
-..........- '-·
species 4

Time

Name the type of interaction between the species in each case. (2 )

Figure 1 Figure 2:
(i) With reference to the photograph, identify the plant group to which Mikania
belongs. (I) AL� 2007 lA
1. The following flowchan shows part ofthe nitrogen cycle in the aquatic ecosystem.
(ii) State the relationsl1ip between Mlkania and the affected plant. Suggest how (a) In each of the boxes below. state a compound which contains nitrogen. (3 marks)
Mikania can lead to the death of the affected plant. (3) (b) In the flowchart circle the process that incorporates inorganic nitrogen into the living
system. ( 1 mark}
(iii)A researcher wanted to find a way to control the spread ofMikania. He dissolved nitrogen in aquatic environment
discovered that a native parasitic plant, dodder(g:;:fi-f-). coils around the Mikania l nitrogen fixation
and absorbs nutrients form them. He then conducted a study by gro�ving dodder in
Mikania-affected areas A andBon an island. Tl1e results are shown in the table
below:
% coverage ofMikania on the affected plant l feeding
with dodder coiled without dodder coiled
I Area A 20 98 organic nitrogen in animal tissue

I AreaB 75 99 Jdecomposition

{l) State one limitation of using dodder for controlling the spread ofMikania. (ii)
Give supporting evidence from the above results. (2)
nitrification
(2) Apart from dodder, an invertebrate from another country can also control the
(iii)
spread ofMikania by feeding on them. From the ecological point ofview,
suggest three reasons why this invertebrate should not be introduced to Hong
Kong to control Mikania. (3)
J derntnt1cat1on

nitrogen
 -,
Ecosystems / P.7 Ecosystems / P.S

A
AL- 2007 lA DSE-2012 1B
prey
2. The graph below shows the
change in the population size of 6. The diagram below shows a food chain in an ocean. The energy content of each trophic
' --,\
a prey species and its predator '' ''
\_\redal.!Jr level is shown in the boxes:
species in the natural
' '' ' ''
environment over a period of -�' '--� ',_
time:
Time

(a) Explain why the predator and prey populations fluctuate as shown in the graph. (4)
(b) Explain why the prey population does not drop to zero. (l)

I�
_;<.:
AL-2009 lA Krill
l 0000001
3. Linc transect is a kind of sampling method used in ecological studies.
{a) What is the criterion for choosing a location to place thi:! transect (2)
line in a habitat?
(b) State two limitations ofthis sampling method.

AL-20101A
4. The following !1owchan shows the amount of energy incorporawd into the biomass at each
trophic level when energy flows througl1 a food chain (all t:ne:rgy values arc given in (n} In !Ii� s1x1i.:e below. calculate !he pc!rcentage decrease in energy content from
arbitraryunit.s): uniccl lular phytoplankton to krill. (2 marks)

.:=, Se;;,:;JI'}
(b} Give twu reasons why there is a decrease in energy content from a lower trophic level
➔ conc;anw:., ➔
l6U to a higher one (2 marks}

(s) Using the above data, complete the following table 10 sho.v the ern.!Tb'Y transfer (c) In another food elm.in, the producer is tree and the primary consumer is caterpillar.
efficiency in this food chain. (II Would the perc<'!ntage decrease in energy content be greater or smaller than the value
found in (a)? Explain your answer. (2 marks)
Energy transfer efficiency(%)
From producers to primary consumers 10
From primary consumers to secondary consumers HKDSE - 2013 lB
From secondary consumers to tertiary consumers 20
5. Knowing that the nitrogen cycle is important to the healthy growth of fish, Tom purchased
(b) Explain the low energy transfer efficiency from producers to primary consumers. (3) testing kits to monitor the levels of ammonia, nitrite and nitrate in his aquarium. He kept the
(c) The tertiary consumers ofthis food chain are ectotherms. lfthese tertiary consumers aquarium aerated with an air pump. The graph below shows the changes in the
were endothemis, what would the change be in the enert,ry transfer efficiency from concentrations of the three compounds over 50 days:
secondary consumers to tertiary consumers? Give an explanation for your answer. (2)
 Ecosystems / P.9 Ecosystems I P. l 0

HKDSE- 2014 lB

5. ln a study, a plot of land was burnt by fire. After this, the vegetation on this land, classified
into herbs and woody plants, was monitored for 8 years. The percentage cover of each type
ofvegetation is shown in the graph below:

100

------- Woody plarus

(a) Name the process that led to the changes shO\vn in the graph. (l mark) -------------
(b) After three weeks, Tom observed a high concentration of nitrite in the water and the
fish were showing symptoms of nitrite poisoning. Therefore. Tom added n suspension Yeanaflerbuming
of a bacterial culture to the water to lower the nitrite concentration. Suggest the type of
bacteria he added and explain how it lowered the nitrite concentra!ion. (2 marks) (a) Whicl1 type orsuccession is shown in the above case? Explain your answer. (:2 marks)
( bl (il Describe brie!ly how the dominant community of vegetation changes with time
(c) To prevent the accumulation of nitrate, Tom regularly replaced some water in the a!'ter the tire (:2 marks)
aquarium with fresh water. What else could Tom do to lower the nitrate conccntmtion�(:2 marks) (ii) Explain the changes in th,c: dominant described in (i). (4 marks)

HKDSE- 2013 1B 1--1 l{DSE- 2015 1B

8. A study was carried out to investigate the distribution and abundance of animal species A 3. The diagram below shows the feeding relationships among some organisms in a marine
and Bo n a rock')' shore. The table below shows the results obtained from the back of the ecosystem:
shore to the waterfront:

Distru,ce from the back of Abundance (number of individuals m-2")

Ilic shore (m) S=cies A Snecies B
I 10 0
2
3
4
25
40
38
'
2

JO
5 20 20
6 ts 35
7 15 33
8 (waterfront) \\ 28

( a) Plot a graph to show the results. (5 marks)

(a) Write dovm the shortest food chain found iTI the diagram. (1 mark)
(bl Based on the information in the graph, suggest which species would have a higher (b) In the space provided below. draw the pyramid of numbers for the food chain in (a).
tolerance to desiccation. Explain your answer. (4 marks) (:2 marks)
(c) Explain the shape of the pyramid of numbers drawn in (b). (3 marks)
( c) Briefly describe the sampliTig procedure used to obtain the above data. (3 marks) (d) Suggest two practical methods that allow you to confirm the feeding relationships
among various organisms in this ecosystem. (2 marks)
 Ecosystems / P. 12

HKDSE-2016 JR H.KDSE�20l7IB

f
5. The diagram below shows some biotic and abiotic factors ofa rocky shore, tbe distribution 8. In an investigation about the ef ect of soil bacteria on the gro\vth of plant X, three types of
of two crab species and their temperature tolerance: soil bacteria (A, B and C) were grown separately in one type of culture solution. After this.
each bacterial culture was added to the soil of separate pots of plant X. A control was
Middle shore Lo¥•ershnN prepared by adding the culture solution only. The average height of plant X was recorded at
/ AJ�l biom=: 4 _g m �i r Alga! hlom.i�; 8 g m-:
i Mcantcropcr.iture:21�c M<:llll temperature: l s<C day l and day 60 ofthe experiment. The results are shown in tlie chart below:
' Crab specb A: "'LT5:1 ,� 25 C
Q
Crab Sp,:!des B: .,Cr�0�, 2!rC
I'.
�
( !

40
a� J5
lii::posed_;,f<e----­ Luid c.oven:d by JO
� !and tides pe:riodicaUy -----a,l<e--- Submerg� land ---;)-

* Median lethal temperature (LTso): When a species is exposed tu that temperature for 24 hours,
",.
]
25

10
half of the individuals die. g,
J5
(a) The two species coexist on a rocky shore and feed on the same species of alga. Whcm
the two crab species are kept in a simulated habitat with the ::ilgal species, they will
fight against each other. According to the information given in the diagram, deduce 5
which crab species, A or B, would be a stronger competitor. (3 marks)
(bJ Deduce whether temperature tolerance is a determining fo.::wr forthe distribution of 0 Bacterium C
these crab species. (4 m::irks)
(c) Explain why quadrats are unsuitable for studying the nbundance of crabs <m the rocky Witll reference 10 the above results, state the effect of each type of bacterium 011 the
shore. (2 111arks) growth of pl::111t X (J marks)
Bnct..:rium A:
Bacterium B.
Bactc:rium C-

b. It is known that both bacteria A and B are able to colonise the root of plant X and
obtain nutrients from the root for growth. Suggest the possible ecological
relationships between each type of bacterium and plant X. (2 marks)
Bacterium A·
Bacterium B:
 Ecosystems / P. 13 Ecosystems / P.14

HKDSE-20191B
In a subsequent experiment, the effect of temperature on the grmvth of bacteria A and 7. The table below shows the changes in soil nitrogen content and the number of species of
B was tested and the results are shown in the graph below: herbaceous plants and \Voody plants before and after a landslide on a hillside:

: Soil nitrogen content Number of J�m snedts

Herhll.eetius r,lants Woody plane.
7
!
' {mg i;"') {e.g. c.ra�sl (e.g. shrubs md m:�s)
Key: --- Bacterium A 13efort land.slide I 6 IQ 15

·E
6 2 \'enrs after landslide
20 ve�r:; ntkr landslide
I l
)
17
14 '
5
(a) What type or ecological succession occurred on the hillside after the landslide?
4 Explain yotir answer. (2 marks)
(b} (i) Explain the change in the soil nitrogen content shown in the above table. (3 marks)
� 3
e (ii)With reference to the change in soil nitrogen content, explain the change
in the plant composition after the landslide in terms of the number of
species ofl1erbaceous and woody plants. (3 marks)

9. The apple snail originates from South Africa. It was first imported to Asian countries for
0
JO 20 30 40 50 60 human consumption. However, it escaped to the local wetland liabitat. Below are data
Temperaturn (0C) regarding the average growth rates of apple snail and a local species K when they were
Indicate the optimum temperature for the growth of bacteria A and B raised separately and raised together:
respectively. (1 mark)
Bacterium A:

',,------.,----
Bacterium B:
7 f•·
·-.'----:"�---\

!l�r-i
"
ii. Nonna] soil temperature in Hong Kong is around 30 °C in summer. Global 6 , I !
5 'I ' I ,.,.: :
warming has led to an increase in soil temperature within 2°C. With reference 4 --·-+_,1m<J��1ta.iv---+-----j -------7,---_··� · -· i

to the above graph, predict the changes in the population sizes of bacteria A and
� ' i/ i - r----� �!
:
.:.._!2�Sllilll
i
B in soil in summer. (2 marks) -
·;v.:::"�-:e.-tSt1au�
I ' .;,,-- ! ' ji J.,_,---4'
I )(----�---- =ilK
l 2 •I 5 0 ::
d. Plant X is a foreign species that is more competitive than the native plant species in Time (month)
Hong Kong. With reference to your answers in (a) and (c)(ii), suggest a possible impact (a) With reference to the above data, what would happen to the population of snail Kin
of global wanning on the native plant community. Explain your answer. (2 marks) the wetland habitat once the apple snails have escaped to this habitat? Support your
answer with data from the graphs above. (4 marks)
(b) It has been noted that apple snails consume wetland plants at a high rate, especially
buds and young leaves. Suggest why the feeding habitats of apple snails may have an
adverse effect on the community oflocal wetland habitats. (3 marks)
(c) Apart from tl1e above, suggest another biotic factor which may explain why an
imported species would tum into an invasive or dominant species. (I mark)
(d) Suggest one human activity which migl1t lead to an invasion of imported species in
Hong Kong (1 mark)

l'/)
 Ecosystems i P.15 Ecosystems / P 16

HKDSE- 2020 IB
The diagram below shows the !Ota! biomass (arbitrary unit) ;it each trophic level inn 6 The diagmm below shows a mini-ecosystem in which waste water from a fish tank is
marine ecosystem: used as a source ofnt1trients for plant gro\.Vlh by making use of the interaction among
fish, microorg:i.ntsms and plants. Adding fertilisers and periodic change of water are not
necessary This is an eco-friendly way to grow vegetables and raise fish for human
'"'
oonsumcrs
consumption.

;i
w::i�tc warcr+ f

produ<:er.i

I llOO

(a) As the trophic level becomes higher, the total biomass of each level decreases. (al Ammonia, a toxic substance, is the major waste product excreted by fish.
Give two reasons for this phenomenon. (2marks) Ammonia in waste water from the fish tank can be converted to nitrate, which is
Reason 1: required by plants for gro\.Vlh.
Reason 2:
(i) Name the bacteria involved in the conversion. (1 mark)
(b) Sharks, being the top consumers in tht: ocean, play an important role in keeping
the populations of other marine organisms under control. It is predicted that the (ii) Describe how plants can obtain nitrate from waste water and make use ofit
extinction of sharks would result in overpopulation of producers. Explain how for protein synthesis in their leaves. (3 marks)
this would happen. (3 marks)
{b) The air pump perfonns some important functions in this system. Describe these
functions. (2 marks)

(c) tr double the amount offish food is added accidentally, some fish will die a fow
days later. Based on your knowledge ol'the cycling of materials, suggest an
explanation for this phenomenon. (4 marks)
 Eco5yslerns / P. I Ecosystems / P :1.

Past papers Marking Scheme- Ecosystems CE- :l.007 Q.9

(a) (i) I! converts light energy to chemical energy
CE- 2003 Q.1 (c) which is passed along the food chain to support other organisms
lt also maintains a steady air composition
(i) naked skin by releasing oxygen and absorbing carbon dioxide
(ii) Amphibia / Amphibian (ii) Bacteria break down the organic matter to inorganic matter
{iii) Destruction/ lack of habitats for the Hong Kong ne,vt which is then absorbed and used by algae for growth
The newt may have low reproductive potential (iii) The biomass of algae is limited in the ecosphere
Poor ability to find food/ insufficient food supply Energy is lost along food chain
Poor defensive mechanism against natural enemies and cann�t support more trophic levels
Hunted by humans any two 1.1
CE- 2008 Q.8
(iv) (I) wild fruit tree___. caterpillar-,. lizard-,. bird__,. snake I (a) (i) Title (T) .. I
(2) Drawing ofthe pyramid: upright inverted bottom 1,1 Correct plotting and joining of points (P). .... 11/2
Correct labelliM of curves (G) ... 1/2

$ ""
Other alternative for the title:
burl Effect of different amount of fertilizers on the yield of wheat in the presence and in the
li=d absence of fungicide
--�-----�--( c:ate,-pillM The yield ofwheat when different amounts of fertilizers are added in the presence and in
wild o,,;, troo the absence of fungicide
The effect offertilizers and funrricides ont the yield of wheat
(3) Energy is lost along the food chain
due to respiration/ excretion/ incomplete ingestion and digestion of food I e.g. Title: Effect of the use of fungicide on the yield of wheat when different amount of
death I fertilizers were added
thus the number of organisms in each trophic level decreases from caterpillar
to snake l
However, the biomass/energy/size of the fruit tree is much greater than that
ofa caterpillar, so a fruit tree can suppon many caterpillars 1
Hu�cidc

CE- 2005 Q.5 itKU\offw,,,.,.,id"

(b) Because it leads to extinction of the species/ decrease in bioversity

and an increase in the population of its prey
(c) It allows the young fish to reach sexual maturity
so that they can carry out reproduction
As a result, the production ofoffspring can compensate for the loss of fish

CE- 2005 Q.8 (b) "'

Mu, ofinmi;urii-. fmiliior.111ddcd lkt:)
(i) The nitrate in the soil is absorbed by the tomato plant for growth
(ii) Any three ofthe following: . ....... ............ 1. l. 1
When tomatoes are harvested, the nitrogen in the tomatoes is not recycled to the soil
denitrifying bacteria In the presence of fungicide, the yield of wheat increases with the
(ii) l
increase in the amount of fertilizer added (from 0 kg to 320 kg)
In the absence of fungicide, the yield of wheat increases with the
(Iii) add chemical fertilizer
increase in the amount of fertilizers added till 240 kg. and decreases
bury leaves/ organic matter into the soil
when fertilizers added is higher than 240 kg
grow leguminous plants any two 1,1
The yield of wheat is higher in the presence ofrungicide than in the
absence of fungicide
(iv) When the soil became poorly aerated, plant roots would not have oxygen for
The difference in the yield or wheat between the presence and
respiration I
the absence of fungicide increases when the use of fertilizers increases
Thus they cannot absorb mineral salts from the soil I
by active transport I
resulting in poor plant growth

197
 Ecosystems/ P.3 Ecosystems/ P.4

CE - 201 0 Q.9b
1st and 2nd points can be written as:
Tlie yield of wheat increases with the increase in the 1;1mount of fertilizer 9. (b) (i) Flowering plant/ dicotyledons (I)
added in both cases tmtil 240 kg or fertilizers added
Beyond 240 kg fenilizers added, the yield of wheat increases in the (ii) competition ii)
presence of fungicides but decreases in the absence of Mikania covers the affected plant so the underlying plant cannot get sufficient
funL;icides amount of light (I)
for photosynthesis to make enough food (IJ
{iii) Leaching of fertilizers tu the aquatic habitat ne;,rhy. e.g rivers,.
will lead to the rapid growth of algae I algal bloom. (iii) ( l) The dTectiveness of using dodder for controlling the spread of Mikania
varies greatly in different areas {I)
Any one of the following:. because the reduction in% coveraue of Mikania caused bv the dodder
Other organisms in the habitat will sulTocuie du� tu oxygen depiction ::llnight in area Bis much lower than those-in area A. ill
The algae may block the gills ofthi:: fish and suffocate it
The algae may produce toxins which kills other aqu..itic organisms OR
Abundant of suspended algae prevents light from rc:aching the aquatic plants Thi:: use: of dodder is not a perfect i ideal solution for complete elimination
below ofMikania II)
as th<:% coverage of Mikania in both areas A and B does not drop to zero
CE- 2009 Q.10 (a) even when dodder is introduced (])

(a) (i) Nitrogenous wastes released by the fish (2) (A) 8-::cause there 1s no predators/ paras11es/ natural enemies for
is decomposed to ammonia by bacteria this mtroduced mvertebrate m HK
(B) 'J hey may feed on other local organ1sms1 disturb the local food
(ii) (I) Nitrifying bacteria chams or webs } an) three{3}
They convert ammonia into nitrate (CJ The) mav carry pathogens that do not exist m HK before
(2) The residual chlorine in the ta! water may kill the bacteria (D) They may upset the ex1stmg ecological equ1l!bnum
Leaving the tap water for at least one night allows time for
chlorine gas to escape
(3) To allow the multiplication of bacteria to a sufficient population
AL-2006 lA
(iii) Water plants can absorb the nitrates in the aquarium
The nitrates are sued for synthesis of proteins 2. Figure 1: *competition (I) 2
Figure 2: *predation (1)
Water plants can carry out photosynthesis I, J
to provide .o;-.'}-' gen for other organisms/ to lower the carbon dioxide any one set
. AL-2007 IA
concentration m water }

CE- 2010 Q.7 1. (a) i. proteins (1) / amino acids

ii. ammonia ( 1) i ammonium compounds
7. (a) The amount of energy stored in biomass is always less than the amount of energy iii. nitrate (I) i nitrite
gained at each trophic level ( l) (b) circle - nitrogen fixation
because energy is lost as heat during respiration/ only pan or the energy gained is used
for growth/ energy is lost in form of metabolic wastes ( 1)
AL- 2007 lA
( b) Energy is lost/ trapped in the undigested/ unabsorbed parts of organisms of the
previous level any two 2. (a) • v,·hen the predation pressure/ predator population is low, the prey population can
Energy is lost in the uneaten parts of organisms of the previous kvel (2) increase rapidly (1)
Energy trapped in the dead bodies of organism is not available to the organisms a greater population of prey can suppon rapid growth of/ increase in the predator
of next higher trophic level/ is redirected to the decomposers population ( 1) / reproduction of the predator, thus the predator population increases
subsequently
(c) Shape:.. ....... (2 or OJ the prey population will drop due to increased predation(!)
Secondary Consumer
Label.. i1 I when the food supply {prey) becomes less, predator population will drop
Primary Consumer subsequently\ l) and the cycle repeats ( l)
(b) • when the prey population becomes extremely low. it is very hard for the predator to
locate the remaining prey (1) / predator is forced to feed on other prey
Producer
 Ecosystems! P.5 Ecosystems/ P.6

AL-20091A HKDSE - 2013 1 B

3. (a) Any ONE of the following: 5. (a) nitrification j• ( l) (I)

place the transect line across a se lected site where there is
zonation of plants and animals ( 1) along with physical factors (1) (b ) nitrifying bacteria ( 1 ).
which convert nitrite to nitrate (1) and help lower the nitrite level (2)
place the transect line across a selected site where is (2l
sucessional change (1) along with physical factors {1)
changes in physical factors ( 1) tha! are suspected to affect plants (c) adding aquatic plants to the aquarium ( 1)
the plants would assimilate/ absorb/ convert nitrate into their biomass (I). (2)
and animals distribution (1)

(b) any TWO ofthe following: HKDSE - 2013 1B

only organisms that touch the line transect are recorded (1)
the population/ density/ abundance of the organisms are ( 2l 8. (a} • correct title ( 1)
not estimated (1) concept: distribution of species, defined location. e.g.
applicable to sessile organisms only (1) > The distribution and abundance of animal species A and B on.11.
rockv shore
> Abundance of animal species from the back of a shore to the
AL-2010IA waterfront
choice ofa'<es (1) (5)
4. (a) 20 ( ll with labels and units (1)
X: distance from the back of the shore(m); Y: abundance (number of
(bl plants contain a high proportion of cellulose and sometimes li1,,rnin (1) (3) individuals m-2 or 111-:!)
which are relafr.iely indigestible (1) correct plotting and joining of line showing the distribution of species A
and therefore unavailable as energy sources for most herbivores (1) and B (1.1)

(bl species A is found to be more abundant at the back of the shore than
!cl the energy transfer efficiency would be lower (1 )/ less energy would (2) species B ( 1 )
be incorporated the back of tl1e shore has a lower chance/ less period of time to be covered
endotherms spend more ener1,,ry in maintaining a constant body temperature by water ( \)
thus. organisms found at this region is more likely to face the problem of (4)
desiccation (I)
DSE-2012JB therefore. it can be deduced that species A has a higher tolerance of
desiccation { 1)
6. (a) ( 10 000 000- 1 000 000) / IO 000 000 x 100% = 90% (Renmk accept -YO')-i,)
Method/ equation l mark (Ll l {c) place a transect line from tl1e back of the shore to the waterfront (1)
Correct answer l mark place a quadrnt along l11e transact line at regular intervals (1)
(3)
count the number of Species A and B in the quadrat ( 1} and record the
(b) some energy is not obtained by the organisms of higher trophic level <IS results
part of the body of prey is not consumed (1) / part of the food is not
digestible or is egested (1) I-IKDSE- 20141 B
some energy is lost by the organisms at the higher trophic level througl1 5. (a) secondary succession ( 1)
excretion{!}/ respiration ( 1) / in the fon11 of heat ( l) (I)
because it involves the restoration of the community after a major (21
Remarks: disturbance. i.e. !ire ( 1)
Anv two of the above.
Th.i: words ·•higher trophic lcvcl" arc'. not n:quircd. 1 -lo,wver. if the (b) (i) l"rom year Oto 3. herbs is the dominant vegetation (1)
wrong trophic level is mentioned. the mark will not be awarded. (2)
from year 3 to 8, woody plant is the dominant vegetation(])
some individt10.ls csc<1pe from predation is not accepted.
Ii the underground sprouting organs and seeds were not damaged in the
(c) the percentage decrease in energy content is greater (I) (I)
as caterpillars mainly feed on leaves of trees, leaving most of the part of fire (1 ).
the biomass oftress unconsumed (1) / \ignin is not consumed Ill herbs generally germinate and grow faster than woody plants (1)
6 marks
hence the percentage cover ofherbs increased rapidly at first (1) and I 41
become the dominant vegetation in the first three years
as woody plants continue to grow and over-shadow the herbs. thus
out-compete the herbs for light (1). they replace herbs as the
dominant vegetation

HKDSE-20151B
 Ecosystems/ P. 7 Ecosystems f P.S

HKDSE-2017 lB
3. (a) phytoplankton --+ fish _. shark ( l)
(Text description is not accepted) 8. (a) Bacterium inh ibitslnjnders/sl ows dmvn/prevents/decreases/has ne"ative
Ac effect on (do NOT accept ·'stops'') (the growth of plant X) (1)
Shark: (all symbols like+ are not accepted)
(b) Bacterium promotes/increases/has positive effect on (the growth of plant (3)
B: X)(l)
Fish: 2 Bacterium has no obvious effect on /a neutral effect on/ does not change
C: (the growth of plant X) (1)
Phytoplankton:
(bJ Bacterium parasitic (1)/ pathogenic
correct shape (I) A:
Bacterium mutualistic (1) (do NOT accept symbiotic) (2)
!ables (1) 2
B·
(c) Not all energy in the lower tropic level is transtel"rcd to the next higher level ( l) / (c) (i) Bacterium 30( °C)
ener1:,,y is lost along the food chain due to respiration N /30/29/31
and the organisms at lower levels are smaller in si1..e / biomass ofindivid ual { 1) Bacterium 35(°C) (1)
(Not accept biomass of the who!� tropl1ic level) B· /35/34/36
therefore, a larger number of individuals at a lower uophie levd is required
{ii) population size of bacterium A decreases ( 1) while
to support those m upper levels ( 1) 3 population size ofbacterium B increases (1) (2)

(dJ Any two of the following: id) • nativi! plant community decreases in size/diversity (due to the threat of
by dissecting the gut of the predators to find 011! 11hat prey items are plant X} ( 1) (_do NOT accept: "native plant community may die'" or ··plant
inside (I) X become5 dominant")
because inhibition on the growth of plant X decreases a.� the population (2)
field observation oftl1e feeding relationship (I)
size of bacterium A decreases /the gr0\vrl1 of plant X increases as the
(direct observation is not accept) population size or bacterium B increases (1)
laboratory study by offering different preys to a predator (I) 2 IO marks
IIKDSE-2019 IB

HKDSE 2016 IB 7. (a) secondar_y succession( I)

5 (a) species B {I)
the lower shore has higher algal biomass which indicates that it is a more
favourable area (I)
a stronger competitor normally occupies a more favourabl� habitat (I)
(b) mean temperature at the lower shore is lower than that at the middle shore/ vice
versa(])
iftemperature tolerance is a determining factor, middle shore should be
unfavourable to species A/ lower shore should be more favourable to species A (1)
however, species A occupied middle shore instead oflower shore (1)
therefore, there are other factors determining the distribution I temperature
tolerance is not the determining factor ( I)
(c) quadrat sampling relies on counting organisms in a confined area ( 1)
so it is only useful for studying plants or very slow moving organisms/ crabs may
move away from the guadrat (])
(2)
because succession occurred in pre�existing soil/ pre-existing plants ( 1)
(b) 01 afier the landslide, the original vegetation/ top soil was removed, so the
soi! nitrogen content fell/ after the landslide, rapid growth of herbaceous
3 plant absorbed nitrogen from the soil_ so the soil nitrogen content fell (1)
some plant species have symbiotic nitrogen fixing bacteria in their root
nodules, which enrich the soil nitrogen content by fixing atmosphere (max. 3)
nitrogen ( 1)
as time went by, the dead mass of the new vegetation was decomposed by
soil bacteria(])
hence releasing nitrogen compounds back into the soil (1 ), and so soil
nitrogen content increased with time
4 (ii) in the early stage/ 2 years after the landslide, there were many more
herbaceous plant species than woody plant species (I)
since the nutrient requirements of herbaceous plant species are lower than
those of woody plant species (1), low soil nitrogen content favours the
(3)
growth of herbaceous plants/ does not favour the growth of woody plants
2 subsequently, the number of woody plants species increased as the soil
nitrogen content continued to increase (1)

8 marks
 Ecosystems/ P.9

HKDSE-2019 IB Past papers - Photosynthesis

9. (a) both apple snails and snail K showed a lower growth rate when they were
CE- 2003
raised together (1)
this shows that there was competition between apple snails and snail K for 4. (a) In the 17th century, a Dutch scientist, van Helmont, wanted to test the following
habitat and / or food ( 1) hypothesis: the soil is the main source of food for plant growth. He grew a young
the growth rate of snail K would be slower and some of them would fail to 'Willow plant in a known mass of soil for five years. In this period, he only supplied the
reach maturity for reproduction/ death rate of snail K would be higher (1)
so the population of snail K would fall/ decline (1) plant 'Mith water. His investigation is summarized in the diagram below:
OR (4 )
apple snails had a higher growth rate when raised separately from snail K (1),
the growth rate of snail K fell significantly when raised together with apple
snails (1)
this shows that apple snails were more competitive than snail K (I)
hence the population of snail K would fall/ decline (J)

(b ) in the long tenn, plants would fail to reach maturity for reproduction (1)
it reduces the size of the plant community in the habitat (1), 76.90 kg
this would reduce food availability/ shelter for other animals (l) plant
OR (3)
{i) Calculate the change in mass of the d ry soil and that of the plant in these five
in the short tenn, plants would grow more slowly (1)
the biomass of producers would decrease (1) years. (I)
this would reduce food availability for other herbivores/ animals ( 1) (ii) Based on tl1e results obtained in (i), what conclusion can you draw with reference
to the above hypothesis? Explain your answer. (3)
(c) • lack of natural predators in the local habitat/ a high rate of reproduction { 1) (I)
(iii) Explain why it is important to put a cover on the pot in this investigation. (2)
(d) any rea�onable answers such as: (iv) At vnn Helmonrs time, people did not know that carbon dioxide in tl1e air is also
release of imported pets to the natural environment once owners cannot/ do not needed by plants for mnking food.
want to keep them anymore ( 1) (I)
release of imported organisms to the natural environment for religious purposes ( l ) ( l) You are provided with a destarched potted plant. Draw a labeled diagram of an
bringing in non-local seeds/ plants which the reproduce and spread to the wild experimental set-up wl1icl1 can be used to show that cc1.rbon dioxide is
habitat through seed dispersal {1) necessary for the plant to make food (3)
9 marks (2) What is the purpose of destarcl1ing tlie plant before the experiment? State how
you would destarch the plant. (2 )
CE- 2004
2. (b) In l 883, a German scientist, Engelmann, used a green alga to study the effect of light
on photosynthesis. This alga has long ribbon-like chloroplasts. He placed the alga on a
slide with a suspension of bacteria which would migrate to regions with high oxygen
concentration. He observed the distribution of the bacteria under different light
conditions. The results are shown in the diagram below:
''"'
--.
red ligh.t ',>(lt

green light spot

blue light spot

I. lnd3rkness IL underwhi!elight m. undalight',>(lts

c,fdiffercm colours
 Pliutosynthesis i P.2 Photosynthesis I P.3

(i) Describe the distribution of bacteria in I and II. (2) CE- 2007
(ii) How would you account for the bacteria distribution in II? (2) 3. The photomicrograph below shows a cross
(iii) What did Engelmann wish to find out by setting up the experiment in Ill? (1) section ofa dicotyledonous leaf:
(iv) What conclusions can you draw from the results in III? (2)
(v) (l) Draw a labeled diagram to show in experimental set-up used to test whether (a) With reference to the photomicrograph,
the conclusions in (iv) is correct or not. You are provided with a waterweed, a give two structural differences
table lamp, colour filters and materials that you can get in the laboratory. (3) between cell types X and Y.
(2) What data would you collect with this set-up? (1) (2 marks) y
(b) (i) 1, the presence of light,
CE - 2006 carbohydrates "" formed aad
8. (a) The diagram below shows a set-up used to measure the rate of photosynthesis of a then stored in cell type Y
pondweed. A lamp was placed at different distances from the pondweed. At each ( 1) State the carbohydrate
distance, the volume of gas collected per minute was taken as the rate of stored. (1 marks)
photosynthesis. (2) If you have prepared a thin section of a leaf, how would you show the
presence of the stored carbohydrate in it? (3 marks)
position �fplu11g,:1 (ii) Explain why the stored carbohydrate in cell type Y disappears when the plant is
remain:, uncllangod
kept in darkness? (3 marks)

{cl During transpiration, water evaporates from the surface of cell type Y. How does this
,''i,,:rrr- sodium help cell type Y to obtain minerals? (3 marks)
h�d•ogcnca,bonatc
solution
CE - 2009
i f--11--~ ,µaduat•d tiJbc
5. (a} The photomicrograph below show the cross-section of a
leaf of a dicotyledonous plant. A to E show the different
pans of the leaf.

Using the letters in the photomicrograph, list the

The results ofthe experiment are shown in the table below: parts m descending order of their photosynthetic
rates. ( l mark)
Light intensity (arl>itrary unit) Rate of photosynthesis (mm' min"1) (iil State t\\'o features of the part with highest
0.4 0.0 photosynthetic rate shown in the photomicrograph
0.6 0.8
and explain l1ow these features contribute to its
1.6 2.0
high photosynthetic rate. (3 marks)
2.5 2.7
5.0
(iii) Explain how the arrangement of the cells in pan D
3.5
10.0 3.5 facilitates photosynthesis. (2 marks)

(i) How would you measure the volume of gas collected per minute using this set-up?
{1) ( b) The arrangement of the leaves of an African violet is
(ii) Present the results ofthe experiment in the form ofa graph. (4) sl1own in the photograph below.
(iii) Describe and explain the change in the rate of photosynth�sis with light intensity.(4)
(iv) Explain why the rate of photosynthesis becomes O even there is 0.4 arbitrary unit How does the arrangement of the leaves of this plant help
of!ight. (2) photosynthesis? (] mark)
 Photosyntfiesis / PA Photosynthesis / P.5

CE-2010 AL-20042A

6. The following table shows the comparison of two vital processes -- photosynthesis and 2. The following now chan shows the Calvin cycle:
aerobic respiration. Complete the table with suitable words.

Photosynthesis Aerobic respiration

riliolose bl<phMphzite (RuBI') gly�ot-:.te pho�le (GF)
Type of metabolic process Anabolism {a) (a 5-co,bon CO, oceoptar) (a 3-corbnneonipound)

Organelle where the process Chloroplasts (b)

occurs
Raw materials needed (c) Glucose and oxygen CoMn<yclc
Energy conversion from (d) ___ en ef),,'Y from chemical energy in ADP +Pi

to chemical energy in glucose to chemical energy in

glucose ATP and (e) energy

NADPH
Total: 5 marks
compound A

co,npoun<I D

=bohydnte,

(a) The rate of GP formation can be affected by a number of external factors. Explain why
two of these external factors can have this effect. (2)
(b) Describe the roles of ATP and NADPH in the conversion of GP to compound A. (2)
(c) If all of compound A is channeled to fonn compound B, what will be the effect on the
Calvin cycle? Why? (3)
(e) Other than carbohydrates, plants need to synthesize nutrients such as proteins.
(ii) Suggest two additional substances that have to be acquired from the environment
to fonn proteins. (2)
(f) Oxygen is a by-product of photosynthesis. Suggest and outline a method that could be
used to detennine whether this oxygen comes from CO2 or H2O. (5)

ALM 2006 2B

5. (b) Explain how the structural features of the chloroplast are adapted to the photochemical
reactions of photosynthesis. (5)
 Pho\0$\'lllhCSIS / P6 Photosynth�sis I P. 7

AL- 2008 IA (c) Giw a reason why the rate or ATP synthesis and the rak if electron transport remained
9. Select the appropriate substance listed in column 2 to mat.:h with the description giwn in unchang,ed when light intensity increased from 100 to 150 arbitrary units. {l mark)
column 1. Put the appropriate letter in the space provided. (3}
( d) It is known that ATP synthesis and electron transport are Jinked to each other in the
Column 1 Column 2 photoch.:mical process. To study this relationship. chemical Y was added to the
Substance that donates hydrogen A. NADH reaction mixture expo:,ed to light intensity of I 00 arbitrary units. Chemical Y served to
to the Calvin cycle 8. NADPl:I break the linkage of the two evenrs. The results of this :>tudy are shown below:
C cxyg,c
Substance that is produced in the D. acetyl CoA
Calvin cycle and is used to fonn E. carbon dioxide mo
starch in the chloroplasts F. trios(; phosphate
_lb)__

Substance that serves as the final

electron acceptor in the electron
Ke): c::::> a.dditionofehem.iccl Y
transpon chain m the
111te of ATI' S)'llLl,esis afta
mitochondria (c) l!<!rlition of chemic:,,) Y

r:lh.! of eJe,oa-on =spo11

after l!ddil.ion ofcl:l=ica! Y
AL- 2008 2B
6. (c) Unlike animals, plants can make their own proteins from different Inorganic
substances. Briefly outline how these substances are assimilated to form proteins after
their uptake into the mesophy!l cells. (-4)

AL-200918 50 IW 150
9. The following figure shows the results of a Couru ofexp�rimtm ---
study on the photochemical process of
photosynthesis. N.B. incubated with an ade(]Uate supply of ADP and Pi
In this study, grana taken from chloroplasts
were incubated with an ade(]uate amount of (i) Describe the results after the addition ofche1nical Y. (2 marks)
ADP and inorganic phosphate (Pi) and treated (ii) Hem:c deduce how ATP synthesis and electron transport are linked
with different light conditions during the course to each other. (1 mark)
of the experiment
(e) Explain why intact chloroplasts should not be used in these studies. l2 marks}
N.B. Incubated with an adequate supply of ADP
and Pi

{a) Both ATP synthesis and electron transport

are events of the photochemical process or
/
photosynthesis. How do the resuhs provide
evidence that the photochemical process is
light dependent? (3 marks)

(b) Explain why the rate of ATP synthesis and the rate of electron transport levelled offal
50 arbitrary units oflight intensity. (2 marks)

2!1
 Photosynthesis I P.S Photosynthesis / P.9

DSE-2012 18 DSE-201618

5. The graph below shows the oxygen production rate and carbon dioxide production rate ofa 3. The diagram below shows the electron micrograph ofan organelle:
local plant on a summer day:

- - - '''
Key:
- - - • Oxygen
a .... --- CLlrbon t.iioxide
''
/
0

f ' '
I '
·I I
I

I ' {a) Label A and B. (2 marks)

'
\

' (b)
(c)
State a type of plant cell that contains this organelle.
What is the functional relationship between A and B?
( l mark)
(3 marks)
'
''
I
I
I HKDSE - 2017 1B

4 10 12 14 16 20 22 24 7. The diagram below shows an experiment set-up for investigating the effect of light
Timt: of a day (hour)

Yi\:1I ��� := = = = = = = =�-;�;:," '

intensity on the ·rate of photosynthesis:

(a) State times at which there is no net exchange of gases into or out of the leaves.
oxygen gas
(1 mark) O
!CS! tube
(b) Sketch a line on the above graph to show the oxygen production rate ofthe plant on a
t
��� -�v ��
winter day. (2 marks)

(c) The area below the line showing the oxygen production rate is usually greater than the
area below the line showing the carbon dioxide production rate. Explain the
J!l- ��'-,.,-t----------- aquatic plant
pi111 111111111jii"I 1111111111111 qt111pi Iiiiiiifl11q11111hi111ii!jli1111111p111 Ill111Iiiqtmp1IllIll111I!
� nil er
importance ofthis observation. (4 marks)

DSE-2014 18
a. What is the assumption behind using the volume of oxygen released per unit time to
I For each of the brain parts listed in colllmn I, select from column 2 one phras;e that indicate the photosynthetic rate? Explain your answer. (2 marks)
matches it. Put the appropriate letter in the space provided. (3 marks}
Column l Column 2 b. Suggest one modification to this experimental set-up to make sure that the result is
NADPH A. a product of oxidative phosphorylation due to the independent variable only. Explain your answer. (3 marks)
pyruvate B. a product of photochemical reacliMS
NAD C. a product of carbon dioxide Wh::it is the signil'icance of the two products ot' the photochemical reactions to the
D. a product of glycolysis whole photosynthetic process? (4 marks)
 Photosynthesis / P. J l

HKDSE - 2018 1B HKDSE - 2020 1B

1.(c) Tl1e diagram below shows a simplified Calvin Cycle:
2. The leaf of an aquatic plc1nt was placed in a concen1rated sucros� solution and observed
under a light microscope. Photomicrographs A and B show the appe:inmcl:! of the cells at •..;arl�(lo
the beginning ofthe experiment and arter five minutes respectively: p�o;.p!Pte
f_,·;f,.'"',:��r<-,, � •
->
c a;
Plwtomicragr11plt A - at the begiJ1.11Ulg �/
�
(
P�;d)
\�b= II /

:re>-:: J ,.,i_ .:-,--cr:s-_s,

{
,;;,-:::--:�-!''.:
suiµr.; /Jr St:rrc!-i

chloroplast Match the three phases with the following reactions: (2 marks)
Reactions Phase
X
Regeneration of carbon dioxide acceptor
Reduction of3C compound
Carbon dioxide fixation
(a) Xis an organelle which is invisible without staining. Name this organelle. (1 mark)
(b} Comparing the photomicrographs, state two observable changes in the appearance of the
cells after five minutes. (2 marks)
(c) Explain how the observable changes stated in (b) are brought about. (2 marks)

HKDSE - 2020 1B

1. The diagram below shows the structures in a chloroplast:

(a) Using the letters from the diagram. list all or tlw strw.:tures that contain
photosynthetic pigments. (1 mark)

(b) Strucrnre C produces intermediates that are used i11 the Calvi11 C�-cle. Srnte the
intem1ediates.
 Photosynthesis/ P. I Photosynthesis/ P.2

Past Papers Marking Scheme - Photosynthesis CE - .,006 Q.8 fa)

( i) Measure th0 displacement of the solution level in the graduated tube
CE - 2003 Q.4 {a) (ii) Title I
Correct choice of axes •1 �
(i) dry soil: 50g / 0.05 kg plant: 74.65 kg Y! ,½ Correct labelling of axes together with units ½.½
(no unit, no mark) Correct plotting and joining of points (deduct ½ for 1 mistake) l '/2
(ii) The soil is not the main source of food for plant growtl1
because the drop in mass ofthe dry soil is very small Rat" ofpl10101;vnthesis in d1Frercm light imen�irv
in comparison with the gain in mass ofthe plant
(iii) To reduce the amount substance in air added to the soil/ the amount of soil lost to
��
so that the loss in weight of the soil is mainly due to the plant
(iv)
(1) Title ½
Design of set-up:
leaf with CO2 supply (1),
leaf in a container having
sodium hydroxide solution
(1)
light source(½)

JO
(2) To make sure that the starch detected at the end of the experiment was made Ligb1 inti:osil;' {arbitrary unit)
during the experiment 1
By keeping the plant in darkness for two days 1 (iii) From 0.4- 5.0 arbitrary units light intensity, the rate of photosynthesis increases
with increasing light intensity
CE - 2004 Q.2 (b)
because there is more energy trapped for dark reaction
Above 5.0 arbitrary units light intensity, the rate of-photosynthesis remains the
(i) The bacteria distributed evenly in I
same
but concentrated on the chloroplast in II because there is insufficient supply of carbon dioxide at high light intensity
(ii) In the presence oflight, the chloroplast produced oxygen during photosynthesis / enzyme activity is not high enough at high light intensity
This led to the movement of bacteria toward the chloroplast
(iii) To study the effect of light of different colours on (the rate of) photosynthesis (iv) Because at 0.4 arbitrary unit of light, the rate of respiration is greater than or equal
{iv) Photosynthesis occurs at similar rates in red and blue lights to the rate of photosynthesis 1
which are higher than that in green light
so there is no net oxygen released l
(v) (1) Workable set-up (S): (must include light source, water, waterweed & colour
filters) l CE - 2007 Q.3
Labels (L): colour filters, waterweed, water/ lamp/ gas or oxygen 3 x½
Title(T) y, (a) Cell type X has no cellular content wl1i!e cell type Y has
Cell type X has a thicker cell wall than cell type Y
'"; ""�
e<>lourfil«r
(bl (i) ( I J Starch
- (2) Add a drnp of Iodine solution to the leaf section
w:ucr Observe the leaf section under the microscope
wa1crwted
The section turns blue black

(ii) In darkness. photosynthesis stops

The stored carbohydrate is converted to sugars
which are transported away to other pans of the plant/ are used in
(2) Measure the volume of oxygen produced/ number of oxygen bubbles respiration
released per unit time/ over a period of time
(c) When water evaporates from cell type Y, a transpiration pull is set up
Water is drawn from xylem to cell type Y
together with dissolved minerals

21;
 Photosynthesis/ P.3 Pho1osynthesis ,' P.4

AL M20042A

CE M 2009 Q.5 2. (a)�--�-�--------------------�

Concept for mark award {Any two):
(e) why CO2 concentration can affect the rate of GP fonnation (I) max.1
why temperature can affect the rate of GP fonnation ( 1)
(ii) Bis at the upper part of the leaf/ close to lipper surface exposing why light intensity can affect the rate of GP fonnation {1)
directly to sunlight why water in soil can affect the rate of GP formation (1)
The chloroplast density is highest in B
These help to maximize the amount of light absorbed for photosynthesis CO: is raw material for GP ( l)
temperature will affect the kinetic energy of1he reactants ( 1 J max. 2
(iii) Cells in part Dare loosely packed with a lot of air space:, between the cells I
This is to allow carbon dioxide to move freely by diffusion to the
temperature will affect the rate of enzyme caLalysis ( I l
mesophyll cells
light for ATP synthesis which is necessary for the n::synthesis ofRuBP,
which in tum forms GP ( 1) / light opens up stomata and increases CO" availability

'
{b} There is little overlapping among the lt;:uves which cnabli:s leaf10 receive
maximum ::11nount of light
ATP provides the enernv for the conversion of GP to TP ( 1)
NADPH reduces GP to TP ( 1) I supply H
CE· 2010 Q.6
(c) • Calvin cycle will stop (l) 3
(a) cacabolism/ catabolic process/ breaking down process (II no regeneration ofRuBP from TP I A ( l)
(b) mitochondria (I I RuBP is necessary to fix COc ( l)
(c) carbon dioxide and water ( l or OJ
{d) light/ solar {I)
(e) heat {I) (e) (ii) Any lwo (l mark each):
ammonium/ nitrate
sulphate
phosphate
'
(f) use Lracer technique l l) max. 5
label the O of CO2 with 1"0 (I) I the isotope of 0
let photosynthesis take place ( 1) / expose the plant to light
collect the gas (02) evolved (1)
in a separate experiment. label the O ofH2O with 1;;0 (I)/ the isotope ofO
interpremtion of result: whichever experiment releases the labeled 02 will
determine the source ( 1)

ALw 2006 2B

5. (b)�- ���- � ---- ------------�

Concept for mark award:
structural feature: thylakoid stacking/ grana (I)
significance of stacking:
> increase surface area (1) for trapping light (1) and electron transport (2) 1- max. 4
> within a small space ( l) J

e.g.• within the chloroplast are many stacks ofthylakoids (1) / grana
this provides a large surface area (1) for holding the chlorophyll
molecules (I) for trapping light ( 1 ), and for holding carriers of electron
transport ( 1) and enzyme for ATP synthesis(]) without taking up too
much spuce (1)
 Photosynthesis/ P.5 Photosynthesis/ P.6

AL- 2008 IA
OSE-2012 18
9. (a) 8 (1)
(bl F (1)
(c) C(l) 5. {a) 7:00 and 18:00 ( 1) (1)

(bJ shorter light period (I), overall rate lower ( 1) (1.1)

AL- 2008 2B (c) the area below the line showing oxygen production rate represents the food
production in 24 hrs ( 1) (1)
6. (c) in photosynthesis, carbon dioxide and water (1) is assimilated to whereas the area below the line showing carbon dioxide production rate
fonn glucose (1) /sugars/ triose phosphate represents the food consumption in 24 hrs ( 1) (1)
nitrate (1)/ ammonium ions and the carbon skeleton derived (max .4) it is therefore important for food production to be greater than food
from glucose/ sugars (1) are used for synthesizing amino acids(l) consumption such that there is a net amount of food produced (I) (1 I
amino acids are then condensed/ polymerized to fonn proteins (1) as a result, this provide energy for the plant to survive, grow and produce (1)
fruits(])
7 marks
AL- 2009 1B
DSE-2014 IB
9. (a) in darkness, the rates of the two events are both 0 (1) (3)
at 50 arbitrary units of light intensity, the rates increase ( 1) 1. B (1)
at 100 arbitrary units of light intensity, the rates increase D (1)
further ( 1 ), and are nearly double that at 50 arbitrary units A ill
of light intensity (1 bm) 3 marks
(bl because light is limiting at the given conditions ( 1) as further
increase in light intensity increases the rate of ATP synthesis
and rate of electron transport (1}
DSE 2016 lB
(c) because factors other than light intensity and ADP+ Pi supply (1)
(e.g. amount of chlorophyll/ grana/ NADP[marker's mtg.]) 3. (a) A: thylakoid membrane (1) / thylakoid
become limiting (1} B: stroma ( 1 l 2

(di (i) in the presence of chemical Y, the rate of ATP synthesis (2) I bi mesophyll cell ( palisade mesophyll cell/ spongy mesophyll cell ( guard cell
decreased sharply ( 1) while the rate of electron transport
/photosynthetic cell not accepted}
remained the same ( l)

(ii) this indicates that ATP synthesis is dependent in the coupling (1) (cl light-dependent reactions take pl::ice at A ( 1)
to electron transport ( l} ! electron transport provides energy which supplies ATP and NADPH (1)
for ATP synthesis for 1 ight-independent reactions that take place at B ( 1 )
o,
(e) intact chlo roplasts contain stroma ( l) where the Calvin cycle will (2) light-independent reactions take place at B ( 1)
consume the ATP fanned in the photochemical process ( l)
which regenerate NADP (1)
for light-dependent reactions that take place at A (1) 3
 Photosynthesis I P.7

Past Papers- Respiration

HKDSE-2017 JB
CE- 2004
7. (a) the rate of respiration remains constant throughout the experimcnt (J) 4. {a) An expenment was carried

I. - '
so that any change in the net production ofoxygen can be atlributed to the )2
out to study the changes in
change in the photosynthetic rate (1)
blood lactic acid concentration 10
OR of ail athlete during and after g ·2
The size of oxygen bubbles should be uniform ( I)
thus the rate of release of bubbles is directly proportional to the rate of
photosynthesis ( 1)
(2) exercise. On day I, the athlete
ran for 10 minutes and then �i
. ·- 6

]1
(b) • add a heat shield/ water bath between the light bulb and the beaker/use a
cold light source/use a bigger beaker containing more water instead to
conduct this experiment ( 1 J
sat down to rest for 40
mi11utes. On day 2. she �
4

2 I
to avoid the heating up of water in the beaker ( 1) performed the same exercise, '
as temperature is also a factor that may affect the photosynthetic rate (I) (3) followed by slaw jogging for
OR 0 10 15 20 � 30 35 � 45 �
place a thermometer in the beaker (1) 40 minutes. The results of the
to ensure the temperature is constant ( l) Time(min)
experiment are shown in the
as temperature is also a factor that may affect the photosynthetic rate ( 1 J
graph.
(c} Photochemical reactions produce ATP (1)
Which provides energy to drive the light-independent re:.tclions
regeneration of CO2 acceptor {I) (i) Account for the increase in blood lactic acid concentration in the first 10 minutes
Photochemical reactions also produce NADPH (I}
ln photosynthesis, reducing power/1-J/H + is required fur r�ductinn u( 3-C (3)
compound to form glucose ( l) (4) (ii) The rate of carbon dioxide production also increased in the first 10 minutes.
Write a word equmion to show how carbon dioxide is produced. (2)
Instructions to markers; if cand idatcs presented a \I rong/irrc-levant (iii) Why is it harmful to the body cells if the blood contains a high level of lactic acid ?(l )
reaction to describe the significance of ATP or NADl'lt no mark is 9 marks
(iv) Rdt':rring to tile grnph, which method, sitting down or slow jogging, is more
awarded to the first and third points.
dfrctive in re1noving lactic acid from the blood after exercise ? Based on your
HKDSE 2018 18 biological knowledge, explain why this method is more effective. (4)
2. (a) • vacuole "'
( 1) (})

{bl Any rwo of the following:

the cell membrane/ cytoplasm of the leaf cells l1as detached from the cell
wall/ the leaf cell is plasmolysed (I) (2) 4. A student carried out an investigation to compare the activity of three brands of yeast. He
chloroplasts condense to the centre of the cell ( l)
the vacuo] e / X has shrunk ( 1 ) added a mix.ture of fixed amounts of dough and yeast into a measuring cylinder and
recorded the volume of the mixture. After putting the measuring cylinder in a water bath at
(c) sucrose solution has a lower water potential than the cell content (I) 30oC for one hour, the volume of the mixture was recorded again. The diagram below
(2)
there is a net movement of water from the cell content to the bathing solution
shows his set-up:
by osmosis ( 1)
5 marks rnea.�uring -------<..
cylinder

rnixturu

Bra11dA Brw1dC

(a) The results of the investigation are shown in the table below. Complete the table by
finding out the percentage change in the volume of mixture for brand C. (1 mark)
 Respiration / P.2 Re:;piration / P 3_

CE -2010
Brand of Initial volume of mixture Volume of mixture Percentage change in
yeast (cm3) after 1 hour (cm3 ) the volume of mixture 6. The following table shows the comparison of two vital processes-- photo synthesis and
(%) aerobic respiration. Complete the table with suitable words. (5)
A 20 28 40
8 20 49 145 Photosynthesis Aerobic respiration
C 20 46 Type of metabolic process Anabolism (a)
Organelle where the process Chloroplasts (b)
(b) Draw a bar chart to show the activity of the three brands of yeast in tem1s of the occurs
percentage change in the volume of mixture. (3 marks) Raw materials needed (c) Glucose and oxygen
(c) Explain why the yeast can make the mixture rise. (3 marks) Energy conversion from (d) .. - - energy from chemical eneq,,y in
(d) The student wants to make a cake that is the most spongy. Based on the above results, to chemical enefb'Y in glucose to chemical energy in
which brand of yeast should be used? ( 1 mark) glucose ATP and (e) energy
(e) Why should the set-up be kept in a water bath? (1 mark)
(f) If the student wanted to study the effect of temperature on the activity of yeast, suggest Total: 5 marks
two changes that should be made in his experimental design. (2 marks)

CE- 2007
8. (b) The graphs below show the changes in
the glucose consumption and the Before During. After
exercise cxcrcis� t:Xerci�c
blood glucagon level in a person
before, during and after exercise:

(i) Explain the change in glucose

consumption during exercise.(3)

(ii) During exercise the blood

glucose level remains relatively
ste ady. Explain this phenomenon
by referring to the change in the
blood glucagon level. (3)
Time {minute)

(iii) Draw a line on the graph below to show the change in the blood lactic acid level
during and after vigorous exercise. (2 marks)

I
Before During Aft,,
exercise exercise c.,;crcisc

Ttme [mtmrte)
 Rcsp1rnt10n i P.4 Respiration / P.5

AL- 20051A (a) Account for the colour change in the reaction mixture. (3 marks)
2. The diagram below oulines the biochemical pathway of respiration in animal and plant (b) The above method can be used to study the effect of temperature
cells: on the rnte of anaerobic respiration of yeast
(i) List three variables that have to be kept constant for the
�lucose
results to be comparable.
(a) (i) State the end product(s)
anaerobic respiration:
of
I iitycul)'si.> Ii (ii) What additional steps are necessary to manipulate the
(3 marks)

anaorobic rosp:raticn
t(.,) nf
pyre vie acicl ____ end produc
independent variable ofthe experiment? (3 marks)
i
Animal cells
Plants cells erc:yl-Co(I (iii) After recording the time taken for the disappearance of the
(2)
pink colour, what further manipulation ofthe dam is necessary
(ii) Based on your knowledge of ,,---�
4--c,irbon citric acid

-1
to obtain the rate of anaerobic respiration ofyeast? (l mark)
biochemical reactions, suggest a compou�.!I IKn,l,scyclel ,
(iv) In the space below, sketch a graph to show the effect of temperature
reason why the same substrate
� 5c,boo
on the rate of anaerobic respiration of yeast. (l mark)
(pyruvic acid) can be broken

''"c�
�
down into different end products

"'"
in the anaerobic respiration of
animal and plant cells. (1) ch�in
J
aorol>ic resphli,m
a produ�tof

{b) Give one carrier that transfers electrons from the Krebs cycle to the electron transport
chain. (1)
(c) Explain why the electron transport chain cannot operate under anaerobic conditions. (l)
(d) Indicate on the diagram two other sites where carbon dioxide is released in the aerobic
pathway. (2)

AL-2009IA AL-20102C

5. To estimate the rate or anaerobic respiration of yeast at room temp..:r:.itt1re, c1 s1uden1 poured 7 Goth chloroplast rind mitochondria are important organelles for handling energy
the contents of tube A into tttbe Band covered the reaction rnixtu1\! l\'ith L1 layer orparnlTin transformation. Explain how the structural similarities of the two organelles contribute to
oil as shown below: efficient energy transformation. ( 11 marks)

Po�r the contems of tube A into rube J3

Tube A Tube B

N.B. Phenolphthalein is an indicator which is colourless at round pH 8 or below, but pink at

higher pH.

The time taken for the disappearance of the pink colour in the reaction mixture can be used
to indicate the rate of anaerobic respiration of yeast.

226
 Respiration f P.6 Respiration/ P.1

DSE-2012 1B Past Papers Marking Scheme- Respiration

CE - 2004 Q.4 (a)

9. Drugs X and Y may inhibit enzymes involved in glycolysis. the Krebs cycle or oxidative
phosphorylation. To study the effects of the drugs, some muscle cells were isolated and (i) The muscles carry out anaerobic respiration
to release additional energy for muscle contraction
treated with these two drugs separately in the presence of oxygen. The cellular levels of
As annerobic respiration produces lactic acid
ATP, NADH, and pyruvate were determined. The results are shown in the table below: it will lead to an increase in blood lactic acid concentration
(ii) glucose+ oxygen---+ carbon dioxide+ water 2 or 0
NADl-l Pyruvate (Iii) Because it lowers the pH oftl1e blood /tissue fluid which adversely affects cellular
ATP
activities/ it inactivates enzymes l
Control (without treatment) 100% 100% 100% (1v) Slow jogging l
DrugX 2% 3% 5% Becausi;: slow jogging can maintain a relatively high rate of heart beat/ blood flow
/ breathing 1
DrugY 20% 15% 150%
which increases the rate of oxygen supply to the body 1
thus enhances the breakdown of lactic acid/ conversion of lactic acid to glycogen I
The data for the control are set as 100% for comparative purpose.
CE - 2007 QA

(a) Suggest the key process that is inhibited by drug X. Explain your answer. (3 marks) (a) 130
lb) correct title
correct labeling of a'\es
(b) Suggest the key process that is inhibited by drug Y. Explain why there is an
correct drawing and labeling of bars
accumulation ofpyruvate in the muscle cells after treatment with drug Y. (3 marks)

(c) Instead of incubating in the presence of oxygen, the untreated muscle cells were
incubated under anaerobic conditions. Predict the change in the cellular ATP, NADH
and lactate levels. (3 marks)

(d) A student would like to study the enzymes involved in glycolysis, the Krebs cycle and
oxidative phsophorylation separately. Suggest which cellular components he needs to
isolate for the investigation. (3 marks)

BrMdA Bra11dB B=dC

DSE-2014 lB Di(forcnt br.mdi ofyew
(c) Anaerobic respiration of yeast
produce carbon dioxide
1. For each of the brain parts listed in column 1, select from column 2 one phrase that which is trapped inside the dough
matches it. Put the appropriate letter in the space provided. (3 marks) making it rises
Column 1 Column 2
(d) Brand B
NADPH A. a product of oxidative phosphorylation
pyruvate B. a product of photochemical reactions (c) To ensure the temperature of the three mixtures are the same/ maintain the
NAD C. a product of carbon dioxide temperature at 30°C throughout the investigation
D. a product of glycolysis
10 Use only one brand of yeast
Put the measuring cylinder in water baths at different temperatures
 Respiration/ P.1 Respiration/ P.3

CE* 2007 Q.S (b)

AL*2005 JA
{i) Glucose consumption increases during exercise
because glucose is used in respiration/ respiration rate is foster
to provide more energy for muscle concentr:ition
1. (a,l ( i) Animal cells: lactic acid ( l )
Ph.mt cells: ethanol and carbon dioxide { 1}
'
(ii) because the: enzyme(s) involved in the breaking down of pyruvic acid in
(ii) More glucagons is released during exercise animal cells is/ are different from those in plant cells ( 1)
1vhich stimulates the conversion of glycogen to glucose in liwr
to restore the blood glllcose level/ compensates for the incr1eas<! in glucose
consumption
(c) becmtse oxygen is required as the final electron acceptor (I)
(iii) Trends:
Increase during exercise
Decrease after exercise
(d) On the diagram: CO2 is released from the steps of pyruvic acid ...... aceryl-CoA (1 ).
citric acid-,. 5*C compound ( 1)
'
(7)
CE* 2010 Q.6
AL* 20091A
(a) catabolism/ catabolic process/ breaking down process (!)
5. (aJ yeast carries out anaerobic respiration to produce carbon
(b) mitochondria (I) dioxide and alcohol ( 1)
carbon dioxide dissolves in water to form carbonic acid/ (3)
[c) carbon dioxide and water (1 orO) a ,veak acid ( 1)
,vhich neutralizes the sodium carbonate ( 1) / which lowers
(d) light/ solar (!) the pH to / below 8
Therefore, the pink colour disappears
(e) he-at (I)
(b) {i) amount of yeast (1) / use yeast solution from the same culture
amount of glucose (1) (3)
amount of sodium carbonate (1)
(ii)
Copcept for mark award: (3)
vary the temperature ( 1)
for each temperature. kept the tubes in a water bath for
equilibration before mixing (1)
maintain the reaction mixture at the target temperature
after mixing ( l)

e.g. prepare water baths set at different temperatures.

° ° ° ° °
<!.g. J0'C, 20 C, 30 C. 40 C, 50"C, 60 C. 70 C and 80'C ( 1 J
for each temperature, keep tubes A & Bin the water bath (3)
for 10 minutes ( 1)
after mixing, keep the reaction mixture in its corresponding
water bath ( 1)

(iii) Convert the time to rnte by taking the reciprocal ofthe time taken (1)
(iv} Cnrreclshape ofcurve(l)

AL- 2010 2C
7.
Structural similarities
- both are double-membrane
bounded organelles ( 1)
• contain large amount
of internal membrane (1) /
i.e. thy\akoid and grana in
chloroplast and cristae in
mitochondrion
• presence of membrane-
bound enzyme systems ( 1)
• presence of own circular
DNA (1)
(4)
Respiration/ P.4 Respiration I P.5
DSE-2012 1B
9. (a) drug X inhibits glycolysis ( l) (do not �cccpt mor"' thc1n 1 proc<.cs�) (Ii
as glycolysi:, is the fir.st step in the respiratory pathway, the inhibition or I I)
Significance for energy transformMion max.12 glycolysis will l1alt the processes that follow. i.e. Krebs cycle and
oxidative phosphorylation ( 1 J
· to provide an isolated environment hence. the overall production of pyruvate. ATP and NADH are greatly ill
( 1) so that the energy transfonnation reduced. showing that the whole respiratory pnthway was jeopardized ( l)
processes will not be interfered by Remarks
other cellular processes (1) - No mark will be giwn \o bullet p0i11t 1 when minor steps in em:h process
· substrate concentration can be ins-kmi oftbe key process are 111entioncd.
Alternative answer:
increased {l) by entrapping the Pyruvate is the product of glycolysis ( 1)
necessary raw materials inside the As the production of pyruvate is greatly reduced after treating with drug X
organelles ( 1) (I)
• provide large surface area ( I) to hold more G\yco\ysis is inhibited in this case ( 1)
membrane-bound enzymes (1)
for more efficient energy (b) drug Y inhibits Krebs cycle (1) (do not accept more than l process) (Ii
transfonnation when the respiratory pathway is halted at Krebs cycle. pyryvate would not (I)
be metabolised ( 1)
but glvcolysis still proceeds as usual and produce pyruvate (1 ). as a result_ (I)
- related enzymes are located ne>..i pyruvate will accumulate
to one another (1) to allow the passage of
metabolic product from one pathway to (c) in anaerobic conditions, muscle cells undergoes anaerobic respiration and ( 1,1)
another pathway { 1) produce less ATP (1) and less NADH (1) than aerobic respiration
at the same time, lactic acid level rises as it is produced (1) as a result of (I)
- produce specific enzymes and incomplete oxidation
structures (1) which are required for
their related energy transfonnation (d) glycolysis: cytoplasm ( 1) (I)
processed Krebs cycle: mitochondrial matrix (1) (I)
oxidative phosphorylation: mitochondrial inner membrane (1) (1)
Remarks:
(9 ) if the key processes are not mentioned bltt the three co:::llular components
are mentioned in the correct sequence. 3 marks will be given
if only two or one cellular componentls) are mentioned, no mark will be
scored
12 marks
I. B (I)
D (I)
A ( I)
3 marks
 Health and diseases I P.2

Past papers - Heidth and diseases CE -2005

CE - 2003 9. (a) In u medical test, George drank a glass of glucose solution. The graph below sho,vs the
4. (cJ Cholera is a l1LJman disease caused by rt type of bacteria. Jt i!- transmitted !hrough subsequent cl1ang;es of his blood glucose level:
contaminated water and food. A vaccine against this disease is made up of killed
cholera bacteria. To study the effectiveness of the vaccine, a mouse was first injected 240
with the vaccine and then with live cholera baekria 20 da;,s later. During the study, the
220
mouse showed no sign of cholera. The changes i11 rl1e antibody lcwl in the plasma of

.
the mouse are sl10wn in the graph b(;!lm\: ]f' 200
�oc-g upp.:r limit for
�-
20 180 complete rcabsorption
of glucose in kidney
�2- 160
0
Antibe>dy level
itrpla,m;
jacbitr4')'UM) 140

10 /5 20 2S 30 35 40 45
t
intake of
Time (hour)

TlruO(do)') glucose solution

injc�tion of t,Ut<Uon of
"1,uleravaa:ln� . liee<:holorabaocria

(i) Explain the rise in the antibody level benveen day 5 and day 7. (2) (i) Based on the graph, state the period in which the urine of George would contain
(ii) State two differences between the patterns of antibody production as induced by glucose. Explain why glucose in the blood would appear in the urine during this
the two injections. Suggest an explanation for such differences. (5) period. (4)
(iii) People may be infected with cholera through eating contaminated seafood.
Besides vaccination, suggest two \Vays to reduce the risk of cholera infection (ii) 'Jlie doctor diagnosed that George had diabetes mel!itus and advised him to get
through eating seafood. (2) insulin injection for treatnlent Which organ of George was likely to be defective?
CE 2004
M
(])
L (c) The diagram below shows an air sac ofthe lung and its blood supply:
(iii) The insulin used for treating diabetes mellitus can be obtained from pigs and
cattle, or produced by genetically modified bacteria. State two advantages of
using insulin produced by the bacteria over that obtained from mammals. (2)

(iv) (I) Besides insulin, name another hormone that is responsible for the
regulation of blood glucose level. (IJ
(2) State one effect of this honnone on the activity of liver cells. (I J

(i) Explain the importance ofthe water film in gast!ous i;::xch:i.nge. (1)
(ii) SARS patients may have fluid accumulated in tlw air sacs E:-;plain how the
accumulation of fluid may affect the oxygen content of1hc blood or the patients.(3)
{iii) One method of confirm whether a patient is infected with the SARS virus is to
test for the presence of antibodies against this virus in the patient's blood. Explain
why these antibodies will be produced by a SARS patient. (1)
(iv) Suggest a method that can help th(;! body dto\·C!op i111111unity aga11Is1 SARS
Explain how the immunity is developed. (4)
 Health and distases / P.3 Health and diseases / P.4

CE 2008
w

35 35

8. {b) The following infonnation is extracted from a pamphlet for diabetic patients. Read the 3Q
content and answer the questions that follow.
2s '--
G
20 §
Hypoglycaemia 15 .§

When there is a very low level of glucose in the blood (below 50 mg per 100 cm3),
hypoglycaemia occurs. Hypoglycaemia usually happens quickly and the
symptoms include sweating, hunger, tiredness, anxiety and dizziness, etc.
Hypoglycaemia may occur because: 0
Ja, F�b Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec
• you have eaten too little, or 2007
• you are late for a meal, or Key: - Mean temperature
• you have injected too much insulin, or 13" Mosquito popu!El.tion
• you have a lot more exercise than usual.
(a) Suggest why the mosquito population is related to the incidence of dengue fever.
It is important always to carry some sweets with you and take them immediately (1 mark)
when you suffer from hypoglycaemia. (bl Based on the infonnation from the graph, suggest how temperature may affect the
breeding of mosquitoes, (2 marks)
(c) The risk of the spreading of dengue fever is graded by the FEHD as high when the
mosquito population is 20 arbitrary units or above. The FEHD will conduct
(i) Explain why a diabetic patient may suffer from hypoglycaemia if he has taken
special operations to eliminate potential breeding places for mosquitoes.
more exercise than usual. (4)
(I) In which months were special operations conducted in 2007? (1 mark)
(ii) The Hong Kong Observatory has estimated that the annual temperature in
(ii) It is recommended for diabetic patients to take in complex carbohydrates (a
Hong Kong will increase in the coming decades. Predict how this will
variety of polysaccharides) in their nonnal meal instead of sugar. Suggest why
affect the transmission of dengue fever. J ustifY your answer. (3 marks)
these patients are advised to take different types of carbohydrates under nonnal
(iii) !l'the mosquito population in the district you live is reported to be above
and hypoglycaemic conditions.
20 arbitrary units. suggest one way to protect yourselrf'rom contracting
dengue fever. (1 mark)
( 1) Take in complex carbohydrates in normal meal (3)
(2) Take in sugar wl1en hypoglycaemia occurs (2)

8. (a) Influenza is a common disease caused by viruses. The Centre for Health Protection of
CE 2009
I-long Kong states. "Influenza vaccination is important because it is one of tlie
w

effective ways in preventing this disease."

6. Dengue fever is an acute viral disease. Prevention of this disease mainly depends on
controlling the mosquito population. Since 2000, the Food and Environment Hygiene
(i) Explain how vaccination can help to prevent influenza (4)
Department (FEHD) has been monitoring the mosquito population in Hong Kong. The
(ii) Suggest why elderly people are recommended to receive influenza vaccination. ( 1)
graph below shows the monthly mosquito population in a certain district and the monthly
(iii)It is known that smoking can inhibit the beating of cilia in the respiratory tract.
mean temperature in 2007.
Suggest how smoking may result in a higher chance of influenza infection. (2)
(iv)lnfluenza viruses undergo mutation easily. Explain why this characteristic of
viruses makes the control of influenza more difficult. (2)
 Health and diseases / P.S
AL- 2005 lA
3. Complete the following paragraph with suitable word(s):
Cholera is caused by a bacterium, Vibrio cholerae which is transmined directly through
(a) . In sub-tropical areas, there is a distinct seasonal pattern of this
_
disease, with the highest incidence in the (b),_ _________ season. The
incidence of cholera can be reduced by taking proper precautionary measures such as
(c)___________ end (d) _________ (4)
AL-2005IC
12. Read the following passage and then answer the questions that follow.
Lifestvle and major diseases in Hong Kono
Lifestyle plays an important role in health and disca'-e. Severul m�ior diseases in Hong/
Kong can be linked to unhealthy lifestyles
Coronary heart disease is one the major causes of death in developed countries. Jn
Hong Kong, it accounts for over 3000 deaths every year und is the Si;!COnd most common
cause of death. !n the past, this disease affected people: lli' high0r soei�l status more them the: 5
working class. This trend rewrsed in Western countrisos dul"i11g the 1970s. and about a
decade later. in Hong Kong. Males and the aged are a! .:i highi.!r risk or devcloring coron�ry
heart disease. The incidence of this disease is also nffoct<"d by a 1111111b1er of lifc:style-related
risk factors including diet, exercise and others.
Cancer is the most common cause of death in Hong Kong. The number of canct::r cases has JO
been increasing steadily, with over 21 000 new cases in tl1e ycar 2/JU0, and ai1 annual
increment of about 2%. There are two major causes for this increase. First and the foremost
is the ageing population, and old age is the single important risk foctor in developing cancer.
The second is the westernized lifestyle in Hong Kong.
Unlike coronary heait disease and cancer, diabetes mcllitus is not a common cause of 15
death. However, it is increasingly common among the younger generations of Hong Kong in
recent years. Like the other two diseases, diabetes mellitus is also related to lifestyle factors.
To reduce the incidence of coronary heart disease, common cancers and diabetes mellitus
and the mortality from these diseases, public health strategies arc designed based on the
prevalence (i.e. how common they are) ofthc various factors in the community.
b. In terms of disease control, why is it important to distinguish between lifestyle-related
and lifestyle-unrelated risk factors? (lines 7-9) (2)
c. Give two reasons to explain why old age is the single most 1mpo1tant risk factor for the
development of cancer. (line 13) (2)
d. Some viral infections are found to be related to the development of certain cancers.
Give one example of such cancers that is common in Hong Kong. Suggest rwo
preventive measures that individuals can take to protect themselves from such viral
infection. (3)
e. Some people believe that diabetes mellitus is caused by e;,,.cessivt: intake of sugary
food Discuss whether this idea is valid based on your knowledge of the two different
types of diabetes mellitus. (4)
Health and diseases / P.6
AL-2006 IC
13. Read the following passage and then answer the questions that follow.
Infectious diseases: treatment and control
Up till the beginning of the last century. there was no proper treatment for infectious
diseases and many people died of infections that can be easily treated today. The major
breakthrough in the treatment of infectious diseases came with the discovery of antibiotics. In
1928, A. Fleming discovered the first antibiotic, penicillin, which is produced by a fungus.
Since then, other types of antibiotics produced by other microorganisms were discovered. 5
During the Second World War, many bacterial diseases were effectively treated by using
antibiotics. As a result, people predicted that these diseases would not be a problem anymore
for humans. How..:ver. this prediction has not come true.
During the I 960s, many prisoners in the former Soviet Union developed tuberculosis. This
lung disease is caused by the bacterium Myr.:ohar.:lr:rium 111berc11/o.1·1,1· and transmitted in a JO
similar way as i 11llucnza. Due to the crowded conditions in the prison, tuberculosis dr:veloped
quickly and widely among the prisoners. Even worse was that lhe antibiotics that used to
11-ork \\"ell in controlling tuberculosis became ineffective. causing death of the diseased
prisoners. Some: years later, the same antibiotics were also found ineffective in treating
tuberculosis in people in New York City. USA. The bacteria in these people were identical to 15
those fottnd in the prisoners in the Soviet Union
Even today. 1Yith the development of many more types of antibiotics. bacterial diseases
still pose .:i serious problem to human health. It is now known that indiscriminate use of
antibiotics has resulted in the loss of their effectiveness in treating diseases. The medical
profession thus calls for concerted effoit from individuals in the community to help slow 20
down the loss of the effectiveness of antibiotics.
Apart from using antibiotics, vaccination is also an effective alternative for controlling the
outbreak of infectious diseases. For example. vaccination against influenza (flu) is
2U recommended for people eveT)' year before the onset of the flu season. Since flu can be
caused by a variety of Jlu viral strains, the World Health Organization (WHO) has set up a 25
network to collect samples from flu patients around the world and to analyse the strains of
the flu viruses. Based on the data collected, the WHO will predict the prevalent viral strains
and then recommend annually the combination ofthe flu vaccines in the coming flu season.
(b) Explain why the crowded conditions in the prison led to the quick and wide spread of
tuberculosis among the prisoners in the Soviet Union. (lines 11-12) (2)
(c) Antibiotics could control tuberculosis well in the past but subsequently failed to cure the
diseased prisoners and eventually lost its effectiveness. Account for this. (lines 12-15) (4)
OJ9
 Health and diseases / P.7 Health and diseases I P.S

(e) Suggest two ways in which individuals can contribute to slowing down the loss of DSE-2012 lB
effectiveness of antibiotics in treating diseases in the community, Support your answer with
biological rationales. (lines 19-21) (4 ) 1. For each type of the blood cells listed in column 1, select from column 2 one phrase that
(f) The use of antibiotics and vaccination are possible means of disease control. Give two correctly describes its function. Put the appropriate letter in the space provided. (3 marks)
differences in the principles of these two means in dealing with infectious diseases. (4)
(g) Suggest two reasons why the combination of the flu vaccines has to be reviewed and Colunm 1 Column 2
determined regularly. (lines 27-28) (2) Lymphocytes A. Involved in blood dotting

AL- 20091A
Blood platelets B. Involved in oxygen transport
4. Select the appropriate description listed in Column 2 that matches with the cell type given
in Column 1. Put the appropriate letter in the space provided. (4 marks)
Red blood cells C. Involved in antibody production
Column 1 Column 2
D. Involved in phagocytosis
B cell A. Contains a lot oflysosomes
T cell B. Kills own body cells that display foreign antigens
on their surface E. Involved in transporting hormones
Phagocyte C. Is primarily responsible for the humeral immune
responsc DSE - 2012 1B
Memory cell D. Can pass through the placenta and conl'er natural
Immunity to the foetus Dengue Fever is a vector borne disease transmitted by mosquitoes. The table below shows
E. Prolil'"era!es rapidly upon second exposure lo the two methods adopted by the Government to break the transmission link or this disease.
same antigen Complete the table: bdow to show how each method works and comment on its advantage
or disadvantage. (4 marks)
AL-20102A
Method How it works Comment (advantage or disadvantage)
2. !n recent years cancer has emerged as a major life-threatening disease in Hong Kong. It
begins with a group of cells that display uncontrolled cell division. A lot of research and Spraying of
resources have been dedicated to the development of various cancer treatments to save the pesticides or
lives of cancer patients. !arvicidal oil
(a) Some cancers are treated by administering ionising radiation to kil! cancer cells in the around
affected area. Suggest two hannful effects of this treatment on the cancer patients. (2) mosquito's habitat

Clearance of
(b) (iv) These anticancer drugs are not specific to cancer cells but harm all rapidly accumulated
dividing cells. Therefore, cancer patients receiving chemotherapy often water in a
experience various side effects of the drugs. Suggest three cell types that are neighbourhood
more susceptible to anticancer drugs. (3)

(c) The incidence of cancer is higher in the older age group. Suggest two reasons for this. (2)
(d) In some lung cancer patients, there is excessive accumulation of fluid in the alveoli.
These patients will suffer from shortness ofbreath. What is the physiological basis of
this symptom? (5)
 1-kulth ;ind dis�ascs / P.9 He�lth and diseases I P. l 0

DSE-2012 lB HKDSE - 2014 lB

7. Tom suffers from diabetes. His doctor asked him to drink. after overnight fasting, a large 9. Table I shows the number of deaths in Hong Kong caused by certain diseases. The deaths
volume of n glucose solution. After that, blood samples were taken at regt1lar lime intervals, are categorised according to sex and age.
to measure insulin and glucose contents. The following b,raphs show the changes in Tom's
blood glucose level and blood insulin level after the test and those ofn healthy person: Table I
Cause or death Sex Age group
All ages 0 1-4 5-14 15-44 45-64 > 65
Hean disease Male 3352 1 2 2 104 679 2564
Ft:male 2981 2 2 0 20 146 2811
Tom
Diabetes mel!itus Mnle 213 0 0 0 2 43 )68
Female 246 0 0 0 )0 19 '}7
Heillthy Colon cancer Male 725 0 0 0 )6 )77 532
person
Female 627 0 0 0 8 131 488

(s} Which cype of diabetes does Tom suffer from? Explain yot1r answer. (4 marks) (a) Rank the disc:ases in the descending order of mortality (death rate). (1 mark)
(b) Explain the difference in blood glucose response to the owl consumption of glucose (bl From the data above, generalize a trend of mortality that is exhibited by all the
solution between Tom and the healthy person (3 marks) diseases. (1 mark)
(c} What medical treatmem should Tom be given? ( 1 mark} (c} Table II shows the relative proportions of males and females in the above table who
had pcmicular lifestyles:
HKDSE - 2013 1 B

{a) The following graph shows the change in levels of antibodies in children's bocJies· Lirestyk Male Female
9.
(AJ antibodies from mother Smoking d21ily 78.9% 21.1%
(BJ children's own antibodies 1-vith vaccination Never smoked 36.9% 63.1%
{C) childrt:n ·sown antibodies without vaccimuion 24 serving� or processed meat per week 57.7% 4'!,3%

From the following diseuses. explain how these lifesiyles of the males and females are
rehlted to the number of deaths in Table J.
Heart disease (3 marks)
Colon cancer (3 marks)

HKDSE-2016 lB

Birth 3 months I year 6 (a) Kitty and Karen are identical twins. Kitty has preferred meats to vegetables in her diet
Age since lier childhood. Kitty suffered from colon cancer at age 35 while Karen had the
(i) State the types of immunity resulting from A, Band C. (3 marks) same disease 10 years later.
{ii) Suggest two possible ways that newborns can acguirt: antibodies from their (i) Why did both sisters suffer from colon cancer? ( 1 mark)
mother. (2 marks) (ii) Why did the disease occur at different ages? (1 mark)
(b) Explain why children who have been vaccinated. against diseases arc better protected (b) Give two oth-:r lifestyles that increase the risk of suffering from cancer. (2 marks)
than those who have not. (4 marks)
 Health and diseases / P.11 Health and diseases / P. \ 2

7. The diagram below shows a site of injured skin exhibiting an inflammatory response: a. What is the vector for transmitting the JE virus? (l mark)
b. For treatment C. explain why there is a sharp rise in protection against JE from day
28 to day 35. {4 marks)
c. Give 011e more benefit of treatment C. {l mark)
d. Mathew plans to visit a country with many JE cases in 10 days and will stay there for
15 days.
i. Witli reference to the graph. which vaccination treatment (A, B or C) should he
receive at this moment? Explain your answer. (2 marks)
ii. As a responsible citizen_ Mathew will continue to use repel\ant as a precaution
lor two weeks after he is back from that country. Suggest a rationale for this
(a) Label the type of white blood cell represented by cell A in the above diagram.( l mark) precaution. (1 mark)
(b) Explain why the tissue exhibiting the inflammatory response usually shows
symptoms such as redness. swelling and pain. (3 marks) J-ll..:OSE- 2018 I B
(c) Cell A will present the antigens of the invading patl1ogens to the lymphocytes.
Describe what will happen subsequently. {3 marks) 4. The bar chart below show the top five diseases that caused death in low-income countries and
high-income countries respectively in tl,e year 2015:
HKDSE�20171B
Low-income countries
).,;:,\Ver rcspir;iwry trnct infection
9. Japanese encephalitis (JE) is an inflammation of the brain caused by a viral infection.
Scientists have developed a vac.;ine against the JE virus. In a study of the effectiveness of Diarrho-c.,J dis=,e
the vaccine, three groups of healthy people received different vaccination treatments and Stroke
the level of protection against JE was monitored over a period of time. The results are
Coronary heart disease
shown in the graph below:
AIDS

Key: 0 30 60 90 120 150

Treatment A ; one injection of 6 µg vaccine on day 0 }.'umber of deaths per 100 000 popt1lation
Treatment B: one injection of 12µgVllccine on day 0
80
Treatment C: two injections of6µg vaccine each on Hig/Mircome co11rrtri�s
C day O and day 28 respectively
"
� Coronary heart disease

·a 60 Stroke
Minimum !eve\ fur '
effective protection AlzhClrner' s a:lisi:ase { Dementia
.B against JE
40 Lw1g cancer
le Chronic obstructive pulmonary disease
0 30 60 90 120 150
20 Number of deaths per \00 000 population
(a) With reference to the bar charts, which countries(low-income or high-income) have

"
more infectious diseases as the top five diseases that caused death? (1 mark)
0 7 21 28 42 49 56 (b) Suggest two reasons to account forthe phenomenon stated in (a). (2 marks)
( c) Coronary heart disease is the top cause of death in high-income countries. Explain
First injection Second injection ],ow 1/ne ofthe lifestyle habits in high-income countries is related to coronary heart
Days after first injection (day) disease. (4 marks)
 Health and diseases I P.14

HKDSE-2019 JB (b) Jn the research. a group of domestic cats were fed with normal cat food for 2 weeks.
I. (a) Physical and chemical barriers are the first lint: ofdefonce in the hum,in hody. Select followed by cat food containing anti-X for 10 weeks. The amount of fret protein X
from Column Jl all correct example{s) that belong(s) to the two types of barriers in found on their hair during the research is shown in the bar chart below:
Column I and put the letter{s) in the spaces provided. (2 marks)
'
fed with
norm;il ood
,-
fed with food containiog anti-X
Colunm I Column 11 ,:_ ,__;;
(i) physical barrier A. slcin
I3. tear ,_ �
(ii) chemical barrier
C. antibody
D. blood clot - -
-
E. gastric juice �
-
�
(b) The diagram below shows the process ofphagocytosis. Q is a phagocyte while Pis a � 50
protein molecule produced by a type of lymphocyte. Q

' 3 6 - 8 9 JO II 12
Ti=(wec:k)
(i) Research team member A thought anti-X was effective in reducing the amount
of free protein X on cats' hair while team member 8 thought anti-X was not
effective. Based on the bar chart, give one reason to support team member A
and another reason to support team member 8. (2 marks)
Supporting reason for team member A:

Supporting reason for team member B:

Describe the function of P in phagocytosis. (3 marks)
(ii) How would you modify the research to confirm whether anti-X in cat food is
HKDSE- 2020 lB effccti�'e in reducing the amount of free protein X on cats' hair? (2 marks)

8. Some people suffer from sneezing and coughing wl1..:n there arc cats rro::arby. These (CJ Based on the information in the introductory paragraph of this question. suggest two
unwanted immune responses, kno\�11 as allergies, arc caused by ,i rrotein X secreted by cats' limit.1tions of this approach to reducing allergies caused by cats. (2 marks)
salivary and sebaceous glnnds. When cats lick tht:ir body �urfacc. this prok:in Xi.� spreod to
their hair Protein X can accumulate in their living e11viron111<.:nt over time

(a) Recent research shows that the amount of free protein X Ull <.:ats' lrnir can be reduced
by adding antibodies :.1gains1 protein X (anti-XJ to cat foud.

(i) Why can anti-X reduce the amount of free protein X on cats' hair? ( I mark)

(ii) There are no proteases in the saliva of cats. Explain why this is imponant for the
success of this method of reducing free protein X. ( I mark)
 Health and diseases/ P.1 Health and diseases / P.2

Past Papers Marking Scheme - Health and diseases CE- 2008 Q.8 (b)

CE - 2003 Q.4 (c) lb) (i) Diabetic patients lack insulin/ do not have enough insulin in their blood
(i) The antigen in the cholera vaccine and hence the liver fails to convert glucose into _glycogen for storage.
stimulates specific white blood cells to produce antibody During intense exercise, blood glucose is consumed for muscle
resulting in the rise in antibody level ac1ivi1ies / more blood glucose is consumed
{ii) For the second injection, the rise in antibody level occurs earlier, The blood glucose level drops continuously without replenishment from the
the rise in antibody level is faster glycogen stored . 1
and the peak of the antibody is higher any two l, 1
This is because as a result of the itrst injection, certain white blood cell will develop ( ii) (I J lt takes time for starchy food to be digested before absorption
a�for theantigen 1 /\s a result, a small amount of glucose is absorbed gradually
When the same antigen enters the body in the second injection, The tluctuation of blood glucose level is less/ blood glucose
the white blood cells will produce a large amount of antibodies within a short time I level will not increase too fast after a nomial meal
(iii) Cook the seafood thoroughly 1
Irradiate seawater used in fish tanks with UV light I (2) Sugar is easily digested/ absorbable
(accept other reasonable answers) Blood glucose level can be raised immediately/ quickly/
Faster to alleviate the symptoms of hypoglycaemia.
CE- 2004 Q.l (c)
(i ) Oxygen inair dissolves in the water film CE - 2009 Q.6
so that it can diffuse readily through the wall of the air sac into the blood capillary] (a) Mosquito is the vector for transmitting dengue fever
(ii) The accumulation offluid increases the distance for diffusion / reduces the surface
area for dissolving oxygen 1 (b) The mosquito population increased with the monthly mean temperature
thereby decreases the rate of diffusion of dissolved 02 into the blood capillaries 1 This shows that high temperature favours breeding of mosquito
Thus the oxygen content of the blood decreases I becomes lower than normal 1
(iii) The antigen of the SARS virus 1 (c) (i) June and July
stimulates the white blood cells ofthe patient to produce the specific antibodies 1
(iv) injection of the weakened virus/ the antigen into the body 1 (ii) The breeding period of mosquitoes will be longer/ The number of
This will stimulate the white blood cells to develop memory for the antigen 1 months with mosquito population above 20 arbitrary units would
When the same virus enters the body, 1 increase
a large amount of antibodies can be produced rapidly 1 The population ofmosquitoes will be larger
to kill the virus l11is increases the risk of the transmission of dengue fever

(iii) Any one ofthe following:

CE - 2005 Q.9 (a) wearing clothes oflight colour/ clothes with long sleeves
using insect repellent
(i) 0.5 to 4 hour
Blood glu cose is [i]tered into the kidney tubule CE� 2010 Q.8 (a)
In this period, the glucose level in the glomerular filtrate is higher than the upper 8. (a) {i) Antigens/ dead viruses in vaccine are reCO.b'llized by white blood cells (1)
limit for complete reabsorption of glucose 1 Memory cells for these antigens are formed (1}
so some glucose will be left in the g!omerular filtrate/ cannot be reabsorbed When they encounter the same viruses/ antigens again (1)
and excreted in the urine they will produce large amount of antibodies ( and phagocytes)/
(ii) Pancreas a quicker immune response (1)
(iii) Less side effects
More effective in action (ii) Because they have relatively poor resistance to infectious diseases or influenza/
Insulin produced from genetically modified bacteria is cheaper and in !,'Teater supply more difficult to recover from diseases/ relatively weak immunity (1)
(accept other reasonable answers) any two l, 1
(iv) (]) glucagon 1 (iii) Due to the inhibition of beating of cilia, smoking reduces the efficiency of
(2) Glucagon will stimulate the conversion of glycogen in liver cells to glucose 1 removal of influenza virus (1)
trapped in the mucus on the respiratory tract { 1)

(iv) The virus will form new strain (with new surface antigens) easily ( 1)
Memory cells developed previously become ineffective against the new strain/
the existing population docs not have the immunity against the new strain/
existing vaccine becomes ineffective ( 1)
 Health and diseases/ P.3 Health and diseases/ P.4

3. a. the intake of contaminated food/ water 13. (b) • tuberculosis is transmitted through air ( 1) / droplets 2
b. summer/ hot the bacteria would be transmitted easily over a short distance ( l J from infected
c&d cooking food/ boiling drinking •.vater thoroughly/ individuals 10 uninfected individuals in the crowded prison/ uninfected individuals
washing hands a1ler going to toilets/ have u high chance of exposure to the bacteria from infected individuals in the
proper disposnl of sewage: crnwdl!d prison
proper treatment of drinking water i (cl • in the p.ist. the predominant population of Mymhuderi11111 111h.:rc11/osi,1· was max. 4
vaccinmion .-;.:nsitiv.:: ltl .intibiotics (I)_ so antibiotics were effective in controlling
tuberculosis
AL-20051C

'
there were variations in the bacterial resistance against antibiotics { 1)
excessive use of antibiotics eliminated the sensitive strains ( 1 ) / sdected for
12. (bJ • lifestyle factors are those that are under the control of individu::i!� ( I J the resistant strains
individuals can make effons to rectify/ avoid: resistant str�ins multiplied ( 1) and became the predominant populations ( 1 ),
non-lifestyle factors are inborn ( 1) / those that an individual can <lo nothing hence antibiotics became no longer effective
10 change
(eJ �--�---�------------------�
regular exercise/ balanced diet/ medication for disease control after Concept for mark award: 4
distinguishing the two factors { 1) Action to take { 1}+ rationale ( 1) an ·two2x(J + 1)
(c ) �--�-�--------------------,
Concept for mark award:
decrease in body immunity to destroy i remove cancerous cell { 1)
prolonged exposure to environmental carcinogen/ cumulative effect of
2 . Action
take antibiotics only when
necessary ( 1) / when one's
. Rationale
to reduce the exposure of the
pathogens to the antibiotics (1)
J+J
carcinogens { 1 l

'
immune response cannot cope
decline m immune response by the body/ to remove cancerous cells ( 1) with the bacterial infection/ avoid
(accept other reasonable alternatives)
environmental carcinogens have a longer time to act as one ages, and hence
have a higher chance to cause cancer/ cumulative effect of carcinogens as
. using antibiotics for viral diseases
complete the whole course of
antibiotics pre;;cribed { J)
. to let the antibiotics eradicate the
bacterial population in the body
J+1

one ages { 1)

(d)�-�-------------------�
. take precaLttions against being
infected ( 1) / spreading one's
. leaving no strains to nronagate ( 1 )
to reduce the chance of using
antibiotics ( 1) / to reduce the chance
1+1

Concept for mark award: infection/ imorove sanitation of snreadin" the resistant gene
Name of disease ( 1) (have to be viral induced and common in Hong Kong) l+ 4
? Measures
max. 2
CD�-�-��----------------,-
immunization/ vaccination, if applicable to the dise.ise named (]) Concept for mark award: 4
nrevent the transmission of the virus causinll the named dise,l.Se (I*?) Contrast on any rwo ofthe following:
hvercancer(l) 1, nature of the control measure
immunization/ vaccination against hepatitis B virus ( 1 l max. 2 agent for killing pathogens/ action of antibiotics vs action of vaccine
take safety measures to prevent infection by blood ( 1), safe sex by wearing scone of efficacy (the nmes of diseases bein" controlled)
condom ( 1 ), avoid sharing needles ( 1)
e.g. aiw two Se ts
(e) �--�-�-�------------------�
Concept for mark award:
agree that excessive sugary food wil I lead to non-insulin-dependent diabetes 4
. Antibiotics
curative measure ( l) / for
treannent
. Vaccination
preventive measure (1) / for
prevention/ controlling the spread of
I+ J

mellitus (l), and why (1)

disa1.;ree, that is excessive intake of sugary food will not kad to
insulin�dependent diabetes ( 1 )_ and why { 1)
. kill pathogens directly { 1) . diseases
stimulate the development of
immunological memory ( l) /
I+ 1

too much suga!}' load will lead to obesity (l) / ovi::rwe1ght (01· other reasonaole 4 pathogen is killed by T-cells/
alternatives), increases risk of non-insulin-dependent diabc:tes mellitlls
(type II) (l)
sugar)' food will not lead to insulin-dependent diabc!t:S meliitus (type I) ( I l
. ef'fo.:t1w agains1 [xicterial
disc:asc:s onlv ( l l
. antibiotics nroduced bv human bodv
effective against both bacterial and
viral diseases (l)
I+ I

bt::cause it is due to autoimmune response { 1) / viral inlCction nffecting thi:: 4

pancreus i insufficient secretion or insulin tgl • the: flu virus may undergo mutation frequently ( l) to form new strains
Bonus: apart from sugary food. high energy food/ food rich in carbohydrate 1 bonus = I the -::pic.kmic .strains may vary in different seasons (1)
also lead to obesity ( l)
 1--kalth and diseases/ P.5 Health and diseases/ P.6

AL- 2009 lA DSE-2012 1B

4 (a) C (b) B {c) A (d) E (1) X 4 I. C (1)

A (1)
B (()
AL- 2010 2A
DSE-2012 1B
2 (a) it kills nom1al cells near the affected area ( l) (2)
it may induce mutation of the nearby normal cells { l) 1. lHethod How it works Comment tadvalltaI.Te or distulvanta"ei
Spraying of Directly kill the larvae
Pros: quickly put mosquito population
(b) (iv) Any three ofthe following: pe:,ticides or down in short term(\)
/ adult mosquitoes (1)
cells of intestinal lining (1) / epithelial cells of the (3) \arvicidal oil to so that they cannot
Cons: mosquitoes may develop
intestinal lining mosquito's resistance to the pesticides (l) I
serve as vector (_(
habitat environmental contamination when
cells of the hair follicle responsible for the growth of hair (1) pesticides leak to water bodies I
cells of bone marrow that responsible for producing blood oesticides are toxic to humans
cells ( 1) Clearance of Eradicate the Pros: does not have adverse impacts on
genn cells in testes (1) (not sperm) accumulated breeding places of environment (l'J (_(
water in the mosquitoes ( 1) Cons: it is vritually impossible to clear
lymphocytes (1) neighbourhood uo all stagnant water en
(o) Any two of the following:
exposure to carcinogenic substances for a longer time/ (2) DSE-2012 1 B
accumulate more carcinogenic chemicals
the mutations ofgenes have accumulated to a level that 7. (a) despite-the high blood glucose level detected in his blood, l1is fasting blood (1)
cancer develops insulin level was lower than that of the healthy person ( 1)
a weaker autocorrection mechanism I immune system although there is an increase in blood glucose level, the insulin level only (l)
shows little change (1)
this shows that Tom failed to produce the normal amount of insulin ( I) (()
therefore, Tom suffered from insulin-dependent diabetes (1) / type (( l
(d) diabetes
Concept for mark award:
· slow diffusion rate in liquid medium (1) leads to decrease in the (b ) with insufficient insulin, his body cells will not take up extra glucose from
(5) the blood as efficiently as the healthy person (1)
efficiency or gas exchange (I) as a result, the blood glucose concentration rised to a higher level (1) after
· elevated CO2 cone. in blood (I) and its subsequent effect on breathing glucose consumption (3)
rate (21 and reinnins high for a longer time / decreases slower than the healthy
person ( 1)
Rc:mDrk:;: ..:onver�ion of glucose to glycogen by i11sulin is not acceptable
e.g. gas diffusion in liquid medium is slower than that in gas (5)
medium ( 1) I this reduces the surface area for gas exchange (c) • by injection of insulin ( l) I aerosal spray of insulin applied to nasal cavity
etiiciency of gas exchange decreases ( 1)
carbon dioxide accumulates in blood (I)/ less oxygen is
taken up into the blood DSE-2013 1 B
chemoreceptors at the medulla are stimulated ( l) I
carotid body/ aortic body 9 (a) (i) .tv (Natural) passive immunity(\)
B (Artilteial) active immunity ( 1) (3t
nerve impulses from medulle are sent to increase C- (Natural) active immunity (1)
the breathing rate ( l) / intlammation ( 1) / effector ( l)
l ii\ some antibodies in the maternal blood pass through the placenta and
enter into the foetal blood { 1) {2)
some maternal antibodies in the n1other's milk pass to the newborn
via breast feeding { 1)

(bl vaccine contains antigens ( \)

which stimulate the immune system to produce memory cells for that
particular antigens (1)
on the 2"u exposure to the same antigen (1) (4)
these memory cells are capable of producing a large amount of antibodies
I l)
therefore, child with vaccination has a better protection
 Health B.n d diseases / P. 7 Health and diseases I P.8

bleeding and formation of blood clot at inj ured area ( 1 )

Swelling: accum ul ation of tissue fluid/blood/a large am ount of white blood cel ls/
pathog en s at th e injured skin ( 1)
9. {a) heart diseases > colon cancer > di abetes me!l itlls { I ) (I) Pain : th e pain recepto rs/ nerve en dings l sensory neurons ar e stim u!ated I injured
and give signals to th e brain for pain sensation (l)
( b) number of death in creases with a_ge gro ups ( l J / ag,e (I) N.emurk'i:
( c) Heart di sease: Three p()ints should he marked separare/y.
heart di sease ki lls more male than femal es ( 1 ) Re/ared knuwledge fearm:dfr om CS Bio:
m ore male were daily sm okers ( I ) F 1111c·tions of hiood
ni cotine of ci garette smoke in creasi;;s tile dwnci; of bl ock in g th i; bl ood (3 ) Formalion of 1iss11e fluid1·
vessel ( I J Scn.mlion 3
Colon cancer:
l
col on cancer k il s more ma/es than frm aks ( 1 J IIKDSE - 2017 1B
m or e male consumer 1 ess fruits and v egetables I m o r e proces sed food ( l J
9. (a) mosquitoes ( l J
vegetables sti mul ate peri stalsi s and rs:mo va) of f;.1eces or co n tain
a11ti oxi ciant to pre vent DNA from thl! au ack of fa'e mciic.i ls processed (J )
(bJ me mory cells are produced [accept develop/d ifferentiate] when the
food contains chemicals that mny sti m u late mut nli (1 11s ( J J of c:oi llll person has reci::i v ed th e fi rst dose of vaccine (1 J
epitheli um 111 !h e: second dose. these memory cells en counter thesame
S m arks an ti!!cps[ accepl that speci fic antigen. original antigen, antigen
C!n co unte re d be fore, etc.] ( l )
mem ory ce lls differentiate [NOT accept stimul ate/activate] into plasma (4)
DSE - 201 6 lB c:c:JI� i killer cel ls f specific lymphocytes taccept specific B-cel/s/ specific
T - cd /sJ I I )
resu l!ing in production of a large runo un t of anti bo d ies/k il/er cells [accept
6. (a) (i ) Karen is _geneti cally identi cal to Ki tty . hence th ey both have tl 1e T- cellsjwitl1in a shorrer time ( l )
cancer-causi ng genes lead ing to the sharp rise in th e protection against the infection
(ii) Kitty' s eating habit would tri gger the devel opment of co lon can cer earl ier
( c) th e pr otective effect [accept level of anti bodies/ki !ler cells if mentioned in
(b)J does not wear off/ remai ns high ( I ) from day 35 to 56 (l)
(b) Any two of the foll owi ng:
Smoki ng ( ) )
vacci nation tr eatment B ( ) J (!+])
Drin king ( I ) as it offers protection over the minimum level of effective protection
l
Str ess ( ) 2 fro m day 10 [accept day 8/9)to day 47 [accept day 25 to day 49Jafter
adm in ist ration I for a peri od which fully covers Mathew's trip (l)
7. (a) A: phago cyte [accept macrophage /neutrophil ; accept pl ural form] (no m ark will be given with wrong choice oftreatm entJ
(ii ) . even i f he has contracted JE during the trip, the precaution can help
( b) arterioles [accept blood v essels; NOT accept otl1er s , e. g. capi ll aries] of th e ti ss ue prevent I reduce the risk of transm ission of the �(! ) to other (l)
people as the insect repe!Jant preve nts mosquito bite.
with inflammatory respo nse dil ate , increasing blood flow to the tiss ue and makes it
9 marks
r ed (1)
perm eability of capillary walls [ accept blood vessel walls; NOT accept others]
Hh'DSE - 201 8 1B
in creases, thus increasing flow of pl asm a to the tiss ue / resulti ng in th e
accumulation of tissue fluid and makes it swe!l ( l )
4. (,) low-income countries ( 1 )
more tissue fl uid presses against nerve endin gs/ stimul ating the pai n receptors,
giving pain sensation ( l ) l
( b ) Any two of th e fol owing:
Remarks: Thr ee poinfs should be marke.dsepurute!y. 3
poor pu blic / penonal hygienic conditions led to eas y spreading of
in fectious diseases ( l )
(c) Activi ty of B-lymphocytes will lead to the pr oduction of antl i bodies agai nst th e
specific pathogens ( I ) [B-l ymphocytes differ enti ate" into p asma ce!1s / mem ory poor heahhcare sy stems faile d to treat patients at critical time ( l ) (2)
cell'1 { l ); plasma cells produce anti bodi e:,, (l) agaiTist the specific pathogens] poor income could not afford the medical costs for treating infectious
T-lymphocytes will fonn killer cells to dest roy th e infected cells ( 1 ) disea�es ( I )
fT-lymphocytes differenti ate!\ into kill er cell s / mem ory cell s$ ( 1 ): kil ler cells
destroy the infected cell s ( l )]
memory cells will be fanned for futur e im muni ty (e. g. qu ickerresponse in the 2nd
attack) ( 1 ) [accept en hanced imm unity , recognize/ mem orize the anti gen/ path ogen]
s 7'l11: concept (1( d(fferenriarion info memory ce/1.v w ,!! he 1narkr.:d once only
I\ accept tranilorm,, converl/ change 'fi)/'/11 111 r11: nu/ aca;p! . 1tim 11/crtc acti1• ute
max 3 (cJ co nsumption nfl1 igh calories food / fatty food / lack of exercise ( 1 )
inc-r�asC! the risk o f plaque formation / deposition o f ch olesterol / fat in
( d) Redness: red blood cells/ bl ood [Not accept bl ood pl atelcb] flow to inj ured skin/ coronary arten·es ( I )
 Health and diseases/ P.9

which leads to narrowing of the lumen of arteries/ blockage in arteries (4) Past Papers- Basic Genetics
/ decrease blood flow to the heart ( 1) CE- 2003
heart muscles do not have enough nutrients/ food and oxygen supply
(1 ), resulting in heart attack 2. (a) Individuals of a certaiil type of plant produce either purple or white flowers. The
7 marks flower co lour is controlled by a pair of alleles. A gardener carried out two crosses with
Hh.'DSE 2019 1B this type of plant and the results are shown below:
1. (a) (i) A, D (1) Cross l Cross z
B,E(l) (2 ) Plant with Plant with PJ:a,itwith Plant with
purp!e flo1111:r.1 white flowers

l
purple flowers x p111pk flowers

(b) Pis a type of antibody which attaches to the antigens on the surface of the
pathogens (1) 2 .-.eds =r� coll<Ctcd und S"""1
l
2 sec:d.! were collected and sown

l l
P binds several pathogens together as a big mass / clumping /accept
agglutination I precipilationj (1) (3)
to enhance / facilitate the phagocytosis by Q (1) /accept fi1rther both plants prodixed both pl:in� produco:d
e:xplanalion ofrole of antibody in phagocytosis} white flower& p111ple flo"'US
5 marks
(i) Based on cross 1, deduce the dominant flower colour. ·Explain your deduction. (5)
(Marks will not be awarded for genetic diagrams.
(ii) Use symbols to show the possible genotypes of the parents in cross 2.
Define the symbols you use. (3)
(iii) lf1he purple-flower parent in cross 2 was self-pollinated (i.e. the stigma receives
pollen grains from the same plant) and a large number of offspring was produced,
predict tl1e phenotypes of the offspring and their ratio. (3)

CE· 2004
3. (a) The following pictures show two plants or
!he same species. Plant A has green leaves.
Plant B is a nc:w form recently discovered by
a scientist: it has variegated leaves.
Tl1e scientist performed an experiment by
self-crossing plant A. A large number of
offspring were obtained and they all
produced green leaves. He then repeated the
same procedure with plant B and all the
offspring produced variegated leaves.

(i) Assuming that tl1e colour pattern of the leaves is controlled by a pair of alleles,
what deductions can be made from the above results regarding the genotypes of
plants A and B ? Explain how you arrive at your deductions. (3)
(Marks will not be awarded for genetic diagrams.)
(ii) ln order to find out which colour pattern is dominant, the scientist performed
another experiment by crossing plant A with plant B. Explain how the results of
this cross would enable him to determine the dominant phenotype. (3)
(iii) The white patches on the leaves of plant 8 might be caused by mineral deficiency
instead of genetic changes.
If this is the case, what mineral is likely to be deficient? What is the function of
this mineral in plants? (2)
 Basic Genetics / P.2 Basic Genetics / P.3

CE 2005
M CE 2006
M

2. Complete the following parab>-raph with suitable words selected from the list below: 8. {b) Diagram 1 below shows the result of meiotic cell division in gamete formation in

- �
humans: (Note: Only one pair ofhomologous chromosomes is shown.)
Chromosome diploid dominant embryo gamete Dfagrnm I / A pair of homologous
Haploid heterozygote homozygote meiotic cell division mitotic cell division ohamosom"
Mutation protein recessive
� '-.
Parcnt,:.dl
Genes are the basic units of inheritance. They are carried on the /,
,-·" CD CD CD CD
(a)__________ in the nucleu.s of a cell. A gene may exist in different
forms called alleles. When an organism contains two different alleles of the
same gene, it is described as a {b),_ _ _ ___ _ _ _ _ _ aod
the allele that expresses itself is said to.be (c),_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ (i) Based on Diagram 1, give two features that are characteristic of meiotic cell
During reproduction, some cells in the sex organs undergo division. (2)
(d)_ _ _ _ _ ___ _ __�·· During this process, the alleles in these cells (ii) Sometimes, an abnormality occurs during meiotic cell division in gamete
separate from each other and every (el__________ thus formed will possess fonnation in humans. Diagram 2 below shows the abnormality concerning a pair
only one allele for each gene. After fertilization, the zygo1e fom1ed will contain alleles ofhomologous chromosomes:
occurring
ID,___________
i" pairs its chromosome nurn!Jc:1· will Diagram2 (Jy '-.
/ A pair of homologous
,h.omosomos

Parent cdl

/1 -�
®CIDOO
CEM 2006
4. Long ago, scientists discovered that a certain kind of soil bacteria can produce ::i protein
that is toxic to insi::cts. The scientists intended to transfor the: gene coding forthi� pro1ein to
crop plants, so as to reduce the damage of crops by insects. In 1 C;95. the US first developed __________, __________,
such a genetically modified (GM) corn plant containing this gene. The !1owchar1 below Type A Type B
outlines the development of the GM com plant: II) Distinguish between type A and type B gametes. (I)
12) Name a genetic disorder that will develop if a type A egg is fertilized
rncccssfully by a normal sperm. (1 l
Step l: The gene is extracted Ji-om the bacteria
(3) This type of abnormality in cell division may occur in the sex
chromosomes. The type B eggs may feni!ize with normal sperms to form
Step 2: The gene is. inserted into cells of com plants
L 7.ygo1es with different genotypes as shown in Diagram 3 below:

o?
(Note: Only the sex chromosome is shown.)
St�p 3: The cells containing the gene multiply into several cdl masses on lhe nutrkn! agar
L Sperrnwll/1

0
TYJ>OBon
Step 4: The cell masses develop into small GM com pluots which :.re then transplanted to th¢ field

(a) Name the type of cell division that is involved in step 3. State the sisrnificance of this
type of cell division in the production ofthe GM com plants. (2) y y
(b) Discuss briefly one consequence of cultivating this GM corn plant in the field to the
surrounding ecological community.
(c) To improve the quality of food produced, state another character of cultivated plants
(2) CD
Zygo� wi-Ji
G)
that scientists would modify besides the insect-resistant character. Give an advantage XO�ono[)·p,:

of this genetic modification. (2) Suggest why zygotes with XO genotype may develop into an individual but
not those with YO genotype. (3)
 Basic Genetics / P.4 Basic Genetics I P.5

CE - 2007 CE- 2008

5. The shape of the human little finger can be straight or bent. The photograph below shows a 9. (a) A study of the wheat genome reveled that modem wheat is originated from the crosses
hand with a bent little finger: among wild wheat and wild grasses. Below is one of the crosses.

Wild wheat A WildgmsB

2n "' 14 X 2n"' 14

ben\ lit1le
l
Hybrid C
Finger 7 chromosomes from A and
7 chrornos0mes from B

i chromasomes doubled accidentally

Modem wh.eat
The inheritance or the shape of the little finger is controlled by a pair of alleles. The
(i) Hybrid C cannot produce gametes but it can produce offspring asc:xually. State the
following pedigree shows the inherilance of this trait in a family:
type or asexual reproduction employed by hybrid C. ( l)

o· (ii) With reference to lhe process of meiotic cell division, suggest why hybrid C

■
Kev·
male With sLrnir,:hl \ink fing,�rs cannot produce gametes.
(iii) The following photographs show the reproductive structures of wheat.
male with bent little fingers
Q female wl!h straight lirtlc fingers
• female with bent little fin��rs

(a) After studying the pedigree, a student could not detennine which little finger shape is
dominant. However, he drew the following conclusion.
'Either individual l or 2 must be heterozygous.·
Do you agree ,vith this conclusion? Explain your answer �vith reference to the role of
gametes in inheritance. (3 marks)
(b) Provided that the allele for the bent little fin gers is dominant, deduce the possible P,01,rgr"ph J Photograph 2
genotype(s) of individual 4. (4 marks) (1) What is the pollinating agent for wheat'? Support your answer with two
(Marks will not be awarded for genetic diagrams.) observable features from photograph 2. (3)
(c) Individuals 5 and 6 are going to have another child. What is the probability of their (2) A scientist performed a genetic experiment by crossin g two different wheat
second child having straight little fingers? Illustrate your answer with a genetic plants. Describe the procedures done in order to ensure cross-pollination,
diagram. (5 marks) but not self pollination to occur. (3)

060
 Basic Genetics / P. 7

CE-2009 AL- 2001 2A

3. (a) Glucose-6-phosphate dehydrogenuse (G6PD) deficiency is an inherited disorder. 3. (a) Contrast the genetic control of ABO blood group and that of red-green colour
People with G6PD deficiency will experience a mnssive destruction of red blood blindness in humans (5)
cells when exposed to certain drugs. (b) Wh�n a man. Tom, of blood group A marries a woman. May. of blood group 0, deduce
the chances that a child of blood group A would be born to this couple. Use genetic
It is known that G6PD deficiency is controlled by a pair of alleles. The pedigree diagram(s} to show your deduction. (7)
below show the inheritance ofthis trait in a family:

Key:
□ mak without G6PD deficiency 2. The experiments done by Gregor Mendel in the 19 th century have led to the replacement of
the old concept of heredity, i.e .. the Blending Theory, and have given insights to the nature
■ male with G6PD deficiency
and physical basis ofthe hereditary materials involved.
Q ft."Jnale without G6PD deficiency
4 5
e female with G6PD deficiency
In pre-Mendelian times, people observed that children look like both their mother and father.
Thus the Blending Theory, which asserted that in inheritance, parental traits were mixed in
the offspring, was proposed to explain this observation. However, when the Blending
{i) Provided that the allele causing G6PD deficiency is recessive. deduce the Theory is applied to Mendel's dihybrid experiments, it cannot account for the variations in
possible genotype(s} of individual 7. (4 marks) the offspring.
(Marks will not be awarded for genetic diagrams.) The following flowchart i!lustrates the hypothetical results when the Blending Theory is
{ii) Individuals 6 and 7 are going to have another child. What is the applied to the inheritance of two qualitative traits:
probability of their second child h;iv1ng G6PD deficiency"? ( I mark)
(iii) ls the blood of individual 6 suit.ible for use in blood tr::rnsfusion? Justif)' Parental Tall pea plants with Dwarf pea plants with
your answer. ( 1 mark) phenotypes red flowers white flowers
X

CE- 2010

9. (a} Disease A is a kind of genetic disorder. Its occurrence is con!rolled by a pair of All F1 offspring show pl1enotypes resulting from a
alleles. Thie! fol/owing pedigree sho\\"s the inheritance oi' dis1:•J.SeA 111 a family. Fr phenotypes blending of parental phenotypes
K�·y: i.e plants of medium height and with pink flowers
0
■ selfiog ofF, 1
"'-'<Tf'llm:il�

m::,,k wi!h Ui."><!'a'>C A

0 oor"'41 l�m..i.Je

F2 phenotypes All F2 offspring show the same phenotypes as the F1

• f�m�lo: ..,;11, <lhca,,e A

(i) Based on the pedigree above. a studen1 deduced that the allele for disease A is With reference to the above flowchart, how do the actual results of Mendel's
dominant. Explain how he arrived at his answer. (Marks will not be awarded for experiments disprove the Blending Theory? (5)
genetic diagrams.) (4) ii. How do Mendel's laws of inheritance explain the results ofhis experiments? (4)
(ii) Individual 8 is going to marry a male heterozygous for disease A. What is the
probability of their first child having disease 1\? (I) b. The design of Mendel's experiments contributed to his success. Give two reasons why
(iii)Using the infonnation in the pedigree for individuals 2, 5 and 6, explain why it is the design ofhis experiments made his findings valid and reliable. (4)
not possible for the allele of disease A to be located on the X chromosome or the
Y chromosome. (4)
 Basic Genetics / P.8 Basic Genetics / P.9

c. In tenns of present day knowledge. describe what Mendel's 'hereditary factors' are in DSE-201218
diploid organisms and explain the physical basis ofthe activity of these ·factors· during
gamete fonnation. (4) 8. The photograph below shows the appearances of some kernels of a com:

AL-20061A

6. A man of blood group A married a woman of blood group B. They have a son and a
Kernel .-\ppcurancc
daughter. The blood group or the son is 0.
Purr le and smooth
ll Purnk and wrinkkd
(a) What is / are the possible blood group(s) of the daughter? Use a genetic diagram to C Yellov..- and smouth
D Ycllo,� and wrinkled
show hO\V you arrive at your answer. (4)
(Use 1 1\ 11 ; and i to represent the three alleles that determine the ABO blood groups in The purple colour is produced by a pigmented layer within the kernels. If the layer is not
humans.) pigmented. the yellow colour of the inner tissue becomes visible. Whether the kernel is
(b) Explain whether the son can receive blood transfusion from his father. (3) smooth or wrinkled is due to the type of food stored inside it. Smooth kernels (starchy
corn) store starch while wrinkled kernels (sweet com} store soluble sugars. The surface of
the sweet corns becomes wrinkled when the corn dries up,

(a ) With reference to osmosis. explain why the kernels of sweet com become
wrinkled wl1en they dry up but the kernels of starchy com remain smooth. (4
marks)

(b) The two traits of the kernels are controlled by genes located on different
homologous chromosomes. The following diagram shows the result of a cross

-
between two pure-bred com plants, one with purple and smooth kernels and the
other with yellow and wrinkled kernels:

-
Pure-t>red purple and T Purc•brcd yellow and
smo{)th k�nels. wrinkled kernel�

Purple and. $momh

kcmds

(i) Bused on the results of the cross. deduce which phenotypes are dominant.
(3 marks)
 B<ll't� Genetics.' P 10 Basic GeneL1cs I P.11

(ii) The Fl generation produced ,vas cros�L:d wi1h pure-breJ corn plants with DSE- 2014 J[I
yellow and wrinkled kernels, us shown belo,r:
6 It is gc:n<:!rally believed that domestic dogs evolved from ancient wolves. A recent study
comparing th:;; genomes of wolves and dogs suggests that genes with key roles in starch
digestion were selected during the domestication of wolves into dogs. One of these genes
w::is gene A, which codes for amylase. This gene may exist in many copies in a genome. The
following graph shows the number of individuals having different numbers of copies of gene
Pure-bred ydlow and
'-ITinkkd kernels A in 35 wolves and !J6 dogs:

t:
35
Koy: b"5 Wolves
□ Dogs
] 20
� 15

!
Explain the results of the cross using Mendel's la\v of inheritance. (4 _g 10
marks) 5
(Marks will not be awarded for genetic diagrams.) 0 2 10 15 20 25 30
Number ofcopies ofgene A
in the genome of each mdividual
(c) When Mendel proposed how traits are inherited, chromosomes had not yet been
discovered. In your opinion, how did Mendel come up with his hypothesis? (3 (a) Based on the data above and the gene expression processes, explain why the amylase
marks) activity in dogs is generally higher than that in wolves. (3 marks)
(b) ft is hypothesized that in ancient times, wolves might have been attracted to waste
DSE - 20131B dumps near early human settlements and consumed human food waste. Suggest how
the domestication of wolves would have led to the selection of multiple copies of gene
4. Red-green colour blindness is an X-linked recessive trait in humans. Peter is red-green A. (5 marks)
colour blind while his daughter, Mary, is nonnal.
(a) Deduce Mary's genotype without using gem:tic diagram. DSE 2015 IB
(4 marks)
(bJ Mary is an expectant mother. The photomicrograph below shows the karyotype of 4. Roger is found to be suitable for donating blood to recipients with blood types different
from his own. However, he cannot receive a blood transfusion from his parents. The blood
types of his father and motlier are A and B respectively.
(a) What is Roger's blood type? (1 mark)
(b) Given that:
JA represents the allele for producing antigen A on the surface of red blood cells
.JO 11 12 ! 1°' represents the allele for producing antigen Bon the surface of red blood cells
$.�·t!. �� i 1cprcsems the allele that does not lead to the production of any antigens on the
13 14 1S 16 I7 ·�

J23i�
surface of red blood :::ells
(i) Lising the abov1e symbols, state Roger's genotype. (1 mark)
her foetus: 19 20 21 ZI
(ii) Using the abv,·e symbols, state the genotypes of his parents. (2 marks}
(i) From the photomicrograph, can 1w deduce whether this foetus will be Fmhcr _ Mother: _ _ _ _ _ _
______ ___
red-green colour blmd or not? Explain your ans,vo:r. (:! marks)
(cl Explain 1-;hy Rogi::r cannot receive blood transfusions from his parents. (3 marks)
{ii) Is the foetus a boy or a girl? Explain your answer with reference to the
photomicrograph. (3 marks)

206
 Basic Genetics/ P.12 Basic Genetics / P. I 3

DSE 2016 lB Hl�DSE - 2017 I B

10. Colour blindness is an X-linked recessive genetic disorder. The pedigree below shows the \0.
inheritance of colour blindness in a family:
Key:
0 fomalc wict, nonmi.1 cn\ourvisfon
D nt:lk with nonnal colour vision
a ln l 940. scienti�t Affred Sturtevant hypothesised that the ability to rot! one's tongue is
detcm1ined by a single gen�. Hi,; hypothesis was based on the data below:
Case Charnctcrs of �rents Tongue rolling offsprin� Non-ton ue roll in offs rin
toil uc rol!in ;,:: ton 'LIC rollin
tongue rolling x non-ton ue rol\in 33 22

6
-6 ; 7 Does the trait of tongue rolling ability show continuous or discontinuous
O.d � female with colo1Jr blindness variation? Explain your answer. (2 marks)
� male- with colour blindness ii. Sturtevant concluded that tongue rolling is the dominant phenotype while
I non-tongue ro!ling is the recessive phenotype. With reference to the above
11 12 table, explain how he arrived at this conclusion. (2 marks)
(a) Colour blindness is due to the abnormal development ofphotoreceptors. State the
relevant type of photoreceptors and the location inside the eyeball where these b. In 1965, the offspring of a group of non-tongue rolling parents were studied. It was
photoreceptors are most abundant (2 marks) found that more than 30% of the offspring were tongue rollers. Does this finding
support Sturtevant's conclusion in (a)(ii)? Explain your answer. (2 marks)
(b) Given that the dominant allele of colour vision is represented by R while the
recessive allele is represented by r, determine all the possible genotypes and '· In 1971, another study on identical twins was carried out to further explore the factors
phenotypes of the offspring of individuals 1 and 2 using a genetic diagram. (5 marks) influencing the tongue rolling trait The results are summarized in the chart below:
(Note: Punnett square is not accepted) bolh twins were--------,
non-tongue rolling
(c) Draw all possible representation(s) for individual4 with reference to the key of the �----- both twins were
tongue rolling
pedigree. (1 mark)
one was tongue rolling----;
(d) Daisy (ind ividual 6) has recently given birth to a baby girl. Since one of her sons and the other was
suffered from colour blindness (individual 12), Daisy worried that their daughter non•tonguc rolling
would have colour blindness too. David (individual 7) reassured her by saying that:
Don't worry. Our daughter will be fine because I have normal colour vision! Justify
David's claim. (5 marks)
(Note: Marks will not be awarded for genetic diagrams.)
What is the advantage of using identical twins as the subjects for the study?(] marks)
ii. With reference to the above chart. complete the following table with data that
,;upport the conclusion (2 marks)

Conclusion Evidence
Genetic factors pl;;iy a signii"icant
role in the determination of the
\Ongue rolling 1rait
There are otkr foctors influencing
the tongue rolling trait
 Basic Genetics ! P.14 Basic Genetics! P.15

(c) It is commonly thought that the sex of offspring is mainly determined by the mother.
d. In the above case regarding the development of knowledge about the Explain why this is no/true. (3 marks)
inheritance of the tongue rolling trait. which or the following ideas about
science is demonstrate? (2 marks)
6. Hong Kong Red Cross Blood Transfusion Service keeps stocks of different blood groups to
[deas about science Put a·✓- in the appropriate ensure that there is enough blood supply for transfusion in hospitals.
spaces bdow
Science is a process of ongoing inquiries. (a) Ofull the blood groups, blood group O is in greatest demand in the Accident and
Science is afl�cled by social and cultural factors. Emi=rgcnc\ Dcpnrtmi=nts of hospitals. Suggest why the demand for blood group O is the
Scientists may not arrive al the same conclusion� cibout greatest. (3 marks)
the some set of data {b) Tht: table bdo11 shows some recommendations for adult frma/e and mule donors:
Scientific investigations may act require doing]
experiments in laboratories I
ii. Elaborate on how the deve/op!Tlent of knowledge about the inheritance of the Sugg1;s1 why there are different reco!Tlmendations for female and male donors. (3 marks)
tongue rolling trait can be used to demonstrate that scientists haw to be
open-minded. ( I mark} 9. Allhougl1 most DNA is stored in the nucleus, mitochondria also have a small amount of their
own DNA. The mituchondrial DNA contains some gi=nes coding for enzymes which are essential
HKDSE-2018 1B for oxidative phosphorylation. Mutations ofthese mitochondrial genes cause Leigh syndrome.
whicl1 is rare and fat<ll metobolic disease.
5. The photomicrograph below shows the paired homologous chro1TI0s01Ties ofa nom1al boy for
karyotyping: (a) Explain why gene mutations in the mitochondrial DNA can dfect oxidative
phosphorylation. (4 marks)
..,,:_"I (b) \.Vhm are the major products of oxidative phosphorylation? State their significance.
., �
;
··-
.,.'
-
(4 marks)
�._-
·; �
-,..�-
(c) LiJy had l\vo children who died from Leigh syndrome. It was fot.md that her eggs
•. contained mutated mitochondrial genes. Her children suffered from the disease because
"·
-�- ..)fo t
/�
\,'\. norrna!1y mitochondria in zygotes come from the eggs while sperms do not contribute

,· any.
(i) With regard to the fertilization process and the structure of sperms, suggest why
sperms do not contribute any mitochondria to zygotes. (] mark)
,. (ii) By using a new method called the 'three-parent baby' technique, Lily gave birth
to a healthy boy in 2016. Below are the main steps in the technique:

-
""·
(a) Circle the sex chro1Tiosomes on the above photogmph.
(b} State the type of cells. somatic cells or gametes. from which the b:ir;.'o!ypc was obtainc::d.
Explain your answer. (2 marks)
 Basic Genetics I P.16 Basic Genetics IP.I

donor Past Papers Marking Scheme - Basic Genetics

CE- 2003 Q.2 (a)

(i) The offspring in cross I have white flowers. so they must have received at least one
allele for white flower from either of the parents 1
Since both parents have purple flowers, each of them must carry at least one allele
for purple llower 1
-D- ,(). Thus at least one of the parents is heterozygous
In the heterozygous condition. only the dominant character is shown
l
1
egg with '""'"' "-'en / sperm Thus purple flower is the dominant character 1
nude:u.� removed fro:n the egg
(ii} F represents the allele for purple flower; frepresents the allele for white flower
(accept other sets of symbols)
The possible genotypes of the purple-flo\ver are FF or Ff 1 or 0
/�\ and that of the white-flower parent is ff I
"- I If gene is used instead of allele in (i) or (ii). deduct 1 mark
'ertilisation

\ @ ) Z}'!,'.l)!e (iii) If the genotype of purple-flower parent is FF, all offspring will produce purple
< flowers 1
1
heahhyboy
If the genotype if Ff, purple-flower offspring and white-flower offspring will be
formed 1+
and they would be in the ratio of 3: 1 1
Identify the source(s) of DNA of the nucleus and mitochondria in the boy·s cells.
(2 marks)
CE- 2004 Q.3 fa)
Nucleus:
Mitochondia: (i) Plant A is homozygous for the green-leaf allele
Plant B is homozygous for the variegated-leaf allele
because all the offspring of each plant have tl1e same phenotype as the parent

(ii) Both plants A and B are homozygous, but of different phenotypes

When they arc crossed. all their offSpring will be heterozygous
In heterozygous condition, the phenotype shown by the offspring is the dominant
phenotype 1

I Effective co1111111111icatio11 (c)

(iii) Magnesium I+
For the formation or chloropl1yll I

o, Nitrate I+
For the fonnation of chloropl1y 11 / protein I

CE- 2005 Q.2

(a) chromosome
(b) heterozygote
(c) dominant
(d) meiotic cell division
(e) gamete
(fj diploid
 Ba.-;ic Genetics /P.2 Basic Genetics / P.3

CE- 2006 Q.4

(a) *mitotic cell division l+ Individual 5 Individual 6
This ensures that all the GM com plants produced carry the inserted gene/ Parent bb Bb
are genetically identical
(bi It may kill some other insects/ lead to a drop in the insect popt1lati0n Gamete b B b
thus resulting in the extinction of the species I reduction or biodiversity
It may kill some beneficial insects Offspring Bb bb
which may help the pollination of other plants (bent little finger) (straight little finger)
If the corn grains are dispersed into the natural envirnnm<!nt
the plants formed will outcornpete / displace some other species Deduct 1 mark for \Vrong format, e.g. no identification of parent, gamete or
due to its resistance to insects offs rim", or no line indicatin° the combination of gamete
(c) Ability to fix nitrogen/ nitrogen fixation
to increase nitrogen content of the food produced The probability fortheir,child to have straight little finger is ½ /0.5 / 50%

CE- 2006 Q.8 (b) CE- 2008 0.9 fa)

(i) Vegetative propagation.
(i) Four daughter cells are formed from a single parent celL (ii) The chromosomes from A fail to pair up with the chromosomes
The tv,,o members of a pair ofhomologous chromosomes :ire separat1;;J: from 8 during meiotic cell division
each goes to a different daughter cell because they are not homologous chromosomes
Each daughter cell contains the haploid number or chromtisom..:s Any two I Therefore. hybrid C fails to produce gametes
(ii) ( 1} Type A gamete has both members of the homologous pair. while !ypc 8 (lit) (]] Wind
gamete has none oftlmt homologous pair Feathef)' stigma
(1) *Down i Down's syndrome Stigma exposed ] Absence ofperals } any two
(3) The X chromosome carries more genes than !hi.! Y chromosome A11thers exposed
Absence of the X chromosome will result in the loss of mmi:: gem::sr'alleles I
that may be essential to the survival of the zygotes and iis subsequent 1_1) Dming the experiment, use a plastic bag to wrap the
devdopment treated flowers except during the following treatments
Remove the anthers from the flowers.
Use o. brush to transfer !he pollen grains from other
CE- 2007 Q.5 flowers to the sti1:,'llla ofthe treated flowers.

(a) Yes. CE- 2009 Q.3 /a)

To produce offspring with different phenotypes
there must be two different combination of gametes
therefore, either one of the parents must be heterozygous, producing two types of
gametes carrying different alleles
OR
The parents are of different phenotypes, hence, one of the parents must be
homozygous recessive
To produce offspring with different phenotypes
the other parent must be heterozygous, producing two types of gametes carrying
different alleles
(a) (i) Individual 8 is G6PD deficient, she must be homozygous recessive
Shi;; received a recessive allele for G6PD deficiency from individual 7
Individual 7 is without G6PD, she must have at least one dominant allele
l Hence, individual 7 is heterozygous
OR
Individual 7 is without G6PD deficiency, she must have at least one
dominant allele (1)
To give birth to a G6PD deficiency daughter (individual 8) who must
be homozygous ri:!cessive (1)
individual 7 must have given her a recessive allele for G6PD deficiency (1)
Hence, individual 7 is heterozygous (1)

(b) Individual 1 possesses straight little fingers. she must be homozygous recessive (ii) The probability of their child to have G6PD deficiency is 1/1 I 0.5150%
and pass an allele for straight little fingers to individual 4
Individual 4 possesses bent little fingers, she must have at least one allele for bent (iii) Yes. Because it is an inherited disorder not a transmissible disease,
little fingers 1 the recipient will not contract the disease from receiving the blood
Hence, individual 4 is heterozygous 1 of individual 6
OR
(c) Define symbol (S) No. lfthe recipient is under medication of certain drugs,
Let B be the allele for bent little fingers the transfused red blood cells may be damaged and he would suffer
and b be the allele for straight little fingers from a loss ofthe transfused blood (IJ
 Basic Genetics / P.4 Basic Genetics / P.5

CE- 2010 Q.9a AL - 2001 2A

9. (a) (i) Individual 8 without disease A must have at least one nonnal allele that is 3. (a )
inherited from either of her parents (individual 3 or 4) (1)
Individuals 3 and 4 showing disease A must have at least one allele for disease A (l)
Hence, either individual 3 or 4 is heterozygous (l)
. red-ereen colour blindness
gene on X sex chromosome/
sex-linked
. ABO blood m-oup
gene on autosome / not
sex-linked
With the dominant allele being expressed (1)
As both individuals 3 and 4 have disease A, the allele for disease A must be dominant .
OR
male progeny inherits the allele .
OR
male progeny inherits allele
(ii) 1/2 /0.5/50% (1 ) . from other/ maternal inheritance
single gene with 2 alleles . from both mother and father
single gene with 3 alleles /

(iii) Individual 2, having disease A. must ha'>'e at least 1 dominant allele for disease A (1)
. complete dominance (1) . multin!e alleles
codominance ( J) and
dominance depend on allele
3
If the allele for disease A is located on X chromosome, individual S(his daughter) pairs (1)
must receive the allele for disease A on X chromosome and showing the disease (1)
If the allele for disease A is located on Y chromosome, individual 6 (his son) must
recei'>'e the allele for disease A on Y chromosome and showing the disease. (1)
.
OR
allele for nonnal colour vision is
dominant over allele for red-green
.
OR
alleles for A and B anti<>ens are
codominant (1 )over the allele

.
Howe'>'er, both indi'>'iduals 5 & 6 do not ha'Je disease A (1) colour blindness ( 1) for no antiuen which is a

.
Therefore, it is not possible for the allele of disease A to be located on the X
chromosome or the Y chromosome.
male progeny expresses the
phenotype of single allele
recessive allele (1)
male progeny expresses the
phenotype according to the
genotype ofthe allele pair
(max. 5)

)N.B.: No contrast, no mark.\

(bl Definition orsvmbols ( l)

Let!'\ be tl1c d�minant qllc]c foranti<>en A production
Let i be the recessi'>'e allele for no antigen production
Tom's genotype cun be!'\ I·"' or!'\ i (1/::)
May's genotype is ii ('h)

P / parents' genotypes
GI gamete types
F1 / F1 genotypes I"i ('h) l'\ i, ii (Y::)
phenotypes All progen'>': blood group A(½) 50% progenv: blood group A
(½)
The chance is either 50% or 100%.

IN.B.: No contrast, no mark.I

 Basic Genetics / P.6 Basic Genetics I P.7

e.g. (any lli'.Q.Sets)

AL- 2005 2A hi:: studied one or two traits at a time (1) which is a simplified model for
studying inheritance/ scientific investigations ( 1)
2. (a) (i) he worked with a great number of samples (1) / he did replicates, to reduce
Concept for mark award: errors in interpretation caused by chance (1) / sampling error
Mendel's F1: showed either one ofthe parental phenotypes f the dominant 5 he removed stamens offlowers (I) to prevent self-pollination in the first 4
phenotype for each trait (1) and no intennediate phenotypes cross (I)/ to eliminate other variables
Mendel's F2: he bred pure lines for the experiments (1) to obtain a simplified model for
> detailed description of the four different phenotypes in F2 (3)/ just a studying inheritance/ scientific investigations (I)
simple statement of having four different phenotypes in F2 (l) he chose discrete and simple traits for investigation (l) so that observations
> dihvdrid ratio: 9: 3 : 3 : 1 (1) can be easily and accurately recorded (])

e.g. Mendel's F1 show either one ofthe parental phenotypes for each of height (c) • factors are alleles ofthe same gene (])
and flower colour (1) / the dominant phenotype for each trait which exist in pairs (l) in diploid organisms and
Mendel's F2 shows four different phenotypes (I)/ some showing F1 traits. located on a pair ofhomologous chromosomes (l) 4
some showing dominance in one trait and some showing dominance in the (OR factors are genes (1), their alleles exist in pairs (l) and are located on a
other trait, and they are in a phenotypic ratio of 9 : 3 ; 3 : 1 (1) pair ofhomologous chromosomes (1 ))
homologous chromosomes separate in gamete formation/ meiosis (1)
(ii) and this corresponds to the se1rregation of factors in gamete formation
Concept for mark award:
Mendel's first Jaw: ma\'..4
> each trait is detennined by a pair of hereditary factors (1)
> effect of one factor masks the effect of the other factor {I) AL-2006 IA
> segregation of factors during gamete formation {I)
> one factor of each pair goes to each gamete (I) 6. (a) 4
Mendel's second law:
Fal!ier Mother
> independent assortment of hereditary factors (I)
> leading to variations in the 1.rnmetes ( 1 J PMent:i!I genorype !A i rs; (JJ

e.g. • Mendel"s first law I The Law of �egregution suggc:srs 11ml a pa11icular
trait is determined by a pairofl1eredirnrv factors { I J which will
ma.'i:. 4 Gamete 0 0 0 0 (I)

Offspri:ig genotype J�I8 IA,- l6i ii (1)

segreg,ate during, gamete formation ( l ), so that only om:: fac!or will go
tll each gamete (I) Possible blood groups Of the daugl1ter nre AB. A, Band O (I)
When two gnmetes each carrying either oric foi.:tor ofa pair fuse,
only the dominant factor will be expressed in 1iie phen()t_ype or the (bJ • the sou has amibodics 10 antigen A ( I J 3
offspring (l J these nntiliodies would react with antigen A present on the red blood cells
His second law/ The Law of Independent 1\sso11ment ex.plnin.s tlrnt ofl1is father ( 1)
hereditary factors assort independently (I)/ recombine randomly in causing agglutination to occur {I), thus the son cannot receive blood transfusion
gamete formation, which leads to different genetic combinations in from his father
the gametes (I), and hence variations in F:. (7)

(bJ�-- ��--- - ---- -----------�

Concept for mark award:
description of one specific aspect of Mendel's experimental design ( 1) 4
explain how such design can improve the validity and/ or reliability of his
ex erimenta! findings(])
 Basic Genetics /P.8 Basic Genetics / P.9

DSE-2012 1B DSE- 2013 1B

8. (a) soluble sugars lower the \Vater potential ofthe kernels (1) while (I) 4. (a) as Mary's father is red-green colour blind, he must have a X chromosome
starch, being insoluble in water. does not affect the water potential of the (1) bearing the recessive allele for red�green colour blindness (1)
kernels ( l) being a female, Mary must have inherited the X chromosome bearing the
during development, kernels of sweet corns draw in a larger amount of/ (1) recessive allele from l1er father (1) (4)
more water by osmosis than those of starch kernels (1) on the other hand, Mary is normal, therefore she must have a X
later on, when the kernels dry up, kernels of sweet com shrinks as a result (1) chromosome bearing dominant allele for normal eye sight (1 )
oflossing large amount of water (1) therefore, Mary is a l1eterozygote (I)
as the skin is not elastic ( 1 ), thus the kernels of sweet corns become (I}
wrinkled (b) ( i) No, it is because
max. 4 the photomicrograph cannot reveal the genetic make-up of the foetus
( 1) I the pl1otomicrograph only shows the number or appearance of
(b) (i ) as both parents are pure-bred plants, the FI produced are all (}) chromosomes (1) (2)
lieterozygous ( 1) whereas red-green colour blindness is due to the presence of a
in heterozygous condition, dominant alleles will be expressed while i1 I certain allele ( 1 J
recessive alleles will be masked ( l) (Remark: gene: inst.::nd ornlkk is
not accepted.)
therefore, purple colour and smooth surface are the dominant (ii) the foe1115 is a female (1) bccaase (
(I} the 23"' pair of chromosomes in !he k:iryotype have simil!!r size/ length
phenotvpes ( 1) ( Remark: al Ide instead or phenotype is not accc:pLcd.J (3)
1rsymhols <1rc us.::d in the cxplanntion, the symbols must be def'ined <1l the: (I) I.
vcry beginning. and thus the sex chromosomes of the foetus ;ire both X chromosomes (l)

(ii) as the individuals in FI generation are heterozygous with and the (I) DSE�2014
l!enes for the two traits are located on different chromosomes. the
alleles for the traits are assorted independently ( 1) 6. (a) dogs have many more copies of gene A in the genome than wolves ( 1)
only one type of gametes for the pre-bred corn plant with yellow and
F1}
(I} these genes will be transcribed into mRNA (I)
wrinkled kernels (1) which, in tum, translated into amylase, i.e. more amylase will be produced (3)
and four different types of gametes will be resulted from the in dogs (I), resulting in higher amylase activity
generation(!)
after random fertilisation, zygotes with four different combinations of (max. 2)
genotypes will be produced ( 1) (b) (humans are omnivores,) the human food wastes usually contain
leading to the expressions of all the possible phenotypes (A, B, C and carbohydratt:!S such as starch (1)
variations in copy number of gene A may exist in an ancient wolf
D) in the Fz generation (1) (Remarks: This answer cannot get l mark population ( 1)
ifit is mentioned that the ratio is 9:3:3:\.) those with higher gene copy numbers could produce more amylase and
were more adapted to a starch-rich diet of human food waste(])
(c) Mendel collected a large amount ofexperimental evidence (I) (}) as wolves got used to feeding on human food wastes and gradually (5)
and based on his observation on the number of offspring with different (I) domesticated, they could then grow better & reproduce more than those
phenotypes (1) with smaller gene copy number (1)
he worked out a possible explanation for the observation by logical (1) their genes, including multiple copies of gene A could be passed to the
deduction (1) next generation (1), resulting in the selection of multiple copies in the
Remarks: dogs' genome
The first mark is given to the point that a large number of experiments
on different traits were conducted.
T11e second mark is given to the observation of the ratio of different DSE-2015 lB
phenotypes.
The third mark is given to the reasoning ofthe e.-xperimental results. 4. (a) blood type O (1)
14 marks
(bl ( i) ii
(ii) Father: IAi ( J) Mother: l8i (1) 2

(c) antibodies A and Bare already present in Roger's blood (1)

these antibodies will act against the antigens of the parents' red blood cells (1)
and causes blood cells clumping/ hemolysis ofblood cells (1) if Roger receive
blood transfusion from his parent 3
 8:isic Genetics IP. l 0 Basic Genetics / P.11

DSE 2016 1B l-lKDSE-201718

10. (SJ cone cells (I}

they are concentrated at the yellow spot ( 1) of the rdina ' 10. (a) (i) discontinuous trait ( l)
beca.use there are distinctive categories with no intermediate
categories ( 1)
(2)

{b) {ii} in case I, non-rolling offspring appeared even when both parents
individual individual 2 w.::re tongue rollers ( l)
parents: XRY X'>,.." (1,1) this shows that the allele for non-tongue rolling was masked in the
parents (1)
hence. tongue rolling should be the dominant phenotype and
non-tongue rolling should be the recessive phenotype
{IJ OR
in case L non-tongue rolling offspring must have inherited at least (2)
one allele for non-tongue rolling from at least one of their roller
parents ( 1)
however. both parents showed tongue rolling phenotype. i.e.
offspring$ nun-tongue rolling phenotype was masked (1)
hence, tongue rolling should be the dominant phenotype and
genotypes: XR VY {IJ non-tongue rolling should be the recessive phenotype
phenotypes: Female with nom1a! colotir vision Male with ,;;olour blinilness (I)
{b) no, it did not supporr the conclusion (I)
"Accept Fl but not encouraged ifnon-tongue rolling was the recessive phenotype, all the offspring of the
non-tongue rolling parents would be non-tongue rollers (I)
Wrong fonnat: deduct I mark only [format include labellings on the leftmost OR
column (parents, gametes, offspring). the symbol of mating "X" and the lines no, it did not supporr the conclusion ( 1) (l+l)
linking the symbols] tongue rolling offspring must have inherited at least one allele for tongue
Wrong use of symbols: deduct 1 mark only [put "x" on the bultom right comer] rolling from at least one of their non-tongue rolling parents, however,
Remarks: both parents showed non-tongue rolling phenotype, tongue-rolling
{l!he label.1•.ft;r individuals J and 2 are missing, only mar J mark will he should be recessive.
given to the parent genulypes; pul a tick ncr/ lo mdivid11al 2.
( (c) (i) the genetic composition ofthe identical twins is exactly the same (1)
(/individual 2 produces two 1ypes r? .\'" gametes, 1heJi1:1·1 relernnl murk wit! they should show the same phenotype/ tongue rolling ability (1) if {2J
not be givr:n 5 the trnil is controlled by genetic factors

{c) lilll Conclusion Evidence

Genetic factor plays a significant 82% of the identical twins showed
[only accepted shading area with oblique stroke: neglect all other text except "4"]
role io th, detennination of the same phenmype (1)
ton>;ue rolling trait. (2)
{dJ as David is a male, heh.is only one X-chromosome (I) There are other factors influencing 18% ofthe identical twins showed
having normal vision, his only X-chromosome must bear the nllele for normal the ton!!ue rolling trait different phenotypes ( l)
vision ( 1) lnstrnctwns to markers. (I) candidates must quote ntimencal data m this part (2) as the
and this X-chromosome must be inherited to his d.iughter { I l fir:,,t evidence, candidates need to elabonitc that two iroups were identical twins with the
because the allele for normal vision is domirnrnt / will be exrmcssed ovcrthe same phenotype.
recessive allele (I) [accept dominant character is shown]
even if the baby girl receives an allele for colour blindness rrom D:iis;,. she: will not {d) (i) !dens about Science I
Science is a urocess or ongoing inquiries. I ✓
have coluur blindness (I)/ will have normal vision [,1ccep1 ··the baby girl\\ ill not
have colour blindness as her genotypes ure either X 1'X' or x 1•x1-:··1 .5
Science 1s .iffccted bv social and cultural factors. I
Scien!is_ts havmg the same set of data may not arrive at the same I (2)
coni.:lus1ons.
Scientific investigation need not necessarily be doing experiments ✓
111 laboratories. I
(JeJuct 1 mark for each mistake)
Instructions to markers:
Totiil l tick in the answer bo:.:, I correct tick (ONE mark); I incorrect tick (NO mark);
Total 2 ticks in the :rn�·wer boxes, 2 correct ticks (TIYO marks). 1 correct tick and I
incurred tick (ONE mark), 2 incorrect ticks (No mark);
Total 3 ticks, 2 corn,ct ticks and I incorrect tick (ONE mark), l correct tick and 2
irn:arrect ticks (NO mark)
Total 4 ticks, NO mark
(ii) ScientistS who conducted tongue rolling experiments in 1965 or
1971 should have been skeptical and have looked for evidence from
different sources/ perspectives (1) I have been ready to review/ (11
challenge current ideas I knowledge/ theories
13 marks
Basic Genetics / P.12

Past Papers - Molecular and Applied Genetics

AL- 2003 2A

Crops that are drought resistant are economically desirable because they can survive well in
environments that have a limit1;d water supply. whereas crops that are drought sensitive
cannot. Drought-resistant crops can produce a metabolite that can adjust the osmotic
potential of the cell sap in the root.

(a) In drol1ghl conditions , explain how the root cells of the following plants response
osmotically
(i) drought-sc11 sitive plants (2)
(ii) drought-resistant plants (2)

(b) ln the drougl1t-resistant plant, a gene encodes a key enzyme in the biosynthetic
pathway of this metabolite. The nucleotide sequences of the drought-sensitive allele S
and drought-resistant allele Rare:

S ATAAGCATGACATTA
R ATAAGCAAGACATTA

(i) What is the nucleotide sequence ofthemRNA for S? (2)

(ii) Using the universal codon table below, detennine the amino acid
sequence encoded by the allele S. (2)
(iii) How is allele R different from S? What difference would this make
to the translated product? (3)
UnivcJ'lla on tab e

First Third
base in Second base in !lie codon base in
<he tbe
codon u C A G codon
Pho S& T;;;- '' u
F ''
u Pho
Le,, '"'So,
g,,,

'"His'"
Stan"' Sto°'
C
A
L<n
L<n Pro '"'
T G
u
C Leu
Leu
Pm
Pn,
Hi,
G!u '"'
Arn C
A
L"'
n,
n,
Pm
Tiu
Th,
G!u
Asn
Asn
'"''"
AN G
u
C
A
ru, Tlu L•s A
M� Tlu L� - Arr G

G
Vol
Val
Ab
Alo
A"'
A-;_;; ''I Glv
Glv
u
C
Vol
var
Am
Als
G!u
G!u ' Gl•
G!y
A
G

(U. C, A and G stmi.d for \he 4 different ba�s in nucleotldcs.)

(The various arnlI10 .1cids arc repr,:;sented by their short frmns in the table.)
 /\1oleculur �11d Applied Genet,cs f P. :?. Molecular :md Applied Genetics ( P,3

AL-2004 1B AL-2005 IA
JI. Three DNA samples were used in the followi ng analysis These inc luded linear viral DN/\.
pl.ismid DNA and DNA marker. The same amount of DNA from each samp le was 8. DNA fingt:rprinting can b e applied ill different areas.
completely cut with a restri ction enzyme . Th is was followed by gc:I ekctroµhorcsis wl1ae
the DNA fragment moved from the 11egatiw to th.: posi1ive pok. Th..: gd 1\ · c 1s then stained (aJ One npplic<!tion of DNA fingerprinting is to identi(y !he relationship among members
with a dye so that bands eontaining DNA fr::r.gments cou lJ be v1su:.il1zcd under ultr:.i-vo
i lct in a fornily. Tilt result of a DNA fingerprinting test performed on four individuals. P, Q.
light. The DNA marker has a known molecular size in basc:ra1r (bp ). lhc m,u·k,:·1 �avcd els a Rand S. is shown bdo1Y
standard to measure the molecular si;,:e of ONA fragm.:nts. A rhotograph of the

- -
electrophoresis pattern is shown belo;v: p Q R
(femo/e) (maJe) (moWrofP)
pl�,,,,i,J

-- - -
\

0
Ii.\' .

--
,cf"'lin� p, <ltkm
>
or dee1rophnre,;,

-
-
,oo,
- -
0
! 000

(N.B . Assume that within the same band, the DNA fragments have homogeneous

-
molecular size and identical nucleotide sequence.)
(a) Based on the pattem shown, determine the number of si tes that can be cut by the
restriction enzyme in the
(i) plasmid DNA (l)
( ii) linear viral DNA (]) Based on the data above, deduce with reasons the most probable relationship of the
following persons with P:
(b) Based on the pattern shown, the molecular size of the DNA marker is 28 000 bp (found
by the sum of the molecular size of its DNA fragments). What is the molecular size of (i) Q (2)
the plasmid DNA? Show your calculation. (ii) s (2)
(N.B. Assume that the molecular size ofan individual DNA fragment is measured
by the leading edge ofthe fra&'lllent facing the positi ve pole.) {l) (b) Another application of DNA fingerprinting is to identit}' the evolutionary relationship
among different groups of Jiving organisms. What is the assumption involved in this
(c) According; to the pattern shown, explain whether the viral DNA or the p lasmid ONA. application of DNA fingerprinting? Ill
has a larger molecular size. (2)

(dJ Suppose the patterns of DNA fragments shown arc unique to the vi ru� and the p/:,srnid.
( iJ what is tile scientific name for these patterns? (ll
(ii) state Mo applications of these vi m/ und plasm id DNA pattc:rns. (1)

(e) If the same nmount of human DNA is complcte ly m t by the ::ibove-111ention..:d

restriction enzyme and e/ectrophoresed in the :mrnl! way, a smear wi th no discrct<:: DNA
bands is obtained. Account for this result. {3J
 Molecular and Applied Genetics / P.4 Molecular and Applied Genetics / P.5

AL- 2006 2A (a) Using \he nuckotidc number as a reference, identify the mutation in the [SJ allele. (1)
(b} Give the corresponding mRNA sequence for the part of the [SJ allele sl1own above. (2)
2. DNA controls various metabolie processes in our body through encoding different types of (c) Based on tl1e codon table below, give the amino acid sequence encoded by the mRNA
proteins synthesized in the cells. sequence in (b). (2)

(a) TI1e diagram below shows the process of transcription of a DNA strand, which First base in Second base in the codon Third base in
encodes part ofa polypeptide: the codon u C A G the codon
coding =and Phe Ser Tye Cys u
u Phe Sec Tye Cys C
Leu Sec Stop Stop A
Leu Sec Stop Tep G
direction of transcription Leu Pm His Acg u
C Leu Prn His Aeg C
(i) According to the DNA sequence shown. deduce the mRNA produced (1)
Leu Prn Glc Acg A
(ii) Describe the process by which the mRNA obtained directs the synthesis of
Leu Prn Glc Aeg G
the polypeptide part. (5)
Ile The Ase Sec u
Ile The Ase Sec C
(c) In some people. a gene mutation results in the fonnation of a defective digestive A
Ile The Lys Acg A
enzyme that may cause a gastrointestinal disease.
Met The Lys Acg G

(i) One way to treat this disease is by enzyme replacement, i.e. introducing an Val Ala Asp Gly u
external source of the digestive enzyme into the patient's gastrointestinal G Val Ala Asp Gly C
tract. The enzyme used can be produced by recombinant DNA technology. Val Ala Glu Gly A
Outline how the enzyme is produced by this technology. (4) Val Ala Glu Gly G
(ii) Gene therapy can be an alternative method for the treatment of this genetic
disease. State nt-'O fundamental differences between the principles of gene Note: The various amino acids are represented by their short forms in the table.
therapy and enzyme replacement mentioned in (c)(i). (2)
(d) DNA testing \Vas carried out on a married couple, Mand P, their newborn baby 8_ and
id) What potential hazards should scientists consider in the use or gene therapy in two individuals (J and K). In this test, the DNA that codes for the P-chain of each
treating genetic diseases? (3) person was subjected to treatment by a restriction enzyme. This enzyme recognises the
DNA sequence CTNAG and cuts !lie DNA between the C and T nucleotides. The DNA
fragment(s) fanned were then analysed by gel electrophoresis. The results are shown
below

-- -
1. In malaria prevalent areas, such as Africa and the Middle East. sickle-eel! trait is quite (Note: N ,,,._ any nucleotide A, T, C or G)
common. People with sickle-cell trait are mildly anaemic and are heterozygous for the gene
K M p B
encoding the P-chain of haemoglobin. The beginning part of the coding DNA (non•template (mother) (father) {baby)
strand) of the P•chain for both the nonnal allele [A] and the mutated allele [SJ are listed
below. The first nucleotide is numbered as 1.

-
direction of
DNA migration
24
nonnal allele [A]: ATG GIG CAC CTG ACT CCT GAG GAG (non-template strand)

J: reference DNA sample from a person with nonnal P-chain

24
K· reference DNA sample from a person with sickle-cell anaemia, i.e. l1omozygous
mutated allele [SJ ATG GTG CAC CTG ACT CCT GTG GAG (non-template strand)
for the rsJ allele
 Molecular and Applied Genetics I P.6 Molecular and Applied Genetics / P.7

(i) In the gel electrophoresis results above, two DNA bands are observed in the J (b) A new qm�en usually mates with many drones before she settles down for the
sample while only one DNA band is present in the K sample. Explain these results development of a new colony. Explain the biological significance of mating with
by referring to the DNA sequence of the alleles shown on the opposite page. (4) many drones. (2)

(ii) From the results of the DNA testing. deduce the genotypl.' of the mother and that (C) Honeybees are usually yellow in body colour. Without the yellow pigment, honeybees
ofthe father. Briefly explain your deduction. (2) would appear greyish. Fonnation of the yellow pigment involves enzymes I and II.
Its biochemical pathway is shown below:
(iii) With the aid of a genetic diagram, find the probability of this married couple
having a child with sickle-cell trait. (5) :iJkk:
-· --· ?.
·-·"--
(Use A and S to represent the two alleles as given i11 this question.J !
.::n�d.::� iwwd:J

(e) Jt is known that people with sickle-cell trait are more resistant 10 1mdaria. Based on this
J,
En•·yrn.:: I
information, explain why the sickle-cell trait is more common in malarial prevalent
areas than areas with low incidence of malaria. (4 I Dominant alleles Q and R encode enzyme:s I and II respectively. Their recessive
alleks q and r Jo not lead to the production of functional enzymes. These two genes
AL-20091A arc: not linked.
2. Complete the following paragraph with suitable word(s}
(i) ln a crnss. a queen or genotypes QqRr was allowed to mate with a drone of
Scientists mark use of genetic technology to produce transgenic crops. An example is genotype qr.
genetically modified (GM) maize that is resistant to insect pests. This involved the isolation ( l J Stute the body col om of the queen and the drone. (2)
of a bacterial (a) .which is then introduced into the maize plant via a (b) the GM (2) Using the given allele representations, determine the genotypes and
maize can produce a protein at the (c) inside its cells. This protein is toxi!,; to the insect phl;!notypic ratio of worker offspring with the aid ofa genetic diagram. (4)
pests of maize but not humans. However. the production of GM crops has r::iised concerns (Note: Assume all the offspring produced are worker bees.)
in different aspects, such as (d) and (e) ( 5) t3) 15 000 greyish workers were produced fonn the above cross. lfthese
work.!rs arc fed with intennediate N for several days, predict how many
would become yellow. Explain your answer. (4)
AL- 2009 IA
7. In a bacterial genome, cytosine contributes to 28% oftl1e total number of nitrogenous bases {ii) Part of the nucleotide sequence of allele Q is shown below:
in its double-stranded DNA
triplet ea:k
�
(a) What is the percentage of guanine in this DNA? Explain your answer. (2) Lll ,: cl.,· ,Ci) GI r, Gj C' GiG! cl,, rl
(b) Calculate the percentage of adenine in this DNA. (2)
(cl How much uracil can be found in this DNA? ())

( 1 J If the nucleotide at position 6 is deleted in a mutation. how would this affect

AL- 2010 2A the production of enzyme I? (3)
3. In honeybees, female are developed form fertilised eggs '>Vhereas drones (males) are
developed from unfertilized eggs. Therefore, females are diploid and drones are haploid. (2) lfthe nucleotide at position 6 is replaced by another nucleotide with a
There are two types of female bees: the queen and the workers. However, only the queen diflh.!nt base, a functional enzyme may still be produced. How would you
can lay eggs. account for this? (3)

(a) State the type(s) of the cell division involved in gamete formation in the queen and
the drones respectively (2)
 Molecul.ir and Applied Genetics / P.B Molecular and Applied Genetics / P. l

HKDSE 2020 1 B
M Past Papers Marking Scheme - Molecular and Applied Genetics
9. The following DNA sequence shows the coding strand of part of a gene found in insect
ALM 2003 2A
species A:
3. (a) (i) root cells have a higher water potential than soil water (1)_ water leaves 2
the root cells by osmosis (1)
(ii) synthesis of the metabolite lowers the water potential ( 1) / lowers the 2
(a) Which of the following correctly shows the sequence of the mRNA corresponding to
solute potential ofroot cells to below that of soil water, cells will not lose
the underlined sequence of this coding strand? Put a-✓- in the appropriate box to water to the environment and survive (1) / cells can still absorb water
indicate your choice. {1 mark)
D AUG GUC GUA UAC GCU ACC (b) (i) mRNA ofS. UAU UCO UAC UGU AAU (2) 2
( coneept of complementary bases)
D UAC CAG CAU AUG CGA UGO (ii) amino acid sequence of S: Tyr Ser Tyr Cys Asn (2) 2
(iii) R has nucleotides AAG instead of ATG (1) in the third triplet of 2
(b) Using the following codon table. write the amino acid sequence of the protein nucleotides (1)
or The81li base(l)Tis replacedbyA(l)
translated from the mRNA in (a). (2 marks)
the third amino acid changes from Tyr to Phe ( l) / replaced by Phe in the
encoded peptide
I Scc,md ba_-;e of the codon
I U C A I G AL- 2004 lB

1 \ (a) (i) 2 (1)

(ii) 5 ( 1)

{bl S000bp+2000bp== l0000bp(l)

(c) • viral DNA is larger ( 1 ), sum of base pair of all DNA fragments ofviral DNA> 2
that or plasmid DNA ( 1)

(dl (i) fin�erprint ( 1)

( ii) Any� uses or fingerprint ( l mark for each use):
e.g. {acci::pt correct alternatives)
use in detecting the presence of this virus and plasmid ( 1 }
use in the identification of this virus and plasmid (I) max. 2
use in the study oCth<:: relationship between viruses and the
(c) It was found that the gene has two alleles. The difference betv,,ecn the two alleles in the relationship between bacteda ( 1)
underlined sequence is highlighted below:
1,1 �--�-�-�------------------,
alklc 1: .. ATG GTC OTA TA,�j GCT /,.CC .
. . Concept for mark award;
human DNA is large in size (1) max. 3
allele: Z·... 1\TG GTC GTJ\ T1\\Q: GCT ACC. the restriction enzyme cuts the DNA into many different DNA fragments
(mutated) (1) / many restriction sites
What kind of mutation is this? (1 mark) some fragments are close in size ( 1)
cannot be se arated effectively :. mer •e as a smear (1)
With reference to the codon table, describe how this mutation affects the protein (11)
translated from this gene. (3 marks)
(iii) Individuals from insect species A exist in two fonns, green bodied and bro\1/ll AL- 2005 lA
8. (a) (i) The bands of P either come from R (mother) or from Q (1 ). Therefore, 2
bodied. Individuals with a green body have only allele 1. Some ofthose with a
Q is her father ( 1).
bro\1/ll body have both allele 1 and allele 2 while others have only allele 2. (ii) S has many bands common to P. The bands of S either come form Q or R ( 1). 2
Ifthe body colour of insect species A was only caused by the mutation of this Therefore, he is a son ofQ and Rand a brother ofP (1 ).
gene, which allele (1 or 2) would be recessive? Explain your answer. (3 marks)
(b) The closer the e'>'o\utionary relationship of two groups ofliving organisms, the more
(Note: Marks will not be awarded for genetic diagrams.) common bands they will have in their DNA fingerprinting patterns (1).
(5)
 Molecular and Applied Genetics / P.2 Molecular and Applied Genetics / P.3

AL- 2006 2A
2. (a) (i) CGCAAGAGGUCU (1}
(ii)
Concept for mark award;
fate ofmRNA after transcription (l-2)
amino acids carried by tRNA ( l)
complementary pairing between anticodons of tRNA and codons of
mRNA (1)
attachment of tRNA to ribosomes (l Jin sequence
formation of peptide bond ( l)
e.g . the mRNA transcribed moves out to the cytoplasm (I) and ma>.:. 5
attaches onto rRNA / the ribosomes ( J)
different tRNA molecules carry different amino acids ( l}
aminoa cyl-tRNA molecules/ amino acid-tRNA complex with anticodons
complementary to the codons of tbe mRNA {I) will anacl1 to the
ribosome { I J in seqtience and a peptidt: bond will be fr.inned between
adjacent amino acids ( l J, tht1s forming the polypeptide
(C) {i)
Concept for mark award:
obtaining the gene coding for the: enzyme ( J J max. 4
introducing the gene into cultured cdls through 11 vector ( J)
expression of the gene forming the enzyme ( I J
mass production of the enzyme ( I J
purification or the enzyme ( 1)
eg
. . synthesi:ze the DNA sequence coding for the functionul enzyme
in bacteria ( 1) I use restriction enzyme to cul the non-defr:c1ive gene
from the l1ost cell
introduce the DNA/ gene into cultured cells through a p)Hsrnid (I)/ vector
the gene is expressed in the cultured cells to produce tile enzyme ( J)
(d) Anv three of the fo!lowin": (accept correct alternatives) max. 3
there are potential adverse side effects due to misplacement oftarget gene (1);
mt1tation, errors in the process(!), defective or harmful _gene products produced
(1 ), absence ofnonnal _gene product ( 1)
microbes/ chemicals used to carry the gene into patienfs cells may bring about
ma>.:. 5 adverse/ unknown effect on human health (1) / the vector may elicit undesirable
response in the patient/ allergy/ inflammation
(20)
AL- 2008 2A
!. (a) Nucleotide number 20 A is changed to T (1)
(b) Concl:!p! of mark award:
base sequencl.! being the same as the coding sequence (I) except T replaced by U (J )/ (2 or 0)
AUG GUG CAC CUG ACU CCU GUG GAG
(c) Met Val His Leu Thr Pro Val Glu (2)
(d) (i ) J has only the A alleles ( J)
the A I normal allele contains a sequence ofCTGAG which can be recognized by
the restriction enz:ymc ( 1 ); the �-cliain gene is thus cut into two DNA fragments
( 1 J of different lengths between C and T within this seque11ce
in the S r mutated allele of K, the DNA sequence at the same position is CTGTG
(I).' the rnslriction site
is lost/ no! recognized! the enzyine cannot cut the allele;
thus only one band appears on the gel
ma>;. 4
(ii] !hi.! genotype ofM and P must be AS (1) I heterozygous because they have all the
hnndsofJandK(l)
(iii)
P:i.rent AS X AS

l
mass culturing/ fermentation of the culrnred cells mass produces the en:zyme (I)
enzy me is purified for use (I)
Gamete A s A s
(ii)
Concept for mark award:
Ofl:�pring AA AS AS ss
comparison in terms of 2 Offspring normal sickle-cell trait sickle cell anaemia 1,1
> any introduction of the gene into patient"s body ( 1 J phenotypes
> source ofenzyme(I)
111e chance for tlie couple to have a child with sickle-cell trait is 2/4 = Vi
e.g.
Gene theranv Enzvme renlacement
foreign gene is introduced into no introduction of foreign
the patient's cells gene into patient's cells
enzyme is produced by the enzyme is obtained from an
natient external source
 Molecular and Applied Genetics I P.4 Molecular and Applied Genetics / P.5

(e) AL- 2010 2A

Concept for mark award:
advantage of sickle-cell trait outweighs disadvantage of being mildly 3 (a) queen produces gametes by meiotic cell division (1) (2)
anaemic in malarial prevalent areas(]) and mitosis (accept)
malarial infection as selection agent ( 1) drones produce gametes by mitotic cell division (1)
preferential survival of individuals with sickle-cell trait (1)
reproduction to pass the S allele to subsequent generations (1), hence a (b) any one set ofthe following:
max. 4 this increases the variations of the offspring produced ( 1)
rise in proportion of individuals with sickle-cell trait from one 1,1
generation to another (1) so that some offspring may continue to survive even if there
reasons for fewer cases of sickle-cell trait in areas with low incidence is a sudden environmental change (1)
of malaria:
> no such selection advantage (1) ( c) (i) (1) queen: yellow (1) (2)
> being mildlv anaemic is a disadvantage (I) drone: greyish (I)
(2)
e.g. in malarial prevalent areas, the survival advantage brought by sickle-cell trait
against malarial infection outweighs the disadvantages of being mildly anaemic P, QqRr " q,
(1)
malarial infection acts as a selection agent for people with sickle-cell trait ( 1) G, QR Q, oR ,, q,
people with sickle-cell trait are able to survive (1) and reproduce. passing the S E',: QqRr
allele to the subsequent generations ( l)
}
the proportion of individuals within a population having the sickle-cell trait phenotypic yellow grey
ratio I '
increases from one generation to another (1 ). making the trait more common in
the population
in areas with low incidence of malaria, people with sickle-cell trait \vould not Correct presentation or genetic diagram ( 1) _I
have such a selection advantage ( 1 ), instead being mildly anaemic is a _ (4)
disadvantage ( 1 ), thus the trait is less common in these areas (3)
max. 4 Concept for mark award:
· correct perdition (1) (4)
AL* 2009 lA · identification of the ratio of offspring with genotype qqRr ( l)
· with the ability to produce functional enzyme II (1 ).
2. a. gene(\) these offspring can covert intermediate N into yellow
b. vector/ plasmid (1) i"ment (1)
'· rough endoplasmic reticulum/ ribosome (1)
d& e. e.g. · about 5000 (1) (4)
- possible allergic reaction to human through affecting the metabolism ofplant (1) / · only 1/3 of the offspring are of the genotype qqRr(l) which
long term effect of GM crops on humans is unknown
is capable of producing functional enzyme II (1) for the
* spread of the new gene from the GM crop to the wild species, upsetting the
balance of nature(])/ unknown long-term effect on ecosystem conversion of intermediate N into yellow pigment (1)

AL* 2009 IA (ii) [I) Concept for mark award:

· deleting a nucleotide results in the shift of (3)
7. (a) 28% (1) nucleotide sequence (I), leading to a change in the
guanine forms complementary pairs with cytosine in a double-stranded (2) entire amino acid sequence ( 1)
DNA (1), therefore the amount ofG is equal to the amount ofC. · protein produced is completely different (1)
(b) (l 00-28x2) / 2 (]) (2)
22% (])
(c) There is no uracil in DNA(1) e.g. · the loss of a nucleotide shifts the subsequent (3)
nucleotide sequence by one nucleotide (1)
· hence the whole chain of amino acids that follows will be
completely different(1) from the original one
· no enzyme I is produced (1) / a completely different protein is
produced
 Molecular ;md Applied Genetics ; P,6

Past Papers- Evolution

(2)
e.g. · the substitution of a nucleotide only leads to the change of one
triplet codon ( 1) I one codon
· any one set ofthe following CE¥ 2005
> the new code formed may be degenerate (I)/ may encode for the
same amino acid, so there is no change to the original polypeptide 10. (b) Peter moved to a small island ten years ago. He found that there were a lot of
/ the same polypeptide is fanned (I)
>the new code fanned encodes another amino acid which is not mosquitoes, so he sprayed the area around his house with a certain kind of insecticides.
involved in the fonnation of active site (] ), so the shape/ The mosquito population dropped rapidly, but rose again after several months. He then
conformation of the active site remains the same ( 1) sprayed the same insecticide to kill the mosquitoes and this was repeated whenever
there was a rise in the mosquito population. However, Peter has found the insecticide
has become less and less effective in recent years.

(i) Explain why the mosquito population rose again after a large number of them
were killed by the insecticide. (2)

(ii) In the same population, the mosquitoes may show different degrees of resistance
to the insecticide. Explain two genetic causes that may lead to this variation
among the mosquitoes. (4)

(iii) Using the theory of natural selection, explain why the insecticide, explain why the
insecticide has become less and less effects in killing the mosquitoes. (4)
 Evo lution I P.2 Evolution / P.3

CE 2007 AL- 2006 lA

7. {b) Antibiotic is a drug commonly used to treat bacterial infections. In recent years, there S. {a) Suggest two ways in which scientists can make use of fossil records in their study of
have been more reported cases of resistant forms of bacteria strains found in hospitals the evolutionary relationship oforganisms. (2)
The graph below shows the percentage of the resistant fonn in a partiuilar bacterial (b) Suggest two limitatio ns of using fossil records as evidence of evolution. (2)
population and the amount of antibiotics used in one particular hospital each year from
1995 to 2004:
Amount of\ b� ant1bio1ics u,s.•d AL- 2007 2A
p ,.,1��.,.,l.nf'e oftb� re,i.sUlnt form in " ?M. i cu\:i.r bJctcr�,l popuia1i�11

To e-..:pbin the diversity of life forms on Earth. Darwin proposed a theory that different
spc:cies arose by gradual changcs from ancestral stocks. lt would be possible to identify the
evolutionary relationships of different species by examining the s imilarities and differences
betwet;:n them and compming them with pre-existing life fonns. Evidence of evolution can
\
-0\--
he drawn from a wide range of sources. e.g. fossils, comparative anatomy, and comparative
\. biochemistry.
\

\,
:\ \ ; (a) (i) What are fossils? (2)
(ii) Discuss how the study of fossils can provide evidence for evolution. What are the
- . --r·-- :'·<: limitations of using fossils as evidence for evolution? (5)
I
' 9-. (b) In comparative anatomy, the pentadactyl limb is considered as a homologous structure
found in tetrapods. List three criteria that the limbs of different tetrapods have to
0 satisf)' for them to be considered as homologous structures.
1995 1997 (3)
(c) In comparative biochemistry, one can study the structures ofth e same type of protein,
i
( ) Explain why the increased amount of antibiotics used will lead to the rise in the such as haemoglobin, produced by different organisms. The table below shows th e
percentage of the re5lstant form in the bacterial population. (4 marks) differences between the amino acid sequences in the polypeptide chains of
haemoglobin offour primate species;
(ii) Some patient in hospitals will have a higher death rate if infected wi th resistant forms
ofbacteria Suggest one group of these patients and give an explanation. (2 marks) Number of amino acids in the polypeptide chain

i Primate different from that ofhumans

( ii) lfyou were a doctor, suggest two practices that you could adopt to slow do\Vn the rise
species a-chain _B-chain y-chain
ofthe resistant forms of bacteria. (2 1nark.s)
(141 amino acids) (146 amino acids) (146 amino acids)

Humm; 0 0 0
Chimpanzee 0 0 1

Gibbon 3 3 2
Gorilla 1 1 1

(i) Based on the above information. construct an evolutionary tree of the four pn·mate
species, assuming that they arose from the same ancestor. (2)
(ii) What is the assumption made when constructing the evolutionary tree of
organisms based on the infonnation in the above table? Explain the biological
l
principle under ying your assumption. (4)

'""
 Evolution / P.5

(d) A modern classification system cun rcJkcl the i..: 1·olt1l iomu_1· rL'lutionships of organisms. DSE-2015 Ill
(i) Explain how the taxonom i c J1ierarchy in the modern cl;issificmion system reflects
the evolutionary relationships of organisms. (3) 11} Fossil records suggest that camels in Africa and Asia and Jlnmas in South America evolved
(ii) Why is ii impossible for two species oforg.'.lnisms groupi..:d under the s.ime family from a common ancestor 6 million years ago. The diagram be/ow shows the possible
to be put in different classes? (I) mign1tion routes of the common ancestor al the time before the continents were separated
and tht! location {shaded areas) where the camels and llamas are found at present:

AL-20102B

4. (c) Hair len _gth in a kind ofarric dog exhibits continues vnriHlion. With reference to the
concept of natural selection, suggest the long tenn effec! ofglubal warming, on the
)-�"-- - origin ofthe
mean hair length of the arctic dog. (4 marks) common ancestor

6. l t is generally believed that domestic dogs evolved from ancient wolves. A recent study
compari ng the genomes of wolves and dogs suggests that genes with key roles in starch
digestion were selected during the domestication ofwo!ves into dogs. One of these genes
was gene A which codes for amylase . This gene may exist in muny cop ies in agenome . The
followi ng graph shows the number of indivi duals having different numbers of cop ies of gene
A i n 35 wolves and ]36 dogs:

Key; &S Wolves

0 Dogs

Camel in Africa Came! in Asia r ,fam.<i in ,<;rmth A merir.11

(,) Based on the information given, draw a diabtram to show the evolutionary tree of the
three animals. (2 marks)
2 10 15 20 25 30 Evo) utionarv !fet! of camels in Africa and Asia and ]1amas in South America
NtUMer of copies ofgem�A
i n the ger.ome ofeach indMdual

(a} Based on the data above and tbl;! gene expression processes, explain why the amyl ase
activi t y in dogs is generally higher than that in 1volves. (3 marks)
{bJ / 1 is hypothesized that in ancient times, wolves might han: b<:<:n �11uac[l;!d 10 wasie
dumps n-:cir early human selllcmcnls and consumed hum::in rood was1e. Suggdt how (bJ Explain )101-v tin:: common ancestor might have given rise to the !\Vo different ,inima/
the domestication of wolves would have led to the select ion of mu/ ltpk copies of gene 5pecies (camels .ind Jiam.is) in the above case. (4 marks}
A (5 murks ) (c) Sugg,est ano!her way to c:stablish the evolutionary relationship among the above
.inima/s. ( 1 mark)
(d) Giv� M() limitation� of fo:;sil records as evidence for evolution. (2 marks)

30'1
 Evolution / P.6 Evolution / P.7

DSE-2018 18 DSE 2020 1 B

7. The diagram bel011· shows the life cycle of mosquitoes:
10. Both Lamarck and Darwin contributed greatly to the understanding of evolution. They n:p.:at up to a mJ..i:i1nt1m
proposed different explanations for the evolution of long necks in giraffes, as shown below:
LDmurck's iJr:/J about ei'o/uttim ------·--I(_ of6 cvdi:5

� - � -,?Iii;, .. --
foc<l

Day1 Day 5 Dny6

(a) Give one example of a mosquito-borne disease. (1 mark}

Long necks evolv<!d as generations of giraffes stretchet:1 their nccb
to feed on leaves at high levd above the ground
Darwilr's i.tll!a obvut el'l>lllfion
(b) The Food and Environmental Hygiene Department introduced a fungal species to control
the mosquito population in Hong Kong. Mosquitoes will die in a few days ifthey are
infected with the fungus. What is the ecological relationship between mosquitoes and this
fungal species? (l mark)

{�) To make this fungal species more deadly to mosquitoes, researchers produced a
genetically-modified {GM) fungus which can produce a toxin in the mosquitoes. The
short-necked
effectiveness of this biological control was examined by measuring the survival rate of
adult mosquitoes over 14 days. The results are shown below:
Giraffes v.ith !ong necks were born by cham:;e and had more offspring
due to their compt!'.:itive advantage over those witli short 11ecks 100

(a) Put a •✓• in the appropriate box to indicate whether the ideas listed were proposed ·- wit.hoot fong;.il infoctivn
by the scientists. You may put more than one •✓' for each idea. (2 marks) 75

�---------------------------t-_L_::un���--! _D.!rW]_n
i Char.a-eten; acq1.1in:d during lifo time can be passed cm to the oext generation

I Org�imi� become Jn(m; adaptive to the environment over the gener.itions

(b) Based on the current understanding of evolution, elaborate on the view ofDanvin on
the evolution of giraffe's long neck. (4 marks)
{c) In Darwin's era, his idea caused intense debates. The concept of humans evolving
Time (day)
from common ancestors along with other species was unacceptable to many people due
lo their religious belief. What does this tell us about the nature of science? (1 mark) (i) Using the data from the graph, complete the following table. (1 mark)

· i,1,\ih'O�t ruDg:\1 lnfocted with nc>.rrn::il ! !nfect:"1 with Gt--1

--l---'in0f0 m=io0,'---f--�fu c"c'c'c"'---'---"""'°'"'·�- 1 .___ I
Sun.-ival n,k c,n Day(,(� ol
I
(ii) The GM l'ungus but not the nomrnl fungus was able to •wipe our the mosquito
population after several _generations. With reference to the mosquito's life cycle and
the answer in (cl (i), explain this phenomenon. (3 marks)
 Evolution/ P. l Evolution/ P.2

Past Papers Marking Scheme - Evolution

CE-2005Q.10(b) 8. (a) Anv hrn of the followin!!: 2

(i) Some mosquitoes survived after the spraying of the i11si::c1icidc to obtain information for comparing the anatomy of organisms ( I)
They woLlld reproduce to give many offspring to obtain information for comparing the morphology of organisms (1}
and thus the population would rise again to obtain information about the time of existence of organisms ( 1) /
Many eggs were laid before the death ofthe mosquitoes chronological order of existence of organisms
The eu:l!.S hmched to find the missing links of existing organisms (I)
and (hus the population woLJld rise again uny om: s1;:t
(ii) Mutation (bl /\1w two ort!1c followim>:: 2
It results in the chnnge of the gene(s) controlling s-::nsitiv1t_1 r<:sistunci:: lo !he there nrc missinl! links {I} in the fossil records that indicate the intermediate
insecticide. forms bdwcen r:.lated groups of organisms
most fossils arc incomplete and may be damaged (I), thus giving an incomplete
Independent assortment of homologous chromosom..::- occurs during meiosis record or orgnnisms in the past
leading to the formation of gametes with different alkks f"or insecticide-rcsist.ince 1
S(m1i; org,1n1sms may not be fossilized as they may have a son body ( 1)
(4)
Fertilization
It results in a random combination of alleles for insi::cticide-rcsisiance in the zygote 1
any two sets
AL-2007 2A
(iii) There are genetic variations among the mosquitoes in their resistance against
insecticide
2. (a) (i) fossils are preserved remains of organisms (1) which may be infiltrated by
Those that are resistant have a higher chance of survival in the presence of the
insecticide minerals to become petrified/ rocks (1)
They have a greater chance of reproduction/producing more offspring various types of fossils include entire organisms I hard skeletal materials /
Thus the proportion ofthe insecticide-resistant mosquitoes increases in the moulds and casts/ imprints and fossilized faecal pellets (1)
subsequent generations (ii) Pros·
Hence, the insecticide becomes less effective in killirn.; the mos uitoes most ofthe fossils found showed a close resemblance between the fossilized
E ective conmmnication c) 1 organisms and living species {1), indicating existing life forms arose from
pre-existing life fonns (1) {1 +l)
a greater diversity of fossils is found in younger rocks (1 ), this agrees with the
CE- 2007 Q.7 (b) hypothesis that organisms evolved from a common ancestry ( l) ( 1 + 1)
fossils in younger rocks are also found to be more complex than those in older
(i) Genetic variation exist among the bacteria in their resistance against the antibiotic l rocks ( 1), this agrees with the hypothesis that organisms evolved from simple to
The increase in the amount of antibiotics kills non-resistant form while the complex form (1) (1+1)
resistance fonn survive the sequence of appearances of different groups of organisms in the fossil
The resistance form continue to reproduce I produce more of its 0\'111 kind records agrees with changes in ecological conditions (1), e.g. plants appeared on
The number of resistant fonn of bacteria increases faster land before animals (max. 3)
Cons:
(ii) Any group with weak immune system plus correct example, e.g. children. eldly, there are missing links(]) in the fossil records that indicates the intermediate
AIDS patientS, cancer patient after treatment patients taking immunosuppressor forms between related groups of organisms
drugs 2 some fossils nre incomplete or damaged {l), thus giving an incomplete record of
organisms in the past
(iii) Prescribe antibiotics only when necessary
some fossils are found in inaccessible areas(l ), thus unavailable for study
Instruct the patient to finish the whole course of prescription
Use narrow spectrum antibiotics any two 1,1 some organisms may not be fossilized as they may have a soft body (1) (max.3)
(max. 5)

(b) Anv three oftl1tc: followin":

similar anatomical pattern of the bones ( 1}
similar bociv position ( l)
same i::11_1bryonic origin/ development of the limbs ( 1)
consists of the same tis$ues ( 1} / strong resemblances in the nerves, blood vessels and
muscle pr�sent in the limb$

JI/(•
 Evolution I P.3 Evolution/ P.4

gibbon
ancestor 10. (a) Labeling ( 1)
chimpanzee Correct tree (l l 2
�� human
(il) Assumption:
the fewer the number of different amino acids, the closer the evolutionary
relationship of the organisms (1)

Underlying biological principle

each amino acid in a polypeptide is coded by a codon in the DNA (1) (b) separation ofthe continents resulted in isolation
mutation in a codon would result in a different amino acid being incorporated in ofthe two groups of
the po \ypeptide ( 1) ancestors (1)
each isolated group was subjected to a different set of environmental
organisms with closer evolutionary relationship would have fewer mutation (1) /
conditions ( 1)
more similar genetic code as a result, they evolved differently from each other due to natural selection (1)
/ adaptive traits specific to those particular environmental conditions were
(d) (i) the modem classification system is based on the phylogenetic relationship of selected by natural selection
organisms (I) until their genetic compositions were so different that they could not interbreed
organisms with some fundamental similarities are put into the same group ( \) again (I J 4
each group is then subdivided into smaller groups with organisms sharing more
similarities going into the same subgroup, the lower the hierarchy, the closer (c) compare their genetic compositions/ biochemical compositions of essential
they are linked in evolution (l) proteins

(ii) because class is a higher hierarchy tl1an family (1) (d) Any two of the following:
/ same family, more similarities/ same class, less similarities not all organisms could be fossiliz.ed ( 1)
Some fossils are incomplete/ damaged (1) /the fossil may contain only part
AL-2010 2B of the body rather than the whole organism
4. (c) when there is an increase in global temperature, arctic dogs with (4) some fossils are found in inaccessible areas (1)
shorter hair length are at a selective advantage than those with long.er there are missing links in the fossil records ( 1) 2
hair length ( 1) / there is a higher selection pressure against those with
longer hair length HKDSE- 2018 1 B
because those arctic dogs having longer hair length have a higher
chance ofbeing overheated (1) I arctic dogs having shorter hair 10. (a) Lamarck Darwin
length have a lower chance of being overheated Characters developed during lifetime can be passed on ✓
over the generations, arctic dogs with shorter hair length haw a to the.
higher chance of survival and reproduce ( l) Organi�ms become more adaptive to the environment ✓ ✓ (2)
therefore, the mean hair length of the arctic dog population would over 11cn\:!rnt1ons
decrease over time (1}
(b) genetic variation e:-:.isted in the giraffe population, some with longer
DSE- 2014 necks and others ,.,...ith shorter necks ( l)
6. (a) dogs have many more copies of gene A i11 the genome than wolves ( 1) individuals with longer nt;Jcks has better ability to obtain food/ could
these genes will be transcribed into mRNA ( 1) get more food than those with shorter necks ( l)
which, in tum, translated into amylase, i.e. more amylase will be produced (3)
they have greater chance to survive and reproduce ( 1) (4)
in dogs (1 ). resulting in higher amylase activity
thus the population of the subsequent generations would have a greater
(bl (humans are omnivores.) the human food wastes usually contain proportion of giraffes with longer neck (1)
carbohydrates such as starch ( 1)
variations in copy number of gene A may exist in an ancient wolf
population ( 1) lei science is culturally embedded/ influenced by social and cultural factors ( l)
those with higher gene copy numbers could produce more amylase and (1)
were more adapted to a starch-rich diet of human food waste (1) 6 marks
as wolves got used to feeding on human food wastes and !:,'fadually (5)
domesticated, they could then grow better & reproduce more than those
with smaller gene copy number (I)
their genes, including multiple copies of gene A could be passed to the
next generation (1 ), resulting in the selection of multiple copies in the
dogs' genome

HKDSE- 201:5 1 B
 Evolution/ P.5

HKDSE-201918

8. (a) (i) • sight is not the sense used by bats when they avoid obstacles (I) (1)
(ii) Any two·
Nature of Science Elaboration
Science is based on Spal!anzani and Jurine could not provide sufficient
evidence from experiment evidence to show how bats navigated / scientists
did not accept that ats use hearing for navigation
until Griffin showi;d that bas could emit (2)
ultrasounds(])
Scientists build on the Griffin used Pierce·s -;ipparatus to show bats
work of other scientists emitted ultrasounds / Griffin built on Spallan:arni
and Jurine's work, and showi;d that bats emitted
ultrasounds, providing important evidence for the
navigation ( l)
Technology has impact on Griffin cot1ld not have proved 1hat bats emitted
the develooment of science ultrasounds without Piercc·s annaratus ( l)
(accept other reasonable answers)

(bJ (i) the procedures of cutting & gluing back the wing t·ctil ibclfdid not affect !he
rnte of successfi..il escape {I)
this shows that the: results of CID were related !tl t/11;: le11gtl1 oftlie wing tail
and not related to the manipulation procedure.<: ( J J
(ii)
Pair oftreatrnents J Conclusion
A&C • Removing I shortening thi.: wing r;i1I reduced the mie
of successful escmie I i J
A&D Elongating the wing wil enhanced the rate <>f
successful escaoe ( 1)
(iii)· the data show that the )ongerthe wmg tall, the higher tile rate ot �uccessJul
escape (1) ff/

(c) within the moth population, there were genetic variations with some individuals
having long wing tails and others having short wing tails ( J)
individuals with long wing tails had a higher chance of escape from the attacks of
bats than individuals with short wing tails ( ! ) (4)
therefore, individuals with long wing tails had a higher chance of survival
and reproduced more offspring (l)
after many generations, offspring which inherited the allele for long wing t:iils
became the majority in the population (1 J
12 marks
 Cell mid r:1crnbr:mc trnnsport / P !

□SE M.C. Questions - Cell and membrane transport Challenging

(sort by difficulty)
Challenging 2014 Q.2 (32%)
Which of the following events does not involve the functioning of membrane proteins?
2012 Q.2 (33%)
Plants carry out photosynthesis to produce glucose which is required for the fonnation of A. Transmission of nerve impulses across a synapse
(I) cellulose B. Absorption ofglucose in the small intestine
(2) protein C. Transport ofoxygen by haemoglobin
(3) starch D. Recognition ofpathogens

A.( l) and (2) only B.(]) and(3) only C. (2) and (3) only D.(IJ.(2!and(3) 2016 Q.24 (36%)
Directions: Questions 24 and 25 refer to the diagram below. which shows an
Directions: Questions 23 to 25 refer to the diagram below. which shows an experiment experimental set-up for studying osmosis:
on osmosis using a potato tuber. A washed potato was cut to form a base.
After that. a cavity was made and a 10% sucrose solution \Vas added into
the cavity. The whole potato was then placed into a beaker containing
some distilled water. A�er 1 day. the level of the sucrose solution rose.
�--- ca�illary tube
,____ liquid kvci

' :if
,-·· dialysis tubing
'
2013 Q.25 (24%) $ ,Y% solurion S
: v.!
;t y% solution S
c,.
Which of the following treatments will lead to a higher final level of the sucrose solution
after I day?
(I) using 5% sucrose solution instead of 10% sucrose solution After three hours, the liquid level has risen. What can be deduced from this result?
(2} using 20% sucrose solution instead of 10% sucrose solution (I) Solution S diffuses into the dialysis tubing.
(3) peeling off all the potato skin instead ofjust cutting the bottom of the potato (2) Value ofx is larger than that ofy.
A.(l)only 8. (2)only C. (l)and(3)only D. (2)and(3)only (3) Solute of solution S cannot pass through the dialysis tubing.

2013 Q.26 (33%) A.(!)and (2) only 8. (I) and(3)only C.(2) and(3)only D.(!), (2) and(3)
Which ofthe following nutrients enter the epithelial cells ofthe small intestine mainly by
simple diffusion?
A. amino acids B. fatty acids C. monosaccharides D. nucleotides
Challenging Average

2019Q.ll {23%) 2012 Q.l {73%)

Solutions of different concentrations of a solute with a small molei.::uhir size were Which ofU1e following tissue types has the greatest number of mitochondria?
prepared and some plant cells were immersed in each ofthe solutions. Which of the A. the wall of an air sac
following graphs shows the initial rate of uptake ofthe solute by means ofditfosion? B. the wall of a capillary
{Note: Xis the concentration of the solute inside the plant cells) C. the inner wall ofa lymph vessel
A B. D. the inner wall of the small intestine
�
i ..
�� Question 1 to 3 refer to the table below, which shows the relative amounts
1!
Directions:
�2
..:; 0 of the mitochondria, chloroplasts and endoplasmic reticulum in four cell
types P,Q,R and S:
X Concentration of LLConct:ntrl!.twn ot
the ex1ema! solution the external 5olution
,;J 1ypc __ __ .. �Jiwclwrnirion C/1fomplus1 E,ufop/.-ismh· .,,_•1iiJ!_,,,,
� D.

�i
ti·•

�!
..s 0

L
Concentration of X CoucentrJtion of
2013 Q. l {54%)
the external solution the ext.:rm;l soluLion Which cell type is found in the lining of the air sacs in the lungs?
A. p B.Q C.R D. S

2013 Q.3 {72%)

Which of the following carbohydrate{s) is/are likely to be found in cell type P?
{]) Starch
{2) Glucose
(3) Glycogen

A.(l)only B. (2) only C. (I) and (2) only D. (2) and (3) only

2013 Q.5 (41%)

Which ofthe following descriptions of the function ofmembrane proteins is incorrect?
A. Some membrane proteins serve as antigens for cell recognition.
B. Some membrnne proteins serve as enzymes for cellular metabolism.
C. Some membrane proteins act as barriers which prevent the entry of some
substunces.
D. Some membrane proteins act as carriers which transport some substances
across the membrane.
 Cell ,md rncmbrane transport/ P.5 CcH and mcmbrnnc transpnn / P.6

Average Average

Directions: Questions 23 to 25 refer to the diagram below, which shows an experiment 2014 Q. l (64%)
on osmosis using a potato tuber. A washed potato was cut to fonn a base. Which of the following is a catabolic process?
After that, a cavity was made and a 10% sucrose solution was added into A. Conversion of glucose to glycogen
the cavity. The whole potato was then placed into a beaker containing B. Absorption of glucose
some distilled water. After 1 day, the level of the sucrose solution rose. C. Emulsification of fat
D. Digestion of starch

Directions: Qm:stions 3 to 5 refer to the following study:

A study wants to use an ordinary light microscope to observe the binary
fission of a photosynthesizing protist under high magnification. A
temporary mount of the protist is placed on the stage of the microscope.

2013 Q.23 (48%) 2014 Q.3 (59%)

The level of sucrose solution inside the cavity rose because osmosis has taken place, Below are some steps in using a light microscope:
which means that (I) Focus with 1 OX objective
A. water was drawn mainly from the cells in contact with the sucrose solution. (2) Focus with 40X objective
B. water was initially drawn from the cells in contact with the distilled water. (3) Search the field with lOX objective
C. water moved from the distilled water along the cell wall of the potato cells to (4) Search the field with 4 0X objective
the cavity. (5) Move the slide until the protist is located in the centre of the field
D. water moved from the distilled water through the cell membrane of the potato (6) Adjust light intensity if necessary
cells to the cavity.
Which of the following is the most reasonable sequence of steps for the above study?

D
2013 Q.24 (65%) A. (l). (3). (5). (6) B. (2), (6), (4), (5)
The diagram shows the appearance of a cell in contact with distilled water C. (l). (2), (4). (5), (6) D. (l), (3). (5), (2). (6)
in the beak.er at the beginning of the experiment:
2014 Q.5 (41%)
Which of the following diagrams correctly shows the appearance of the same cell at Which ofthe following structures would be observable in the above study?
the end of the e,-.-periment? A. Ribosome B. Chloroplast C. Mitochondrion D. Endoplasmic reticulum

0
A. B.
2014 Q.23 (61%)
Which of the following cell types has the highest density of mitochondria?
A. Root hair cell
C. D. B. Lcafepidermal cell
C. Spongy mesophyll cells
0. Palisade mesophy\J cells
Average Average

2015 Q.] (49%) Directions:

Which of the fo!lowing parts ofthe microscope should be adjusted to obtain a clear and Questions 1 and 2 refer to the
sharp image when you switch from low-magnification to high-magnification observation?
schematic diagram, which shows the
structure ofa cell membrane: w

X
A. 1 and 4 only
B. 2 and 3 only 2016 Q.2 (69%)
C. I, 3 and 4 only If the membrane is located at the inner surface of the small intestine, the absorption of
D. 2, 3 and 4 only amino acids is likely to be achieved via
A.W B.X C. y D.Z

2015 Q.5 (74%) 2016 Q.25 (58%)

Directions: Questions 4 and 5 refer to the schematic diagram below, which shows the Directions: Questions 24 and 25 refer to the diagram below, which shows an
structures ofa chloroplast: experimental set-up for studying osmosis:

&:-���µ��;.;,
jl
; :-, --- caplllaxy tube
:\--- liquid b'e/
Q

Which of the following kingdoms contain organisms that possess the above organdie?
( l) Eubacteria
(2) Protista
(3) Plantae Which of the fbilowing modifications wil! result in a faster rise in the liquid level?

A. (I) and (2) only A. use a smaller volume of x¾ solution S

B. (l)and(3)only B. use a larger volume ofy% solution S
C. (2) and (3) only C. use a shorter capil!ary tu�
D. (1). (2) and (3) D. use a longer piece of dialysis tubing
Average Easy

2018 Q.36 (66%) 2013 Q.2 (76%)

Which of the followin g processes mainly involves osmosis? Directions: Question 1 to 3 reforto the table below, which shows the relative amounts
of the mitochondria. chloroplasts and endoplasmic reticulum in four cell
A. mov ement of water along the xylem in plants types P.Q,R and S:
B. movement of water vapour out of stomata in plants
C. movement of water from tissue fluid lo capillaries in humans.
D. movement of water from tissue fluid to lymph capillaries in humans

2019 Q.8 (73%) .-.1· · · ir.cii<:�\cs the rdJtivc ;imc,u1i1-:;:--;,,e ,ul,-c, llubr ;;1rn�tu1,·
,,, 1hc �hsc11cc or1hc ""h-cdh1lor ,n;,c;",r"
According to the requirements of various methods of transp ort across the cell
membrane, Which cell type would you expect to be insulinffproducing cells in the pancreas?
which of the following combinations is correct? �p 8.Q CR D.S
Renu.irl!JJU!llts
Ener,.,, in.nut Membrane nrotein Concf!Tltration rm1die11t 2015 Q.2 (78%)
A. nhaPocvtosis active transnort osmosis
B. diffusion osmosis active transport
Which of the following processes requires metabolic energy?
C. active transoon phagocvtosis phagocvwsis A. glucose moves across the epithelium ofthe ileum
D. osmosis diffusion diffusion
B. carbon dioxide moves across the wall of air sacs
C. oxygen moves into mesophyll cells
D. water moves along the xylem

2016 Q.1 (85%)

Directions: Questions 1 and 2 refer to the schematic diagram below, which shows the
structure of a cell membrane:

Which of the follO\ving molecules contributes to the fluidity of the cell membrane?
A.W B.X C. y D.Z

,, "
2020 Q. l
2020 Q.9

I. Which of the fo!lowing sub-cellular structures can be found in a prokaryotic cell? 9. The elemon micrograph bdow shows an organelle P:

A. cell wall, r.ibosome, cell membrane

B. ribosome, cell membrane, chloroplast
C. cell waJI, cell membrane, mitochondria
D. cell membrane, chloroplast, mitochondria

2020 Q.2

Direct/ans: Questions 2 and 3 refer to Ifie diagram bekn.,,� whid1 shows a sd-up for invc�tigating the
penncability of dialysis tubing. l O c:ml of solution P was il.d{k<l to the di.,.Jy�is hi bing, wlllt one end
tied and the orl1er end connected to a capillary tube. The dialy,,is tubing was Ulen placed in a beaker
with 200 cmJ afso!ution Q. Whl!'O solutions P and Q arc mixed, a blue colour will b°' observed.

500 nm

:------ capillury tube Which ofthe following arc possibly produced by organelle P in i:he cells of the pancreas?

(]) amylase
(2) insulin

-
. . - - - - - d (3) lipase

-
li(!Ui !��-d

�kf . A
8.
(l) and (2) only
(1) and (3) only
dialysis tubing ----1-+-�&'. *f' -i-----
, ---1 O cm .solution P
;,. C. (2) and (3) only

J_J,.,;;;:..;.�;;---- 200 cm; solution Q D. (!), (2) and (3)

,. At lhc end of tiw invc.stigation, the liquid level inside the capillary tube had risen and only !he solution
inside the dialysis tllbing be.came blue, W11ich ofthe following conclusions can be drawn from Jhe re�ults?
2020 Q.14

JI) Solut1: of �o!ution P c:m pass through the dialysl!i tubing. 14. 'Nhich of the following combinations correctly matches the mtcr movement in the human body with its
(2) Solute of so1u1io11 Q cun pass through tho: dialysis tubing. major driving force?
(J) There fo an� movement ofwcm,T into the di.ll.!ysis tubing.
Water movenumJ Major d.rivillgforc.e
A. {J) and (2) only A water in tissue fluid enters lymph vessels osmosis
A, {!)and(3Jonly 8. water iu blood leaves capillaries at the arterial end hydrostatic pressure
C. {2) and (J) only C. W:lt<:!r in tissue Ouid enters capillaries at the venous end active transport
D. (!), (2) and (3) D. waler enters capillaries from the lumen of the small intestine diffusion

2020 Q.3

3. If the investigation is repeate.d with water instead af solution Q, which of th� following resu[lS will be
obrained?

A. The liquid level in the capillary rube will not rise at all.
B. The liquid level in 1.he capillary tube will rise to a lower !-:vci.
C. The liquid !eve] in the capillary rnbc will rise to a higher level
D. The liquid level in the capillary rube will rise to the sumc level.
2020 Q.22

Dirccrio,r�; Quc�ions 12 to 24 refer to the photornkrographs below, which sh<>w thu stem $1!C\ion of a plam Answers
observed under a microscope. Diagram Y 5hows a higher m�gnf(kation c,f the v,iscular bum.Iii: (VI>)
in Diagr,im X;
Challenging
2012 2013 2014 2016 2019
2 [DJ 25 [BJ 2 [CJ 24 [CJ 11 [B J
26 [BJ

Average
2012 W.1 2014 J.Qll 2016 2018 2019
[DJ 1 [DJ 1 [DJ 1 [D] 2 [BJ 36 [CJ 8 [A J
3 [CJ 3 [DJ 5 [CJ 25 [ D l
5 [Cl 5 [BJ
[DJ 23 [ AJ
24 [ A J

Easy
22. Which of the f,:,llowini;: eombinatJoo.,. �hov-':' �he com:ct steps focusing the microscope in ordet to obWi1 2013 2015 2016 2020
the \m:i.ge in Diagr.m, Y [rom thn ofDia.gr�un X?
2 [CJ 2 [A] [CJ l[AJ
2[CJ
A. Mo�'C llw �\ide wwards 1he observer �o that Change the objce\ivc from 4X to \OX ;\lld
Vb is in the centre of the field ofvir:w. adit1$1 the focus, 3[C]
B. Ch11.ngc the objective from \OX to 40X and Move Lhc slide to\\:lrd.'\ the ob\>Crvcr SQ tht1t 9[DJ
u.di,J.S! tlie focu5. Vt, fa in the cenln: of the fo;ld of view.
C. Move thc s!idc away from the ob5.erver .�o Changc 1he-0bjcctiw frmn .:IX 10 triX ��d ·--­ 14[BJ
that Vb i:, in tl1e e1.'fltro of the field ofvfow. -+s"o''".""""'""'"'""'"�"-�---------4 22[CJ
D. Cha11go:, 1he obj�ctiv.: from 1 OX to �OX and· Movi:: th� slide av.11.;, from the ob�crvcr s,;, 248]
�•<l,ro·0s"'"'hc'c
foc="c�-�-------�' �hat Vb is ill !he centre of ihe field of view.

2020 Q.24

24. Which of the following structures is commonly found in all the cells shown in Diagram Y?

A. vacuole
13. cell wall
C. cytoplasm
D. cell membrane
 DSE M.C. Questions - Enzymes and metabolism Challenging
(sort by difficulty)
Challenging 2017 Q.4 (23%)
Which of the following is not the purpose of the experimental design?
1
20 6 Q.27 (18% ) Design Purpose
Which ofthe follov,1ing statements about enzymes is incorrect?
A. setting up tube P to show the result of iodine test if starch is present
A. Enzymes are produced by cells.
B. setting up tube Q to show that enzyme X alone cannot give positive
B. Enzymes are denatured at extreme temperatures.
result in Benedicfs test
C. There could be more than one specific enzyme to catalyse the same reaction.
D. When an enzyme encounters the same substrates. it always produces the C. setting up tube S to show that enzyme Xis denatured after boiling
same products. D. setting up ·water bath to simulate the temperature ofthe human body

Directions: Questions 2 to 4 refer to the diagram below. which shows four test 2018 Q.5 (37%)
tubes prepared by a student to investigate the action ofa starch­ · Lock and Key' is a sci,;;ntific model which is a selective representation used to
explain that enzymes
digesting enzyme X:

A. Are biological catalysts

B. Are specific in action
C. Are protein in nature
D. Are required in small amounts

Starcll EnzymeX Starch solution Srnrch solution and

solution solution and enzyme X boiled enzyme X

2017 Q.3 (34%)

The student conducted some tests on the content of each test tube at the beginning and
after 30 minutes. Which ofthe following correctly shows the results ofthe tests for tube
R at the beginning?
Benedict's test Iodine tesr Testforprotein
A. negative positive positive
B. negative positive negative
C. positive negative negative
D. positive negative positive
 Enz�ms.:s and metabolism/ P.3

Challenging Average

2019 Q.10 (22%) Directions: Question 6 and 7 refer to the graph below, which shows the energy levels
Directions: Question 9 to 10 refer to the diagram below, which shows an of the reactant and product of a biochemical reaction in the presence of
experimental set-up prepared by a student to investigate the effect of its enzyme.
temperature on catalase activity. Pig liver extract contains catalase
which speeds up the breakdown ofhydrogen peroxide into oxygen and
water. A fixed volume of hydrogen peroxide solution was added to the
liver extract and a IO mL syringe was used to collect the oxygen gas
� reactant
released from the reaction mixture.

Progress of reaction
hydrogen peroxide---f-"­
solution
2013 Q.6 (47%)
10 mL syringe The reaction shown in the graph is
A. an anabolic process because energy is absorbed.
B. an anabolic process because energy is released.
I C. a catabolic process because energy is absorbed.
I \-- conical flask
I D. a catabo!ic process because energy is released.
,�--�-\
( 7 pig liver extract 2013 Q,7 (44%)
After modifying the set-up, the following graph \Vas obtained which shows the Which of the follo\.ving graphs correctly sho\.VS the change in the energy level of the
volume of gas collected over time at room temperature: reaction if the enzyme involved is absent?
Key: --- with the enzyme
----------- \.Vithout the enzyme

y
TUDe (s)

The student planned to use the volume of gas collected over a fixed period ohime as
the dependent variable to study the effect of different temperatures on catalase
activity. Which of the following is the most suitable time period for the measurement?

A. 0-W B. 0-X C. 0-Y D. 0-Z

Average Average

2014 Q.9 (70%) 2016 Q.8 (64%)

Which ofthe following graphs correctly shows the changes in the amount of products Which of the following combinations correctly matches the biochemical reaction with
in a reaction catalyzed by a human enzyme at different temperatures'? the type of metabolism involved?

'o�w"'
·,· . B
Biochemical reaction Type of metabolism
� .g
� 2. A. Conversion of glucose to pyruvate Anabolism
<�
B. Conversion of protein to amino acid Anabolism
f'imc
C. Conversion of amino acid to urea Catabolism
C
'c �,
l)
'- t
c ,
_; �J,.: ·- D. Conversion of glucose to glycogen Catabolism
:= ,:;
�i
< J li,.t-,�,,_�,- 2017 Q.l {67%)
rim� !inw Which of the following combinations correctly matches the process with the type of
metabolism involved?
Process T_vpe of
2015 Q.3 (60%)
The graph below shows the effoct of temperature on enzyme activity: mernbolism
A. digcstiun orlipids in the small intestim: anabolism
D. storage of excess energy in the fonn of glycogen catabolism
C. as':iimilation of amino acids to fonn muscle fibres anabolism
D. absorption of digested food in the small intestine catabolism

Temperatw_.e (0C)

Which ofthe following statements correctly describes the enzyme reaction?

A. The enzyme is denatured at 0°C and 60 °C.

B. The reaction taking place at 50 °C is faster than that at 20 °C.
C. There are more collisions between substrate and enzyme molecules at 40 °C
than 60°C.
D. The amount of product collected at the end of the reaction is the greatest if
the reaction takes place at 40°C

ZlJ
Average Average

2017 Q.2 (67%) 2018 Q.I (71%)

Directio,is: Questions 2 to 4 refer to the dia2:ram below, which shows four test Which of the following processes involves enzymes on cell membranes?
tubes prepared by a student to investigate the action of a starch� A. Excretion of carbon dioxide by the lungs
B. Transport of water along the xylem vessel
digesting enzyme X:
C. Calvin cycle in the chloroplast of plant cells
p Q R s D. Digestion of carbohydrates in the small intestine

Directions: Question 2 to 4 refer to an experiment on the enzyme catalase, ,vhich

speeds up the breakdown of hydrogen peroxide to release oxygen. John
added a I cm' cube of pig liver to boiling tube containing 5 mL hydrogen
Starch Enzyme X Starch solution Stan:h solution and peroxide solution. Gas bubbles were released and he used a glowing splint
solution solution and enzyme X boiled cnz:ytnc X to test the: gas. He repeated the experiment with bee( potato and apple.
The re.su\ts; are shown below:
In which of the following regions o!"the human nlimentary canal can enzyme X be
found? R a_f<c_11 (bJJ})_fll,:,s r<'lc_�s,:1/ - - ·:·.: Q£�:��f£;p��i'f;_�Jif ·-----,
:
...., . -·\-1:�-dct��-- ·:.:.�---i------'
(1) mouth cavity
�"'='' �---
'.�foderntC.. '"·· Y.,;..s
···--t·_----�""�
i
-�ic w · -------j----�-----
Yes
(2) stomach '�-- --
(3) small intestine
2018 Q.2 (54%)
Which of the following statements is an observation of the experiment?
A. (I) and (2) only B. (I) and (3) only C. (2) and (3) only D. (!), (2) and(])
A TI1ese tissues contained catalase
B. Oxygen gas was released in the reaction
2017 Q.5 (60%)
C. The gas released re-lit the glowing splint
Different animals produce different maltases to digest maltose. The maltases produced
D. Animal tissues had more catalase than plant tissues
have different molecular sizes. Which of the following description ofthese maltases is
correct? 2018 Q.4 (69%)
A. Their active sites have similar shape. In order to prove that hydrogen peroxide is the substrate of this enzymatic reaction,
B. Their amino acid sequences are the same. which of the following steps should be used as a control?
C. They have the same optimum temperature. A. Repeat the experiment using water and the tissues
B. Repeat the experiment using water and boiled tissues
D. They have the same three�dimensional structure.
C. Repeat the experiment using hydrogen peroxide but no tissues
D. Repeat the experiment using hydrogen peroxide and boiled tissues
Average

2019 Q.9 (72%) 2018 Q.3 (76%)

Directions: Question 9 to 10 refer to the diagram bduw, which shows an Directions: Question 2 to 4 refer to an experiment on the enzyme catalase, which
experimental set�up prepared by a student to investigate the effect of speeds up the breakdown of hydrogen peroxide to release oxygen. John
temperature on catalase activity. Pig liver extract contains catalase added a 1 cm., cube of pig liver to boiling tube containing 5 ml hydrogen
which speeds up the breakdO\Vn of hydrogen perox:idt: into oxygen and peroxide solution. Gas bubbles were released and he used a glowing splint
water. A fixed volume of hydrogen peroxide solution was added to the to test the gas. He repeated the experiment with beef, potato and apple.
liver extract and a 10 ml syringe was used to collccl tl1e oxygen gas The results are sho'tVIl below:
released from the reaction mixture.
! nw4_ -----+-- __ __ _
!.. _,,__, __&t!!,_{}fb,rb{;/a· rdC-€sed f!'!.!!..1!!!EJ:.E!l£a�'�"�,✓•� ---,
, .... P-iii [jver · Modtrn�te,__ ___-+' -----i y�"�-------j

, ll�(;f ---.f--- �'�

l�od�
c�; � �s_
te ___ -+------� �'�'------,
"/i

�---------------
� 'x�tu;�· ---· -
J,_,._____ ,,___ �:�::�:, �,
hydrogen peroxidc---tc'
solutioIJ ------+-----��7��: ----�

10 mL syringe
When the release of gas bubbles had stopped, John added more hydrogen peroxide
solution to the boiling tubes. Which of the following combinations correctly shows
'I the expected result and the explanation of this additional experiment?
':-- conical flask
Expected result Explanation
/- ---\ pig liver extract
A, Gas bubbles released Catalase is specific in its action
8, Gas bubbles released Catalase is reusable
In the trial run conducted at room temperature, the students found that the volume of C, No gas bubbles Catalase has been used up
oxygen released was greater than the maximum collection volume of the srringc. 0, No gas bubbles Catalase is denatured
How should he modil)1 the set�up in order to collect valid data ,vhen repeating tJ1i;:
experiment at different temperatures?

( ! ) use a larger syringe

(2) use a larger conical flask
(3) reduce the volume of the hydrogen peroxide solution added

A, ( 1) and (2) only

B ( l) and (3) only
C (2) and (3) only
0, ( l), (2) and (3 J
 En;,:.yrnts anJ mi:tabulis:m.: P. l l
2020 Q.6

Directions: Questions 6 and 7 refer to the diagram below, which shows a set-up for investigating the activity of Answers
catalase in living tissues, Cata.lase is an. enzyme which can break down hydrogen peroxide. Each test
tube contains the samc amount of hydrogen peroxide solution at the same concentration. A piece of
Challenging
living tissue is added into each tube as indicated below:
2016 2017 2018 2019
27 [BJ 3 [AJ 5 [BJ I0 [AJ
4 [CJ

Average
2013 20!4 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019
6 [AJ 9 [BJ 3 [BJ 8 [CJ [CJ [D J 9 [BJ
7 IB J 2 [BJ 2 [CJ
5 [A J 4 [AJ
pot:a._�o potato potato app,\i:: carrot liver
p�t, pot;to
�
'"':, �' x:;� �zt1
�� � Easy
O'C 80"C 25°C 25"C 2s0c 2s0c 25'C
pH 7 pH? pH 3 pH 11 pH7 pH? pH? 2018 2020
6. How many independent variables are being studied in this investigation? 3 [BJ 6[BJ
7[DJ
A. 2
B. J
8[DJ
C. 4
D. g

2020 Q.7

7. Which of the following control variables is most imponant for a fair comparison in the above
investigation?

A. mass ofliving tissues

B. shape of\iving tissues
C volume of living tissues
D. surface area ofliving tissues

2020 Q.8

8. Wl1ich of the following descriptions ofthe active site ofan enzyme is correct?

(1) It can be used again.

(2) It is the part of the, enzyme on which its substrate can fiL
(3) Its shape is determined by the amino acid sequence of the enzyme,

A. (I) and (2) only

B. (1) and (3) only
C. (2) and (3) only
D. (l).(2)ond(3)
 DSE M.C. Questions - Food and humans and Nutrition in humans Average
(sort by difficulty)
Challenging 2012 Q.20 (64% )
Which of the following descriptions about the function of the liver is correct?
2015 Q.9 (36% ) A. detects blood glucose level
Which of the following combinations correctly de scribes the absorption ofwmer in the B. breal�s down red blood cells
alimentary canal? C. secretes glucagon into the blood
D. secretes enzymes into the small intestine
Occurs mostly in Major reason
A. ileum it is the longest part of the digestive tract 2012 Q.34 (74%)
B. ileum most digested food is absorbed in this After consuming a boiled egg, chemical digestion begins in the
region A. mouth. B. oesophagus C. stomach. D. small intestine.
C. larg e intestine its function is water absorption
D. large intestine absorption of food has completed in this 2014 Q.24 (63%)
region Which of the following dental formulae best represents the dentition shown in the
photograph of the X-ray?
20 I 8 Q.25 (36%)
The graph bellow shows the relationship between the dietary fibre content of a meal
and the mean retention time (i.e the duration for which the undigested material stay in
the large intestine ) in the human body:

Dii:t.ri1y fibre cont;.,mt in the mc-.al (%)

Which of the follov-iing can be deduced from the graph?

i\.
2123 B. 2132
2123 2132
A. Meals with more dietary fibre can increase the bulk of the faeces
B. Meals with more dietary fibre can hold more 'Nater. anJ so sofien faeces beth:r C. 3212 D. 2312
C. Meals with less dietary fibre have more nutrients and a long•.:r timi:: is required 3212 2312
for complete absorption
D. Meals with less dietary result in harder faeces due to an incn.:ased time for
water absorption
Average Average

Directions: Questions 25 and 26 rekr to the diagram bdow. which shows the human Directions: Questions 5 and 6 refer to the diagram below. which shows the
digestive system: nutrition label ofa food product:
2014 Q.25 (47%)
Nutrition Information Per st>rving
Physical digestion takes place at
Er1ergy 62 Kcal
A.land 3. B. I and4. C.3 and 4. D.l.3an<l4.
' Protein
Total fat
3.1 g
3.5 g
2014 Q.26 (62%) 5 I
2 � Saturated fat 2.4g
Which of the following structures are responsible for producing
- Trans fat Og
digestive juices that help the digestion of fat?
Total carbohydrate 4.6 g
A. 2 and 5 B. 2 and 6 C.5 and 6 D.2, 5 and 6 - Dietary fibre Og
- sugars 4.6g
2015 Q.7 (47%) Sodium 44mg
Which of the following combinations correctly matches the gland, the enzyme secreted Calcium 110mg
and the optimum pH of the enzyme? 2016 Q.5 (52%)
Which ofthe following food substanci;:s provides most ofthe energy content in this
Gland Enzyme Optimum pH
food product?
A. gastric gland carbohydrase 2
B. liver lipase 8 A. fat B.protein C. sodium D. carbohydrate
C. salivary gland amylase 11
D. pancreas protease 11 2016 Q.6 (68%)
The food product bearing this nutrition label is most likely to be
2015 Q.10 {43%) A. milk B. bread. C. sausagi;:s. D. potato chips.
After absorption in the small intestine, most fat is first transported to the
A. large intestine. B. pancreas. C. heart. D. liver. 2018 Q.18 (63%)
Some people claim that we should chew food for a longer time before swallowing.
2016 Q.3 {43%) Which of the following statements about this claim is incorrect?
In which of the following pairs of carbohydrates can Benedict's test be used to
distinguish the two carbohydrates from one another? A. This stimulates the secretion of saliva
B. This moislen the food for easier sw<1llowing
(l) sucrose and starch C. This provide enough time for digestion of;arch into glucose
(2) sucrose and maltose D. This increases the surface area of the food for chemical digestion

(3) glucose and maltose

(4) glucose Md starch
A. (l) and (3) only B. (!) and (4) only C. {2) and {3) only D. {2) and (4) only
 hK1d unJ hm,ians ai1d hutr!tion in h1m1a11:-;; P.6

Average Average

2018 Q.23 (74%) 2019 Q.25 (68%)

171e diagram bello\NS shows a water bath with three test-tubes containin g different
mixtures:

water bath at
37°c

(l) (2) (3)

skimmed milk skimmed milk skimmed milk
Which of the foilowin g dental fonnulae correctly describes t]1l! dentition in the abow + + +
saliva gastric juice pancreatic juice
photograph?
Chemical digestion of food takes place in test-tubes
A. 2212 s. 2122
2212 2Ui A. (l ) and (2) only
C 2131 D. 2113 B. (l)and (3)only
Zfii 2Tfa C. (2) and (3) only
D. (]). (2) and (3)
Directions: Questions 23 and 24 refer to the diagram below, which shows a section
of one type of tooth and its associated structures:

2019 Q.23 {4j%)

---w
Which ofthe following are living tissues that contain a large amount
of calcium salt?
A. WandX
B. WandY
C. XandY
D. W,XandY

2019 Q.24 (41%)

The number of this type of tooth in the milk dentition is
A. 0.
B. 4.
C. 8.
D. 12.
 2020Q.10

10. Which of the following explain why a person cannot swallow food and talk at the same time?

(1) ·r11e epiglottis covers the opening of the trachea during swallowing.
2015 Q.8 (76%)
(2) Swallowing ls a reflex action while speaking is a voluntary action.
After eating a hamburger, chemical digestion begins in the (3) Air must flow through the larynx to produce sounds.
A. mouth cavity. B. oesophagus.
A. (1) and (2) only
C. stomach. D. small intestine. B. (1) and (3) only
C (2) and (3) only
D. (I), (2) and (J)
2016 Q.7 (80%)
Which of the following organs produces digestive juice that does not contain
enzymes? 2020 Q.12
A_ liver 8. mouth C. stomach D. pancreas
Both the villi of the small ii1testine and the air S(ICS of the lung arc sites for material exchange. Which of
the folknving is an adaptive feature common to the epithelium ofbmh structures'/
2019 Q.26 (80%)
TI,e following charts show the composition of four different foodstuffs. Which A. The epithelium is one cell thick.
B. There is a wru:er film on the surface oflhe epithelium.
foodstuff yields the highest amount of energy per gram? C. The epithelial ceUs cootain a large number of mitochondria.
D. The cphhclial cells have a modified eel! membrane to increase surface area.
A. B.

carbohydrate carbohydr.i.te
(40%) (35%)

C. D.

co.rbohydrate
carbohydr.ite (30%)
(40%)
Answers DSE M.C. Questions - Gas exchange in humans
(sort by difficulty)
Challenging Challenging
2015 2018
9 [BJ 25 [AJ 2013 Q.30 (7%)
The graph below shows the change in air pressure in the lungs ofa person:
Average �
2012 2014 2015 2016 2018 2019 76 '

'•r·1me
20 [BJ 24 [A] 7 [DJ 3 [DJ 18 [CJ 23 [ C 1
76: -
!� >
25 [Bl
)4 [CJ 10 [CJ 5 [A] 23 [81 24 l c J
�i, : Atmospheric prctssure = 760 mm Hg
26 [A] 6 [A] 25 I cl 758 :--- ,

p Q R s
Easy
2015 2016 2019 2020
8 [A] 7 [A] 26 [A] 10[8] At which point of time on the graph is the volume of the lung the largest
12[D A. P B. Q C. R D. S

Average

2014 Q.27 (62%)

The graph below shows the change in air pressure in the lungs of a man:

:::�, , ,�, >rnne

,ss l� I I
! ! i ! ' '
R S T U V W
Atmospheric pressure = 160 mm Hg

His diaphragm muscles are in a state of contraction during the period

A. RT.
B. SU.
C. TV.
D. uw.

37
 Gas cxchan�c in hun1c1ns / P.2 Gus e,changc in humo.n� / P.3

Average Average

Directions: Questions 13 and 14 refer to the diagram below, which shows a section 2016 Q.33 (46%)
of an air sac and its associated blood capillary in humans: \1/hich of the following organs are protected by the rib cage?
• (1) lung
(2) liver
(3) heart

A. (]) and (2) only

B. (!) and (3) only
C. (2) and (3) only
D. (I). (2) and (3)

2015 Q.ll (73%) 2018 Q.8 (63%)

Which of the following combinations correctly describes the changes in blood The photomicrograph below shows a section ofhumnn lung:
composition when blood t7ows from X to Y?

Oxygen content Glucose content Urea content

A. increases remains unchanged increases
B. increases decreases remains unchanged
C. remains unchanged decreases remains unchanged
D. remains unchanged remains unchanged increases

2015 Q.14 (67%)

As the blood in the capillary continues to flow, the red blood cell will first return to the
With reference to the structures shown in the photograph, which of the following are
A. left atrium. adaptive features for gas exchange?
B. right atrium
C. left ventricle. ( l) Presence of water film
D. right ventricle. (2) Short diffusion distance
(3) Rich supply ofblood capillaries

A. (I) and (2) only

B. ( I) and (3) only
C. (2) and (3) only
D. ( I). (2) and (3)
 2020 Q.11

11. Which of the fol.lowing descriptions of breathing is correct?

A. The air rushes in to expand the lungs.

2012 Q.22 (82%) B. The trachea expands to dra,v 1n more air.
Which of the following descriptions about the function of the cilia lining the trachea is C Pressure in the lungs decreases to draw in air.
correct? D. The expansion of the lungs pushes the diaphragm downward.

A. to warm the incoming air

B. to moisten the incoming air
C. to move mucus away from the trachea
D. to produce mucus to protect the trachea

2015 Q.15 (76%)

The ciiagrams below show the relative positions of the human respiratory system and
its associated structures in two different breathing stages;

ribs
lung
diaplu-c!gm

\Vhich ofthe following statements correctly describes the change tlinl takes placc
from stage P to stage Q?

A. Pressure inside the lungs is increasing.

B. Diaphragm muscle is contracting.
C. Volume of the lungs is increasing.
D. Rib cage is moving upward.

"" "
Answers DSE M.C. Questions - Transport in humans
(sort by difficulty)
Challenging Challenging
2013
30 [CJ 2016 Q.28 (18%)
Directions: Questions 28 and 29 refer to the diagram below, which shows the
Average cells and the associated vessels in a tissue:
2014 2015 2016 2018
27 [BJ 13 [BJ 33 [BI 8 [CJ
14 [AJ p

Easy
2012 2015 2020
22 [C] 15 ll[CJ
[AJ
Q

Which of the following combinations correctly identifies the major causes of fluid
flow represented by P, Q and S?

p Q s
A. osmosis diffusion hydrostatic pressure
B. hydrostatic pressure hydrostatic pressure diffusion
C. osmosis hydrostatic pressure hydrostatic pressure
D. diffusion diffusion osmosis

2018 Q.34 (38%)

Which of the following contribute to the continuous blood flow in the aorta?

(1) pumping action of the heart

(2) elastic nature ofthe wall ofthe aorta
(3) contraction and relaxation ofmuscle wall of the aorta

A. (I) and (2) only B. (I) and (3) only C. (2) arid (3) only D. (I). (2) and (3)
Challenging Challenging

2018 Q.35 (20%) 2019 Q.22 (39%)

35. The following photograph shows a dissected pig heart: When ventricles i:ontract, the valves bet\Vl!en ventricles and atria close. Which of the
following is the cause of the valve closure?

A. The bean tendons hold the valves in position.

B. The refilling of blood at the atria pushes the valves so that they close.
C. The closure of valves prevents the blood from flowing back to the atria.
D. The higher blood pressure resulting from ventricular contraction pushes the
valves so that they close.

Average
2013 Q.31 (64%)
Muscles are found in
(I) arterioles.
(2) capillari.:s.
(3) veins.

Which ofthe follm.ving descriptions about chamber Xis correct? A. (1) and (2) only 8. (I) and (3) only C. (2) and (3) only D. (!). (2) and (3)

A It receives blood from the pulmonary vein. 2016 Q.13 (47%)

B. It pumps out blood to the aorta. Of the following blood vessds_ which one contains blood with the highest urea
C. It receives blood from the vena cava. content?
D. It pumps out blood to the pulmonary artery.
A. renal vein B. hepatic vein
2019Q.lj (35%) C. pulmonary vein D. hepatic portal vein
Which of the following description(s) of human red blood cells is/ are correct?
(I) they cannot synthesise enzymes or proteins for repair because of the absrnce of
the nucleus
(2) they will stop tlmctioning one day because haemoglobin \Vil! be used up
(3) they do not have an energy supply because of the absence of mitud10ndria

A. (1) only B. (2) only C. (l) and (3) only D. (2) and (3) only
 Trnn:,;riurl in hurn::i.11:- i P.5

Average Average

2016Q.]7(40%) 2017Q.18(49%)
Directions: Questions 16 and 17 refer to the diagram below, which shows a Which of the Collo·wing descriptions of the circulatory system is correct?
sec ti on of the heart: A Veins have a large lumen because the blood pressure inside them is 101,-v,
B. Arteries have a thick layer of elastic tissue because they have small lumen.
C. The aorta has the highest blood pressure because it supplies blood to the
1,,vhole body.
-,,---w D. the capillary netvvork is a suitable site for material exchange because
capillaries have the thinnest walls.

2019 Q.27 (50%)

The photomicrograph below shows a section of a human umbilical cord with three
blood vessels:
Which of the following statements abo11t the heart is correct?
A. Z receives oxygenated blood from the lungs.
8. Y and Z pump out same volume of blood.
C. Blood in Z has higher glucose content than that of W.
D. Blood pumped out from Y travels a longer distance than that of X before
returning to the heart.

2016 Q.29 (73%)

Directions: Questions 28 and 29 refer to the diagram below, which shows the
cells and the associated vessels in a tissue:

Which of the following comparisons of the content of the blood vessels is correct?

A. The blood in vessel X has a higher oxygen content than that in vessel Y.
B. The blood in vessel Z has a higher glucose content than that in vessel X.
C. The blood in vessel Y has a higher amino acid content than that in vessel X.
D. The blood in vessel Y has a higher carbon dioxide content than that in
vessel Z.

Fluid in R eventually returns to the heart at the

A. left atrium. B. right atrium. C. lefl ventricle. D. right ventricle.
 'fwn:<p0rl in hu1nmVi P.7

Easy
2012 Q.21 (83%)
A red blood cell leaves the aorta. travels through !ht body illld arrives nt the capillaries 2012 Q.33 (76%)
of the air sacs. The correct sequence of organs through \Vhicl1 the red blood cell may In the cir(;u)atory system. the highest blood pressure is developed in the
have travelled is /\. left atrium.
A liver, lungs, small intestine and henrt. 13. right atrium.
B. lungs, heart, small intestine and liver. C. left ventricle.
C. small intestine, heart. liver and lungs. D. right ventricle.
D. small intestine, liver, heart and lungs.
2016 Q,J6 (76%)
Directions: Questions 31 and 32 refer to the photomicrograph below. which shows Directions: Questions 16 and 17 refer to the diagram below. which shows a
some blood vessels found in the human body: section of the heart:

When W contracts, which of the following combinations about the conditions of the
2012 Q.31 (90%) valves is correct?
Blood vessel Xis an artery because it has a
A. thick muscular wall to withstand high blood pressure. Semi-fltlltlr Vll[Ve Bicuspid valve
B. thick muscular wall to generate high blood pressure. A. open open
C. large lumen to slow down the blood flow. B. open dosed
D. large lumen to accommodate more blood,
C. closed open

2012 Q.32 (75%) D. closed closed

If blood vessel X is connected with the lung, it carries
A. oxygenated blood towards the heart.
B. oxygenated blood towards the lungs.
C. deoxygcnakd blood towards the henrt
D. deoxygenated blood towards the lungs
2020 Q.12
12. \1/hich ofthe fol!owiog descriptions ofthc bcpatic portal vein is correct?

A. It carries blood away from the liver,

Answers
B. It carries blood with lower oxygen content than that in the hepatic vein.
C. It canies blood with lower amino acid content than th.it in the hepatic artery after meals. Challenging
D. 1t carries blood with lower glucose content than that in the l1epatic vein when one is hungry.
2016 2018 2019
28 [CJ 34 [AJ 15 [A J
35 [DJ 22 [DJ

Average
2013 2016 2017 2019
31 [BJ 13 [BJ 18 [DJ 27 [CJ
17 [CJ
29 [BJ

Easy
2012 2016 2020
21 [DJ 16 [CJ 12[DJ
31 [AJ
32 [DJ
33 [CJ
 TranspiraLion, lmnspor! :md Sllpp,;n m ri211ts :' P. 1 TranspiratiO!L lransp0T1 :mJ support in plant;/ P.2

DSE M.C. Questions - Transpiration, transport and support in plants Average

(sort by difficulty)
Challenging 2012 Q.11 (64%)
The results ofthe experiment conducted under different environmental conditions are
shO\-vn in the bar chan below:
Average

20 !2 Q.3 (68%)
Which of the following is the major cause that accounts for the ascent or water in trees?
A the loss of•.vater from leaves
B. the absorption of water in roots
C. the thickness of tree trunks
D. the diameter of xylem vessels

Directions: Questions 10 to 11 refer to the follO\ving sel-up, which is used to

investigate the effect of different environmental conditions on the rate :�·"(" l!l"C 25°C IIJ'C. 25"(
of water loss from a leaf)· shoot: 1nlic!h 1n li5ht m lir,ht ;n li!chl i,� dark
1:.111 Oil fan on fo:ion- lim,,n fan off

£"' )
•�:;;:,,_ :::v Which ofthe following changes in conditions results in the greatest decrease in
Lealy sh,x,t �- ·water loss from the leafy· shoot?
A. S\Vitching offthe light
Water
8. s,vitching offthc fan
° °
](l,c,11 C. increasing the temperature from 10 C to 25 C
I J °
.·'iir bubble D decreasing the environment from 25 C to J0"C

2012 Q.10 (69%) 2012 Q.12 (48%)

It is important to cut the leafy shoot under water at the beginning of the experiment Leaves were taken from four different plants and the number of stomata was counted.
because this The results are shown in the following table:
A allows the leafy shoot to adjust to the new environment.
B. prevents the drying up of the cut end of the leafy shoot. I Plant
1'1-Jean nu.mberofstomatu per cm1
ljnner .surface ol the leaf ' Lower surface oftlte leaf
C. avoids the fom1ing ofair bubbles in the xylem ofthe leafy shoot. i p 4 000 28 000
D. makes sure that there is no water loss from the leafy shoot before the n 0 800
R S 500 15 000
experiment. s S 000 26 000

Which plant will ,vilt first when it is grown in a very dry region?
A. P B. Q C. R D. S

53
Average Average

2014 Q.21 (65%) 2016Q.11 (73%)

Directions: Questions 20 and 21 refer to the graph belovv, which shows how the The graph below shows the changes of the transpiration rate of a plant under different
transpiration rates through the upper and lower epidermis of a leaf vary environmental conditions:
with light intensity:

Lower epidermis

./
------
Upper epidermis

Light intensity Magnitude of environmental condition

Which of the following methods can be used to measure the rate of transpiration
through the upper epidennis of the leaf? Which of the following correctly matches the environmental conditions represented
A. Peel the upper epidennis of the leaf and count the number of stomata by X, Y and Z?
under a microscope. and then repeat with the lower epidennis. X y z
B. Put the leaf into wann water and then count the number oCbubb!cs that A light intensity wind speed relative humidity
appear on each side of the leaf in a fixed period of time.
8. wind speed light intensity relative humidity
C. Shine light on the upper epidennis ol'the lt:arand measure the rate: of
C. relntive humidity light intensity wind speed
water absorbed using a bubble potometer. and then repeat with the lower
epidennis. D. light intensity relative humidity wind speed
D. Smear the upper epidennis of the leaf with Vaseline and measure the
rate of water loss using a weight protorner, and then repeat with the lower 2016 Q.12 (69%)
epidennis. A student wants to estimate the stomata! density of the upper and lower epidennis ofa
leaf using a microscope. Which ofthe following combinations correctly shows the
2014 Q.22 (73%) magnification that should be used and the reason?
The transpiration rate of a tree is much higher than that ofa herbaceous plant because
the tree Magnification Reason
A. is much taller than the herbaceous plant. A. low magnification show a larger field of view
B. has many more roots than the herbaceous plant. B. low magnification give a brighter image
C. has many more leaves than the herbaceous plant. C. high magnification show more cellular details
D. has much more xylem than the herbaceous plant.
D. high magnification give a clearer image
Average Average

Directions: Questions 21 to 23 refer to the diagram below, \.Vhich shows the cross
section ofa young dicotyledonous root
Directions:
Questious 14 to 16 refer to the set-up below,
which is used to investigate the effect of
environmental factors on the transpiration leafy shoot
rate ofa leafy shoot. The leafy shoot was put
into a beaker ofred-coloured solution. After
five hours, cross-sections ofrhe shoot were
solution---- beakOT
cut starting from the top until red colour
appeared in the cut sc:ction. The length of the
remaining shoot was then mca<;ured.

2016Q.21 (71%)
2017 Q.14 (5 3%)
Which of the following parts provides rigidity to support the plant?
Which of the following step(s) is/are necessary when preparing the set-up?
A.I B.2 �3 D.4
(I) Smear Vnseline 01110 the lower surface of the leaves.
(2) Add a !ayer of oil on the surface of the red-coloured solution
2016 Q.23 (73%) (3) Cut the lower end ofthe leafy shoot under the red-coloured solution.
Which of the following parts is most likely to have more mitochondria? A. (l) only B. (3) only C. ( l) and (2) only D. (2) and (3) only
A. I 8. 2 C. 3 D. 4
2017 Q.16(61%)
2017 Q.13 (57%) A section of the remaining shoot was observed under a microscope. Which of the
Water absorbed by trees is mostly used following diagrams correctly shows the appearance of the shoot section?

3
A. to replenish water loss.

M
Smintd red

8. for storage in vacuoles. B.

C. as a raw material in photosynthesis.
D. as a medium for reactions to take place.

V
8 0
D.

•
•
 Transpiration._ trnnspor1 ,md support in plants/ P. 7 Transpiration, transport and snpport in plants/ P.8

Average Average

2017Q.17(51%) 2019 Q.32 (50%)

Which ofthe following cell types contribute(s) to the support of a leafin a woody The photograph below shows a fresh cut around the trunk near the bottom ofa tree:

flowering plant?
( 1) guard cells
(2) xylem vessels
(3) mesophyll cells
-" .tn,,h cut arrnmd
A. (2) only B. (!) and (3) only C. (2) and (3) only D. (!), (2) and(3) the.m: tru:nk

2018 Q.24 (51%)

The following photograph shows a tree with roots covered by concrete:
The tree eventually died. Which of the following is the most likely reason for the
death of the tree?
A. Water could not be transported to the leaves for transpiration.
B. Water could not be transported to the !eaves for photosynthesis.
C. Minerals could not be transported upward for protein synthesis.
D. Photosynthetic products could not be transported to the roots for respiration.

Four students have expressed their views about this:

Whose view is correct?

A. John's view
B. Mary's view
C. Tom's view
D. Susan's view
2014 Q.20 (78%) Directions: Questions 17 and 18 refer to the setMup below, which is used to measure
Directions: Questions 20 and 21 refer to the graph below, which shov.1s how the the rate of transpiration of a leafy shoot:
transpiration rates through the upper and lower epidem1is of a leaf vary
with light intensity:

Lower epidermis

/
------
Up per epidermis et-------- oil layer
,...,Jt------- pipette
/
/ waterMfilled tube--------'�I
/

Light intensity

Which ofthe following accounts for the difference in the transpiration rates through the
upper and lower epidermis shovm above?
A. The mesophyll layer near the lower epidcnnis has more air spaces. 2015 Q.17 (75%)
B. The upper epidermis is more exposed to light. The assumption behind the use of this set-up for measuring the rate of transpiration is
C. The air te mperature below the leaf is lower. that
D. The upper epidennis has fewer stomata.
A. the connections in the set-up are sealed off.
B. the n1te or water uptake is equal to that of water loss.
C. the ::;tornata ofthe leaves remain open throughout the experiment.
D the cuLting oJ'the shoot does not introduce air bubbles into the xylem vessels.

2015 Q.18 (78%)

Which ofthc following variables has the greatest influence on the rate oftranspiration
of the Je,1J)' shoo!?

A. the area of the leaves

B. the thickness orthe leaves
C. the length of the leafy shoot
D. the number of xylem vessels
 Easy

2016 Q.22 (85%) Directions: Questions 30 and 31 refer to the set-up below. The set-up consists of
Directions: Questions 21 to 23 refer to the diagram be\o,.v. which shows the cross two boll jars placed on above the ether with the leaf of a potted plant in
section ofa young dicotyledonous root between. Chemical X was placed into the jars to absorb water vapour.
The whole set-up was made air-light. The masses of chemical X in the
tvvo jars were measured at the beginning and after five hours.

hdljar
che01JC:1! X
initial mas;;; :L,!Q .g
Gnal :n�s.: 2.49 ;;:

b-dlj.ir
chemic;i,l X
initial ma:;s: 2AJ. g
Which of the following parts is responsible for the transport of food? G.nnl mass: 2 .56 g

kl B.2 C3 D.4 oil

Directions:
Questions 14 to 16 refer to the set-up below, 2018 Q.30 (76%)
The change in mass ofchemical X was mainly caused by
which is used to investigate the effect of
environmental factors on the transpiration -�leafy shoo,
A. water uptake by the plant.

rate of a leafy shoot The leafy shoot was
put into a beaker ofred-coloured solution.
After five hours, cross-sections ofthe shoot
were cut starting from the top until red
colour appeared in the cut section. The
length of the remaining shoot was then measured.
2017 Q.15 (76%)
The length of the remaining shoot will be the longest if the experiment is conducted in
A. hot and bright conditions.
B. hot and humid conditions.
C. cold and bright conditions.
D. cold and humid conditions.
14�
B. water Loss in transpiration.
C. water produced in respiration.
solution -----t�ee�rm1t-----bcnker
D. water consumed by photosynthe.sis.
2018 Q.31 (81%)
Which of the following conclusions can be drawn from the results?
A. Water absorption by the root is mainly driven by the iower epidermis of the leaf
B. There are more stomata at the Lower epidermis than the upper epidermis of the leaf
C. The respiration rate is higher than the photosynthetic rate during the experiment
D. The photosynthetic rate of the upper layer of the leaf is higher than that of the
Jo,.vcr layer.
2020 Q.23
Directions: Questions 22 to 2./1 refer to the photomicrographs helow. which show tile ::t\;rn �-:clion of a plant
observed under a microscope. Diagram Y shows a higher mogni [kation Q[ the v:1�cu]�r llL!ndle (Vb)
in Diagram X: Ansv,r ers

Challenging

Average
2012 2014 2016 2017 2018 2019
3 [A] 21 [DJ 11 [DJ 13 [AJ 24 [BJ 32 [D J
10 [C] 22 [CJ 12 [AJ 14 [BJ
II [AJ 21 [DJ 16 [DJ
12 [DJ _, [AJ
r 17 [CJ

Easy
2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2020
20 [DJ 17 [BJ 22 [CJ 15 [AJ 30 [BJ 23[BJ
18 I AJ 31 [BJ
Key: Vb "" vascular bundle

23. Which oflhe following dcScriptions of the function of tissue Z shown in Diagram Y is com.:ct'/

A. It transports proteins upwru-ds.

B. It transports minerals upwards.
C. It transports water downwards.
D. It transports sugar.; downwards.
 DSE M.C. Questions - Cell division and Reproduction Challenging
(sort by diHiculty)
Challenging 2016 Q.32 (30%)
Structure Y serves as
2012 Q.24 (37%) ( 1) food stcirc for seed germination.
Which of the following descriptions about pollen grains is correct? (2) attraction to animals for seed dispersal.
A. Pollen grains are the male gametes ofa plant. (3) cushion to protect the seed during falling.
B. Pollen grains can produce nectar to attract insects.
C. Pollen grains germinate when they land on the stigma of the same species. A. (l) only B. (2) only C. (l) and(3) only 0. (2) and (3) only
D. Pollen grains of insect-pollinated flowers are usually smaller than those of
wind-pollinated flowers. Average

2013 Q.18 (32%) 2012 Q.28 (58%)

The diagram below shows a dividing cell which is forming an animal's egg cell: Which of the following pairs ofreproductive structures in humans and flowering plants
have the same function?
What conclusion about the cell division can be drawn from the diagram?
A. The diagram shows a mitotic cell division. Humans Flowering plants
y
B. The diagram shows the first meiotic cell division. A. sperm anther
C. X and Y are homologous chromosomes. B. penis pollen tube
D. Each daughter cell will have four chromosomes. C. uterus carpel
D. vagina petal
2016 Q.19 (34%)
Directions: Questions 18 to 20 refer to the graph below, which shows the change 2012 Q.29 (46%)
in the DNA content of a cell undergoing a certain division: Which of the following is not a secondary sexual characteristic of a man?
' !
A. gro\.vth of beard

/ - •... . --1------- B.
C.
production of sperms
broadening of shoulders
!
·'---'--- D. enlargement of larynx

p Q s T

Which of the following stages best represent(s) interphase?

A. P only
B. Q only
C. P and Q only
D. P, Q and R only
 Cell di\·i::illn am! R'-::production / P.4

Average Average

2013 Q.36 (55%) 2014 Q.28 (53%)

Directions: Questions 35 and J6 refer to the diagrnm belovv. which shows the ll1e diagram below shov,'S the changes in the uterine lining of a woman:
reproductive system of a man:

28/3 214 7/4, 12/4 17/4 22/4 27/4 2/5

Date
During which of the following periods would the woman most likely get pregnant
after copulation?
Which of the following may still occur after structure 3 on the both sides of the body A. 28/3 to 1/4
has been tied up and cut? B. 4/4 to 8/4
(I) production of sperms C. 11/4 to 15/4
(2) erection of penis D. 18/4to21/4
(3) ejaculation
2015 Q.19(40%)
A (I) and (2) only Which of the following can be the functions of roots in flowering plants?
B. (!) and (3)only (1) anchorage
C. (2)and (3)only (2) absorption
D. (I). (2) and (3) (3 ) vegetative propagation

2014 Q.4 (41%) A (l)and(2)only B. (I)and(3)only

Which of the following correctly describes binary fission of the protist? C. (2) and (3) only D. (!), (2) and (3)
A The amount of organelles in the daughter cell is the same as that in the mother cell.
B. 1l1e number of chromosomes in the daughter cell is halfof that in the mother cell.
C. The alleles found in the daughter cells are different from each other.
D. The sizes of the daughter cells are similar to each other.
Average Average

2015 Q.25 (64%) 2015 Q.26 {42%)

Directions: Questions 24 and 25 refer to the ctiagram below, which shows the During pregnancy, amniotic fluid containing foetal cells can be obtained for
structures of a flower: karyotyping. This helps to determine whether the foetus
(I) is male or female.
(2 ) has Down syndrome or not.

1�1----
(3) is a carrier ofSickle�cell anaemia.

A. (1) and (2) only B. (1)and(3)only

C. (2) and (3) only D. (1), (2) and (3)

Directions: Questions 18 to 20 refer to the graph below, which shows the change
in the DNA content ofa cell undergoing a certain division:

The photograph below shows the cross section of structure 2.

Which of the following parts of the human reproductive system serves a function
similar to that ofY?

A. ovum
B. sperm
y p Q R s T
C. testis Stage
D. ovary
2016 Q.18 (67%)
Which of the following can be deduced from the graph?
( 1) There are two divisions.
{2) There is one DNA duplication.
(3) DNA content is halved at the end of the whole process.
A. (1) and (2) only B. (1) and (3) only C. (2) and (3) only D. (1). (2) and (3)

2016 Q.20 (59%)

Sister chromatids separate from one another during the transition from
A. P to Q. B. Q to R. C. R to S. D. S to T.

;o
Average Average

2016 Q.31 (70%) Directions: Question 15 to 17 refer to the following diagram, which shows the
Directions: structures of a potato plant:
Questions 31 and 32 refer to the diagram below, which shows the section of a fruit:

Which of the following combinations correctly shows the floral pans that develop into
structures X and Y?

X y
A. carpel petal
8. carpel ovary
C. sepal petal
D. sepal ovary

Directions: -.I cell,

Questions 2 l to 23 refer to the following

photomicrographs of the same magnification. 2018 Q.15 (61%)
The photomicrographs show some early stages Which of the following labelled structure(s) is/ are involved in the reproduction ofthis
IV Morethon 100 cells
of embryo development: potato pl.mt?
1t/t�, A. Q only B. Sonly C. Rand S only D. Q, R and S only

2017 Q.21 {53%) �/

2018 Q.16 (51%)
Which of the follO\ving processes are taking place from stage I to stage IV?
Which of the following labelled structures contain cells with different genotypes?
(I) cell division D. R and S
A. P and Q B. P and S C. Q and R
(2) cell enlargement
(3) cell differentiation 2018 Q.17 {59%)
A.(1) and(2) only B. (I) and (3) only C.(2)and(3)only D.(l),(2)and(3) Fam1ers usually grow potato plants by vegetative propagation. This is probably because
vegetative propagation
2017 Q.22 (63%)
How many cell cycles has the cell in stage I gone through to reach stage Ill? A. Produces tubers for harvesting
B. Does not involve seed dispersal
A. 2 cycles 8. 3 cycles C. 4 cycles D. 5 cycles
C. Takes a shorter time to reproduce
D. Allows rapid colonization of an area
2017 Q.23 (49%)
Which of the following stages is ready for implantation?
A. I 8. II C. Ill D. IV
Easy Easy

Directions: Questions 25 and 26 refer to the following diagram, which shows part 2013 Q.35 (90%)
of the female reproductive system: Directions: Questions 35 and 36 refer to the diagram below, which shows the
reproductive system of a man:

2012 Q.25 (93%) Which of the following structures are involved in thi;: production ofthe content ofsemen?
Which ofthe following structures undergo periodic changes? A.land3 B.land4 C.2and3 D.2and4
A. 1 and 3 8. I and 4 C. 2 and 3 D. 2 and 4
20l4Q.29(78%)
2012Q.26 (82%) During foetal development the placenta has functional roles similar to
In which of the following structures does implantation nomrnlly take place? (I) the bone.
A. l 8. 3 C. 5 D. 6 (2) the lungs
(3) the small intestine.
2012Q.27 (79%) A. ( 1) and (2) only B. (1) and (3) only C. (2) and (3) only D. (ll, (2) and(3)
Which of the following contraceptive methods prevents the fonnation of mature
gametes?
A. using diaphragm 2015 Q.24 (78%)
B. using rhythm method Directions: Questions 24 and 25 refor to the diagram below,
C. intake ofcontraceptive pills which shows the structures ofa flower:
D. wing intrauterine device
Which structure will develop into the fruit wall?
2013 Q.14 (80%)
Which of the following consists of individuals that are genetically different from each A. 1 B.2 C.3 D.4
other?
A. Seeds of the same fruit
8. Stigmas of the same flower
C. Petals of the same plant
D. Buds of the same tuber
 2U20 Q.21

21. In flowering plants, asexual reproduction is considered less favourable lhan sexual reproduction in terms
of narnrai selection because offspring produced from asexual reproduction
Directions: Questions 19 and 20 refer to the diagram bclov.', VYhich shows some
structures of the ternale reproductive system in humans: A. are generically identical to each other.
B. have keen competilion with encb other.
C. cannot invade and colonise new envirorunents.
D. can grow rapidly only in favourable conditions.

2020 Q.25

25. Which of the following descriptions of floral structures is correct?

A. Tht ovule forms seeds.

2017 Q.19 (78%) B. Thi.: ovary forms seed coats.
C. Pollen grains are male gametes.
Which of the following combinations correctly shows the location where fertilization
D. The filament contains pollen grains.
and discharge of semen normally take place?
f
Ferti/isation Discharge o semen
A. 2

B. 3
C 2 2

D. 2 3

20 l 7 Q.20 (76%)
Iflocation l is blocked in a 14-year-old girl, vvhich orthe following. is most likely to
occur?
A. There is no ovulation.
B. Her fertility decreases.
C. There is no menstruation.
D. Her breasts fail to develop.

2019 Q.12 {87%)

Which of the following statements about the human egg and ::,pennis correct?
A. Both have the same number of genes.
B. Both have the same amount of cytoplasm.
C. Both have the same amount of food reserve.
D. Both have the same number of chromosomes.
 Cell division and R<:::prnduction / P.12 Gro\\"lh and development/ P. l

Answers DSE M.C. Questions - Growth and development

(sort by difficulty)
Challenging Challenging
2012 2013 2016
24 [CJ 18 [DJ 19 [CJ 2018 Q.29 (28%)
32 [BJ Which ofthe following substances contribute(s) most to the increase in biomass ofplant?

Average A. Water
2012 2013 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 8. Oxygen
28 [BJ 36 [DJ 4 [ DJ 19 [DJ 18 [ DJ 21 [BJ 15 [DJ C. Minerals
29 [BJ 28 [CJ 20 [DJ 20 [DJ 22 [CJ l 6 [DJ D. Carbon dioxide
3 l [ DJ 31 [DJ 23 [DJ 17 [CJ
2019 Q.30 {18%)
Easy Which of the following parameters is best used for recording the growth or a potted
2012 2013 2014 2015 2017 2019 genninating seedling over a period oftime?
25 [CJ 14 [A J 29 [CJ 24 [DJ 29 [BJ 12 [DJ
26 [BJ 35 [DJ 20 [BJ A. The dry mass of the seedling
27 [CJ 8. The fresh mass of the seedling
C. TI1e total surface area of the seedling's leaves
D. TI1e time taken for the seedling's first leaf to appear
2020
2l[AJ
25[AJ
Average Average
Directions: Question 13 and 14 refer to an investigation described bekrn. Pots were
planted with seeds at densities of I 00, 500 and 2500 m·2 respectively. 2019 Q.31 {45%)
The soil, water and lighting conditions \:Vere similar for each pot. The The graph belO\V shows the grO\vth rate of humans:
dry masses of mature plants are shown in the following graphs:

IIJO s�cd� m

II Female
D Male

I 000 2 000 l 000

Dry mas� ofthe rl�nt (mg)
2 ll(JO 0 1000 }Ol)() --
,- ,_.,_ - .,. -,- -·· ., ..,-. - ' .,. .,. -,- -,- �� -,- ., .
' • ' 1

' ' ' •' ; ' • ) ' • 1 • ' ' •

� - .. - r ·r-,--r--. •-:• �-r-,--•r•,- •,• ••• ·, • 1- r -,
2012 Q.13 (54%) ' ' ' '
' '
'
The investigation was most likely performed to study
A. the effect ofsymbiosis.
'
B. the effect of competition.
. ' ' ' '
' ' ' ' .
C. the success rate of seed germination. ·2 ·1 0 1 2 3 JI 6 7 B !I 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Age (year)
D. the optimum density for seed germination.

2012Q.14(61%) Which ofthe follmving can be deduced from the graph?

Which ofthe following best describes the effect on the plants ac; the density of seeds
planted increases? A. Th� brain grows rapidly from age Oto age 4.
A. biomass of individual plants is reduced B. There is no more changes in growth for males after age 20.
B. genetic variability of the plants is increased C. The duration of adolescence is the same in males and females.
C. dry masses of plants are nonna!ly distributed D. Growth orthe reproductive organs begins at age 10 in females.
D. leaves become smaller and stems get thinner

2015 Q.28 (59%)

Which of the following parameters is best for measuring the gro\\1h or the bruad bean
after gennination?
A. the length ort11e shoot
B. the area ofthe leaves
C. the weight ofthe embryo
D. the volume of the cotyledon

so
2015 Q.29 (91%) 2017 Q.24 (87%)
The graph below shO\-VS th<! average root length o!'gtrminating seeds irrigated ,.vith The graph below shovvs the grovAh curves of the head, reprodl\ctive system and the
different auxin concentrations?

--
whole body in humans·
l.6
1.4
100
.- · -·- .
.,, I "' .

'? 1.2
�
C
� ', '
/ 80. l �
'' I
.;;�
1.0 "C
-0
, I
.,,
I

---
" 0.8 � §� 60 I ,.,.,
.,

0.6 I
11,,,,.,,.,,., I
0.4 N
·;; 40
--
I
I
✓.,, ------

,/
i�
0.2

__ ------
I ,
0 20 ·/ /
0 10' 10' 10' 1 0 10 1012 II Ill /
Auxin concentration (arbitrary unit) ,
I

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
Age (years)
Which of the following can be deduced from the above graph?
Which of the following combinations correctly identifies curves I, II and IIl?
I II Ill
A. Auxins promote the elongation of the root.
B. Auxins promote cell division that results in the elongation of the root A. whole body reproductive system head
C. Auxins promote water absorption that results in the elongation of the root. B. head reproductive system whole body
D. Different concentrations of auxins result in differences in the extent of root C. head whole body reproductive system
elongation. D. reproductive system whole body head

2020 Q.26

26. On which ofthc following paruoftht: rooL can root hairs be found?

/\. root cnp

B. region of elongation
C. rugiol\ ofcdl tlivision
D. region of tliffercntialion
Directions: Questions 27 w1d 28 refer to the diagram below, which show� an invcstigati<in into !ht: e/Tect of Answers
uux.ins on the growth ofplo.nt shoal�:

plainagflf Challenging
block � agar blocks with auxins
2018 20]9
�
=� 29 f DI 3() [CJ
decapitated--;: .! i '.; ·: a few davs later)
cokioptile ,: -:, , '-: .!
;.:Jr'--;2 ,,.. Average
p ,#6
.. ::,Jc"->=-··;;1!c- .
#y ,f:31'
j, !] /f '/', ri.'
2012 20)5 2019

\\,P (�Q f.R JfS Th 13

14
[DI
IAJ
28 [AJ 31 [CJ

p Q R S T

2 7, Wl1ieh of the following serve(s) as the control set-up(s) in this investigation? Easy
2015 2017 2020
A. Pon]y 26[0]
B. R only 29 [DJ 24 [ c J
27[C]
C. P and Q only
28[8]
D. Q o.nd R only

2020 Q.28

28. V/hich of the following conclusions can be drawn based on the results of the investigation?

A The tip of the colcoptilc produces auxins.

8. Auxins stimulate the growth of coleoptiles.
C. The coleopti.!e shows positive phototropis.m.
D. Coleoptiles stop growing when tbe tip is removed.
 DSE M.C. Questions - Detecting the environment (plant) Average
(sort by difficulty)
Challenging Directions:
Questions 35 and 36 refer to the diagram below, which shows an experiment that
2012 Q.30 (Jj%) collects auxins from the tip of coleoptiles under different conditions. After that, the
Which of the following correctly describe the importance ofphototropism to plants? agar blocks are placed on decapitated coleoptiles of the same height:

,mi
w=

ffi. ,
(1) It ensures that the root can get water from the soil. <li< unil.lkn.1 Hglu -�
h <�
(2) It ensures that the root can anchor to the soil for support. t-t--f- pia,;ti.c pl.Pc plas.tic plate
It allows the shoot reach a position where there is sunlight. compktdy C{).t11pletcly
(3) ag.ll"black
diviclcs.!fW" ;,,-,.,•: w,;
divide':. nµr• .. .· ..... _
.t11dtipimo 3 J. p-arti:l.lly 5 6
twoho.h•,:;5 divlde.�dp
A. (1) and (2) only
B. (1) and (3) only pl= lhe 1.1.g:,rb!oi:.ks on do:apil.ltcd colooptiks oflhc s.i:mc heigh:

u IT
C. (2) and (3) only
D. (I), (2) and (3) 4 5 6

IT IT
2016 Q.35 (42%)
Which ofthe following correctly shows the grov..1h response ofthe decapitated

uuuurru
coleoptiles?
A. B.

uuuuuu
I 2 .> 4 5 f,

C D.

l 2 :, '1 5 6

2016 Q.36 (64%)

Which of the lbllowing can be used as a control set-up for the above experiment?

(}.--- r,.;:,m,ul ,:l)kc,prf!c

C. D.
 Dut:cling the cm ironmcnt (plant) i PA-

Average Easy

r·�- _ff%=
2017 Q.31 (65%) 2014 Q.36 (77%)
111e diagram below shows a low power drawing of the cut section ofa root: Which ofthe followings pairs of set-ups can be used to test the hypothesis that auxins

�-�
Which of the following correctly describes the relationship of auxin and are growth-promoting substance in oat coleoptiles:
different regions ofthe root? A B.

-�·l
Q
A. lt affects cell division at P. replaced with 11.uxins

B. It affects cell division at Q.

Dec:ap1tated Decapitated

r-- �-� t=-·�

C. !t affects cell elongation at P. col cop tile coleoptile

D. !t affects cell elongation at Q. C. D.

with auxins t :::: with auxins

without auxins
2019 Q.28 {45%)
To investigate the transp on of auxins in the stem of a young seedling. a plain agar Decapitated Intact Decapitated
coleoptile coleoptile coleoptile
block and an agar block soaked in radioactively labelled auxins were prepared and
placed at different ends of a cut stem, as shown in the diagram below. The relative

r·
amounts of radioactivity in different parts are shovm as different intensities of shaded
area.
young seedling set-up (I) and resuh.t set-up (1) nod res"lis
,g,blookwi•1
radioa.."tivdy
labelled auxin
b ----ell<- :
plaiIJ ai;ar t,lock , w,

j I
p!Jiin agar block

� �
�gar block willl
r.>dioactlvc!y
°''"''='"
lab1<lkd ,ruxin

Which of the following conclusions can be drawn from the above results?

(1) Transport of au.."Xins in the stem is not affected by gravity.

(2) Transport of auxins in the stem involves an active process.
(3) Transport of auxins in the stem mainly takes place from a to b.

A. ( 1) and (2) only 8. (1) and (3) ouly C. (2) and (3) only D. (l). (2) and(3)
 CoorJinc1tion i11 humans/ P 1

Answers DSE M.C. Questions -Coordination in humans

(sort by difficulty)
Challenging Challenging
2012
JO [ D]

Average
2016 2017 2019 2012 Q.4 (63%)
35 [A] 31 [ DJ 28 [Bl \Vhich of the following gives the correct direction ofimpulse transmission in a neurone?
36 [ D] A. axon -> cell body -----,. dendrites
B. dendrites __,,. cell body -> axon
Easy C. cel 1 body --- axon - dendrites
2014 D. dendrites _,. axon---,. cell body
36 [Cl
2012 Q.5 (61%)
Chemicals released at the synapse are responsible for the impulse transmission from
(I) sensory neurone to intemeurone
(2) intemeurone to motor neurone
(3) motor neurone to muscle

A. ( 1) and (2) only B. ( 1) and (3) only C. (2) and (3) only D. ( 1), (2) and (3) only

Direction:
Question 27 and 28 refer to the diagram below, ;-
which sho\VS a section of the human eye a11d the
positions X1 and YI where the images of two
coloured objects X and Y are formed respectively
" ----c¾f'F==------l
on the retina;
,1ruc\ure Z

2013 Q.27 (64%)

Which of the following correctly describes a person's visual perception in day time?

A.X appears brighter because cone cells are found at position Xi.
B.X appears sharper because cone cells are found at position Xt.
C. Y appears black and white because rod cells are found at position Y 1.
D . Y appears blurred because rod cells are found at position Yi.

"
 Coordina1iz,n i11 human,;/ P_J

Average Average

2013 Q.28 (55%) 2017 Q.26 (73%)

When a person ages, structureZ becomes less elastic. When this happens, a person ½'ill Directions: Questions 25 and 26 refer to the diagram below, which shows the
probably have difficulty focusing on structures ofa human ear:
A.a nearby object beeause structure Z cannot be thicken folly.
B.a nearby object because structure Z cannot be pulled thin fully.
C. a distant object because structure Z cannot be thicken fully.
D.a distant object because structure Z cannot be pulled thin fully.
5 2
2013 Q.29 (62%) 4 3
Which of the following combinations correctly matches the structure of the human ear
and its function?
Structure Function
A.ear flap protecting the <::ar
8.ear drum amplit�,.ing sound waves
C.earbones transmitting vibratiuns
D.round window setting thc rndolyrnph in motion \Vhich of the following structures wil! vibrate when there are sound waves?
A I and 3 only G. 2 and 3 only C. 2, J and 4 only D. 2. 4 and 5 only
2015 Q.27 (72%)
Which of the following combinations correctly shows the conditions of di1lcrent parts 2017 Q.27 (71 %)
of the eyes ·when a person is looking at an object moving towards him'? Which nftll� folluwing combinations correctly matches the problem ofshon
Lens Sw,pens01:r ligament sightedness ,md its correction?
A. becoming thinner s!ai..:kcning Problem Correction
B. becoming thinner tightening A. image focused behind the retina wear concave lens
C. becoming thicker slcickening B. image focused behind the retina wear convex Jens
D. becoming thicker tightening C. image focused in front of the retina wear concave lens
D. image focused in front of the retina \Vear convex !ens

2017 Q.28 (66%)

Which of the follov11ing correctly explains why our eyes feel tired ifwe have been
reading .i book for a long time?

A. The ciliill)' body has contracted for a long time.

B. The photosensitive cells have been over�stimulated.
C. The lens has maintained a curved state for a long time.
D. The suspensory ligament has been under tension for a long time.
 C0ordination in huma�s / p_.j Coordination in human,; P_:5

Average Average

2017 Q.29 (j3%) 2019 Q.16 (56%)

The diagram below shows a motor neurone: Peter wanted to throw a crumpled paper into the rubbish bin in the dim room. He found
that he could see a bin more clearly ifhe tried to focus on objects right next to the bin.
Which of the fo!lo1,,ving statements about the image formation ofthe bin is correct?
•/lf---Y
.,/.
;·--.... ,, A. !mage ofthe bin is formed on the yellow spot where there are cone cells only.
<t/f/ B. Image of the bin is formed on the yello\.V spot where there are more cone cells
than rod cells.
Which of the following statements correctly describes the motor neurone? C. Image of the bin is fonned on the periphery of the retina where there are rod cells
A. Xis connected to a muscle fibre. only.
8. Electrical impulses are transmitted fi-om Y to X. D. Image ofthe bin is rormed on the periphery of the retina where there are more
C. Synapses can be found at the end of both X and Y. rod cells than cone cells.
D. Electrical impulses are sent out at Y to the next neurone.
2019Q.17(59%)
2018 Q.7 (74%) \\/earing contact l<!ns-:s for too long will have an adverse effect on the eyes because
Below is a ray diagram ofa common eye def'ect: this decreases the amount or oxygen reaching the eyes. Which of the following eye
structure is most aflCcted in this case?

A. iris B. lens C. cornea D. sclera

2019 Q.21 (54%)

Daisy is very hungry. When the waiter puts her favourite dish on the table, her saliva
Which of the following combinations correctly identifies the eye defect and type of secretion increases. Which of the following body parts controls this response?
lens to be worn to remedy it?
Eye defect Type oflens A. cerebrum
A. Long-sightedness convex lens B. cerebellum
B. Long-sightedness concave lens C. salivary gland
C. Short-sightedness convex lens D. medulla oblongata
D. Short-sightedness concave lens
Easy

2012 Q.6 (79%) 2015 Q.23 (84%)

Which of the following activities is coordinated by the cerebellum? Which of the following correctly compares reflex actions and voluntary actions?
A. muscular movements during dcmcing Reflex 11.ctiollS Voluntary 11.ctions
B. breathing movements during sleeping A responses may vary responses are always the same
C. secretion of digestive juices when one is hungry B. stimulus is optional stimulus is required
D. withdra\val of hand when one touches a hot object C. initiakd by receptors initiated in the brain
D. effoctors must be muscles effectors can be muscles or glands
Directions: Question 8 and 9 refer to the diagram below, which shows a section of
the human i;:ye: 2017 Q.25 (79%)
Directions: Questions 25 and 26 refer to the diagram below, which shmvs the
structures of a human ear:

5
�%17s'<c'f-----2
4
�-=--/-----3

2012 Q.8 (81%)

Which part of the eye is tough and ,vhite in colour?
A. p B. Q C. R D. S

2012 Q.9 (87%)

Which of the following parts are made ofmusck? Which ofthi': following structures is not involved in hearing?
A. P and S B. Q and R C. Rand T D. Sand U A. l B. 2 C, 3 D. 4

2015 Q.22 (86%)

Toys are often used to develop children's fine motor skills. Which of the following
parts is trained when children play with toys?
A. cerebellum
B. spinal cord
C. pituitary
D. medu!la oblongata
 Coordination in hunwns / P.8 Cc,ordination in humans./ P.9

20l7Q.30(87%)
Which of the following does not belong to the central nervous system?
A. medulla oblongata
B. spinal cord
C. cerebellum
D. eye

2018 Q.22 (76%)

Which of the following combinations correctly identifies the distribution of grey
matter and white matter in the cerebrum and spinal cord?

Inner part of the cerebmm Inner part oftlze spinal cord\

A. White matter grey matter
B. White matter white matter
C. Grey matter grey matter
D. Grey matter white matter
Answers DSE M.C. Questions - Movement in humans
(sort by difficulty)
Challenging Challenging

Average 2015 Q.21 (39%)

2012 2013 2015 2017 2018 2019 Directions: Questions 20 and 21 refer to the diagram below, which shows an elbow
4 [BJ 27 [Bl 27 [CJ 26 [DJ 7 [Al 16 f DJ joint and its associated structures:
5 [DJ 28 [A J 27 [CJ 17 [CJ
29 [CJ 28 [A J 21 [DJ
29 [CJ

Easy s------
2012 2015 2017 2018
6 [ Al 22 [ AJ 25 [ A J 22 [Al
8 [ AJ 23 [CJ 30 [DJ
9 [DJ

Structure S is able to

(]) carry out respiration.

(2) store minerals.
(3) produce blood cells.

A. ( J J and (2) only

B. { I) and (3) only
C. (2) and (3) only
D. (JJ.(2)and(3)

IDC/
Average Average

Directions: Questions 34 and 35 refer to the Diagram I and Diagram II belo'rv. Directions: Question 19 to 21 refer to the diagrams below. Diagram ! shows the reflex
Diagram I shows a yoga instructor in a yoga posture. Diagram II shows arc orthe knee jerk reflex while diagram II shows three types of neurons:
some of the muscles associated with her left leg. l)favam f /Ji«;r,urr II

Di11graml Diagmm fl

d)f0\
2 (I) (2) (J)

2018 Q.19 (73%)

The effector in the reflex are in Diagram I is
2014 Q.34 (54%) A. a flexor because its response bends the limb
Which muscles ofthe left leg ofthe yoga instructor are contracting when she maintains B. an extensor because its response straightens the limb
the posture shown in diagram I? C. a flexor because it shortens to bring about the movement
A. 1 and2 B. I and3 C.2and4 D.3and4 D. an extensor because it lengthens to bring about the movement

2014 Q.35 (58%) 2018 Q.20 (50%)

Which muscles ofthe left leg are flexors? Which of the following combinations correctly identifies the types of neurons to
A.1 and2 8. 1 and3 C.2and4 D.3and4 which X and Y belong?
X y
2015 Q.20 (67%) A. (I) (3)
B. (21 ( 1)
Directions: C. (2) (3)
Questions 20 and 21 refer to the diagram D. (3) (2)
below, which shows an elbow joint and its\
associated structures: 2018 Q.21 (58%)
Another neural pathway allows the man to feel the tapping action. Which of the
following parts should this pathway connect to?
Which of the above structures are elastic?
A. P and R only 8. P and S only C. Q and R only D. Q and S only A. Cerebellum
B. Spina cord
C. Cerebral cortex
D. Medulla oblongata

102
 1Viun::mcm in human�.' P.�

Average Easy

2019 Q.20 (6j%) 2012 Q.7 (76%)

Directions: Question l 9 to 20 refer to Diagrnm I and Diagram 11 bdow. Oiugrnm l !n a movable joint, the tissue holding the bones together is called
shows a leg and its associated muscles while Diagram !I shov,·s a woman
practicing yoga. A. ligament.
B. cm1i!age.
Diagram! Dfrigram if
C. muscle.
D. tendon.
joint A

X 2019 Q.19 (84%)

Directions: Question l 9 to 20 referto Diagram I and Diagram II be]o,,,v. Diagram l
ffl\,!!)---joint B
shows a leg and its associated muscles while Diagram II shows a woman
y
practicing yoga.

Diagrriml Diagram!!

Which of the following combinations correctly indicates the state ofmuscks X and Y
joint A
when the woman is maintaining the yoga posture shovm in Diagram JJ?

X y
[Q,,,Jr---joinL B
A. contracted contracted
contracted y
B. relaxed
C. rela.."<ed contracted
D. relaxed relaxed
Which of the following combinations correctly identifies joints A and B in
Diagram I?

Joint A Joint B
A. Hinge joint Hinge joint
B. Hinge joint Ball and socket joint
C. Ball and socket joint Ball and socket joint
D. Ball and socket joint Hinge joint

J(J.; 105
Answers DSE M.C. Questions - Homeostasis
(sort by difficulty)
Challenging Challenging
2015
21 [DJ Average

Average 2019 Q.18 (61%)

2014 2015 2018 2019 Which of the following organs serves both endocrine and exocrine functions?
34 [DJ 20 [CJ 19 [BJ 20 [BJ
35 [BJ 20 [DJ A. Pancreas
B. Pituitary
Easy C. Oesophagus
2012 2019 D. Adrenal gland
7 [AJ 19 [DJ

2013 Q.33 (79%)

A person has not taken any food for 24 hours. Which of the following will increase in
concentration in blood?

A. glucagon
B. glucose
C. glycogen
D. insulin

106
2020 Q.J J

31. The gr:tphs bck,w show the cll<mgt.--s in blood i;Juc()'SC level .ind thf' blood in�l.l!in h:vel oftl1M, ·1ml.h·iclLJals Answers
;itkr consuming a su.;<tr) drir1k:

!J'.: t�
Jmlfridual 1 Challenging

�
Average
2-€ 2019 2020
" 0
JS [A] 31 [DJ
o 30 r,o (}O 120
Time rmin'i

Easy
2013
33 [Al

_,o 60 (j,() J20

Tim,; (tn!OI

/Jtdividmil 1 J,1dil•i(/uul 2 lr,dfridlllll J

"C
A No diabcu:s
Typi:. l diabctc:»
Typ¢ 2 <liabdCS
Type l lihdxws
T�11� 2 di;:ih�:es
No diabcn.:s
Typ<: 2 ,Jwbetcs
No J1;ibc1c�
T_yp,: i di:1bctc�
[) Tyyic l diabetes No di:1be!""- ·ryr.::: di.�bctc�

mo
 DSE M.C. Questions - Biodiversity Average
(sort by difficulty)
Challenging 20ll Q.2! (54%)
Which of the following combinations shows the correct information about Eubacteria
2014 Q.15 (35%) and Protista?
Which of the organisms below belong to the domain Eukarya? Eubacteria Protista
(I) Yeast A. bigger in size smaller in size
(2) Amoeba B. absence of cell wall presence of cell wall
(3) Mouse C. presence of true nucleus absence of true nucleus
A.(l)and(2)only B.(l)and(3)only C.(2)and(3)only D.(l),(2)and(3) D. absence of mitochondria presence of mitochondria

20!4Q.l8(3!%) Directions: Questions 14 and 15 refer to the information below. Five new species
Directions:Questions 17 and 18 refer to the following photographs oft-.vo different fish: of eubacteria were discovered in Antarctic ice core samples. The
Fish X Fish Y nucleotide sequences of the gene that codes for an essential protein of
these nevv species were compared. The table below shows the number
or nucleotide differences between the species:
2016 Q.14 (68%)
Number of nucleotide dirTerences
Species p Q R s T
p . 4 12 II 22
Which of the following allow further study of the phylogenetic relationship between Q . 12 11 19
the two fish? R . 4 22
( l) Compare the amino acid sequences of their fimctional proteins s . 22
(2) Compare their internal body structure T .
(3) Compare their living habitats and behaviours Which of the following evolutionary trees best illustrates the phylogenetic
A. (!) and (2)only relationship of the five species?
B. (I) and (3) only
A. B.
C. (2) and (3) only
D. (!), (2) and (3)

C. D.
Average Easy

2016 Q.15 (51%) 20!4Q.17(8!%)

Which of the following cell components can be found in these species? Directions:Questions 17 and 18 refer to the follo,.,ving photographs of two different fish:
FishX Fish Y
A. nucleus
B. cell wall
C. chloroplast
D. mitochondrion

2018 Q.9 (41%)

Which ofthe following statements provides the best reason for clac;sifying unicellular Using the dichotomous key below to identify the fish:
organisms into domain Bacteria and Archaea? la Both eyes on the top of the head.. 2
lb One eye on each side of the head.. 3
A. Archaea are more ancient than bacteria
B. Archaea are smaller than bacteria 2a Has lon g whip-like tail.. Aetobatus narinari
C. The DNA seq uences ofarchaea are distinct from those of bacteria 2b Has short blunt tail Bothus mancus
D. The compositions of the cell wall and cell membrane of archaca arc different
from those of bacteria 3a Has spots on its surface .. 4
3b Docs not have spots on its body surface.. 5
2018 Q.32 (64%)
Organisms P and Q are found in the same local habitat. Their population sizes have 4a Has chin whiskers.. Pseudupeneus macu/atus
continued to grow in the last few years. Which of the following statern�nts best 4h Does not have chin whiskers ....................... ... Sphoerosides spengleri
describes organisms P and Q?
.5a Has stripe� on it� boJy surface Holocentnrs rufus
A. They are heterotrophs. .5b Does not haYe stripes on its body surface.. Parapriar..:anthus guentheri
B. They are top predators_
C. They have different niches. FishX Fish Y
D. They have different predators, A. Buthus mancus Pseudupeneus macu/atus
B. Bot/ms mancus Holocentrt/S rufus
C. Aetobatus narinari Parapriacanthus guentheri
D. Aetobah/S narinari Sphoerosides speng/eri
 Answers

2018 Q.14 (91%) Challenging

Caterpillar fungus is kind of Chinese herbal medicine. When the spores of this fungus 2014
land on the larvae of moths, the spores will germinate inside the body o fthe larvae and 15 [DJ
grow out of their heads. as shown in the photograph below: I 8 [A]

Average
2013 2016 2018
21 [Dl 14 [BJ 9 [CJ
15 [BI 32 [CJ

rc:nai:1,; ,i:·
;.1:-v;i.l t'ody Easy
2014 2018
17 I Bl 14 [ AJ

Which of the following best describes the role of this fungus?

A. Parasite
B. Predator
C. Producer
D. Consumer

114
 DSE M.C. Questions - Ecosystems Average
(sort by difficulty)
Challenging 20l4Q.31 {51%)
The graph below shows the changes in the populations of two organisms that exhibit a
2018 Q.5 (37%) predator-prey relationship in a habitat:
The diagrams below show the pyramids of numbers and biomass of a food chain: 160
140 _p
Pyramili ofnumhers -1l 120
--Q
100
80
.s
t 60
40
20
Which ofthe following is most likely to be the producer in this food drnin?
0
1845 1855 1865 1875 1885 1895 1905 1915 1935
A. Rice Year
B. Trees
C. Grass Which of the following statements about the identity of the organism is correct?
D. Phytoplankton A. Pis the predator because its number fluctuates more than that ofQ.
B. Pis tJk! predator because its lowest number is lower than that ofQ.
Average C. Q is the predator because its number fluctuates less than that of P.
D. Q is the predator because its highest number is lower than that of P.
2014 Q.30 (69%)
Some environmental protection groups claim that the vegetarian diet is good for our 2014 Q.33 (45%)
environment. This is probably because Which of the following processes releases nitrogen-containing compounds fi-om
A. vegetables grow faster than animals. organisms back into the environment?
B. it protects endangered species as less animals are killed for food. A. Nitrification
C. growing vegetables can produce oxygen but rearing animals only 8. Decomposition
consumes oxygen. C. Dc:nitrification
D. it reduces the emission of carbon dioxide associated ,vi th rearing animals D. Nitrogen fixation
for food.
Average Average

2015 Q.31 (58%) 2016Q.34(47%)

Directions: Questions 30 and 31 refer to the diagram below, which shows the Symbiotic bacteria found in the root nodules of bean plants are able to convert
conversion of some nitrogen-containing substances in nature: A. nitrili::: ions to nitrate ions.
B. nitrogen gas to nitrate ions.
Nitrogen gas C. organic nitrogenous compounds to nitrate ions.
in air
D. nitrogen gas to ammonium ions.

2017 Q.12 (71%)

Ammonium compounds
in soil Nitrates in soil The following graph shows the predicted change in biodiversity during the

)
processes of primary and secondary succession in an ecosystem:

Protein in
organisms .£
l'.?
Which oft.he following processes does !lot require the action of bacteria? .2:
-0
A. I 0
B. 2
C. 3
D. 4
Time
Which ofthe following combinations is correct?
2016 Q.30 (61%) Type of succession Explanation
The following is a food web found in grassland: A. I is primary succession. A climax community is reached in I.
B. I is secondary succession. I has a higher biodiversity than II at the
beginning.
C. II is primary succession. Pioneer community is involved in II.
D. II is secondary succession. II shows a slow increase in biodiversity.

grass

2
mouse

If the energy input for each food chain is the same, the transfer of energy between two
trophic levels is the smallest in
A 8. 2 C. 3 D. 4

119
Average Average

Directions: Questions 32-33 refer to the diagram below. which shov,'s some
processes in thl'.: nitrogen in nature: Direction.\·: Questions 34 and 35 refer to the diagram belovv, which shows the flow
of energy among organisms found in a grassland:
c;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;-;;;;,1----'--�''--·-
organic residues in soil '-��_,,, ammonium compounds i11 soil --
nLt:-ilc, -
in ,uil ,

nitrog�tl in nir nitrntc.� 111 Sr>il

!�
prol�in5 in animal� �------, proteins in plants T +--- S ---Q

2017 Q.32 (56%)

Which of the following combinations correctly matches the microorganisms involved
in processes 3 and 6?
3 6
A. denitrifying bacteria nitrogen-fixing bacteria 2017 Q.34 (62%)
B. nitrogen-fixing bacteria fungi Which ofthe follo'.\r:ing statements correctly describe(s) the above organisms?
C. fungi denitrifying bacteria ( 1) S is a heterotroph.
D. denitrifying bacteria fungi (2) Pis the secondary consumer.
(3) Q has the largest total biomass
2017 Q.33 (62%) A. (l) only B. (2) only C. (I) and (3) only D. (2) and (3) only
Which ofthe following processes does not require the action of bacteria?
A. I B. 2 C. 4 D. 5 2017 Q.35 (56%)
If there is a decomposer in this group oforganisms, it is most likely to be
A. Q B. R C. S D. T

2019 Q.29 (68%)

If a student wants to find out whether the distribution of plant species is affected by
the slope of a hillside, which of the following sampling methods should be used?

A. Set up a line transect along the hillside and record the plant species that touch
the line.
G. Set up a line transect around the hillside and record the plant species that touch
the line.
C. Randum!y place- quadrats along the hillside and record the plant species within
tho: quodrat
D. Randomly place quadrab around the hillside and record the plant species
within thr:: quadrnt.
Average Easy

2019 Q.33 (70%) Directions: Questions l 6 and 17 refer to the following diagram, which shows the
Directions: Questions 33 and 34 refer to the diagram below, which shows some flow of carbon in an ecosystem:
processes of the nitrogen cycle:

.'\nim.:tb 2
n.itro,:;�g:i.s
I
4 Carbon ,fo,-.:i<lt in
Humus the a\1110.�phen:

ficcesfromc.ittlc

2012 Q.16 (78%)

Which of the following combinations correctly shows the process indicated by labels
1,4 and 5?

_//"
L--'""'='�n=·•=m�T __r-· , ammonium compounds
:_

b:lctcria Q and R
I 4 5
,/absO!pUOn A. respiration photosynthesis decomposition
-✓
nitrogen-contiining cornpouads - B. photosynthesis respiration decomposition
Which of the following statements about the bacteria sho\\'II in the diagram is correct? C. photosynthesis decomposition respiration
D. decomposition photosynthesis respiration
A. P belongs to parasitic bacteria.
B. Q belongs to nitrifying bacteria
2012Q.17(80%)
C. R belongs to nitrogen-fixing bacteria.
D. S belongs to denitrifying bacteria. Saprophytes are involved in process
A. I. B. 2. C. 3. D. 5.
 Easy

201; Q.30 (79%) 2018 Q.JJ (77%)

Directions: Questions 30 and 31 refer to the diagram below, which shmvs the Which of the following statements about primary succession and secondary
conversion of some nitrogen-containing substances in nature: succession is correct?

A. Primary succession is always followed by secondary succession.

Nitrogen gas B. Primary succession always starts with a barren area while secondary
in air succession docs not.
C. Secondary succession always ends with a climax community while primary
succession does not.
D. Secondnry succession ah-vays ends with a clima,
Ammonium compounds
in soil Nitrates in soil 2Ul9Q34(.81%)

)
Directions: Questions 33 and 34 refer to the diagram below. which shO\VS some
processes of the nitrogen cycle:

Protein in
organisms

Process 3 is

, - T- --- - -�·· ,--------"

•·
A. nitrification. faeces from cattle

B. denitrification.
C. decomposition.
D. nitrogen fixation.

bactt:rlwn T �ammonium compounds

2018 Q.6 (89%)
�---� I 1-w\oodR j
i
Protecting sharks in the wild is important for maintaining the ecological balance of // afthe legume
.,,/°absorption
the marine ecosystem because /"
uitmgen--.:onraining compou,m!s -

A. Sharks are an endangered species Which of the following bacteria has a similar role to fungi in the cycling of materials?
8. Shark fin is a popular dish for banquets
C. The dead bodies of sharks are an important food source for decomposers A. Q.
D. Sharks are to p predators that regulate the population sizes of other consumers B. R.
C. s.
D. T.
2020 Q.16

16. Australia has some plant rnld animal species whkh caimot be found elsC'wherc ii, the world. Which of the 2020 Q.34
following is likely to be the key factor that led to the occurrence of these unique plant and animal species
inAusttalia?
34. \Vhich of the following factors contributes least tci the variations shown?
A. isolation
B. muration A. the height oftbe parental plants
C. competition
D. c-nvlronmcntal stress B. the: light intensity in the environment
C. the independcnl assortment of chromosomes
D. the oxygen concentration in the environment
2020 Q.32

32. The following groph shows lhc change in the populations of organisms X ilild Y living in the same habirat;

',
...' I ,,,-......... \
\
, ,,....-...... \
\
, ,,, .... y
\ , \. I ' I
' I \ I \ I
\. I '\ I \ I
\ / ,,.,
__
...... .,.,.'
/ \
... ...........,,.
...
"\
......... __,.,.
Time

Which of the following is the most likely ecological relationship between organisms X and Y?

A. predation
B. mutualism
C. competition
D. commcnsalism

2020 Q.J3

Directions; Questions 33 and 34 refer to the following graph. which shows the variations in the height of a
cermin type ofplfUlt'.

50
short tall
40

0
� 3
.il 00

JO

JO 30 50 70 90 110
Height (cm)

33. Whicb of the following conclusions can be drawn from the above graph?

A. The shon and tl.ll plililts arc of two different species.

B. The two traits. short and tall, arc controlled by a pair of alleles.
C. More samples should be Llkeri to cover the fill! raoge of heights.
D, The height o!the plunls displays Lhc properties of continuous and discontinuous v.rriutions.

127
Answers DSE M.C. Questions - Photosynthesis
(sort by difficulty)
Challenging Challenging
2018
5 [CJ 2019 Q.7 (31%)
Direction : Questions 6 and 7 refer to Diagram I and Diag ram II below. Diagram I
Average shows a set-up prepared by a student to study the conditions for
2014 2015 2016 2017 2019 photosynthesis. Diagram II shows the leaf surface ofa variegated leafX
30 [DJ 31 [BJ 30 [AJ 12 [BJ 29 [AJ before the experiment.
31 [DJ 34 [DJ 32 [ DJ 33 [BJ
33 [BJ 33 [CJ Dfagramll

34 [BJ
35 [AJ

Easy
2012 2015 2013 2019 2020 �la;s honte
16 [CJ 30 [CJ 6 [DJ 34 [CJ 16[AJ
32[BJ
17 [CJ 33 [BJ 33[0] dest;1rched plam
34[DI with v;1riegW kaws

How many indepmdent variables were being studied in the experiment?

A. l 8. 2 C. 3 D. 4

Average
2012 Q.23 (68%)
Which orthe following descriptions about the role oflight in photosynthesis are correct?
(I) Activation of chlorophyll provid(:)S high energy electrons.
(2) Photolysis of water releases oxygen for use in carbon fixation.
(3) Photolysis of water releases hydrogen for the formation of NAOPH.

A. (1) and (2) only B. (1) and (3) only C.(2) and(3)only D.(I), (2)and(3)

2013 Q.8 (42%)

Which of the follov-:ing processes in photosynthesis require energy input from ATP?
( 1) fixation of carbon dioxide and the formation of 3-C compound
(2) reduction of 3-C compound leading to the formation of glucose
(3) regeneration of carbon dioxide acceptor
A.(l)and(2)only B.(l)and(3)only C.(2)and(3)only D.(1),(2) and(3)

129
 PhoLOS) nthe;;is / P.2 PhoLosymhc-sis / P.3

Average Average
Directions:
Questions 6 to 8 refer to the 2015 Q.4 (57%)
diagram below, which shows Directions: Questions 4 and 5 refer to the schematic diagram below, which shows
a set-up used to determine the the structures of a chloroplast:
rate of photosynthesis of a
green plant. During the study,
the position of the plunger
p
remained unchanged.

2014 Q.6 (70%)

Q
Based on the results, what was the rate of photosynthesis of this plant?
A. 0.6 ml oxygen released per hour
8. 0.3 mL oxygen released per hour
C. 0.6 ml carbon dioxide absorbed per hour Regeneration of the carbon dioxide acceptor takes place at
D. 0.3 mL carbon dioxide absorbed per hour A.P. B.Q C.R. D.S.

2014 Q.7 (74%) 20l5Q.12(60%) Set.u A Scl•11p B

The rate obtained was lower than the actual rate of photosynthesis of the plant. Which Directions:
cbemleal thai--l--��--1--- funnel -----<
of the following is the most probable reason for this? Questions 11 and 12 refer to the .ibsorbs �rbon
lfl:--t-sroppcr ----:',1f;!_
dio:dde
A. The plant also carried out respiration during the study. following experiment. A student
B. The plant also carried out transpiration during the study. put two similar plants in darkness box that
h!ocks light
C. The air temperature might have increased during the study. for 24 hours and then placed them
D. The atmospheric pressure might have decreased during the study. in the following set-ups to conduct
an investigation on photosynthesis: chemic.1! lhat
absorbs carbon
2014 Q.8 (47%) dioxide

Which of the following set-ups can be used as a control for the above study to find out After the iodine test, the leaf taken fiom the set-up A was brown while the leaf taken
the actual rate of photosynthesis? from set-up B was blue�black. Which of the following conclusions can be drawn from
the results?

'J@Pi'
,,1 ""
pr,,otbo�

0-.j'. ("
A. Light is necessary for photosynthesis.
B. Carbon dioxide is necessary for photosynthesis.
ci..;wx • :
C. Both light and carbon dioxide are necessary for photosynthesis.
D. D. Photosynthesis occurs in the plant in set-up 8 but not in setwup A.
Average Average

2016 Q.10 (67%) 2019 Q.2 l44%)

Directions: Questions 9 and 10 refer to the diagram below, which shows the rate Directions: Questions 1 and 2 refer to the electron micrograph below, which shows
of photosynthesis ofa plant under dilforent conditions: a chloroplast of a plant ce!!:

Carbon dioxide with radioactively labelled oxygen was

provided to the plant cell for photosynthesis.
Radioactivity can be detected in

2:'.FC, 0,04% carbon ·dfoxide

A. Oxygen produced at Q.
B. O:-...')'gen produced at R.
(S·'C. 0.04%.:aihonilioxidc C. Glucose produced at Q.
R
D. Glucose produced at R.
Light lmen,;i1y
2019 Q.4 (49%)
Which of the following descriptions best accounts for the higher rate of The graph belov,r shows the changes in the relative concentrations of a 3-C compound
photosynthesis of Pas compared to Q? and a 5-C compound (carbon dioxide acceptor) in the Calvin cycle in green plant cells
which have been kept in bright light and then in darkness.
A All conditions are optimum in P. Light
B. There is a faster diffusion of carbon dioxide into the leaves.
C. More carbon dioxide can be used as raw matcri::il for photosynthesis.
D. Carbon dioxide concentration in Pis much higher than that in the
atmosphere.

2017 Q.6 (73%) 5-C compound 1

-----------------)
Which of the: following reactions in photosynthesis tnki.:s place nn the lhylakoid
i,,\
membrane? JOO 200 300 400 500 600 700
Time(�)
A regeneration of carbon dioxide acceptor
B. reduction of3-C compound
Which ofthc following is not a reason ·why the concentration of the 5-C compound
C. photolysis of water decreased in 1he dark?
D. carbon dioxide fixation A. The 5-C compound ,vas converted to the 3-C compound.
B. The 5-C compound combined ,vith carbon dioxide to fonn glucose directly.
C. Regeneration of 5-C compound stopped because there was no ATP from
photochemical reactions.
D. Regeneration of 5-C compound stopped because there was no NADPH from
photochemical reactions.
Average

2019 Q.5 (45%)

The photographs on the right beJo,..v show leaves taken from different parts of the 2015 Q. l I (96%) Set-up B

-+--�i---1-
Set-11 A

canopy Directions:
chemical !har, funnel: ----­
of the same tree. (Note: The photographs are of the same magnification. Questions 11 and 12 refer to the absorbs carbon
dioxide ffl'---1- Stopper ----,:Jll fl
LJ'a,·afrom d•e UJ{' of!he ,;anuP)· follmving experiment. A student put
two similar plnnts in darkness for 24 boxiliat
block..s ligh.t
��� hours and then placed them in the
fo110\ving set-ups to conduct an
investigation on photosynthesis: chemical th.at
absorbs carbon
dioxide

At the end of the experiment leaves were taken from the plants in set-ups A and B for
the iodine test. Arrange the following steps in the correct order:
Which of the following is the most likely explanation for the differences between the (I) Put the leaf in boiling water for 5 minutes.
leaves taken from the two parts of the canopy? (2) Add iodine solution to the leaf
(3) Put the leaf in hot alcohol solution for 5 minutes.
A. The leaves from the top of the canopy are smaller because they do not receive (4) Put the leaf in water at room temperature for a few seconds.
sufficient water for grm.vth.
B. The leaves from the top of the canopy are smaller because they can reduce water A. (!), (2), (3), (4) 8. (]), (3), (4), (2)
loss due to transpiration. C. (2), (3), (4), (I) D. (4), (3), (2), (I)
C. The leaves from the bottom of the canopy are larger because they can store more
food from photosynthesis. 2016 Q.9 (79%)
D. The leaves from the bottom ofthe canopy are larger because they can collect light Directions: Questions 9 and 10 refer to the diagram below, which shows the rate
escaped through the top of the canopy. of photosynthesis of a plant under different conditions:

ZS'C, 0.04% carbon dio:,;ide

-Q

�-"--------------�➔
Ligh1 in1cm,i1y

The f'actor(s) that detennine(s) the difference in the values ofx andy in the diagram
is/arc
A. temperature. B. light intensity.
C. carbon dioxide concentration. D. light intensity and temperature.

13.\
 Answers

Challenging
2019Q.1 (83%) 2019
Directions: Questions 1 and 2 refer to the electron micrograph bdO\'\'. which shows 7 [CJ
a chloroplast of a plant cell;
Average
2012 2013 2014 2015 2016 2017 2019
,,
_J [BI 8 [C] 6 [A] 4 [DJ 10 [CJ 6 [CJ 2 [D]
7 [AJ 12 [DJ 4 [BJ
8 [BJ 5 [DJ

Easy
2015 2016 2019
During photosynthesis, light is captured at 11 9 1
[s J [ AJ [BJ
A.P. B.Q. C.R. D.S.
6 [AJ
2019 Q.6 (77%)
Direction : Questions 6 and 7 refer to Diagram I and Diagram ll below. Diagram I
shows a set-up prepared by a student to study the conditions for
photosynthesis. Diagram II shows the leaf surface of a variegated leaf X
before th.: experiment.
!Jlogr,mfl

de,wc4.Jpl""t
wi,hv,.ics•t<O lo.,1,:0

After leaving the set-up under sunlight for several hours. iodine test was carried out
on kafX. Which of the following diagrams correctly shows the n!sutls?

'
Key· Obrown
Ill bluef>lack

A.

"'"" covered -- --
--
Oylhzcor< {__

13i
 DSE M.C. Questions. Respiration Average
(sort by difficulty)
Challenging 2016 Q.26(65%)
Which of the fo\10\ving processes in aerobic respiration release NADH?
( 1) glycolysis
Average (2) Krebs cycle
(3) oxidative phosphorylation
2013 Q.10 (67%)
Which ofthe following combination best describes the process involved in A. (1) and (2) only 8.( 1) and (3) only C. (2) and (3) only D.(1),(2)and (J)
respiration?
2017Q.7(58%)
Oxygen is required Carbon dioxide is released Which of the following combinations correctly matches the reaction in aerobic
A. Conversion ofpyruvate to acetyl CoA Glycolysis respiration with the location where it takes place?
8. Conversion ofpyruvate to acetyl CoA Krebs Cycle Reaction in aerobic respiration Location
C. Oxidative phosphorylation Glycolysis
A. regeneration ofNAD cytoplasm
D. Oxidative phosphorylation Krebs Cycle
8. production of carbon dioxide cytoplasm
2014 Q.14(45%) C. conversion ofpyruvate to acetyl•coA rnitochondrion
Which of the following processes produce ATP? D. conversion oftriose phosphate to pyruvate mitochondrion
(I) Glycolysis
(2) Krebs cycle 2018 Q.11 (69%)
(3) Conversion ofpyrnvate to lactic acid Which of the following processes takes place at the inner membrane of mitochondria?

A. ( 1) and (2) only A. Glycolysis

8. (1) and (3) only B. Conversion ofpymvate to acetyl CoA
C. (2) and (3) only C. Krebs cycle
D. ( 1). (2) and (3) D. Oxidative phosphorylation

2015 Q.6 (53%) 2018 Q.26 (50%)

Which of the following combinations correctly compares the aerobic respiration and AA.er vigorous exercise, the blood lactic acid concentration of an athlete increases.
anaerobic respiration of muscle cells? Which or the fo1lov,·ing ,.vord equation correctly shows the process that leads to the
fonnation ol'lactic acid?
Aerobic respiration Anaerobic respiration
A. occurs only when oxygen is present occurs only when oxygen is absent A. Glucose__,,. lactic acid
8. produces more NADH produces less NADH B. Glucose _,_ lactic acid+ water
C. glycolysis takes place no glycolysis C. Glucose _,. lactic acid+ carbon dioxide
D. takes place only inside the mitochondria takes place only in the cytoplasm D. Glucose+ oxygen __,,. lactic acid+ carbon dioxide
 Average Answers

2019 Q.3 (61%) Challenging

Which of the following process(es) in the respirntory pathways rckuse(s) carbon
dioxide') Average
2013 2()14 2015 20]6 20!7 2018 2019
( l) Oxidative phosphorylation 10 ID] 14 I A J 6 [BJ 26 [ A J 7 [CJ 11 [ D] 3 [BJ
(2) Reactions in the Krebs cycle
(3) Conversion of glucose to pyruvate 26 [Al

A. (l) only Easy

B. (2) only
C. (l) and (3) only
2020
D. (2) and (3) only
4 [A]
5 [BJ

2020 Q.4
4, Which of the following descriptions of anaerobic respiration in muscles is correct?

A It involves glycolysis,
B. It produces lactic acid and carbon dJoxide.
C, It takes place in the matrix of mitochondria,
D, lt takes place on the inner membrane of mitochondria

2020 Q.5

.5. Which of the following combinatioru correctly matches rhc stages of cellular respiratio□ and the
metabolites produced?

Stqge lr/etu/Julite prmlur::,:d

A. Giycoly:,is acetyl-CoA
8. Glycolysis ATP
C. Krebs Cycle NAO
D. Krebs Cycle pyruvutc

141
 DSE M.C. Questions - Health and diseases Average
(sort by difficulty)
Challenging 2012 Q.35 (71%)
Which of the following belongs to humoral immune response?
2015 Q.32 (38%)
Directions: Questions 32 and 33 refer to the table below, which shows the results of A. blood clotting
blood tests for the presence of antigens and antibodies of hepatitis B in B. production of antibodies
four individuals: C. phagocytosis of pathogens
D. production of memory T cells
Individual l Individual 2 Individual 3 Individual 4
Anti ens ofhe atitis B Ne arive Positive N ative Positive
Antibodies ofhe aritis B Ne arive Ne ative Positive Posft:fve 2012 Q.36 (70%)
After injury, the wound usually becomes swollen due to
Which individual(s) would you recommend for vaccination against hepatitis B?
A. accumulation of bacteria at the wound.
A. 1 only B. accumulation of tissue fluid at the wound.
B. 4 only C. increased phagocytosis at the wound.
C. 1 and 2 only D. increased blood flow to the capillaries around the wound.
D. 1 and 3 only
2014 Q.32 (61%)
2015 Q.36 (34%) Infants can obtain antibodies from breast feeding. Which ofthe following combinations
Which of the following components of blood are involved in forming a blood clot? correctly describes this type of immunity in infants?
(I) Blood platelets
(2) Red blood cells Type of in11nu11i�v Explanation
(3) White blood cells A. active the antibodies are produced from white blood cells
8. active the antibodies attack pathogens bearing f0reign antigens
A. (I) and (2) only C. passive the antibodies do not trigger the production of memory cells
8. ( 1) and (3) only D. passive the antibodies vvork only when there is re-entry o fthe same pathogen
C. {2) and (3) only
D. (1), (2)and (3) 2015 Q.34 (47%)
Directions: Qutstions 34 and 35 refer to the list of factors sho\.vn below.
(I) Smoking
(2) Family history
(3) Ovenveight
(4) Radiation

Which of the above factors can be controlled by lifestyle adjustment?

A. (1) and (3) only B. (2) and (4) only C. (I), (2) and (3) only D. (I), (3) and (4) only

14J
Average

2019 Q.35 (48%) 2013 Q.34 (81%)

Type II diabetic patients may feel dizzy after prolonged exercise. Which of the Which ofthe follovdng information concerning the characteristics of insulin-dependent
following is the most likely explanation for this? diabetes and non-insulin-dependent diabetes is correct?

A. Their blood glucose level has dropped to too low a kvel because they do not Insulin-dependent diabetes Non-insulin-dependent diabetes
have enough stored glycogen to replenish the glucose level. A. accounts for the majority of accounts for a small portion
8. Their blood glucose level has dropped to too low a level because they do not diabetic cases of diabetic cases
have enough g!ucagon to stimulate the conwrsion of glycogen to glucose. B. is mainly due to an unhealthy lifestyle is mainly due to hereditary factors
C. Their blood glucose level has risen to too high a level because they keep C. requires regular injections of insulin may be controlled through proper diet
losing water during exercise_ D. body fails to respond to insulin body produces a IO\-V level of insulin
D. Their blood glucose kvel has risen to too high a kvel because they do not
have enough insulin to stimulate the conversion ofglucosc to glycogen. 20]5 Q.33 (80%)
Directions: (_)ucstions 32 and 33 refer to the table below, which shows the results of
2019 Q.36 (66%) blood tests for the presence of antigens and antibodies of hepatitis B in
Antibodies are produced by four individuals:

Individual 1 Individual 2 Individual 3 Individual 4

A. Memory 8 cells. , Anti t:ns ofhe a1itis B Negative Positive Nea ative Positive
8. Memory T cdls Antibodies ofhe atitis B Nega1ive Ne ative Positive Positive
C. Specialised B cells.
D. Specialized T ce!ls. Hepatitis B is transmitted through
A. insects.
B. droplets.
C. body fluid.
2013 Q.32 {47%) D. skin contact.
Which of the following descriptions about antibiotics is correct?
2015 Q.35 (81%)
A. Antibiotics can engulf pathogens. Directions: Questions 34 and 35 refer to the list of factors shown below.
B. Antibiotics can be produced by fungi. (I) Smoking
C. Antibiotics can bind to specific antigens. (2) Family history
D. Antibiotics can be produced by lymphocytes. (3) Ovenveight
(4) Radiation

Which of the above are risk factors for coronary heart disease?
A.(l)and(3)only B.(l).(2)and(3)only
C. (]). (21 and (4) only D. (2). (3) and (4) only

145
 2020 Q.30
30, Which oflhc following provides immunity to the human body?
Easy
A. phagocytosis
B. inflammation
2017 Q.36 (78%) C. memory cell
D. fonnation of blood clots
Which of the following combinations correctly matches the type of diabetes with its
description?
Type of diabetes Description
A. Insulin-dependent (type I) Heredity is the major cause.
B. Insulin-dependent (type II) Blood insulin remains high.
C. Non-insulin-dependent (type II) Blood glucose revel remains low even
after meal
D. Non-insulin-dependent (type II) Blood glucose level v.1 ill drop significantly
after insulin injection.

2018Q.10(78%)
Which of the following statements best explain why vaccination against flu is
administered annually?

A. The tlu virus is constantly mutating

B. The antibodks against flu virus only last for one year
C. The flu vaccine is not very effective because it is made from a weakened virus
D. When memory cells encounter the tlu vaccine again, a secondary response is
triggered

2020 Q.29

29. Which of the following combinations of causative <1genls and ways of transmission of infectious diseases
is correct?
hifecJioll.'i disease Citusative age1tt Way oftrann11ls.sio11
A. cholera virus food
B. cholera bacteri11n1 body fluid
C. hepatitis B virus body fluid
D. hepatitis B bacterium food
Answers DSE M.C. Questions - Basic genetics and Molecular genetics
(sort by difficulty)
Challenging Challenging
2015
32 [AJ 2012Q.19(31%)
36 [DJ T1te tRNA anti codon for the sequence AGT on the coding strand of DNA is
A. UCA. B. AGU. C. TCA. D. AGT.
Average
2012 2014 2015 2019 2013 Q.11 (35%)
35 [BJ 32 [CJ 34 [DJ 35 [ AJ Which ofthe following statements about codons is correct?
36 [BJ 36 [CJ A. A codon may consist of bases A, C, G or T.
B. A codon is a triplet of bases on transfer RNA.
Easy C. Most amino acids are coded by more than one codon.
2013 2015 2017 2018 2020 D. All codons code for amino acids.
32 [BJ 33 [CJ 36 [AJ 10 [AJ 29 [CJ
34 [CJ 35 [BJ
30 [CJ 2014 Q.11 (31%)
Directions: Questions l 0 and 11 refer to the fol!owing two crosses of fiuit flies. In a
fruit flies, male are the heterogametic sex (XY) and the wing shape
(normal wing or cut wing) is controlled by a single gene.
Cross I Cross II
Pan:nts Normal wing female x Cut wing male Cut wing female x Normal wing male
12 normal wing females l l nomrnl wing females
I I nornrnl wing males 11 cut wing males

F2 7 I nonnal wing females 32 normal wing females

34 nonnal \Ving males 33 cut wing females
35 cut wing males 36 11om1al wing males
38 cut wing males
From Cross IL vve can conclud.: that
A. the gene for the wing shape is located on the X-chromosome because the
cut wing phenotype was passed from the female parent to the Fi males.
B. the law of independent assortment was demonstrated because new
phenotypes, including normal wing females and cut wing males, were
found in F2.
C. the normal wing male parent is heterozygous because four combinations
of phenotypes were observed in h
D. the gene foT the wing shape is located on an autosome because a ratio
1:1:1:1 wasshovro.inF2
 13as!c gcncLics ani.l :Vlokculnr genetics/ P.2 B,isie genetics ::mi.I iV!olccular gcneLics / P.3

Challenging Average

2014 Q.19 (14%) 2012Q.15 (63%)

Which ofthe following is not an application of DNA fingerprinting? Identical twins have the same
A. Forensic science ( 1) genotype.
B. Screening for genetic diseases (2) traits involving continuous variations.
C. Sequencing of the human genome (]) traits involving discontinuous variations.
D. Identification of Chinese medicines A. ( l) and (2) only B. ( 1) and (3) only
C. (2) and (3) only D. (l),(2)and(3)
2016 QA (33%)
Which of the following parts of the nucleotide make up the backbone of a Directions: Questions 15 to 17 refer to the pedigree below. which shmvs the
polynucleotide strand? inheritance ofa certain trait controlled by a pair of alleles located on an
autosome {i.e. non-sex chromosome):
A. sugar and base
B. sugar and phosphate
0 normal fom'J.lc
C. base and phosphate

■
• Jffcct�d fcm;i.k
D. base, sugar and phosphate
F.?.
D normJI rn.:ilc

affected mole
2018 Q.12 (39%)
F)
Directions: Questions 12 and 13 refer to the information below. Kathy had two pure­ 4

bred cats, one had long white fur while other had short black fur. It is 2013 Q.15 (47%)
kno-wn that fur colour are controlled by two different genes respectively. Which cross{es) can be used to deduce which phenotype is dominant?
The two cats gave birth to four kittens which had long black fur. A. cross Y only B. cross Z only C. crosses X and Y only D. crosses X and Z only

Which of the following conclusions can be dra-wn based on the above case? 2013 Q.16 (55%)
(1) Long fur is dominant over short fur What are the probable genotypes of individuals l and 2?
(2) The four kittens have the same genotype for fur length and fur colour J11dividual I Individual 2
(3) The genes controlling fur length and fur colour are located on different A. homozygous homozygous
chromosomes B. homozygous homozygous or heterozygous
C. homozygous or heterozygous homozygous
A. ( 1) and (2) only D. homozygous or heterozygous homozygous or heterozygous
8. (1)and (3) only
C. (2) and (3) only 2013 Q.17(71%)
D. (1). (2) and (3) If individual 3 and 4 are twins, which ofthe following conclusions can be dra-wn?
A. They are developed from the same fertilized egg.
B. They are developed from different fertilized eggs.
C. They are genetically different for characters displaying continuous variation.
D. They are genetically different for characters displaying discontinuous variation.

151
Average Average

2014 Q.10 (50%) 2018 Q.28 {63%)

Directions: Questions IO and 11 refer to the following two crosses of fruit flies. In a 'Ille DNA model proposed by Watson and Crick leads to the understanding of how
fruit flies, male are the hetcrogametic sex (XY) and the ,ving shape A. Organisms store genetic codes
(normal wing or cut wing) is controlled by a single gene. B. Organisms share a common ancestor
Cross I Cross II C. Cells produce instructions for protein synthesis
Parents Normal wing female x Cut wing male Cut wing female x Normal wing male D. Cells can pass genetic information to the next generation
F, 12 normal wing females 11 normal wing females
11 normal wing males 11 cut wing males 2019 Q.13 (45%)
The diagram below shows a DNA model: w
X
F, 71 normal wing females 32 nonnal wing females y

34 normal wing males 33 cut wing females Which ofthe following combinations shows the most probable
35 cut wing males 36 normal wing males identities of molecules W, X, Y and Z?
z
38 cut wing males
Which of the following observations from Cross l best supports the conclusion that
normal wing is the dominant phenotype?
w X y z
A. All the Fi individuals are normal wing.
A. sugar phosphate cytosine thymine
8. The ratio of normal wing individuals to cut wing individuals in F2 is 3: I.
B. sugar phosphate cytosine guanine
C. There are more normal wing individuals that cut ·wing individuals in the Fz.
C. phosphate sugar adenine thymine
D. Normal wing males are more or less the same in number as cut wing males
D. phosphate sugar adenine guanine
in the F2.

2019Q.14(63%)
2014 Q.16 (71%)
In the family, Lhc father is red-green colour blind {a recessive X-linked trait) and is of
Which of the following biomolecules are associated with transcriptinn?
blood group A. whiic !he mother has nonnal vision and is of blood group B. Which of
(l) DNA
thi.:: follo1\'ing could be phenotypes of their biological child?
(2) mRNA
{3) amino acid
(I) A nonnal-vision girl with blood group 0
A. (I) and (2) only B. (1) and {3) only C. (2) and (3) nn! ) LJ. ( I), (2) and (3)
(2) a red-green cuiour blind girl \Vith blood group 0
(3) a red-green colour blind hoy with blood group AB
2017 Q.9 (53%)
Jfthe base sequence on the coding strand of the DNA is AAC. wliicl 1 oflhc following
A. (I) and (2) only
combinations correctly shows the mRNA codon and the tRNA anticodon?
13. (l)and(3)only
mRNA codon tRNA tmticodon
C. (2) and (3) only
A. AAC UUG
D. (1), (2) und (3)
B. AAC TTG
C. UUG AAC
D. TTG AAC

153
 Easy

2012 Q.18 (78%) 2014 Q.12 (80%)

Which of the following descriptions about transcription is correct? Which ofthe following combinations ofblood groups ofparents may produce offspring
A. tRNA pairs \-Vith ribosome to produce amino acids. with blood groups of parents may produce offspring with blood group AB?
B. mRNA pairs with ribosome to produce proteins. (\) Ax B
C. Free DNA nucleotides pair with DNA template strand to produce DNA. (2) AB x 0
D. Free RNA nucleotides pair with DNA template strand to produce mRNA. (3) AB x AB

2013 Q.4(81%) A. (1) and (2) only

For different DNA nucleotides, the part that varies from one to another is the B. (I) and(]) only
C. (2) and (3) only
A. base. D. (I). (2) and (3)
B. ribose.
C. deoxyribose. 2014 Q.13 (83%)
D. phosphate group. The average height of men in a developed country rose by 10 cm between 1890 and
1980. Which of the following is the most probable reason for this observation?
2013 Q. 12 (80%)
The DNA of a eukaryotic cell contains 20% adenine (A) bases. What is the percentage A. Chemical pollution induced mutations leading to the increase in height.
of cytosine (C) bases in this DNA? B. Spontaneous mutation resulted in a shift to taller height.
C. The better nutrition supply promoted growth.
A. 60% D. A taller height had a better chance of survival.
B. 40%
C. 30%
D. 20% 2015 Q.16 (88%)
Variation in skin colour exists among different human races. Which of the following
2013 Q.13 (84%) factors plays the major role in detennining this variation?
A man and his wife are heterozygous for blood type A and B respectively. What is the
probability of their son having blood type AB? A. exercise
B. nutrition
A. 0 C. inheritance
B. 1/4 D. exposure to sunlight
C. 1/2
D. 3/4

155
 2020 Q.19

19. Which of tlie following descriptions of the molecular structure of DNA proposed by Watson and Crick is
correct?
A. The two chains run in opposite directions.
2017 Q.8 (79%) B. The ba.�es link up the nucleotides to fom1. a cl'1ain.
In humans. blood group B is dominant to blood group 0. ln Q family. lhc fathi::r and C. Tht: sugar that makes up nucleotides has two types.
D. The pl10.�phate that makes up nucleotides has at least four types,
mother are of blood groups O ond B respectively. They have t1,,\·o children >vvho .in: or
blood group B. The father concludes that his vvil'e must bi.: homozygous for blood group
2020 Q.20
B. Is this conclusion correct?
20. Th� amount of DNA in cell P immediately before mitosis is x. After division, there are 4 chromosomes in
A. No. because there are other blood groups besides blooJ groups Band 0. each daughter cell. \Vhich oftlie following descriptions ls cotTecc?
B. No, because even if the mother is heterozygous. each chilJ has a 50% chance A. The amount of DNA in the daughter cell is 0.5 x.
to be of blood group 8. B. The amount of DNA in each chromosome is 0.25 x.
C. There are 8 chromosomes in Ulc diploid state of cell P.
C. Yes, because the father has no alkle for blood group B. ;:ill alleles for blood D. There are 8 chromosomes in cell P immediately before division.
group B must have come from the mother.
D. Yes. because if the mother is heterozygous, one child should be of blood
group Band the other should be of blood group 0. 2020 Q.35

Direr.rions: Questions 35 and 36 refer to the pedigree below, which shows the inheritance ofa genetic disorder.
2018 Q, 13 (77%)
Directions: Questions 12 and 13 refer to the information below. Knthy had two pure­
bred cats. one had long white fur while other had short black fur. It is
known that fur colour are controlled by two different genes respectively.
The two cats gave birth to four kittens which had long black fur.

Alter the kittens had grown up, they interbred and gave birth to the second filial
6 Q
6
67
■ '' •
B
I
9
Key:

•= affected female

generation (F2). Among the F2 kittens, there was one v,,1 ith short white fur. Which of
3>-r9
? � 0 ■= affected male
14
the following processes mostly likely contributed to the occurrence ofthis ne\.v O= normal female
10 11 12 13
phenotype?
□= nonnal male

(I) Mutation
(2) Random tertilization of gametes 35. Which of the following combinations correctly shows the possible types of inheritance of this disorder?
(3) Independent assortment of chromosomes Allfosomal AllfOSOIIUJ./ X-lillke,i X-/in/ud
dominant recessiw! domina11t recessii>e
A. ✓
A. (l)and(2}Dnly B. ✓ ✓
8. (I) and (3) only C. ✓ ✓
D. ✓ I
C. (2) and (3) only
✓

D. ( 1), (2) and(]_)

157
2020 Q.36

36. What is the prnbability of individual 3 <1n<l individual 4 giving birth to a normol male:' Answers

A. 0 Challenging
B. 0.25
C. 2012 2013 2014 2016 2018
0.5
D. 1 19 [A J 11 [CJ 11 [AJ 4 [BJ 12 [AJ
19 [CJ

Average
2020 Q.17
2012 2013 2014 2017 2018 2019
17. 'Transgenic organisms produced by recombinant DNA technology have more potential in terms of 15 [BJ 15 [B] 10 [B] 9 [A] 28 [AJ 13 [DJ
evolution than those produced by traditional breeding.'
1G [DJ JG [AJ 14 [DJ
Which of the following is the best reason for this? 17 [BJ
A. Recombinant DNA technology creates new species.
B. Recombinant DNA technology produces new phenotypes. Easy
C. Recombinant DNA technology transfers genes within a species.
2012 2013 2014 2015 2017 2018
D. Recombinant DNA technology tr.msfers genes between different species.
18 [DJ 4 [A J 12 [BJ 16 [CJ 8 [Bl 13 [CJ
12 [CJ 13 [CJ
13 [BJ
2020Q.18

Directions: Questions l 8 and 19 refer to lhe following passage about the discovery of DNA structure: 2020
17[D]
Many scientists tried to uncover the structure of DNA. In 1852, Franklin took the first X-ray 18[CJ
photograph of DNA, which revealed its helical shape. Her colleague, Wilkins, showed some
of Franklin's unpublished findings to Watson without her knowledge. Shortly after, Watson
19[A]
and Crick made a crucial advance when they proposed that the DNA molecule was made 20[AJ
up of two chains of nucleotides paired to form a double helix. ln 1962. Watson, Crick and Jj[AJ
Wilkins were awarded the Nobel Prize.
J6[D]
1 S. Which of the following aspects of the Nature of Science can be exemplified in !he above story':

(]) A good scientifie expcrimcnl must include carefully designed controls.

(2) Scientists ore both collaborative and competitive by nature.
(3) Doing science requires imagination and creativity.

A. {I) and {2} only

B. (l)and(3)only
C. (2) and (3) only
D. (1), (2) and (3)
 DSE M.C. Questions - Evolution Average
(sort by difficulty)
Challenging 2017 Q.10 (58%)
I Directions: Questions IO and 11 refer to the diagram below. A high mountain
resulting from an earthquake millions of years ago has led to the
Average separation of areas 1 and II. A new tree species Q is found in area JI.

2013 Q.19 (59%)

Directions: Question 19 and 20 refer lO th� nucleotide s1;:que11cc of a certain
functional gene segment found in four differenL species of organisms P.
Q. Rand S:
Which of the following processes were likely to Irnve been involved in the fomrntion
AACGTCGAAA (organism P) of new species Q?
AACCTCGAAA (organism Q) {I) mutation
AGGCTAGAAA (organism R) (2) isolation
AGGCTAGTAA { org,mism S) (3) natural selection
The differences in the sequences shovm above are most probably caused by A. (1) and (2) only B.(l)and(3)only C.(2)and(3)on!y D. (!), (2) and (3)
A. crossing over.
B. gene mutation. Easy
C. random fertilization.
D. Chromosomal mutation. 2013 Q.20 (78%)
Directions: Question 19 and 20 refer to the nucleotide sequence of a certain
2013 Q.22 (60%) functional gene segment found in four different species oforganisms P.
Which ofthe following observations is not related to the process ofevolution? Q, Rand S:
A. Some variations are not inheritable. AACGTCGAAA (organism P)
B. Organisms compete for resources to survive. AACCTCGAAA (organism Q)
C. Environmental changes give stress to organisms. AGGCTAGAAA (organism R)
D. Variations exist among different individuals of the same species. AGGCTAGTAA (organism S)
Based on the above information, which of the following diagrams best represents the
evolutionary tree of organisms P, Q, Rand S.
A

.:ncc.stor

C
K D, R S
Q Q

ClllC"-"<l'

iMI 161
 Ev,Jlulion / PA

Easy Answers

2017Q.ll (81%) Challenging

Directiolls: Qul!stions l 0 and 11 refer to the diagram below. A high mountain
resulting from an earthquake millions of years ago has led to the Average
separation of areas I and II. A new tree species Q is found in area II. 2013 2017
19 [BJ IO [DJ
22 [AJ

Easy
earthquake 2013 2017 2020
millions of years ago
20 [AJ II [DJ IS[BJ

Which of the following descriptions of the above incident is most likely to be correct?
A, Q is more adaptive than P.
B. P grows equally wdl in areas I and II.
C. Areas I and ll have similar environmental conditions.
D. P and Q belong to the same Family in the classification system.

2020.QlS

15. The UJ.ble below shows the prcscm:e or absence of some !nlirs in ftve species:
Tr-Jit
Snccic.s 2 3
p + ., +
0 + +
R + +
+ + +
T
Key:
presence oftn!it
- abs.ence of trait
Which of the following evolutionary u-ccs best illustrates the phylogenetic relo.tior,shlp of the five species?
A. B.

C. D.